197216369 CivilCAD 2014 User Manual

8/20/2019 197216369 CivilCAD 2014 User Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/197216369-civilcad-2014-user-manual 1/442

Referenc e Manu al for CivilCAD 2014 ® New Edi t ion November 2013 – Rev. 1.0

All rights reserved to Sivan Design D.S. Ltd.

Copyright 2013 ©



Page 2 of 443 www.sivandesign.com

CivilCAD 2014 Reference manual

Table of Content

Chapter 1: General ...................................................................................... 7

GENERAL ...................................................... ................................................................. ................ 8 DRAWING ENVIRONMENT - WORKING WITH AUTO CAD® (AUTODESK ) OR BRICSCAD ® (BRICSCAD ).................................................................................................................................... 9 S CREEN DIVISION ............................................................. ......................................................... 10 TOOLBARS ............................................................... ................................................................. ... 11 WORKING WITH PROJECTS .......................................................................................... .............. 14 PROJECTS NONAME AND PROTOTYPE ( RECOVERING OF LOST INFORMATION ) ...................... 15 DEALING WITH LAYERS ........................................................................................................ ...... 16 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PICK , LOCATE , S ELECT AND UNUSED ................................................ 19 INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM ........................................................... .............................................. 20 DEFINING ROADS WORK MODES .......................................................................................... ... 23 S AVING THE PROJECT FOR MOVING FROM ONE COMPUTER TO ANOTHER (Z IP ) .................... 24

USING CIVILCAD 2014 HELP ........................................................................ ......................... 26 Chapter 2: Coordinates database .............................................................. 27

COORDINATES DATABASE ............................................................ .............................................. 28 COORDINATES LIST ........................................................... ......................................................... 29 COMMAND BUTTONS CONNECTED TO THE LIST ........................................................................ 34 DRAWING COMMANDS AFFECTING THE LIST ................................................... ......................... 42 WORKING WITH BLOCKS ........................................................................................................... 47

Chapter 3 : Working with blocks(code) ..................................................... 49

WORKING WITH BLOCKS (C ODES ) ........................................................................................... 50 S ETTING WORK MODE IN BLOCKS ............................................................................................. 50

WORKING WITH CODES .................................................................................... ......................... 52 LOADING A NEW BACKGROUND INTO A PROJECT WITH BLOCKS ............................................. 53 CREATING CODES .............................................................. ......................................................... 54 COMMANDS FROM ‘TOPOGRAPHY CODES ’ WINDOW ................................................................ 55 BLOCK IN ROADS ............................................................... ......................................................... 56 DEFINING COLORS IN ‘T EMPLATE ’ FILE ............................................................... ......................... 57

Chapter 4: Creating contour lines ............................................................. 58

CREATING CONTOUR LINES .................................................................................................... ...... 59 S TART USING .......................................................... ................................................................. ... 59 BASIC ISSUES AND DEFINING THE RANGE OF CONTOUR LINES .............................................. 59 COMMAND BUTTONS FROM THE CONTOURS WINDOW : ............................................. .............. 63

S ETTING OPTIONS ............................................................. ......................................................... 64

CONTOUR LINES LAYERS .............................................................. .............................................. 64 PROCESSING POINTS TO CREATE CONTOUR LINES .................................................................. 66 BREAKLINES ............................................................ ................................................................. ... 67

Chapter 5: Lines connections .................................................................... 72

LINES CONNECTIONS ............................................................................. .................................... 73 DEFINING MEASURING LINES ...................................................................................... .............. 73 CHANGING THE LINES DEFINITION ....................................................... .................................... 74 ADD OR REDUCE D H TO BREAK LINES ............................................................. ......................... 75 COMMANDS FROM ‘TOPOGRAPHY /D ESIGN LINES ’ WINDOW ................................................... 76 FILTERING LINES FROM A DWG FILE ......................................................................... .............. 78

Chapter 6: Area calculations ..................................................................... 80 GENERAL ...................................................... ................................................................. .............. 81

http://www.sivandesign.com/







DEFINING PLANES .................................................................................. .................................... 82 DISPLAY DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................... 84 S UMMARIZING TABLE ........................................................ ......................................................... 85 CREATING A SURVEY PLAN ........................................................... .............................................. 86

Chapter 7: Computations of earthworks volumes using planes ................ 94

VOLUMES COMPUTATIONS USING PLANES ................................................................................ 95 DEFINING TOPOGRAPHY STATUS ............................................................................................... 95 DEFINING DESIGNED PLANES .................................................................................................... 97 MORE OPTIONS FROM THE ‘D ESIGNED PLANES ' WINDOW ...................................................... 99 DEFINING SLOPES ............................................................................................. ....................... 101 CHANGING PLANE CHARACTERISTICS ..................................................................................... 102 DESIGN PLANES WITH CORNER RADIUS .................................................................. ............... 105 CALCULATE PLANE ’ S HEIGHTS ACCORDING TO 3 POINTS ( WITH HEIGHTS ) ........................ 105 S UMMARIZING TABLE ........................................................ ....................................................... 106 ELABORATION : DESIGNED ELEVATION OF PLANES ......................................... ....................... 108

Chapter 8: Computation of earthworks volumes using the model-to-model system .......................................................................................... 109

COMPUTATION OF EARTHWORKS VOLUMES USING THE MODEL - TO- MODEL SYSTEM ........... 110 PREPARING A MODEL OF THE EXISTING TOPOGRAPHY ........................................................... 111 INPUT OF DESIGNED TOPOGRAPHY DATA / OR AS MADE ....................................................... 113 DEFINING ZONES EXCLUDED FROM THE EARTHWORKS COMPUTATION ................................ 114 DEFINING ZONES THAT ARE INCLUDED IN THE EARTHWORKS COMPUTATION ..................... 115 PREPARING A MODEL OF THE DESIGNED TOPOGRAPHY ............................................. ............ 116 VOLUMES TABLE – 'G ENERAL EARTHWORKS ' WINDOW ........................................................ 117

Chapter 9: Earthworks - additional issues .............................................. 122

EARTHWORKS - ADDITIONAL ISSUES .............................................................. ....................... 123 EARTHWORKS COMPUTATIONS USING THE TRIANGLES SYSTEM ................................................. 123 EARTHWORKS LEVELING GRID ............................................................... .................................. 126 EARTHWORKS CONTOUR LINES ( INCLUDING THE “0” LINE ) ................................. ............... 131

Chapter 10: Quick sections and the 3D model ........................................ 133

QUICK SECTIONS ...................................................................................................................... 134 THREE - DIMENSIONAL MODEL ................................................................................................ .. 136

Chapter 11: Distomat data computations ............................................... 139

ACTIVATING THE DISTOMAT WINDOW ....................................................................................... 140 STATIONS SHIFTING .................................................................................................................... 142 TRAVERSE ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................................ ............ 143 OPTIONS WINDOW REVIEW ............................................................. ............................................ 145 I NPUT ANGLE FORMAT .................................................................. ............................................. 147 OPTIONS FROM THE D ISTOMAT DATA WINDOW ..................................................................... .... 147 APPENDIX 1 – LEAST SQUARE TRAVERSE ADJUSTMENT ................................................ ............ 152

Chapter 12: Coordinates geometry ......................................................... 157

COORDINATES GEOMETRY ................................................................................ ....................... 158 COORDINATES GEOMETRY DEFINITIONS .............................................. .................................. 158 WORKING UNITS - ( FOR ANGLES ) ........................................................................................... 159 GENERAL REMARKS ........................................................................................... ....................... 159 AREA COMPUTATIONS ............................................................................ .................................. 160

ARC BY CENTER AND POINT ON ARC ................................................................ ....................... 160 ARC BY TWO POINTS AND A RADIUS ....................................................................................... 161








ARC BY THREE POINTS ................................................................................................ ............. 162 ARC BY THREE OUTSIDE POINTS ...................................................................... ....................... 163 ARC SEGMENT ......................................................... ................................................................. . 164

CONTINUOUS DISTANCE .............................................................................................. ............ 164

TRANSFORMATION OF COORDINATES SYSTEM ................................................................... .... 165 DISTANCE AND ANGLE OF A GROUP OF POINTS ................................................................. .... 165 DISTANCE AND AZIMUTH ..................................................................................................... .... 166 INTERSECTION BY TWO DISTANCES ........................................................................................ 167 INTERSECTION BY TWO ANGLES AND A DISTANCE ................................................................ . 167 INTERSECTION BY THREE ANGLES ......................................................... .................................. 168 INTERSECTION BY ARC AND A STRAIGHT LINE ....................................................................... 169 INTERSECTION POINT BETWEEN TWO LINES ................................................... ....................... 170 LOCATING POINTS ON A LINE ................................................................................................ .. 170 LOCATING A POINT BY AZIMUTH AND DISTANCE ........................................................ ............ 171 LOCATING A POINT BY DISTANCE AND ANGLE ........................................................................ 172 OFFSET FROM A POINT TO A LINE ......................................................... .................................. 173 PARALLEL LINES ...................................................... ................................................................. . 174 TANGENTS ............................................................... ................................................................. . 174

Chapter 13: Earthworks on roads............................................................ 176

EARTHWORKS COMPUTATION ON ROADS ............................................. .................................. 177 CREATING MASS HAUL DIAGRAM USING EXCEL ..................................................................... 182 IMPORTING EXCEL DATA .............................................................. ............................................ 182

Chapter 14: Roads design ....................................................................... 184

ROADS DESIGN ....................................................... ................................................................. . 185 PREPARING THE BACKGROUND ( EXISTING BACKGROUND ) ................................................... 185 ORGANIZING THE PROJECT ROADS LIST ................................................................. ............... 190 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT ............................................................ ............................................ 191 VERTICAL ALIGNMENT ............................................................................................................. 204 ROADS INTERSECTIONS ON VERTICAL ALIGNMENT .............................................................. . 214 ALTERNATIVE VERTICAL ALIGNMENT ............................................................... ....................... 215 CROSS SECTIONS .............................................................. ....................................................... 216 S UPER ELEVATIONS ............................................................................... .................................. 237 S IDE DITCHES AND ADDITIONAL COVER FUNCTIONS ........................................................... . 241 BERMS DESIGN ...................................................................................... .................................. 248 WORKING WITH TYPICAL SECTIONS ................................................................ ....................... 250 ADVANCED TOPICS ON CROSS SECTIONS ........................................................................ ............ 251 GEOMETRIC COMPUTATIONS ALONG THE CENTER LINE .............................................................. 261 CHANGING THE HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT ............................................................................ .... 264 CHANGING THE ROAD 'S ALIGNMENT AFTER A FULL DESIGN ....................................................... 267 AUTOMATIC JUNCTIONS DESIGN .............................................................. .................................. 270 FIELD OF VIEW PLANNING ................................................................................... ....................... 272 BREAKING DISTANCE TEST ............................................................. ............................................ 273 BRIDGES DESIGN ....................................................................................................................... 274 TUNNELS DESIGN ............................................................... ....................................................... 275 DESIGN LOTS BETWEEN ROADS ................................................................ .................................. 276

Chapter 15: Retaining walls ....................................................................... 277

DESIGNING RETAINING WALLS ................................................................................................... 278 DESIGNING RETAINING WALLS ATTACHED TO ROAD (FORMAT 1) .............................................. 278 CREATING THE WALLS LIST ............................................................ ............................................ 278 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT ....................................................................... .................................. 279 VERTICAL ALIGNMENT .......................................................................................................... .... 280 WALL DIMENSIONS (CROSS SECTION ) ....................................................................................... . 282








DESIGNING FREE STANDING RETAINING WALLS (FORMAT 2) .............................. ....................... 284 CREATING THE WALLS LIST ............................................................ ............................................ 284 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT ....................................................................... .................................. 284 VERTICAL ALIGNMENT .......................................................................................................... .... 286 WALL DIMENSIONS (CROSS SECTION ) ....................................................................................... . 288 R EPORT GENERATION .......................................................... ....................................................... 289

Chapter 16: Extract and urban design..................................................... 290

EXTRACT AND URBAN DESIGN ...................................................... ............................................. 291 PREPARING THE WORK BACKGROUND ........................................................................................ 291 DEFINING THE PROJECT CENTERLINES ................................................................. ....................... 296 CREATING THE CROSS SECTIONS USING EXTRACT ...................................................................... 297 SAVING AND READING TYPICAL CROSS SECTIONS FROM A ‘.T ML ’ FILE .................................. .... 302 FUNCTIONS FROM THE EXTRACT WINDOW ................................................................................. 302

Chapter 17: Ditch Design ........................................................................ 305

DITCH DESIGN ......................................................................................... .................................. 306 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT OF THE DITCH ................................................................................... 306 DEFINING THE I NVERT LEVEL OF THE DITCH BOTTOM IN THE VERTICAL ALIGNMENT . ................ 311 DITCH CROSS SECTION DESIGN ................................................................................................... 316 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS FROM THE CROSS SECTIONS WINDOW ............................................. .... 323 EARTHWORKS COMPUTATIONS IN DITCHES ................................................................................ 327 THE VERTICAL ALIGNMENT SHOWING THE TOP OF THE DITCH BANKS .................................... .... 329 COORDINATES ALONG THE CENTERLINE ............................................................. ....................... 330

Chapter 18: Reservoir Design ................................................................. 334

R ESERVOIR DESIGN ...................................................................... ............................................. 335 ALIGNMENT OF PERIPHERAL EMBANKMENT ........................................................ ....................... 335 DEFINING THE CROSS SECTION OF THE PERIPHERAL EMBANKMENT ............................................ 339 CREATING THE RESERVOIR MODEL ............................................... ............................................. 344 BALANCING EARTHWORKS ......................................................................................................... 346 R ESERVOIR CAPACITY ......................................................... ....................................................... 347 CHANGING THE PERIPHERAL EMBANKMENT ALIGNMENT ........................................................... 350 SLOPE OF THE RESERVOIR BOTTOM ............................................................................................ 351 DRAWING ‘S CRAPER PLAN ' AND SECTIONS ALONG THE RESERVOIR ........................................... 354 DAMS ............................................................ ................................................................. ............ 355

Chapter 19: Designing gas pipelines ....................................................... 357

DESIGNING OF GAS PIPELINES .................................................................. .................................. 358 PROJECT INITIALIZING ......................................................... ....................................................... 358 DESIGNING PIPELINES ' LAYOUT .................................................................................................. 358 DEFINING THE VERTICAL ALIGNMENT ........................................................................................ 359 DESIGNING THE VERTICAL IP ................................................................................................. .... 361 CREATING DXF AND SHEET DIVIDING FROM THE LONGITUDINAL SECTION ................................ 366 DESIGNING THE DITCH FOR LAYING THE PIPELINE ...................................................................... 367 ELABORATION OF THE CROSS SECTION 'S WINDOW .............................................. ....................... 373

Chapter 20: Drainage and Sewage Pipeline Design ................................ 377

DRAINAGE AND SEWAGE PIPELINE DESIGN ................................................................ ............... 378 I NITIALIZING THE PROJECT ............................................................. ............................................ 378 OPTIONS FROM THE ‘P IPELINE ’ S LIST ’ WINDOW ......................................................................... 379 PREPARING THE TOPOGRAPHY AND /OR DESIGNED SETTINGS ...................................................... 379 DESIGNING THE PIPELINES ’ LAYOUT ................................................................... ....................... 380 ADDITIONAL OPTIONS IN THE LAYOUT WINDOW ........................................................................ 382

MARKING CROSSINGS OF THE PIPELINE WITH OTHER UTILITIES .................................................. 384

ADDITIONAL OPTIONS FROM THE CROSSINGS WINDOW .............................................................. 386 DESIGNING SECTIONS .......................................................... ....................................................... 386








ADDITIONAL OPTIONS FROM THE SECTIONS ' WINDOW ................................................................ 389 OPTIONS FROM THE RIGHT WINDOW ......................................................... .................................. 392 PRODUCING REPORTS .......................................................... ....................................................... 393 ADDITIONAL OPTIONS FROM THE REPORTS WINDOW .................................................................. 395

Chapter 21: Water pipeline design .......................................................... 396

WATER PIPELINE DESIGN ................................................................ ............................................ 397 I NITIALIZING THE PROJECT ............................................................. ............................................ 397 OPTIONS FROM THE ‘P IPELINE ’ S LIST ’ WINDOW ......................................................................... 398 PREPARING THE TOPOGRAPHY AND /OR DESIGNED SETTINGS ...................................................... 398 DESIGNING THE PIPELINES ’ LAYOUT ................................................................... ....................... 399 ADDITIONAL OPTIONS IN THE LAYOUT WINDOW ........................................................................ 401 MARKING CROSSINGS OF THE PIPELINE WITH OTHER UTILITIES .................................................. 402 DESIGNING SECTIONS .......................................................... ....................................................... 404 ADDITIONAL OPTIONS FROM THE SECTION WINDOW ........................................... ....................... 407 PRODUCING R EPORTS .............................................................................. .................................. 409

Chapter 22: Cables lines design .............................................................. 411 CABLES LINES DESIGN ......................................................... ....................................................... 412 I NITIALIZING THE PROJECT ............................................................. ............................................ 412 PREPARING THE TOPOGRAPHY AND /OR DESIGNED SETTINGS ...................................................... 413 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT ....................................................................... .................................. 414 DEFINING THE MAINTENANCE BOXES ALONG THE LINE .............................................................. 417 ADDITIONAL OPTIONS ................................................................................................. ............... 417 DEFINING THE MAINTENANCE BOXES SIZE .................................................................. ............... 418 ADDITIONAL OPTIONS FROM THE LAYOUT W INDOW ................................................................. 419 MARKING CROSSINGS OF THE CABLE LINE WITH OTHER UTILITIES ............................................. 419 DESIGNING SECTIONS .......................................................... ....................................................... 421 ADDITIONAL OPTIONS IN THE SECTIONS W INDOW .................................. .................................. 422

PRODUCING R EPORTS .............................................................................. .................................. 425 Chapter 23: General Issues ..................................................................... 426

GENERAL ISSUES ........................................................................................................................ 427 OPTIONS FROM CONFIGURATION WINDOW .......................................................... ....................... 427 CREATING A COORDINATES FRAME ............................................................................................ 431 DIVISION INTO SHEETS ................................................................................................ ............... 432 DETERMINING PROJECT PARAMETERS ........................................................................................ 433 COMPUTATIONS OF POLES OFFSETS .......................................................... .................................. 434

Chapter 24: Handling *.DWG files ........................................................... 437

HANDLING .DWG FILES ................................................................ ............................................. 438 IMPORTING A *.DWG FILE ............................................................. ............................................ 438 EXTRACTING POINTS FROM A .DWG FILE ...................................................................... ............ 439 USING A FILTER TO EXTRACT POINTS AND LINES FROM A .DWG FILE ........................................ 441 SETTING THE NAMES OF THE FILTERED POINTS ............................................................... ............ 442 SETTING THE ELEVATION OF THE FILTERED POINTS ........................................................ ............ 443 DOWNSIZING THE NUMBER OF FILTERED POINTS ........................................................................ 443








Chapter 1: General








General

Important notice: This Manual is written in the masculine gender, but isdirected to both sexes equally.

This following chapter generally discusses the capabilities of the program,starting with the distribution and organization of the data on your screen,the grouping of general activities and so forth. This chapter which servesas the opening chapter offers basic understanding in the preliminaryoperation of the software.

The issues discussed in this chapter are:

Drawing environment - working with AutoCAD ® (Autodesk) orBricscad ® (Bricscad).Screen division.Toolbars.Working with projects.Noname and Prototype projects (recovering of lost information).Dealing with layers.Differences between Pick, Locate, Select and Unused.Initializing the system.Saving the project for moving from one computer to another

(Zip).Using CivilCAD 2014 Help.








Drawing environment - working with AutoCAD®

(Autodesk) or Bricscad® (Bricscad)CivilCAD 2014 can work with one of the two followings drawingenvironments:

AutoCAD (Autodesk) – all versions of AutoCAD starting from AutoCAD 14 to AutoCAD 20XX*.Bricscad (Bricscad) – Bricscad (former Bricscad's IntelliCAD) version 5and up.

* AutoCAD 20XX – any version of AutoCAD from AutoCAD 14 to AutoCAD2013.

CivilCAD 2014 uses one of the two drawing environments as their maindrawing tool. The same package of CivilCAD 2014 can be configured tolink to either AutoCAD or Bricscad. Each new version of CivilCAD 2014supports former versions of AutoCAD starting at AutoCAD 14 and up.Bricscad is a good DWG (AutoCAD's native file formats) environment forusers that does not own AutoCAD. As a unique solution we deliver acomplete package for roads design, surveying, mapping, undergroundinfrastructures design, land development and more, working with DWGenvironment even when you do not have AuotCAD.Note: there are a number of options that are operational only for workingwith AutoCAD, later to be described.

To choose your drawing environment working method, follow these steps:Start CivilCAD 2014.From the main menu choose : ‘File Open Project’ Choose the ‘Prototype’ Project

In Windows XP OS the default location is:C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ApplicationData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Prototype.prj\

In Windows Vista or Windows 7/8 OS the default location is:C:\ProgramData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Protorype.prj\

After the project has been opened, choose File Configuration. Awindow will open.Choose the first tab (“General settings”) from the top of the window.Next to the caption “ Auto launch ”, choose the desired working method.Choose ‘OK’. Go to: File Exit, and choose ‘Yes’ to save the cha nges.

From this point on, your software will work as been configured.Note: All references to AutoCAD in this manual relates to Bricscad as well.








Screen Division

When starting, CivilCAD 2014 window is divided into 2 parts:The drawing windowThe coordinates editing window.

When choosing an option from the main menu, CivilCAD 2014 displays athird panel.

The drawing windowThe drawing window, situated at the top side of your screen, is the main

window that takes up most of the work area .This window displays theprogram drawing and the preset project. It is important to mention that thiswindow is not designed for free-hand drawing (CivilCAD 2014 is not asubstitute for a drawing program, but is a helpful tool for activities thatcannot be performed using a standard drawing program). CivilCAD 2014shows data graphically using functions that allow the drawing scan, addingdata and so on (there are many functions that are actually drawingfunctions, but they exist only within the standard functions, like addingpoints from the drawing, adding lines and so on (these functions will bediscussed in the other chapters). When working with other CAD programs,this window will be replaced with the drawing window of the program that

AutoCAD is working with.

The coordinates editing window The coordinates editing window holds the list of points of the existingground level (measurement coordinates) and /or the points of designground level (measurements coordinates after measurement, design pointsand so on). This window can be hidden at any stage of work, to enable abigger working area (by clicking the “X” button at the top right of thewindow).The many functions of this window will be detailed in chapter 2 –“Coordinates Database”.

Work tablesWork table is the window at the right side of the screen. On this window willappear different screens that display the program’s capabilities likecalculation and drawing of contour heights, 3D drawings, geometricalcomputation and more.








ToolbarsCivilCAD 2014 toolbars, include 2 main toolbars:

1. The standard toolbar.2. Stand-alone working mode toolbar.

The standard toolbarThe toolbar is located below the program’s main menu and above thedrawing environment. It can be moved to any position and can be locked indifferent a reas of the screen (can’t be locked inside the drawingenvironment application). Every action on the toolbar can be executed alsofrom the main menu. The toolbar enables these actions:

New – Open a new project.

Open – Open an existing project.

Rotate Points – Rotate points by single line or by line at layer. To rotate points by single line, click on ‘Rotate Points’ button and select‘Rotate by single line’ option. In Command line type ‘S’ + Enter to selectspecific points for rotation or ‘A’ + Ent er to rotate all points and clickEnter.

In command line, type the desired angle for rotation and click Enter. Click on ‘Refresh button’. Points on drawing will be rotated according tothe line and angle definition.

To rotate points by line at layer, clic k on ‘Rotate Points’ button and select‘Rotate by line at layer’ option. ‘Rotate points’ blocks’ window will open:

Select the desired layer and angle from the list. To select a layer from drawing, click on ‘Select’ button, select the layerfrom the drawing and click Enter. The selected layer will be marked inlayers list.

Click OK to save definitions.








Click on ‘Refresh button’. Points on drawing will be rotated according tothe layer and angle definition.

Pick height – Sampling ground level. After pressing this button, selectdesired point on the drawing and left click on the mouse, the programwill display the ground levels at the screen’s bottom next to: “Height_D”and “Height_T” (D for design and T for Topography).

Layers control – Opens the layers control window.

Add To Zip – Pressing this button will 'Volume size Auto detect' – Addthe entire project files into one zip file.

Extract From Zip – Pressing this button will Extract from zip – Opensa CivilCAD project directly from a zip file.

Configuration – Displays the project’s main configurations window.

Extract – Quick extract operation.

Tutorials – Viewing flash tutorials movies for learning CivilCAD 2014.

Help – Displays the help window (will be displayed at the languageaccording to the language settings at the main configuration window).

Refresh - Refreshing the drawings layers (Coordinates layers willbe updated according to the last changes in the coordinate’s lists).

Refresh All - Refreshing the coordinates, lines and plans layers.

Stand alone toolbarThe toolbar is located below the program’s main menu and above thedrawing environment. It can be moved to any position and can be locked indifferent areas of the screen (can’t be locked inside the drawingenvironment application). Every action on the toolbar can be executed alsofrom the main menu. The toolbar enables these actions:

Window – Press this button and move to drawing area, left click themouse to define the first corner and left click again to define the window’s

second corner. The drawing area will be set according to the windowboundaries you have selected. The program will make sure that the








drawing will not be deformed. That is why the entire drawing areapresented will be “almost” identical to the selected area, but its width/lengthwill match each other as to avoid deformation.

Zoom extends - Clicking this button will transfer the drawing windowto view the entire drawing. This command is very useful in situations whereyou do not know at which location of the drawing you are at.Note: there may be cases where this command will not respond. Suchcases will occur when the drawing borders are too large for the display. Forexample: if you have placed a point where its coordinate has deviated fromthe drawing area by a great deal (like typing a local coordinate in the worldcoordinate system), when activating this option the program will try tocentralize the entire drawing area, in case it does not succeed, no

comment will be given.

Zoom dynamic – choosing a drawing display using a dynamicwindow

After pressing this button, the entire drawing will automatically. Go to thedrawing area and move with the window to the area you wish to enlarge.Use the left mouse button to dynamically reduce and enlarge the window.

After you finish, click the right mouse button to finalize this command. Thedrawing area will be set according to the window boundaries you selected.

Zoom focus – enlarging a specific area After pressing this button, with your mouse to the drawing area, move thecursor to the location you wish to enlarge and click on the mouse button.The new center of the drawing display will be the point which you havepreviously marked. The area surrounding the center point will be threetimes larger (multiplied by 3).

Pan – scanning the drawing.Press this button and go to the drawing area. Bring the cursor to aparticular point and click your mouse. Drag your mouse to a different area

in the drawing (a line that marks the direction of the scanning will appear),and click again. The drawing area will move according to the marks youhad made – first click – from where, and second click where to.

Reducing the Drawing Area by 2Clicking this button will reduce the drawing area by half, bringing the centerin the current drawing 2 times closer.

Enlarging the Drawing Area by 2Clicking this button will enlarge the drawing area times 2, pushing thecenter in the current drawing 2 times back.








Working with projects

Every new job you start, whether for extensive topography mappingpurposes, or for the purpose of basic geometric computations, will beorganized under a certain project. The first thing that needs to be done inthe program in order to start working (unless you open an existing project)is to open a new project (see details on project ‘Noname’).

To open a project, go to: ‘File -> New P roject’ A “File dialog box” will open (in this case it will have the title: New project).

To open an existing project, go to: ‘File Open Project’ or double click on

the *.prj icon.Working with the file dialog box

Under the title (New project) appears the writing: Look in/ with a frame nextto it. This frame shows in which library/directory you are looking at. If, forexample, CivilCAD 2014 is written in the frame, you will know that you arenow in the CivilCAD 2014 library (that is located in C:\Program Filesdirectory). By clicking the small button with the arrow, you can get themapping of your computer with all the libraries. This way you can browse ina different library to decide where you want to open the new project

(instead of directory CivilCAD 2014).

There are two additional function buttons in this window (left of the writing):

Click this button to go one level up. For example you would use thisbutton, if you are currently in one library and would like to view the librarywhich your library is in.

Click this button to create a new library. Right after clicking, you willbe asked to name your library. Enter the name and click ‘Enter’ when youfinish.

From the bottom of the dialog box you can see the “file type” line. This lineis a “filter” for the type of files that will be presented in the window. In ourexample appears the filter: Project files (*.prj). This implies that the box willpresent only *prj. file types (the sub-library will always be presented, withno connection to the filter). There might be cases in which the filter hasnumerous options. To browse between filter options, click on the smallarrow button left of the filter and choose the filter type you want (in ourexample there are only Prj file type filters).








Recommended work procedure

As aforesaid, to open a new project, you must go to ‘File -> New project’,type the name of the desired project in the ‘File name’ line, and click on the‘Enter’ button from your key -board, or the ‘open’ button. The new projectwill open in the name of the library that appears in the title, which is theproject library. For each project, the program will open a large number offiles with the same name as the project, but with a different ending. Thisstate, of opening many files, might sometimes cause inconvenience atwork. It is recommended, therefore to open a sub library for each project.To do so all you need to do is use the 'Create a new library' button, namethe library, enter the library you made (double click on the library drawingthat appears in the window), type the desired library name in the “Filename”. The project will open in the library that was created and all theproject files will be created in it.

Projects Noname and Prototype (recovering oflost information)

CivilCAD 2014 has two unique permanent projects that are installed in themain library of the program (usually it will be in the \CivilCAD 2014 libraryunless determined otherwise during the installation).

Prototype project

Prototype project, as it is named, serves as a prototype for all the projectsthat are opened by the program. As a rule, the Prototype will not affect theprevious projects that already exist in the system, and any change to it willcome to terms only in the new projects.

In project ‘Prototype’ it is possible to set permanent definitions that will beused during the entire work procedure. Examples of such definitions arechanging the company title in the printed reports, determining the work

scale etc.To change a definition you must perform the following steps:

Open a new ‘Prototype’ project. Change the requested definition.Leave the project while saving the changes.

From this stage on, the changes will be saved, and each new project thatis opened will automatically “inherit” these characteristics.

No-name project and the recovering of destroyed information








No-name project is the first project that comes up with the program once itis activated. This project is not meant for use, and you must open a newproject in order to start working. Project ‘No -name’ can be used regularlywith the program, but will be deleted immediately when the program isclosed or when you go to a new project. Nonetheless, if you had startedworking on project ‘No -name’ you can go to ‘Save as’ and save the workyou had done under a new name.

Project ‘No -name’ has an important role in restoring information. Theremight be cases were an illegal exit was made from the program, withoutthe saving of data (voltage drop, problems in starting Windows, etc.).CivilCAD 2014 creates during the time it is activated, backups fortransactions that were made, and saves them in hidden files. In case anillegal e xit was made from the program (such as ‘File -> Exit’), CivilCADwill recognize this, and when re-activated (first time after the program hadcrashed), will try to restore the last project it had worked on. Therestoration made (whether part or full), will be copied automatically intoproject ‘No -name’ and presented at the end of the restoration process. Atthis stage you must immediately save the project under a new name using‘File -> Save as’.

Note: CivilCAD 2014 might have restored data, but the data does notappear in the drawing. In this case you can “force” the program to refreshthe drawing in the following manner:

Bring the cursor to the points editing line.Click ‘Enter’.

Click on the 'Refresh' button from the main Toolbar above thedrawing.

Activate ‘ Zoom Extents’ .

Dealing with layers

In CivilCAD 2014 , drawings are divided by layers. The “perception” of

layers is common with many CAD tools that divide the drawing by layers,giving each part of the drawing a different layer, making it easy to controlthe display and color of a particular layer.

For example: if you wish to create a design on existing contour lines, youmight, for the sake of convenience, move the contour lines to serve as aworking background by painting them a brighter color. CivilCAD 2014creates fixed layers. This means that during the activation of the program,specific layers will be created according to the type of activity performed(this fact has a number of exceptions like the code layers for which specificnames can be determined).

Layers control window activity








Use the ‘Layers control’ window to control the layers display. To

activate this screen, click on the ‘layers’ button from the main toolbarabove the drawing area. The layers window will open from the right. Thiswindow shows the list of all existing layers in the specific project.

At the bottom area of this window are located all the possible layeroptions*: freezing a layer, changing the color of a layer, erasing a layer,creating a new layer, and creating a DXF file of the layer/ specific layers.

*Note: When working in an AutoCAD environment, the only option that willappear is erasing a layer. All other options of freezing layers and changingcolors will be done by the AutoCAD ‘Layer control’ ( CivilCAD 2014 will

create the new layers simultaneously both in its ‘Layer control’ and in the AutoCAD ‘Layer control’. The layers will be identical except for a slightchange of their names, for example: Topography contours 0 in CivilCAD2014 and Tcontours0 in AutoCAD).In order to define styles to DWT layers in Layers Control:

From CivilCAD main toolbar, click on ‘Layers Control’ button . ‘LayersControl’ window will open.

On the right side of the screen, click on ‘Layers Settings’ button .Define a style for each DWT layer, by choosing it from the styles list.

Click on button to save the styles definitions.Click on button to load the styles definitions in a new project.

Freezing a layer

It is possible to make an entire layer disappear from the drawing. This layerwill not be erased, but temporarily hidden. To freeze a layer(s) mark themfrom the ‘Layers list’. You can mark one layer or a number of layerstogether*. After marking the desired layers, check ‘v’ next to the word‘Freeze’. You will notice the immediate disappearance of the proposedlayers.Marking numerous layers together can be done in one of the followingways:Dragging the cursor while pressing the mouse button onto the desiredlayers.Marking the first layer in the group. To mark click with your mouse on thelast layer in the group, Hold the ‘Shift’ button from your key -board click andmark the last desired layer.Mark a layer, hold the ‘Ctrl’ button from your key -board and mark theremaining layers.








Changing the layer color

Changing the color of a layer/s is done by clicking on the colored squareright of the word ‘Color’. This will open the color selection window. Markthe desired color and click ‘OK’ to confirm. The color of the layer/s willchange accordingly.

Erasing a layer

Mark the layers you wish to delete and click on the ‘Erase’ button. You willget a message confirming the erasing of the layers. After confirming thelayers will be erased from the drawing. Please notice that you cannot

‘undo’ this command. The restoration of a deleted layer will be done byrepeating the desired command in the program (for example: if you deletedthe points layer and you would like to present them again, you will have to

make a certain change in the points list and click the 'Refresh' button .The change does not have to be significant - it is enough that for exampleyou insert an extra space in one of the lines, or even click ‘Enter’ whenyou’re working on a particular line – it is enough to make the change that

when clicking will restore these layers).

Creating a DXF layer file

Exporting a DXF file of the drawing can be done in two ways: Exporting the entire drawing using the main ‘DXF’ button from the drawingwindow/ and/or using the DXF button from the layers window. To create aDXF file of a specific layer/s, first mark these layers and click the ‘DXF’button. A file dialog box will appear and you will be asked to enter therequired DXF file name. Type in the na me and click ‘Enter’. The programwill create a ‘DXF’ file that includes only the marked layers.

In the right bottom side of your screen appears the ‘View’ window. Thiswindow is the control center command of the drawing display. These areits available options:

* Note: When working with AutoCAD most of the commands in this windowoverlap the – ‘Zoom’, ‘Pan’, etc. commands in AutoCAD.








Difference between Pick, Locate, Select and

UnusedIn many program screens appears a box that includes these four options:‘Pick’, ‘Locate’, ‘Select’, and ‘Unused’ (the box can include all four optionsor a combine parts of them. The option ‘Select’ appears only in the

AutoCAD version).

This box has similar usage in all screens: at each time it relates to thescreen which he is in. When the screen that includes this box opens, itsprimary value will always be ‘Unused’. This value signifies that this optionis useless and lacks influence at this point.

The three additional values are:Pick – Choosing a point “freely”, w hich means that wherever you positionyour cursor, is where the point is chosen.We will demonstrate the use of this command on the ‘Topography ->planes:

Go to ‘Topography -> planes. A window will open from the right thatincludes this box.Mark the work ‘pick’ and go to the drawing area. Click with your mouse on a certain area in the drawing and – you willnotice that the coordinate for the selected point was added to thebottom coordinates list and also a point was added to list of points thatdefine the area from the right.

Note: Clicking on the right mouse button will immediately cancel all presentactivity and return to boxes position to ‘Unused’.

Locate – Joining (locating) a point that is already in the bottom coordinatessupply. When you are us ing ‘Locate’, the *mouse cursor changes to asquare. In order to join a certain point, bring this point into the square (itdoes not matter where as long as it is in the square) and click your mouse.The point will be “located” according to the desired com mand. Pleasenotice that the reference in ‘Locate’ is always to the specific point itself, sothere cannot be a situation where ‘Locate’ will be joined, for example, withthe text lettering.

* In AutoCAD version an ‘ObjectSnap’ to point will come instead of thesquare.

Tip: A common mistake is to try and trap points by crossing points betweenthe topography coordinate list and the designed coordinate list. For

example, there is a project with points in the topography coordinates listand more points in the designed coordinates list and you see both lists in








the drawing. Say you have activated the ‘Topography planes’ command.This command relates only to the existing status, as the ‘Locate’ commandfor this activity will locate only points from the ‘Topography coordinates’ list.If you try to join a point appearing in ‘Designed coordinates’, using thiscommand even if you stick to the cursor rules, this point will not betrapped.

Select – Choosing an existing line from the drawing (possible only in AutoCAD version). Assuming you have drawn a certain point that issupposed to serve as a breakline, a line for defining contour line borders orany other usage, and you would like to choose it to serve the purpose forwhich it was designed. In this case, you must choose the ‘Select’ option,go to the drawing area, choose the desired line and click ‘Enter’. Now youcan use the chosen line for its designed purpose.

Initializing the systemCivilCAD 2014 makes it possible to determine the definitions for the workform in each new project that you begin. To determine or changepermanent definitions, open the designated project: ‘Prototype’ .



Change the definitions and save the project.








Defining the Work Language

CivilCAD 2014 makes it possible to work both in Hebrew and English. Theproject language will determine the language in which the differentprogram reports will be presented, as well as the sections drawings. Todetermine the work language, follow these steps:

Go to ‘File -> Open project’Choose ‘Prototype.prj’ project and click ‘OK’.Go ‘File -> Configuration ’ Change the language to the desired language from ‘Language’ Click ‘OK’ Leave the program by : ‘File -> Exit’ Confirm the changes you have made.

Defining the auto save

CivilCAD 2014 can save your project automatically. In order to define theauto save, follow these steps:

Go to ‘File -> Open project’Choose ‘Prototype.prj’ project and click ‘OK’.Go to ‘File Configuration ’ In 'General' tab, check mark the Auto Save cell and define thecyclicality (in minutes).Click ‘OK’

Leave the program by : ‘File

Exit’ Confirm the changes you have made.

Defining the Company Title for Printed Reports

CivilCAD 2014 makes it possible to print out many reports includingcoordinates lists, distomat data calculations, Earthworks calculations, axisdata calculations etc. It is possible to determine a title for the program thatwill serve these reports when they are printed.

Go to ‘General Caption’ from the main tool bar to open the title settingwindow. From this window you can define the title (like company name),details of the report producer, and add any free wording you want toappear on the report. To finish click ‘OK’. From now on the data youentered will appear in each report printed in the current project (and only init),.

You will probably also be interested in entering a fixed title that will serveall the projects you are working on (so it will not be necessary to enter it foreach project separately). To do so follow these steps:

Go to ‘File Open project’Cho ose ‘Prototype.prj’ project and click ‘OK’.








Go to ‘General Caption’ Change the company title to the desired title.Click ‘OK’ Leave the program by : ‘File Exit’ Confirm the changes you have made.

From now on, each new project will automatically “inherit” the title inserted(you can change this title at any time in a specific project in the same waymentioned above).

Choosing a CAD Software for the Graphic Environment

CivilCAD 2014 can work as stand-alone or with other Tibam softwares as: AutoCAD 14-2014 and IntelliCAD2000. In order to choose the program thatwill serve as graphic environment of your work in CivilCAD 2014, follow thesteps below:

Activate: ‘File Open Project Choose project ‘Prototype.prj’, and click ‘O.K’

Activate: ‘File ConfigurationChoose from ‘Auto launch’ the desired program Click ‘O.K’ Exit the program: ‘File Exit’

Confirm the changes you have made

From now on each time you activate CivilCAD 2014, the program will beactivated in the graphics environment of your choice.








Defining Roads Work Modes

First we will follow these steps to go to Roads setting mode: Activate ‘File Open projectChoose project ‘Prototype.prj’, and click ‘O.K’. Open: ‘Roads Cross sections’

Defining the Station and Numbering of Cross Sections

Click on button from the right window (Define sections).The cross sections definition window will open.

Start at station – the station of the first section. The default is ‘0’. Atmost times, we will want the station for the first section in the designedseg ment of the center line, to be ‘0’.End at station – the station for the last section. The default isaccording to the length of the center line as it was computed by theprogram (this length appears immediately when the cross sectionwindow opens – ‘Roads length’). Distance between sections – the distance between the crosssections. The default is 20 meters.Name of first section – the name of the first section (number). Theprogram will number the remaining sections in an ascending order.By stations/By Ips – this box proposes a choice between defining aroad/center line, with its cross sections arranged in ascending order,and the definition of a center line with predetermined sections by theIPs of the horizontal alignment. Moving to ‘By Ips’ status, will removethe other fields from your screen.Presentation of section names:Format 1: the names of the sections presented before they are enteredin the section’s table. Format 2: the names of the sections presented by permanent initialdistance + station for example: 0+20.

Definition and Presentation of Section’s Width

Activate button from the right window to open the ‘Define sectionswidth’ window. Define the width of section for the project. We are referring to the widthof the ground that the program will sample for the existing status out ofthe topography. We will define a station from the center line to the leftand a station from the center line to the right - that when combined willdefine the width of the ground strip. The left end of the section we willdefined in the ‘Left’ field (default of – 20 meters), and its right end in the‘Right’ field (default – 20 meters).

Transfer from Elevation to dH . Using CivilCAD 2014 you can definecross sections of absolute heights, or sections of relative heights.








Move from Earthworks to Design . This option defines the graphicpresentation form of the section. The program has two options fordefining the section: a section for presenting Earthworks, and a sectionfor presenting designed sections. The difference in presentation will beshown both by the sections’ form in the drawing window, by printing viathe program, and by creating sections file on an AutoCAD sheet. Wewill discuss the main differences between the two forms in Chapter 15 – ‘Roads Design’.

After choosing the definitions, exit the sections window by clicking ‘Cancel. Exit the program by ‘File -> Exit’ and saving the data.

More options in roads work modeFrom the main menu, activate Roads->Horizontal alignment.

From the right window, press - Options buttons.The program will display the general options window with the layoutoptions, to understand these options, look in Roads-design chapter.

Defining Distomat data work mode

CivilCAD 2014 makes it possible to predetermine the work mode for thedistomats data. In order to determine the program options, follow the stepsbelow:

Go to ‘File -> Open project’Choose ‘Prototype.prj’ project and click ‘OK’.Go ‘Geometry -> Distomats data’

Click on the options button .Choose the type of angle Degrees/GradsChoose the measuring format – meters/centimetersClick ‘OK’ Exit the program : ‘File -> Exit’ Confirm the changes you have made.

Saving the project for moving from one computerto another (Zip)

When CivilCAD 2014 saves a project, it creates a number of files with thesame name (project name), but with a different ending. When you want totransfer a project from one computer to another, or to a project send via e-mail, the best way is to zip the project into a single zip file. Once the projectis zipped, you can open it straight from CivilCAD 2014.








Creating a Zipped project In One Zip File

Open the project you wish to zip – ‘File ->Open’ Activate ‘File ->Add to zip

The program will automatically save the zipped project in the projectlibrary’s original file.

The program will automatically save the zipped project in the project’soriginal library. Open the library in which the project is in. If the zippedproject does not exceed 1.44MB, you will see the program has created asingle file. If not, you will see a number of ZIP files were created. Thenumbering is as follows: if for example, your project’s name is ‘MyRoad’ – the program will create such file names: MyRoad001, MyRoad002……..MyRoad007Now you can copy the files created into floppy 1.44 diskettes.

Opening a Zipped Project from CivilCAD 2014

To open a zipped project from a Zip File containing the entire project -perform the following:

Activate ‘File ->Extract from zip’ Choose the zip file you wish to openIf the project can be zipped into a few zip files, choose the latest file

The program will open the project automatically and arrange its files in thedirectory where the zip file is located.








Using CivilCAD 2014 Help

In the CivilCAD 2014, there is an option to launch a Help window. In orderto launch this window, click on the main menu Help -> Help, or, from the

main toolbar, press . The Help window will be opened in the languagedesignated at the setting window of the software. In order to change the window's language setting, execute the followingactions:

Enter: File ->Configuration.

Change to desired language on caption "Language".Click "OK".Re-activate the window by: Help->Help.

Viewing of the demonstration clips (new)

Demonstration clips that show the operating steps can be viewed. In order

to view these clips, click (on the main toolbar) or click from the mainmenu Help-> Tutorials and the window containing the list of clips will beopened.








Chapter 2: Coordinatesdatabase








Coordinates database

This chapter discusses the input of coordinates, lists their editing,processing, and presentation in a drawing.

At the bottom of the window, there is another window composed of anEditor and a group of buttons that affect this editor. This window is calledthe “Points Editing Window”, and is used for the functions mentionedabove, i.e. importing and editing the points. Please note: the window title(white with a blue background) is Topography Coordinates, meaning thatthe list at hand is a list of coordinates that represent the point of existingground level.

Closing the coordinates editor window enable a larger work-space for thedrawing environment, to do so, click the small ‘x’ button at the top right ofthe editor window. To open the editor window again, activate from the mainmenu: Topography/Design->Coordinates.

We will emphasize that it is possible to deal with two different lists:List of Topography Coordinates, ground level – refer to the current list.List of Designed Coordinates, ground level - an additional list used forthe design and input of topography coordinates after the project wasdone, and more.

* The separation between the two lists (layers) and their function will bediscussed later on; we would only like to point out now that functionsperformed on the Topography Coordinates lists can also be done on theDesigned Coordinates list.

The Topography Coordinates window can be divided according to thefollowing:

The list of coordinatesCommand buttons related to the listFunctions that can be done on the drawing, which would affect the list.








Coordinates list

The list of coordinates is a scroll down list , that can contain an unlimitednumber of points (the program does not limit the number of points it canreceive. However, if you are working on a computer that is low on memoryand/or processing abilities, it is possible that the software will work veryslowly or even ‘get stuck’ if the lists are too long). The list itself presentsthe points, and above it there is a point editing line (the line below theTopography Coordinates), used for adjusting and adding points. Thefollowing is a short exercise that will help demonstrate this topic:

Example projectWhen starting a new project, every new job requires you to open andattribute it to a specific project. Project Noname that is loaded when theprogram is activated is not meant to be used as a work project.

Go to: File New Project . A New Project dialogue box will appear.Type in the project name: we will type in a project called ‘Coortest’.Click Enter when you finish.Notice that blue title at the top of the window now contains the projectname (Coortest), along with its full path.

Ceating the coordinates list manually

Type in the following list of coordinates:

bm300 200 100.32 75.671 125.32 132.272 131.23 80.76 60.313 50 50.41 62.23

/small grid4 50 50 61.555 60 50 63.236 100 50 63.237 100 100 62.508 50 100 62.27

How should the list be typed? Bring the text cursor to the points editingline. In order to do that, bring the mouse to this line and click on it. You willnotice a hook-shaped cursor appearing within the line. Type in the first

point in the sequence, with a one space or more between each parameter;first type in the point name (bm300), space, (200) x, space, (100.32) y,








space, and height (75.67). When you have finished typing in the pointsparameters, press Enter. You will notice that the point was entered into thelist of points and that the points editing line has positioned itself on a newline. Continue entering the remaining points in the same manner.

* Comment: the following line is NOT a coordinate: /Small grid. Type in thisline precisely as it appears. This line is listed here in order to demonstratean option of inserting comments between the lists of coordinates, whichmay be useful for organizing and arranging the lists. A comment starts witha / sign, which tells the program that this line is a comment line and shouldnot be treated as a coordinate. Continue to enter the remainingcoordinates in the list.

Loading coordinates from Excel file

It is possible to load coordinates from Excel file. To do so follow the nextsteps:

1. Create Excel file with the coordinates data according to the picturebellow (no need to type the yellow row).

2. Go to 'File Save As', select the option 'CSV' (CommaDelimited) (*.csv), under 'Save as type', define the file's nameand click the 'Save' button.

3. Open the *.csv file with Notepad (Windows Text Editor). Thedata in the file will be separated by comma.








4. Go to 'Edit Replace'. 'Replace window will open.

5. In 'Find what' cell, type comma (",").6. In 'Replace with' cell, type space (hit the space button in the

keyboard).7. Click the 'Replace All' button. The data will now be separated

by space.

8. Go to 'File Save As', select the option 'TXT' Text Documents(*.txt) under 'Save as type', define the file's name and click the'Save' button.








9. From CivilCAD main menu, go to: 'Topography Coordinates'.

10. Click the 'Load from text file' button. Select the option Text

Files (*.txt) under 'File of type', select the desired file and clickthe 'Open' button.

Coordinates structure

A coordinate will be composed of four parameters:Point Name / Number x y HeightPoint Name / Number is necessary and can contain any alpha-numericcharacter, except for a space, so that:

A1, 1, 10095, bm300, At30….

Are correct names, whereas: A 1, bm 300are incorrect names.

X – Necessary – means the geometric ‘X’ which can be any number. It isnot necessary to enter zeros after the decimal as: 132.00 is similar to 132.

Y – Necessary

Height – Optional – a point with no height will serve as a regular point, butcommands that are dependent on height, as Earthworks calculations orcontour line drawings, will not take this point into consideration.

Note: Another value which can be added to the fifth column is the codepoint, which will not be discussed in this chapter.

Editing the coordinates list

You can scroll the list up and down using the arrows right of the list. If youwish to change a point youcan bring it to the points editing line by pointing to it with your mouse.When the point will appear in the top line, bring the text cursor to the lineand change the point. You can also change and edit this list without usingyour mouse – bring the text cursor to the points editing line (again usingyour mouse). From this stage use the standard editing keys:

One line up – an arrow pointing upOne line down - an arrow pointing downOne page up – Pg Up

One page down – Pg DnCtrl-End – jump to the end of the list








Ctrl-Home - jump to the beginning of the list

CivilCAD can mark and freeze exceptional coordinates (with exceptionaldistance or height) automatically.

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Design / Topography Coordinates’ .

Click ‘Options’ button.Checkmark the ‘Auto freeze exceptional points’ option and click the‘OK’ bu tton.Click the ‘Refresh’ button. In case of existing exceptional points, amessage window will appear . Click the ‘OK’ button.

Points with exceptional distance or height will automatically freeze and will

not be taken under consideration in the interpolation buildup (contours).

Drawing the points

After you finished typing the coordinates list, you will probably want to

present them in the window. Click the button from the main toolbarbelow the main menu to refresh drawing. This command instructs theprogram to screen the coordinates list, locate changes in the list (in this

case the entire list is new), and to draw the up-to-date list. In the samemanner, each time you make a change in the list, (add coord, changecoord., of a certain point etc.) and wish to receive the change on thedrawing, click on the key, and the drawing will be updated accordingly.

Deleting overlapping area between two measurement

CivilCAD enables deleting the overlapping area between two

measurements.

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Topography Coordinates’ .

In ‘General Settings’ Tab, mark ‘V’ in ‘Save Backup’ option.

Click the 'Options' button and checkmark 'Subtract coordinates

from overlap area’ option.

Click the ‘OK’ button to save definitions.

Load the first measurement file and then load the second

measurement file.

In the opened window, select one of the following options:








Select the first option to leave both measurements without

deleting anything from the overlapping area.

Select the second option to leave the first measurement data inthe overlapping area.

Select the third option to leave the second measurement data in

the overlapping area.

Click the ‘OK’ button to save definitions and execute the operation.

Command buttons connected to the list

In the points editing window (bottom window), you will find a group ofbuttons for activating the points list. We will go over all these commands.

Reordering the coordinatesClick on this button to space the coordinates list in the columns by:

NAME X Y Z CODE

As each column is straightened to the left.(Note: we mean the geometric X - east).

Please notice: this command assumes that the coordinates list is legal. Ifyou click this button, when the list is not legal, the lines that are not legalcan change contrary to the expected. For example:

0 BM30 153700.25 179600.32 323.35 Since this line is not legal (there is an unnecessary 0 column on the left),the program will identify the 0 as the point name – bm300 as coordinate X

(a mistake!) and so forth, to the point that 323.35 will be erased completelyfrom the line since it is the last data and the program does not know whereto put it.

Note: The reordering is not supported by the ‘Undo’ command.

Save as text file Clicking this button will cause the dialog text-box to appear – ‘save as textfile’ (blue title), from which you will be asked to choose a library and type

the file name. The program will open a new file by the name that wastyped, and save the co ordinates into it as a clean ‘Ascii’ file. The opened








Ascii file will open will remain exactly as it is in the coordinates list (willinclude space lines or comments if any exist). It is possible to save thecoordinates file in different formats. To do so you can use this option: Inthe ‘Save as text file’ dialog box appears the ‘Filter’ line with the writing ‘Allfiles ( *.*)’. Click on the small arrow button on the left and choose yourdesired format (Reg, Med etc.). From here on, if you issue a command tosave a text file, you will get a file with the ending you chose and in thedesired format.

Note – This command is supported when working with blocks, so it ispossible to save only a part of the list.

Load from text file Clicking this button will c ause the ‘load from text file’ dialog box to appear.In this box you will be asked to pick the name of the file you wish to load.The file will be loaded and appear in the coordinates list. Please takenotice that the current points list, if there is one, is not erased, and that thefile data is added to the end of the list. This way it is possible to join anumber of files and enlarge the measuring areas. If you still want this list to“run over” the existing list, you will need to first click on the ‘eras e allcoordinates’ button, and only then to load the new list.








Print Coordinates list Activating this button will create the printer dialog box. Make sure the

printer is connected and ready to print and click on “confirm” to print the listof points.

Note: this command is supported by working with blocks, so it is possibleto print only part of the list.

Undo While you are using the CivilCAD 2014, the program saves all thecommands, changes and additions you made in the points list. Each wordtyping, erasing of line, block changes and (erasing a column for example)etc. is saved. Each time you click ‘Undo’ it will take you one step back inthe coordinates list. Take notice that the ‘Undo’ relates only to thecoordinates list (and not the drawing for example). For example, if youdelete a certain point from the drawing and click ‘refresh’, the point will notappear on the drawing. By clicking ‘Undo’ , you are making this pointreappear on the drawing. Don’t forget to refresh the drawing. There areseveral commands for which you cannot use the ‘Undo’, such as erasingthe list of coordinates and reordering.

Erase all – Erase coordinates list The erase command will erase all the coordinates in the list. This warningwill appear before erasing: “All coordinates will be erased”. Click ‘OK’ toconfirm.

Note: This command is not supported by the ‘Undo’ command, and is notpossible to restore.

Erasing Point/sThis button is for erasing a single point or a block of 3 points. Mark thepoint with your mouse (in the list) and click this button. The point will beerased from the list.

Note: this command support working with blocks.

CopyThis command, in collaboration with the ‘Copy’ command, serves forcopying coordinates. You can copy a single point or a block of points.See this example for the usage of this command:

Mark 3 points from the coordinates list using you mouse. (mark your firstpoint, hold the mouse, click and drag the cursor on the two successivepoints to the point you have marked).Mark the points as a block – click with your mouse on the square left of the

word ‘block’. Click on ‘Copy’








Now the points have been copied to the computer’s memory (don’t expecta response – the points will be copied without a confirmation).See a continuation of thi s example in the ‘Paste’ command below.

Paste

This command, in collaboration with the ‘Copy’ command, is for copyingcoordinates. Assuming you are using this command to copy a certainsegment from a particular block (or single line) to memory, you can copy it(and paste) anywhere you like inside the points list. Study this examplethat began with ‘Copy’:

After marking and copying a block of 3 points to memory, browse untilyou reach the end of the points list.Bring the last line in the list to the points editing line (just mark it) and

move with the text cursor to this line (point your mouse to the pointsediting line).Click ‘Enter’ to go one line down – since there are no more lines – anew line will be made.Click ‘Enter; again to create a space li ne (not necessary – is here onlyfor the sake of this example).In the new line, write the next remark (again, this remark is notnecessary): A copy sample/ and ‘Enter’.Click on the ‘Paste’ button – you will notice that the points copied tomemory have been pasted from the line in which you are in. In order toform a distinction between these points to the points that already exist,

a ‘*’ will be added before every point.We will comment here, without demonstrating, that it is possible to copy inthe same fashion, a group of points from the existing topographycoordinates list to the designed coordinates list.

Find

This command is for locating a point (s) in the list by name or elevation orcode. Pushing this button will cause the ‘Find’ dialog box t o appear:

For locating a point by name:

From the ‘Find what’ menu – move the search to ‘Name’ Enter the name you want to locate and click ‘Enter’ or ‘OK’.Option for an advanced search:

To search for a few names click for example: 1000, 1002, 2003. Tosearch in a certain range click for example: 1000- 1004. There is also theoption of doing a combined search: 40-10, 50, 60. There is no meaning tothe order of typed parameters in the search box.The point located, will be marked in blue and appear in the points editingline. Another click on ‘Enter’ will locate the next point in the list of the samename (if there is one) and so on. In order for the program to directly mark

all the search results in the list, switch in ‘Search Mode’ from ‘ StepByStep ’to ‘All’ status.








To locate a point by elevation:We have shown the uses of locating points by name. In the same way it ispossible to locate points by their elevation:

From the ‘Find what’ menu, move the search from ‘ Name ’ status to ‘Height’ .Enter the ele vation you wish to locate and click ‘Enter’ or ‘OK’.Option for advanced search:To search for elevations above a certain height change from ‘SearchMode’ to ‘At Least’ .To search for elevations below a certain height change from ‘SearchMode’ to ‘At Most’ .There is also the possibility of an advanced search for using themethods mentioned for search by name.

To locate a point by code:From the ‘Find what’ menu, move the search to ‘Code’. Type the code you wish to locate and click ‘Enter’ or ‘OK’.

Insert and empty line Clicking this button will add an empty line before the line you have marked.To activate mark the line in front of which you want to add a new line andclick this button.

Mark them allThe ‘All’ button colors the entire points lis t including a space line andcomments. This makes it easier to mark the entire list when working on theblock of points.

Displaying coordinates mode optionsThe options window is for controlling the type and size of the pointslabeling. Click this butt on to open the ‘options dialog box'. CivilCAD 2014will display the general options window with the coordinate’s options at thebottom. We will go through these options:

Standard mode – displaying the coordinates in text format:Names – Displaying the poi nt’s names. If this option is checked, thename of the point will appear attached to the point.Elevations - The point's elevation.Codes – The point's code.Circles - Showing a circle around the point.Crosses – Showing a cross on the point.Brackets - Showing brackets around the elevation point. You canchoose between numerous brackets types or cancel this option by

choosing ‘None’.








Scale – Choosing the text font size. The text height will be according tothe general scale settings (for more details please refer to "Chapter 24,Configurations window").Format – The format in which the points will be shown. There are twoformats of presenting the points (beside ‘Blocks’).

Format 1- the elevation of the point will appear on both sides of thepoint itself – meters left of the point and centimeters to its right.Format 2 – the elevation of the point will appear above it

Blocks mode – displaying the coordinates as blocks entities:

After choosing this option, all entities displaying the coordinate (height,name and symbol) will be displayed as one block. These blocks will bedisplayed according to the blocks library and the coordinates’ codenumbers (to learn more about working with codes please refer to chapter3).

Note: for using this option you must set the "drawing options" into "blocksmode" by following the next steps*:

From the main menu activate: File->Configuration .Select the second tab (“ Drawing environment ”). Under “ Drawing options ” select the “ blocks mode ” option. Press OK to save the changes and close the configuration window.

* Tip: to set the software to always work in blocks mode, set both the"drawing options" in the "configurations" window and the coordinate'ssettings in the "Options" window into "Block mode".

To make a change and save it, c lick ‘OK’. Click on ‘Cancel’ to cancel any

change. After closing the options window press to refresh the drawingaccording to the last settings.

Sort This command is for sorting the points list by their number. When you click

this button the warnin g “All coordinates will be sorted” will appear. Click toconfirm. The list of points will be sorted in an ascending order. All pointswith an alphanumeric name will be transferred to the top of the list. Note: The reordering command is not supported by the ‘Undo’ command.

Auto numbers -

Changing the Point Name This option is for automatically changing the point’s names. Clicking thisbutton will open a window with the options below:

Start column – positioning the first character in the list for the newpoint’s name








End column – positioning the last character in the list for the newnames (the program will not go past this position).Start counting from – the value for the counting beginning.

After clicking ‘OK’, the program will present a window to conf irm thechange, and after the change has been made, it will change all the points’ names from the list. In case some of the list is marked by ‘Block’, thechanges will be made for this section only.

Freezing a point(s) This command is for neutralizing a point in the computation. A frozen pointwill appear in the drawing, but will not be included in the drawing during thecreating contour lines phase. This way you can freeze sewage cells, pitsand more. To freeze a point, mark it from the list and click this button. The

sign <Fr> will appear left of the point. Continue to mark the points you wishto freeze. Refresh the drawing when you are done – and the frozen pointwill appear in the drawing. When you go back to compute the contour linesyou will be able to view the change caused by the freezing of points. Inorder to “unfreeze" a point, mark it and click again on the ‘Freeze’ button.*Note: it is also possible to freeze a measuring point by adding the code‘Fr’ to the desired point.

Locate a point in the drawing (Fix)Use this command to locate a point from the list on the drawing. Mark the

point (in the list) you wish to locate and click this button.In Stand-alone version: the mouse cursor will jump to the point andposition itself on it, on thecondition the point is in the drawing area that appears in the window.In AutoCAD version: the desired point will be located and placed in thecenter of the drawing.

Calculating the point elevation (+H)This command enables you to compute the elevation of the pointinterpolation by its coordinates. The elevation calculation will be done onlyif there are contour lines on the drawing. We will demonstrate the use of this option.

For example: you have a project with contour lines, and you wish to locatethe elevation of a point with known coordinates.

Add the new point to the coordinates list.Mark with your mouse the point inside the list.Click this button.

You will notice that for this point the elevation had been calculated. In caseyou made a design, you can calculate the point’s elevations from thedesigned topography by using this command on the list of designed points.

This command supports working with blocks.








Adding elevation to point (Add Height)This command is for adding/reducing elevation from all the points or from a

group of points marked as a block. To operate click this button. Enter thedesired addition of elevation in the box that opens. To reduce elevationsenter a negative number.Click ‘OK’ to activate or click ‘Cancel’ to cancel it.Note: to add/reduce elevation for some of the points only, mark them first,and then set them as a ‘Block’.

Direct input of points from total stationClick this button to open the communication window. Make certain youhave the proper tool and that the communication data matches the datatuned inside the tool. Click ‘Receive’ to get the data from the tool or ‘Send’data to it.If you wish to send only half the points, you can do so by marking thedesired ones, setting them as a ‘Block’ and clicking ‘Send’. A message willappear notifying that the ‘Block’ points were sent (not all the points).

Changing coordinates This button will replace the coordinates ‘X’ with ‘Y’ in the points list. To

view the influence of this command in the drawing, click . Activate‘Zoom extents’ to move to the new drawing area.

Update block’s rotation Click on this button will update coordinates angle (in coordinates list) ofcoordinates that has been rotated on drawing.

saving changes in location of coordinates' name and heightwhich are made graphically on drawing to CivilCAD database. This option is available only in 'Standard Mode' and in 'Format 2'.

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Design / Topography Coordinates’ .

Click ‘Options’ button. 'Options' window will open.

Checkmark the ‘Standard Mode’ option and select Format 2.


Notice that now, 'Save Coordinates Text According To Definitions'

button in ‘Design / Topography Coordinates’ menu is accessible.

After changing the coordinates' name or height location on drawing,

click the button for saving the changes to CivilCAD database.








The database will be displayed in ‘Design / Topography Coordinates’ list

with the new coordinates of the point's name and height.

Drawing commands affecting the list

In the coordinates list window at the bottom of the screen the following listappears on the right:

Unused, Pick, Locate, Erase, Move

This list enables you to operate on the drawing as these commands willdirectly influence the coordinates list. In this section of this chapter we will

discuss these commands.In all commands, there is a difference between operating in ‘Stand - Alone’(as a separate unit, without AutoCAD), and working with AutoCAD. Thesedifferences will be detailed for each command separately.

Unused

The state in which none of the commands are active. This is a defaultsituation of the list.

Pick

Adding a point from the drawing.

Stand-Alone : To activate, click on ‘Pick’ from the list so it is marked inblue. Move with your mouseto the drawing area, stand on the point you wish to add and click themouse button again. The point will be added to the coordinates list.

Another click on the mouse will create and additional point, and so on. Tofinish, click on the ‘Unused’ button or on the right mouse button.

AutoCAD : To activate click on ‘Pick’ from the list to mark it in blue. Fromthe AutoCAD line of commands appears the writing : ‘Pick point<XXX>/(Esc)nd>. The number in brackets is the number that will be giventhe point you choose. To change this number click the desired number and‘Enter’. Move with the mouse cursor to the drawing area, stand on a pointyou wish to add and click on the mouse button – you will see that the pointthat had been added to the coordinates list. Another click on the mouse willcreate an additional point, and so on. To finish click ‘Esc’.

Point elevations: as before said , each click will add a point to the list. In aproject where contour lines were computed ( ‘Topography Contours’), theprogram will perform interpolation to the elevation of the new point and addit automatically into the list of coordinates.








You will notice that the point that was added, automatically received aname/number. You can control the points names that are added (otherthan of manually changing the name of the point after it was added), thefollowing way:

Go to ‘File -> Configuration’ from the main menu (the command ruler atthe head of the drawing).From the window that opens select “coordinates format” tab and selectfrom the 2 options under “New points counter”:

The automatic numbering – to operate check ‘v’ next to ‘Autonames’. This option instructs the computer to automatically give aname that does not appear in the list. These names will open withthe letter ‘T’ for ‘Topography coordinates’ and with the letter ‘D’ for‘Designed points.’Ascending numbering – It is possible to instruct the computer tonumber the added points in an ascending order, starting from adefined number . To the right of ‘Start counting from’ appears a textline. Enter in this text line the point number from which thenumbering will begin.

You will notice that the ‘v’ marking left of ‘Auto names’ hasdisappeared. From this point on, every new point you add will benumbered in an ascending order of the number you typed.Nevertheless the program will *not prevent duality in the point’snames.Note: When working with AutoCAD, this function is similar toentering a point number directly in the AutoCAD line.

After choosing click ‘OK’.

Note : *It is possible to give an identical name to two different point. In sucha case the points will be presented at their proper place on the drawing,and you will be able to calculate contour lines for them. Problems withnames duality will occur only when these points are included in the

designed plane, breaklines, center lines, etc. In such cases you shouldavoid giving different points identical names.

Locate

Locating a point/group of points from the list in the drawing.

Stand-Alone: To activate click on ‘Locate’ from the list of commands. Afteractivating, you will notice that a new option list had opened instead of theprevious list. The list contains the following options: Cancel, Single, Win in,Win out.








Cancel – Canceling the command (you can also cancel by clicking onthe right mouse button).Single – Locating a single point (default option). We will demonstratethe use of this option: choose the option and bring your cursor to thedrawing area. You will notice that the cursor had changed from a crossto a small square. Bring the square so that the point you wish to locatewill appear inside and click on your mouse button (please notice thatthe point itself – the center of the cross or circle of the point are insidethe square and not the name or elevation). If the point “gets trapped” itwill be brought to the new editing points line at the bottom list and getmarked in blue.Win In – Activating this option will allow you to locate a number ofpoints according to the window definition. To activate click on thiscommand and move to the drawing area. Mark the window includingthe points you wish to locate (click on the mouse button to beginmarking the window – move the mouse to mark the window and clickagain to finish). All the points inside the window will be located in the listand marked in blue (you can scroll the list up and down to see all themarked points).Win Out – Locating points outside a defined window. To activate, clickon this option and move to the drawing area. Mark the window. Whenyou finish marking, all the points outside this window will be located andbe marked in blue.

AutoCAD : To activate click on ‘Locate’ from the list of commands. In the AutoCAD command line you will see this writing:

PolygonIn/PolygonOut/<Single>/(Esc)nd:

(Esc)nd – Click on Esc to finish the command.Single – default. Locating a single point. In AutoCAD ‘Object Point toSnap’ will be automatically operated. If a certain point is chosen, it willbe located from the bottom list and be painted blue.PolygonIn – Locating points inside a closed shape. Click ‘I’ and ‘Enter’to activate this command. Mark a polygon around the desired points

and click ‘C’ and ‘Enter’ to close it. All the points inside the Polygon willbe located and colored in blue.PolygonOut – Locating points outside a closed shape. Click on ‘O’ and‘Enter’ to activate this command. Draw a polygon around the desiredshape. Click ‘C’ and 'Enter' to end. All the points outside the polygonwill be located and colored blue.Freeze - Freezing a point/s from the list in the drawing. The point thatwas frozen will appear on the screen but its elevation will not affect thecontour lines drawing.Stand-Alone : To activate click on ‘Freeze’ from the list of commands .

After activating this command a new options list will open instead of theprevious list. The list contains the following options: Cancel, Single, Winin, Win out.








Cancel – Canceling the command (you can also cancel by clicking onthe right mouse button).Single – Freezing a single point (default option). We will demonstratethe use of this option: activate this option and bring your cursor to thedrawing area. You will notice that the cursor had changed from a crossto a small square. Bring the square so that the point you wish to freezewill appear inside and click on your mouse button (please notice thatthe point itself – the center of the cross or circle of the point are insidethe square and not the name or height). If the point “got trapped” it wil lfreeze, and next to it will appear ‘<Fr>’. After freezing all the desired

points, click show the frozen points in the window.

Note : The freezing of points will not affect directly contour lines thathave been drawn. You will have to activate option ‘T opography ->

Contours’ again, after you have refreshed the drawing using , inorder for the ‘freezing’ to appear.

Win In – Activating this option will allow you to freeze a number ofpoints according to the window definition. To activate click on thiscommand and move to the drawing area. Mark the window with thepoints you wish to freeze (click on the mouse button to begin markingthe window – move the mouse to the window marking and click again to

finish marking). All the points inside the window will be frozen in the list(you can scroll the list up and down to see all the marked points). Click

to show the frozen points in the window.Win Out – Freezing points outside a defined window. To activate, clickon this option and move to the drawing area. Mark the window. Whenyou finish marking, all the points outside this window will be frozen.

Click to show the frozen points in the window.

AutoCAD : To activate click on ‘Freeze’ from the list of commands. In the AutoCAD command line you will see this writing:

PolygonIn/polygonOut/<Single>/(Esc)nd:

(Esc)nd – Click on Esc to finish the command.Single – default. Locating a single point. In AutoCAD ‘Object Point toSnap’ will be automatically operated. If a certain point is chosen, it willbe located from the bottom list and get frozen. After you have froze all

the desired points, click to show the frozen points in the window.PolygonIn –Freezing points inside a closed shape. Click ‘I’ and ‘Enter’to activate this command. Mark a polygon around the desired pointsand click ‘C’ and ‘Enter’ to close it. All the points inside the Polygon will

be located and frozen. Click to show the frozen points in thewindow.








PolygonOut – Freezing points outside a closed shape. Click on ‘O’ and‘Enter’ to activate this com mand. Draw a polygon around the desiredshape. Click ‘C’ to end. All the points outside the polygon will be frozen

and colored blue. Click to show the frozen points in the window.

Erase

Erasing a point(s) from the list using the drawing. To activate click on‘Erase’ from the list of commands. Here as well, the possible options willappear for working with Stand-Alone and for working combined with

AutoCAD (see ‘Freeze’), but here the same commands will erase points.One of the best uses for the ‘Erase’ command is to limit the project area toa defined space, or to erase the deviating coordinates in your project.

We will demonstrate this issue: say you have a new project into which youhave imported a measurement coordinates file, and in this file are also themeasurement stations and coordinates of the station’s orientation points. Inmany cases, these points are far from the measurement area and so afterimporting a file and refreshing it (R), you will get a group of points (theproject area) and a small number of remote points that are of no use. Youcan use the option ‘Erase -> Win out’ or ‘Erase -> polygonIn’ (dependingon the work configuration ( to erase the remote points from your project.

After erasing, click on to refresh the drawing.

Move

Moving a point/s from the list.Stand-Alone : To activate click on ‘Move’ from the list of commands.Choose the point you want to move and mark its desired location. Thepoint coordinates will change according to its new location.In order to move a group of points you must perform the following steps:

Choose ‘Locate’ from the command list. Choose ‘Win in’ from the list that opened. Move to the drawing and draw a window around the points you wish to

move.Check ‘v’ next to the word ‘Block’. Click ‘Cancel’ and choose ‘Move’ from the list. Choose both a point that will be used as a relevance point for movingthe other points, and the new location of the point. All points marked inthe window will move accordingly.

AutoCAD : It is a common mistake to think that moving a point with AutoCAD (the ordinary ‘Move’ command) will change the coordinates ofthe same point in the bottom list. However, it is possible to use the ‘Move’option described here to physically move a point, while simultaneouslychanging its coordinates in the list.








To activate click on ‘Move’ from the list of commands. In the AutoCADcommand line this writing will appear:PolygonIn/polygonOut/<Single>/(Esc)nd :

(Esc)nd – Click on Esc to finish the command.Single – default. Moving a single point. In AutoCAD ‘Object Point toSnap’ will be automatically operated. After selecting a certain point, youwill be asked to mark the first location that will serve as the referencepoint for movement, and then mark the place you want the points tomove to. The coordinates of the selected point will change according toits new location and according to the yellow cross marking. When you

finish moving all the desired points, click to refresh the drawing.PolygonIn – Moving points inside a closed shape. Click ‘I’ and ‘Enter’to activate this command. Mark a polygon around the desired points

and click ‘C’ and ‘Enter’ to close it. All the points inside the Polygon willbe located. Mark the first location that will serve as the reference pointfor movement, and then mark the place you want the points to move to.

When you finish moving, click .PolygonOut – Moving points located outside a closed shape. Click on‘O’ and ‘Enter’ to activate this command. Draw a polygon around thedesired shape. Click ‘C’ and 'Enter' to end. All the points outside thepolygon will be located. Mark the first location that will serve as thereference point for movement, and then mark the place you want the

points to move to. When you finish moving, click .

Working with blocks

There are many commands such as ‘Copy’ ‘Freeze’ and more, that can beused for working with blocks. A block is actually a group of points on whichcertain commands that can be made. The following example will show howto use blocks.Follow these steps to print a section of the points list in your project:

Color in blue the points you want to print.

To do so mark the first point for printing in the list, move with the arrowsright of the list to the last point of printing, hold the ‘shift’ key, and clickand mark this point. All points between the two marked points will becolored in blue.Now mark the points colored in blue as ‘Block’. By checking ‘v’ next tothe word ‘Block’. From here on, all the points marked in the list are“trapped” by ‘Block’.Click on the ‘Print’ button (with the picture of a printer from the bottomgroup of buttons). You will get the message that only the ‘Block’ will beprinted and not the entire list. Click ‘OK’ to continue the process andconfirm the printing after the printer dialog box appears.








We have shown that working with blocks enables you to define a group ofpoints together, making it possible to activate them as a group. We willnow discuss an additional command (very useful!) possible for activationon blocks. This command allows simultaneous erasing and adding ofcolumns to a group of lines. Study this example:Say you have a list of coordinates that was imported to the bottom list, butin the left column farthest on the left appears the code ‘0’, implying that aline from the list will look like this:0 Bm2000 500.32 100.37 30.15

This line is not legal, as the parameter zero is unnecessary. You can, of-course, move a line and erase this parameter, but it will take up much time.To do this with blocks:

Mark the first point on your list.Move with the arrows to the last point on your list, hold the ‘Shift’ keyand click (key-board), and mark the last point with your mouse.Capture the group of points as –‘Block’ (by checking ‘v’ next to the work‘Block’). Bring the text cursor to the points editing line, so it will stand in front ofthe parameter zero that appears on the same line.Click on ‘Delete’ from your key -board – you will see that the entirecolumn which has the cursor was erased from all relevant lines (the‘Block’ lines).

Clicking on the ‘v’ mark next to ‘Block’ will cancel the working withblocks.

* In this example, it was possible to erase or add characters / spacesto columns in a group of points.








Chapter 3 : Working withblocks(code)








Working with blocks (Codes)

One of the many options in working with CivilCAD 2014 is presenting theproject coordinates on a drawing in the form of pre-defined blocks. Thiswork mode is not possible when working with the program as anindependent stand-alone format.

Subsequent to CivilCAD 2014 installation, you will find the librariescontaining the program’s blocks in library ‘Codes’ file.

In Windows XP OS the default location is:C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ApplicationData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Codes\

In Windows Vista or Windows 7/8 OS the default location is:C:\ProgramData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Codes\

The main libraries that you will be working with are the ‘MainHeb’ whichcontains the blocks in Hebrew, and ‘Main’ that contains the same bloc ks inEnglish.

By entering the ‘ CODES ’ file from Windows, you will see that for each

blocks library there are additional ‘ DXF’ files and ‘ DWT’ files of the samename, for example:The ‘ MainHeb ’ library has a ‘ MainHeb.dwt ’ file, and a ‘ MainHeb.dxf ’ file.These are files in which all the library blocks are defined (see “Workingwith Codes” section in this chapter).

Chapter topics are as follows:

Setting work mode in blocks.Working with codes.

Loading a new background into a project with blocks.Command s from ‘Topography -> Codes’ window. Blocks in roads.Defining colors in ‘Template’ file.

Setting work mode in blocks

Open project ‘Prototype’ in order to switch to ‘blocks’ work mode.Open: ‘File ->Open project’ Choose ‘Prototype.prj’ project and click ‘OK’

Open: ‘File ->Configuration’ Select “Drawing environment’ tab.








Check ‘V’ in the ‘BlocksMode’ boxClick ‘OK’

Now go to the ‘Code definition’ window:

Open: ‘Topography ->Codes’ Click on the yellow filing cabinet iconFrom the ‘OpenSet’ window that op ens, choose the desired codeslibrary and click ‘OK’. Now you can see that the library’s nameappearing at the top section of the window under ‘Set’.

After you have picked the blocks library with which you want to work, youwill need to define the project default block. The program will also use thisblock for coordinates that were not defined by a code from the list.

Choose the block number from the list in the top section of this window

Click on ‘Update’ The program will ask if you wish to convert to the block you havechosen. Click ‘Yes’ . Now you can see the default block nameappearing next to the ‘Update (Default)’ icon.Open the Topography coordinates list by activating: Topography->Coordinates.

Press the options button (above the coordinates list), at the bottom

of the options window, mark the option: Blocks mode and press OK.

Exit the program and save the changes:

Click ‘OK’ Exist the program ‘File -> Exit’ Confirm the saving of data

From here on, every time you open a new project, you will work in blocksmode. When working on existing projects, the project will work in the modedefined for that project specifically .








Working with codes

This exercise will explain how to work with codes. After determining the blocks mode, open a new project and perform thefollowing:

Click on ‘Load from text file’ from the coordinates list (yellow filingcabinet icon)Load the file: Sample7.tco

In Windows XP OS the default location is:C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application

Data\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Samples\Sample7\In Windows Vista or Windows 7/8 OS the default location is:C:\ProgramData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Samples\Sample7

Click on to refresh the drawing.

Now you can see that the program has loaded the drawing coordinatesonto the drawing in the form of a permanent block. By not entering therepresenting code for each line in the coordinates list, the program usedthe default block that was defined earlier.

Now change the list:Choose a number of lines from the list and enter at their ends differentcode numbers. The typing will be done in the editing line after the height.

For example: 1 1000 1000 100.37 23(this point will be represented by block code 23)

These codes must exist in the block list of the existing library. In order toview the existing list of codes, open the ‘Topography –codes’ window andlook at the top section.

Following the typing click on the * ’Reord e rCoordinates’ button (the buttonwith right and left arrows in the coordinates list). The spaces in the list willbe arranged automatically.

Click on again and the program will change the blocks according to thechanges made in the list.In order to change the blocks size in the drawing, click on the ‘Options’

button - from the coordinates list and in the window that opens bring‘Scale’ to the desired size, and click ‘OK’.

Press to change the blocks size in the drawing.








*Unlike working without blocks, working with blocks requires aligning the

points in the columns prior to clicking .

Loading a new background into a project withblocks

Every time you open a new project with blocks, CivilCAD 2014 loads a‘Template’ file containing all the blocks belonging to the blocks library withwhich you want to work. Loading a new background for the project via‘File ->Open’ command from the AutoCAD menu, will erase the blocksdefined in the ‘Template’ file.

This is the reason for using the AutoCAD ‘Insert’ command for loading aproject background. The background will be loaded as a block or a ‘dxf’ . Incase you have accidentally erased the blocks definition, follow these steps:

From AutoCAD menu go to: ‘File ->Open’ Choose from ‘File of types’ : ‘Drawing template file(dwt) ’ Open the relevant ‘Template’ file from the ‘codes’ library, for example -‘Main.dwt’

Activate from the main toolbar below the main menu.In AutoCAD activate zoom-extends.

After the re-loading the template and reconstruction of layers it is possibleto view the project.








Creating codes

All codes must be created from “Prototype” project.

1) Open prototype project and then, from CivilCAD main Menu, go to‘Topography–>Codes’ .

2) Click on ‘New Set’ button (at the upper right side of the window)

to create a new library or click on ‘Open Set’ button in order toadd codes to existing library.

3) Cli ck on ‘New block’ button (at the lower right side of thewindow) to create a new block.

4) Enter the desired code name, and click on ‘Browse file name’ button to load the block’s DWG.

5) Click on ‘Set the changes to the block’ button to save thedefinitions.

6) Repeat steps 3-5 for each code.

7) After creating codes, open each code’s DWG in AutoCAD and saveit as DXF file in the earliest version possible in AutoCAD.

8) DXF and DWG file must have the same name and be located in thesame library.








Commands fr om ‘Topography Codes’ window

Creating, editing, and erasing a new blocks library (‘New Set’)

New Set – opening a new blocks libraryClicking this button will present a window with the names of the existinglibraries. Enter the new library name next to the heading ‘New set’ andclick ‘OK’. The location of the blocks library is in ‘CODES’ , from inside theinstallation library.

In Windows XP OS the default location is:C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ApplicationData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Codes\

In Windows Vista or Windows 7/8 OS the default location is:C:\ProgramData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Codes\

Erase Set – clicking this button and choosing a library from the list thatopens completely erases the library from the list and from the codes file.

Open Set – opening an existing blocks libraryClicking this button will present the list of existing libraries in anotherwindow. After choosing the library click ‘OK’.

Set block as default – choosing a default block After selecting a block from the list of blocks in this window, click thisbutton to set the chosen block as a default block. This block will bepresented to the coordinate without a code in the coordinates list.

Preview – a preview of a blockClicking this button will load the block itself to the graphic environment andpresent it on the screen. Since this action will erase the existing diagram, it

should be followed by a click on . Please notice that this command willonly restore the layers connected to CivilCAD 2014 software.

Browse file name - choosing one block file from the blocks library








In order to choose a new block and add it to the library, open this windowand choose the block you would like to define for the existing library. Byclicking on one of the blocks from the list that opens, the name of thechosen block will automatically appear in the typing line.

New Block – choosing a new blockClicking this button defines a new block. In order to choose a block fromthe list, open the window with the list of blocks (the three-point button).

After choosing the block from the list, the name of the file will appear nextto the heading:‘File -name’ . Enter the block’s name under ‘Blocks name’ . Type the nameof the layer in which the block will be entered next to the heading ‘Layer’ .

Use the same layer for all the blocks in the same library. Enter the chosencode name for the new layer next to the heading ‘Code’ . To use this block- enter this code in the coordinates list. After defining all the data to thenew block, click ‘OK’ to enter the block in the list of codes in the topsection of this window.

Erase Block – erasing a block from the libraryThis button erases the block from the list of blocks, but does not erase itsfile from its library, so that in the future it can be returned to the list.

Block in roads

In blocks mode, when working on a project with roads, CivilCAD 2014creates the layers representing the IPs data by using blocks in the form ofsigns, making it very easy to edit the drawing the software had created.

In order to define the working mode in roads with blocks perform thefollowing steps:

From the main menu, activate Roads->Horizontal alignment .From the window at the right side of the screen press on the options

button -CivilCAD 2014 will display the options window, at the top of that window(under “Horizontal alignment”) notice the option IP’S Data in blocksmode , below that option mark the option: Show all data .Press OK.

In order to illustrate this, create a project with blocks and define a road.When the software creates the road layout, try to move one of the Ips signsfrom AutoCAD. You will see that the entire sign is made up of one blockthat you can enlarge or turn according to need.








Defining colors in ‘Template’ file

Another advantage to working on a project with blocks in CivilCAD 2014, isthe possibility to predefine colors for the layers the software creates. Forexample, you can determine the colors in the contour line the software willcreate.

From AutoCAD menu go to: ‘File- >Open’ .Choose from ‘File of types’ : ‘Drawing template file(dwt)’. Open the relevant ‘Template’ file from the ‘codes’ library, for example-‘Main.dwt’ .Open the AutoCAD list of layers.Change the colors in the ‘Tcontours’ as you desire.Save the file.Operate CivilCAD 2014 software.Open a new project with blocks (in this case with MainHeb library).Load the coordinates file into the ‘Topography coordinates’. Run contour lines - ‘Topography -> contours’ .

Now you can see that the layers the software has created in order to showthe contour lines, are presented in the colors you have defined earlier inthe ‘Template’ file. Using this system you can predetermine the color foreach layer the program creates.








Chapter 4: Creatingcontour lines








Creating contour lines

In this chapter we will explain how to create contour lines. We will showhow to create contour lines, starting with the most basic option. Preceding,we will discuss additional options, and finally advanced issues like definingbreaklines.

Start using.Basic issues and defining the range of contour lines. Command buttons from the contours window. Setting options.Contour lines layers.Processing points to create contour lines.

Breaklines.

Start using

To create contour lines, go to: ‘Topography -> Contours' .)Topography appears in the main menu at the head of the drawing window.

To the right of the drawing, in the desk-top window, a contour lines windowwill appear with the blue heading: Topography Contours) .

Press Apply button in this window, to operate the contour linescomputation. Contours data such as: Intervals, contour layers, and soforth, will be automatically chosen by the software according to the defaultsettings.

Basic issues and defining the range of contourlines

Before we continue the discussion, in order to allow immediate applicationof the issues which we will discuss next, open a new project and enter thefollowing list of points:

05.51 1.11 1.11 0 0 .5 1.11 01.11 05.11 1.11 1.11 05.51 5. 2 .0 0 .5 05. 2 .0 5 05.11 5. 2 0 .0 2 05.51 05.5 5 . 7 0 .5 .0 5 .0 05.11 0 .7- 5 . 05.51 . .50 01 0 .5 5.72 7. 00 05.11 5. 0- 017. 7 0








05.51 .72 01 . 5 0 0 .5 2.1 0 . 0 05.11 0 .71 0 . 7 05

After enter ing the list, press the ‘Reorder button’ to align the list and

press to display the points on the drawing.

1. Defining the intervals between the contour lines: In the ‘ContourLines’ window you will find the ‘intervals’ field. To define theintervals between the contour lines, type the desired interval in thetext- box to the right of ‘intervals’. To confirm, click Apply. (note: If the word ‘default’ appears in the text -box, erase it and enter

the desired interval).

2. Defining the interval calculation range: When opening theCounter Lines Window, you will notice a large frame that appears inthe window with the word ‘Extents’. This word indicates that at thecontour lines will be calculated now (after operating this commandby clicking the Apply button) in all of the drawing area, andfurthermore, the shape of the contour lines will be arched at alltimes. For example:

In this drawing area the contour lines will be calculated also in the confinedarea between the following points 0->->7->01->0->0 , and not as wemight have preferred, without this area. To calculate the contour lineswithout this area, you must define it in the following manner :

Choose ‘ Locate’ from the list of options in the right window.Go to the drawing area and choose the selected area by defining the its

bordering points: -->--->2---> 0---> .

When you are finished, click the button from the right (for AutoCADusers you can click on ‘S’ and ‘Enter’ in the c ommand line).

After defining the range of the contour lines, click OK to create them.








There are more methods for defining the range of the contour lines.Let us observe two:

Inserting the points names into the range of contour lines : At thehead of the right window appears a line of text. Go to this line with yourcursor and insert the points that border the contour lines. Between eachpoint click ‘Enter’. You can also simultaneously insert together a rangeof points on the condition that they are arranged in an ascending order,for example : 100- 110. Click ‘Enter’ when finished. When you finish

inserting all the points in the range, press the button. Click Apply toreceive the contour lines.

Using Polyline (for users of AutoCAD version only): In AutoCAD,draw a polyline between the points that border the contour lines. Afterdrawing your polyline, choose ‘select’ from the options list on the right.Go to the drawing, choose the polyline you marked and click ‘Enter’.You can see that in the points list from the right window appears a<Noname < list. Press Apply to receive the contour lines.

Note: You can do the polyline drawing in any layer you want. Foryour convenience, you can enlarge the AutoCAD window tomaximum by closing the panels (from the right and below the

AutoCAD window) by pressing the small ‘x’ button at the top of eachpanel. To restore the coordinates’ panel (panel below the AutoCAD)activate Topography->Coordinates.

Show Triangles : Present the Interpolation triangles in the drawing:checking this option means that for all contour lines calculations, thetriangles which served as interpolation for the creation of the contourlines will be drawn. In order to compute the contour lines the programdoes triangulation (interpolation of triangles), so that the area beingcomputed is “covered” with triangles. The program will choose thetriangles itself, so that each point will be connected (as much aspossible) to the two points closest to it, without the overlapping oftriangles, or there will not be an area that is not covered in triangles.

Fix borders : Automatic border repair: As mentioned, the computationof contour lines will be done throughout the project (in all its areas),unless an exact border was defined. You can instruct the computer toautomatically repair the border computation. Check this option and click‘OK’ to compute contour lines again. The program will try to minimizethe computation borders, so that the triangles with an exceptionally longside will be removed automatically. This way we can avoid connectionbetween distant points, ones that we do not need to connect.

Note: This option is based on the mathematical computation inwhich the program defines for each and every project what its








“longest side” is, according to the density of the project and theaverage distance between the points. This computation is notalways the ideal solution, in which case we will turn to the othertools explained in this chapter.

Show borders: displaying the contours’ border, if a border was definedby the user CivilCAD 2014 will display that border otherwise; it willcalculate the border for the whole contours area and display it.

Create triangles only : the contours will not be shown on the drawing,but the program will build the triangulation model in the computer’smemory, therefore CivilCAD 2014 will be able to do any calculation inthe project even if the contours are invisible.

Smooth : Smoothing the contour lines – The program creates, bydefault, exact contour lines according to the triangles that were formed.You can order the program to “smooth” these contours. To do so check‘V’ in this field and click OK.

Note: After “smoothing”, the contours you receive will be less accurate.

Smoothing level – You can choose the level of smoothnessfor the contour lines by selecting it from the ComboBox (nearthe "Smooth" label). There are 10 possible levels. Bychoosing a lower level the result will be less smooth but more

accurate and vice versa. Please notice that the process inlower levels will be much slower.

Max Interpolation Length – Defining the maximum length forinterpolation: CivilCAD 2014 creates, by default, triangular interpolationbetween all existing points. You can define maximum distance for theperformance of this interpolation. Choose, for example, a value of 60meter (the work units for a field are in meters), and click OK. Theprogram will perform interpolation only between the points that thedistance between them is not over 60 meters. This way you canremove unwanted triangles, since they have a side that overpasses this

distance.

In order to use any one of the options mentioned above, check ‘v’ next tothe option and press Apply. The program will compute the contoursaccording to the definition that have been set, and draw them. If suchcontour lines already exist from previous definitions, the program will erasethem and show only the new contours.

Pick height - Eelevation labeling in a specific place : in some casesthe elevation labeling chosen by the program is not satisfying or just notgood. In such cases it is possible to add elevation labeling in thefollowing way:








Mark ‘Pick’ and move to the drawing area. Create a line betweenany two points (click your mouse button, hold and move to the newlocation), so that it will cut across a number of contour lines. Afterthe line was drawn, elevations will be automatically drawn at thecross sections of the contours. You can also avoid labelingunwanted elevation layers by doing the following: enter the layersand freeze the ones for which you don’t want to draw elevations. Goback to the Contours Window and choose ‘pick height’ again inorder to draw the intersection line. Now the elevations will belabeled only for the layers that are not frozen. When the labeling isfinished, return to the frozen layers to “view” mode. The layers willreturn to the drawing, without the elevation labeling.

Command buttons from the contours window:

We will discuss the functions of the buttons that appear in the ContoursWindow:

Emphasizes Contours instantly : Click this button to draw a yellowline

around the Contour Lines area (zone). To erase the line click .

Erases the points list that define the contours range (field ofarea): click this icon to erase the points list that border the contours border. You will be returned to the state of computing the entire area.

Erases a point from the list of points that define the contour. Markthepoint you want to delete from the list and click this icon. Click on toconfirm the change as final.

Set : After each change you make in the contours computationborders, click this icon to validate your choice.

Open Options Window : Open the contours Status Index. See detailson‘Options ’ from the chapter ‘Settings’.








Setting options

Activate the options Window by clicking the options icon ( ). These arethe options available on the window (the contours options will appear at theupper-left corner of the window):

Auto elevations – When this option is checked, the program willautomatically assign the numbering of the contour lines according tothe plan. Removing this option and running the contours computationonce again will result in the drawing contours without their elevationcomputation label. Since the contour lines are divided into layersaccording to intervals, it is easy to define for which layers the elevationwill be written and for which not. This will be discussed in the course ofthis chapter.

Brackets – This option will cause square brackets to appear aroundthe elevation labeling of the contours. This way you can differentiatebetween existing and designed contours.

Format ‘##’ - this option sign will make the elevation labeling in format##. For example – whether the elevation label 3.25 was written in amarked or unmarked format, it will always be written as 3.25. On theother hand, if the labeling is 3.20, the labeling can be viewed in twodifferent ways:Without the option the elevation will be – 3.2With the option it will be – 3.20

Scale – Choosing the text font size. The text height will be according tothe general scale settings (for more details please refer to "Chapter 24,Configurations window").

Note: During the printing process, the labeling will be printed as it is viewedin the window. The font size 100 is compatible for printing on the scale ofapproximately 1:100.

Contour lines layers

The contour lines are divided into layers according to the intervals betweenthem. For example - all contour lines with intervals of 1 meter will begrouped together into one layer (100, 101, 102 etc.). You can control thecontour layers. The division into layers is dependant on the intervalsbetween the contours that were determined during the computation. In theOptions Window appears the label: ‘Layers’. This is a Layer contours scale(graph):








Each number represents a different layer. You can browse between layersby marking the layer you want using your mouse. The other details thatappear in the frame, represent the characteristics of the highlighted layer.We will now discuss these characteristics:

Intervals – Intervals in contour lines. As aforesaid, we divide thecontours to layers according to the intervals between them. In the‘Intervals’ Window you can characterize each layer by determiningwhich contours will enter it. If, for example you enter 0.5, all contourswith intervals of 0.5 will enter this layer. A zero interval will notify theprogram to include the lines for which no layers were defined, in the 0.5layer group.

If, for example, the segmentation into layers is so:

Interval (M)Layer0 1 5 0 0

1. 5 1

And you ask for contour lines every 0.1 meters, all contours that do notbelong to any layers (100.1, 100.2 etc.), will be passed over to layer four.

Unused – This option will neutralize the marked layer, so that it won’tbe formed at all. If, for example, you want all the contour lines to enterone layer, mark in layer 0, zero intervals, while marking all other layersas ‘unused’.

Auto Elevation – Automatic Elevation labeling. If the main ‘AutoElevation’ option is checked, then all elevation labeling will be doneautomatically. This labeling is affected by the ‘Auto Elevation’ o ption.For a layer that doesn’t need automatic elevation labeling, uncheck themarking next to the layer. If, for example, you do not want AutoElevation labeling for layer 0.25, highlight this layer in the list (say it wasdefined as layer 3), and cancel the ‘Auto Elevation’ next to it.








Processing points to create contour lines

The creation of contour lines is dependant, aforesaid, on the measurementpoints of the project. There might be points in your project that you will notwant to include in the creation of contour lines. There are a number ofways of dealing with such points:

Points without elevation – CivilCAD 2014 defines points with noelevation. Unlike other CAD tools, CivilCAD 2014 separates betweenpoints at elevation 0 and points of no elevation. CivilCAD 2014 willrecognize points with no elevation, and will automatically exclude themfrom the creation of contour lines.

Freezing points – You can freeze the points that have elevation, yetyou do not want to include in the creation of contour lines. Freezing thepoints can be done in two ways:

a. From the list (see details in chapter“Coordinates database - icons that affect the listand are connected to it”).

b. From the drawing (see chapter “Coordinatedatabase - drawing commands affecting thelist”).

Let us review the process of freezing a point:

Click on the word ‘freeze’ from the list of functions in the bottomwindow.Move your cursor to the drawing area and capture one of the points youwish to freeze. You will notice that the point had been located in thebottom list and that the word ,’<Fr>’ has been added beside it.

Click on and you will be able to view the “freezing” in the drawing. Open the contour lines drawing window and perform line computation.

You will be able to notice the change done to the contour lines according tothe point you have frozen. If you add the interpolation triangles drawing tothe contour line computation, you will see that the triangles have been re-arranged in order to overlook the frozen coordinate.

Canceling coordinates in the drawing – There may be points in thelist that you will not want to see in the drawing. Unlike the frozen points,these points will not appear in the drawing and will not be included inthe contour lines computation. In order to remove a point from thedrawing, you must perform the following steps :

Mark the designed point from the bottom list of points.Stand on the points editing line, before the desired point and addthe “/” mark at the beginning.








Click on and the point will be erased from the drawing.

Freezing a point by its code – Even if you don’t want to change thepoint or its original name in the drawing, you might still not want it toaffect its contour. In this case you can freeze the point by giving it acode. The point code will appear in the fifth column of the point (afterthe elevation). Remember that the point that you want to code musthave some kind of elevation (it can even be zero). The code added tothe frozen point will be “FR”.

Please see the sample below:Our point is: 15 175346.32 176728.76 153.14

Add the “FR” code in the following manner – 15 175346.32 176728.76 153.14 FR.

Click on the ‘Reorder points’ button (the button with the two blue arrowsfrom the bottom, to make the code appear in the proper column).

Click on to update the drawing.To view the change, go back and compute more contour lines.

Breaklines

Naming and defining the problem : A breakline is actually a geometricdefinition of a line that will not allow two points that appear on one side ofthe line and the other, to form a triangle, during the contour triangleinterpolation of the contour lines stage.

This example of a surveyed road will clear things up:








From this diagram you can immediately tell that the contour lines receivedare not correct. If you look at the triangle interpolation (see next diagram)that was made for this road, you can tell that it is also not correct. Take forexample points 6, 7, 5, and 15. The interpolation that was received forthese points is for triangles: 6,7,15 and 5,15,7. Point 7 is an elevated point,and you will not necessarily want point 15 to connect to it.We would like this interpolation to be made: 5,15,6 and 5, 7, 6.

Defining the Lines – An example: we will now use breaklines tosolve the problem. To continue the discussion and run this example,open a new project and type in the following list :

0 7. 5 07 . 0 .2 0 0 7. 0 07 1.11 0 2. 050.2 070 .2 0 2. 5 0 .7 070 .5 0 . 051.01 0702. 0 55.07 5 050.05 070 .2 0 2 .72 2 050. 070 .75 0 52. 7 05 . 070 .2 0 52. 0 2. 07 .75 0 . 0 2. 5 07 1. 0 .2 01

.0 07 1. 0 .70 00 0 .2 07 .21 0 5 . 0 0 0 .75 07 . 0 5 . 1 0 05 .22 07 5. 0 5 . 7 0 050.01 070 .1 0 2 . 05 050.0 07 1. 0 25.51 02 05 .1 07 1.20 0 22. 07








After you open a new project – open the Breaklines Window and go to – Topography->Lines. The Breaklines Window will appear from the right.This window is divided into two sections (for more details see Chapter 5 – ‘Lines Connections’)

The bottom which contains the breaklines list and enableschanges in the list, such as deleting an entire line, saving files as.dis type files and more.The top which shows the highlighted line (the same line that ishighlighted in the lines List) and enables to make changes such asadding and deleting points from it.

Defining Breaklines

Defining breaklines using ‘Locate’ to choose the points - when thiswindow is opened, a new line by the name of 1 will open automatically.Click on ‘Locate’ from the options list in the upper window t o go to thedrawing area, and mark a line between coordinates 5 and 6 (mark the line

by catching first point 5, and then 6). When you finish, click on thebutton to set the line (AutoCAD users can click on ‘S’ from the AutoCADcommand line).

This definition of breakline will compel the program to perform the correctinterpolation that will solve the problem (to repeat the interpolation you willhave to run the contour lines once again). Continue to define more lines :

Click on button from the bottom of the breaklines window. A new linewill open (line number 2). Define this line between points 15,12,9 (clickagain on ‘Locate’ and mark the points according to order. Don’t forget to

click on when you finish).

Defining breaklines by typing in point names – open a new line anddefine it Between points 1,4,5. After opening a new line, move with yourmouse to the text line at the top of the window and point to it. Type the

number ‘1’ and click ‘Enter’. Continue to type the coordinates 4 and 5.When you fini sh, click ‘Set’. We have finished defining the breaklines. Go to ‘Topography -> Contours’and choose the intervals 0.5, and click ‘ Apply. The new breaklines will becalculated and you will receive the following diagram:








You can complete the diagram by defining a specific range for thebreaklines (as was explained in the section “Basic issues and the definingof breaklines range”.

Defining breaklines using Polyline (this option exists for AutoCAD usersonly).In addition to the two previous options, you can also define a breakline bychoosing 3D Polyline from AutoCAD (the breaklines have to be 3DPolylines, because Polylines in two dimensions cannot serve as such). Touse this option, follow these steps:

Draw a 3D polylines in AutoCAD that will be used as breaklines. (youcan use Object Snap for Node and connect between the pointsCivilCAD 2014 had created).Enter the ‘Topography Lines’ window and choose ‘select’ from thewindow on the right.Move to the AutoCAD drawing area and choose the line you want. Click‘Enter’. The line will be recorded in the right window.

Open a new line ( button) and choose the next line.

Continue and choose all your selected lines.

Expanding the creation of breaklines:

Creating breaklines for points which were not measured (do not exist in thefile). Occasionally you will need to draw breaklines for points that have notbeen measured (e.g. building borders etc.). In this case you will need tomanually add the points to the file in order to connect them. To do soplease follow the steps below:








Run the contour lines in the project as usual.Use ‘pick’ from the bottom window and choose the points you want toadd (for a review of this action see the section – “Coordinates Database- Drawing commands affecting the l ist”). Since you are working on athree-dimensional background of contour lines, the chosen coordinateswill automatically get the altitude of the existing model.

Click on to refresh. Go to Topography -> Contours and connect the breaklines between thecoordinates that were formed.Creating groups of breaking lines from an AutoCAD layer – see chapter“Dealing with DWG files – extracting coordinates and lines from a DWGfile”.








Chapter 5: Linesconnections








Lines connections

CivilCAD 2014 makes it possible to define measuring lines – lines usuallydefined as breaklines. This chapter will explain how to define these linesusing several different methods. While we will be referring in this chapter to‘Existing status’ breaklines, all activations described are relevant to ‘Designstatus’ measuring lines.

The topics in this chapter are:

Defining measuring lines.Changing the lines definition.

Commands from ‘Topography/Design lines’ window .Filtering lines from a DWG file.

Defining measuring lines

CivilCAD 2014 software has a few different ways to define measuring lines.Using this example will show how to define the measuring lines in a projectincluding all possible options (while this sample refers to the creation ofmeasuring lines for ‘Existing’ status, it is also relevant to ‘Designed’ status measuring lines).

1. From menu activate ‘ Topography - > Lines’ 2. In the ‘Lines list’ (under the heading ‘Lines list’) you will find the list

of lines with one line and no points. Define this line using one of thefollowing methods:

‘Locate’ – Click on ‘Locate’ , go to the drawing window and click onpoints that are already defined in the project and are on the drawing.

After clicking on each point, the program will add the name of thepoint to the points list (at the t op of the ‘Topography lines’ window).These points represent the current line (marked in blue) from the

‘Lines list’.‘Select’ – Defining a line by choosing a drawn line from the drawing. After clicking on ‘Select’, choose a Polyline from the drawing (it ispreferable that this line is defined a 3D Polyline), and click ‘Enter’.The program will create new points starting with ‘DIS’ and add themto the coordinates list. In section ‘Filtering Lines from DWG Files’ in this chapter, we will show how to filter a number of lines from anumber of layers in a single command.Typing point names – It is also possible to enter the point namesmanually (if they exist in the coordinates list), by clicking on ‘Name’ and entering the name. After entering all the names and clicking

‘Enter’ , the program will draw the line on the drawing according tothe points. If there are sequential points (of consequent names), for








example: 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, it is possible to enter 1000 and1003 and click ‘Enter’ . The program will enter all the pointssequentially in the ‘Lines list’ and create the line.

Defining Radiuses – It is possible to define a radius for every lineusing two optional systems:

1. Defining a radius by entering its value between two pointsand typing the radius value under ‘2Points+R’ , in the secondpoints line of the two points.

2. For defining a radius by three points on a line, enter ‘V’ inthe cell located on the middle points line under ‘3Points’ , bydouble-clicking on this field.

Click on the button to define the line. To define additional click onand repeat sections 2 to4.

After completing the line definition, ‘refresh’ the drawing by clickingand the new points and lines will be added to the drawing. The contourlines will be updated by activating ‘Topography ->Contours’ and clickingon the Apply button.

Changing the lines definition

It is possible to determine the presentation of each line in the lines list, andthe effect it will have on the contour lines. In order to determine thesesettings, mark the desired line or lines from the lines list, and click on the

Options button - , the options window will appear:

We will explain the options in this window:

‘Type’ - The presentation of the line on the drawing‘Continues’ – a sequential line (default)‘Fence’ – a fence sign‘Left/Right cliff’ – a cliff sign. The direction of the cliff “edges” willbe determined by choosing ‘Left/or Right’ .








‘Left/Right slope’ – a slope sign. The direction of the cliff “edges”will be determined by choosing ‘Left/or Right’ .‘Distances’ – the marking of the intermediate distances betweenand along the line segments. The lettering size will be determinedaccording to ‘Width’ .

‘Layer’ - The layer in which the lines are formed. As default theprogram will create all the lines in one layer. Choosing a different linefor a certain line, will create it in the chosen layer.

‘Width’ – The line width. The width of the line is the parameter for thedetermination of its size. The size will affect the line according to itstype:

‘Fence’ – will be drawn wider, ‘Distances’ – larger lettering fordistances and so on.

‘Closed’ – Open/Closed line: checking this box will turn the breaklineinto a close line. The contour lines will not be calculated for this line anda 3D model will not be built. This makes it possible to determinestructures and other closed forms for which we do not want to drawcontour lines, or want to add to the volumes calculations. (For moredetails see Chapter 4 “Creating Contour Lines – Defining Areas Not forComputation”).

‘Breakline’ – Throughout the entire chapter we have shown the usageof the ‘Lines’ option for the creation of breaklines only. Thiswithstanding, we have also shown many options from this window for aquick and easy drawing of lines that are not necessarily breaklines. Inorder to continue using the ‘Topography lines’ window for drawinglines that are not breaklines, use the same options as shown, by un-checking the ‘V’ mark in the field ‘Breakline’ . The line will remain in thedrawing but will not affect the creation of contour lines.

Add or reduce dH to break Lines

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Topography Lines' or'Design Lines'.Mark the desired break lines from the lines list and click the 'Add dH to

selected lines' button'.In the opened window, enter dH (in meters). Positive value will add dHand negative value will reduce dH.Click the 'OK' button.

Click the 'Refresh' button to update the drawing.








From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Topography Contours' or'Design Contours' and rebuild the surface 3D model (contours).

Commands from ‘Topography/Design lines’window

In the following section we will review all the options from the ‘Breaklines’ window.

1. Top Window:

- Erasing a point from the list of points that define the line. Mark thepoint that should be erased and click this button. After the change click‘Set’ .

- Setting the current line : until the ‘set’ button is activated, the newline definitions will not take place (adding/ dropping points, line type etc.).

- Determining the height for current line according to existingstatus : clicking this button will adjust the line heights for each pointaccording to the previous contour lines of the existing status the program

has created. The program will also change the heights in the coordinateslist at the relevant points.

- Determining the existing contour line by the existing status :clicking this button will adjust the line heights to each point according to theprevious existing status contours the program has created. The programwill also change the heights in the coordinates list with the relevant points.

- Determination of settings for current line . See detailing in section‘Changing the Lines Definitions’ section from this chapter.

- Filtering lines from the drawing . See detailing in ‘ Filtering Lines’ section in this chapter.

‘Find’ – Locating a point from the list in the drawing (option ‘Find’ from thebox ‘Locate’ ‘Select’ etc.). This option exists only for users of Auto CAD.Choose ‘Find’ from the list on the right and move to the drawing area.Choose the line you wish to locate and click ‘Enter’ . The program willlocate the chosen line from the list and mark it in the ‘Lines List’ .

‘Select’ – Defining a line by selecting a drawn line from the drawing.








‘Locate’ – Defining a line by locating defined points on the drawing.

2. Bottom Window:

- Opening a new work line .

- Erasing a line or a group of lines . Clicking this button will open awindow with the following options:

‘Only selected lines’ – erasing the marked lines from the lines list.‘All lines’ – erasing all lines from the list‘Lines above height factor’ – erasing all lines that include heightsabove the given height, at ‘Height factor’ .‘Lines below height factor’ – erasing all lines that include heightsbelow the given height at ‘Height factor’ .

- Importing DIS files . This option is for importing DIS files used todefine breaklines. Clicking the button will open the files dialog box. Choosethe file you wish to import. The file will be entered into the project in theform of a breakline. The breakline points will be attached upon need to thecoordinates list (bottom window ‘Topography Coordinates’) and the linesdefinition (line points) will be added to the breaklines list.

The imported dis file is divided to several colums by: x y h linename/point number. In different files there can be a different arrangementof columns. By default, the program reads the columns according to acertain order. It is possible to control the ‘reading’ by arranging thecolumns according to the file structure (for more details see Chapter 24 – “General issues – General Configuration Definitions”).

- Exporting DIS files . Following the definition of breaklines, it ispossible to export a DIS file format of these lines. Clicking the button willopen the files dialog box. Choose the location of the new file and enter its

name.

CivilCAD allows saving the break lines to file including its definitions(Break/Closed/Type etc.).

In order to load these files which were created by CivilCAD:

For break lines of Existing G.L. will be saved in a *.tbl file.For break lines of Designed G.L. will be saved in a *.dbl file.

- Emphasizing an existing line . In cases where the work zone islarge and built up from many breaklines, it is often a problem to identify








pre-defined lines. This option is for emphasizing the lines for recognitionpurposes. Mark the line you wish to identify from the list (see ‘Lines list’),

and click this button. The line will be colored in yellow. Clicking willcancel this emphasis.

- Add or Reduce dH to break lines.

Filtering lines from a DWG file

CivilCAD 2014 makes it possible to define breaklines by filtering linesdefined in a DWG file. It is possible to filter all types of lines (Line,

LwPolyline, 3dPolyline, 2dPolyline). It is best if these lines have heights,still it possible to filter the lines without heights and to determine theirheight at a later stage. Using this example we will explain how to operatethe filter.

Open a new project in CivilCAD 2014 by selecting ‘ File- >New Project’ .From the AutoCAD menu select ‘ File - > Open’ and choose the drawingfrom which you wish to filter the lines.From the CivilCAD 2014 menu select - ‘Topography - > Lines’ .

Click on (‘Filter breaklines from DWG file’ )From the window that opens choose the shape under ‘ Entities’ and thelayer under ‘ Layers’ . You can mark this automatically by clicking on‘Select’ and marking the line or lines that represent the layer and thetype of file for filtering.Click ‘Apply, and the program will present a message that will enquire ifyou wish in addition to filtering lines, to add the points of the filteredlines to the coordinates list (clicking NO will add them).If there are lines in the list, the program will inquire if you wish to deletethe existing list or add the new lines to this list.

Click on to refresh the lines in the drawing.Refresh the contour lines in the drawing by choosing ‘Topography ->Contours’ and click ‘Apply. If the program gives out the message that afew points are without height, it is possible that the filtering was donefor lines that were missing height for certain points. It is possible to fixthis by doing one of the following:

1. Correcting the list manually – it is possible to locate the pointsand fix them manually by operating the search button (the button

). Enter the height (0) in the window that opens, mark ‘ AccurateHeight’ and click ‘OK’. The program will mark the points with height‘0’ in the c oordinates list. Enter the proper height for each of thesepoints.








2. Erasing certain lines – it is possible to erase certain lines bymarking them in the lines list or according to a certain height. (see‘Topography ->Design lines’ window).

3. Determining lines height according to topography – mark thelines that are missing heights in the lines list and click on for

getting the height according to ‘existing status’, or to get theheight by ‘designed status’ (see window ‘Topography/Design lines).

After fixing the heights of the desired lines, click on to update the linesaccording to the changes in the coordinates list.








Chapter 6: Areacalculations








General

This chapter discusses area computation possibilities using CivilCAD2014. The program can perform area computations while integrating thedata in summarizing graphs. In order to explain the usage of areacomputations, we will perform this demonstration.

1. Open a new project (File: -> New project).2. Type in the following list which was measured on the local

coordinate system:

011.1 011.1 10 .75 0 5. 015. 1 0 . 002.52 0 7. 7 01 . 0 1. 5 0 .5 0 2.5 2 00 . 01 .7 7 0 5. 1 000.12 00 .7 . 2 0 .71 7.01 01

00 .7 01 . 2 00

After you have finished typing click to receive the points on yourscreen. If the points do not appear, operate the Zoom Extents from the

AutoCAD Window or press (Located in the view toolbar only in stand-alone mode).

We will now approach area computations:

3. From main menu activate : Topography -> Planes. The TopographyPlanes window will open from the right.

This window is divided into two sections: top and bottom.Bottom – in this section a list of all planes existing in the project willappear.Top – this part shows the plane that is currently being worked on – introduces its list of points and options.

Opening this window will automatically open a new plane in the

program bearing the name “1”, assuming there are no other planesexisting in the project.








4. Changing plane name – cha nge the name of this plane to “a1”. Thecursor is currently at the top of this window next to –‘Name’. Erase(using the keyboard) the name “1”, enter the new name (“a1”) andclick ‘Enter’ when finished. You will see that the name has beenregistered in the Planes list at the bottom of the screen.

Defining planes

We will now show how to define planes in the program.Note: this explanation is based on the example from the first page ofthis chapter.

1. Click on 'Locate' from the right window status box:

Move to the drawing area. Stand on point number 3 (bottom right point) andselect it with a single mouse click. Continue to choose the remaining points :4---> 5---> 6 (4 top right, 5 left, 6 under 5). To close this plane click on the

button from the window on the right (users of AutoCAD can enter ‘C’ and‘Enter’ from the AutoCAD command line).

We will continue to define the remaining planes:

2. Adding a new plane : click on the New Plane button ( )

A new plane will be added to the planes list (‘Planes List’ right window).Continue to define the boundaries of this plane. Click again on ‘Locate’ andmove to the drawing area. Mark point 5 as the first point on the plane (thepoint that is at the far left of the previous plane we have defined). Continueto connect point 7 as a continuation of the border, but make sure youchoose it and not point 11 which is close to it and continue to mark the

points on the field : 8 (over 7) --> 6 (to the right of 7) and (or C in the AutoCAD command line) to go back to point 5.

Continue to define area 2 in the same way, by points --> 7 --> 9 --> 10 -->

8 --> 7. After you finish defining the planes, click . The planes names

will appear on the drawing.

UnusedLocatePickSelect








Defining planes with radiuses

There are two methods to define planes with radiuses:-To define a radius by entering its value between two points, type theradius value below caption 2Points+R on the second point line amongthe two designated points .

- To define the radius by three points located on the line, click "V" bydouble-clicking the mouse in field 3Point .

Additional Options from the Topography planes window

Top window - more possibilities for the specific plane at hand :

Locating the plane of the points in the bottom points list – Button . Clickthis button to locate in the bottom graph all the coordinates in the currentplane. They will be marked so that changes can be made on them usingthe various ‘Block’ options. Erasing a point from the list of points that define the plane - mark the point

you wish to erase and click on the erase button - . Click to confirm

the change.

Bottom window – options on all planes:

Reading plane files – . Click the button to open the file dialog box.You can choose between .dpl type files and .tpl type files, which areplane files created by CivilCAD 2014, and .lot type files. This option isuseful for transferring plane files between projects.Erasing a plane/group of planes – mark the desired plane/s and click

on the ‘Erase’ button . After the confirmation warning, the planes willbe erased.








Location of a plane in the drawing – . In order to locate a plane inthe drawing area, mark the desired plane and click the button. The

plane will be located and its borders colored in yellow. Click toremove the marking.

Display definitions

We have shown how to define planes in the program. Now we will showyou how to change the characteristics of the planes as they are presentedin the drawing, namely, in addition to the name of the plane we will showits area, border distances and so on.

To control the planes display, please perform the following steps:1. In the Planes list, mark the planes for which you wish to change the

display. To choose a number of planes, use the Ctrl, or Shift buttons.

2. Click on the Options button - from the window .The options windowwill appear on the Planes Window.

3. Here are all possible options from this window:The font scale – to change the plane font size (plane name size, thelabeling area, and so forth), click on the small arrow to the right of‘Default’ in the ‘Scale’ field. Choose your size from the list that will open

(to view/edit scales table select file->configuration, select the drawingenvironment tab and press on 'system scale').Coloring the area – Solid + Fill color – If you wish to color the markedarea, you will first have to mark it as Solid. Afterwards you can choosea color to fill in the area by clicking on the square of paint near the label‘Fill color’. Choose a color from the window that opens.Plane Names – the presentation of the plane in the drawing (this optionis marked as default).Area – presenting the area of the plane.Perimeter - presenting the perimeter of the plane.Distances - presenting the distance of the plane by its perimeter.

Names of border points – the names of the plane border points.Please note that CivilCAD 2014 creates a layer of border points as partof the existing points layer. Showing the points name in this option willcreate them in the planes data layer, and position the points labeling ina way that is more convenient and easy to read.Elevations of border points – presenting the elevations of the borderpoints.Circled – the drawing of circles around the plane’s border points. Border coordinates – presenting the near coordinates border points.

To change the display status, mark ‘V’ in the requested fields andclick OK. To close the window without making any changes, click‘Cancel’.








Summarizing table

Once you have finished defining the planes, you can record them in asummarizing report.

1. Go to ‘Earthworks -> Topo.Planes’ from the top bar. A window willopen from the right with all the data in a summarizing table.

2. Click ‘Apply’ to receive the Planes Report. In the top part of th e windowappears the list of planes with the word ‘Total’ at the end. When thiswindow is opened, the list is automatically marked (colored). When theorder to show this table is given, (the report-by clicking Apply) , a tablewill be computed and shown for the marked planes only. If you wish tonarrow the table, you will need to mark only the planes you want and

click ‘Apply again. The word total signifies whether to introduce thesummarizing line at the end of the table or not.

3. Present the planes table on the drawing -Once clicked, this button adds the quantity table to the drawing.Click to go to the drawing area, and choose a location for the table:

Users of stand alone version – Position the table and click your mouse.The table will appear at the chosen location .AutoCAD users Positionthe table and click your mouse A temporary yellowframe will appear at the chosen location. If you wish to change thelocation of the table, choose a new location and mouse click again.

After choosing a new loca tion, enter “S” (option ‘Set”) in the AutoCADcommand line. The table will be formed in the chosen spot.

More possibilities from this window

It is possible you might want a limited table that will not contain all the data(for example: only a list of the planes names and their areas). You canreduce the table by controlling the parameters appearing in it:

Area - presenting area columns in the tablePerimeter - presenting perimeter columns in the tableFull Report - the detailed definition list of each and every plane in the

reportScale - setting the table font size as it will appear on the drawing








Creating a Survey Plan

Creating a Survey Plan with CivilCAD 2014 is very easy. Using thefollowing example, we will explain how to operate this module.

First, we need to configure the correct working mode.

1. From CivilCAD main menu, go to: 'File Open Project'.2. Select 'prototype.prj' project and click the 'Open' button.

In Windows XP OS, the default location is:

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ApplicationData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\prototype.prj\

In Windows 7 OS, the default location is:

C:\ProgramData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\prototype.prj\

3. From CivilCAD main menu, go to: 'File Configuration'.In 'Drawing environment' Tab, define the desired scale (1:250 ; 1:500 ;1:1000) and checkmark the option 'Survey format'.

4. Click the 'OK' button to save the definitions.

5. From CivilCAD main menu, go to: 'File Exit'. Click the 'Yes' button tosave the changes.6. From CivilCAD main menu, go to: 'File New Project'. 'New Project'

window will open.7. Create a new folder (For example: NG-MN-4592) and in 'File Name'

define the project's name (For example: NG-MN-4592).8. Click the 'Open' button.9. In 'Topography Coordinates' menu (at the bottom of the screen), type

the following coordinates:

011101.5110111 1. 51BM7958

011100.299980.258BM7959

0111 2.1 2. 5BM7960

0111 7.011105.21BM7961

10. Click the 'Refresh' button to display the coordinates in the drawing.

If you cannot see the coordinates, in AutoCAD command line, type:Z ENTER and then E ENTER (Zoom Extents).








Note: You can also Load Coordinates list from Excel file. For

loading coordinates from Excel file – see chapter 2 on pages 30-32.

11. From CivilCAD main menu, go to: 'Topography Planes'. 'TopographyPlanes' menu will open on the right side of the screen.

12. Type the coordinates' names by order under 'Name' column.

Note: make sure that after typing each name, you hit the 'ENTER'button, otherwise the coordinates will not be stored in CivilCAD's database.








13. Click the 'SET' button and then click the 'Apply' button.

14. In order to hide the coordinates which were created by CivilCAD (CIVILLayer), in AutoCAD main menu, click the 'Layers Properties Manager'

button or type in the command line 'LA' and hit the 'ENTER' button.In the opened window, freeze 'CIVIL' layer by clicking the 'Sun' icon.The icon will change to 'Snowflake' icon.

15. Click the 'X' on the upper left corner of to close the Layers window.








Note: The data in the drawing is according to the default definitionsof 'Survey format' working mode, which was defined prior to the

Survey Plan creation (in prototype project).

16. To change the drawing scale, in 'Topography Planes' menu, click the

'Options' button . 'Options' window will open.Click the Scale button and select the scale from the list.

Note: To change the data display in the drawing, see last paragraph(on page 93).








17. In order to export the Survey Plan to Layout, from

'Topography Planes' menu, click the 'Create Plan Layout' button .18. CivilCAD will create a Layout in AutoCAD by the name: 'SurveyA4'.19. Double click on the Header. An Attribute window will open.

Define the details, e.g.: Plan Number, Owner's Name, Location, etc.20. Double click on the Footer. An Attribute window will open.

Define the details, e.g.: Surveyed By, Prepared By, Checked By, etc.

21. In order to move the plan in the layout, double click on the layout withinthe plane's area. A border will be displayed. Use AutoCAD 'Pan' button

to move and locate the plane in the layout.22. If, the scale was changed while moving the plane, in AutoCAD click the

'Viewport Scale' button (located under the layout window (on thebottom right side) and select the scale from the list (1:250 ; 1:500 ;1:1000).








23. For printing the Layout, right click on the 'SurveyA4' Layout Tab andselect the 'Plot' option.

24. In the 'Plot' window, define the printer's name and make sure that thepaper size is changed from 'ISO A4 (210.00 x 297.00 MM)' to 'A4'.








25. You can click the 'Preview' button to see the layout before printing.26. Click the 'OK' button to print.








27. To change the data display in the drawing, in 'Topography Planes'

menu, click the 'Options' button . 'Options' window will open.

Define the plane'sborders display – double lines withoffset or singlelines

Define theunits display

Define theaccuracy afterthe decimalperiod

Define the displayof the plane'sbordercoordinates

Define the trimmingof the plane'sborder with thecorner circles

Define the anglesdisplay – separatedor joined, outside orinside the plane'sborders

Define the display ofNames/Area/Perimeter/Distances inside oroutside, top or bottom theplane's border








Chapter 7: Computations

of earthworks volumesusing planes








Volumes computations using planes

This chapter and the one following, will deal with the two methods of computingEarthworks. Another way to calculate Earthworks that is not discussed in thesechapters, is using the sections method, which will be elaborated in chapters:“Earthworks on Roads” and “Roads Design”.

We will now explain briefly the principle difference between both our methodspresented in this chapter and the following chapter:

Computation volumes using planes – this method allows you todivide the work area into planes (see planes definition next), according

to your own personal design division method. When studying thismethod, you will learn what a plane is, how to define a plane, along withdefining a slope and the computation of dibbling lines.

Volumes computation using the model to model system – usingthis method you can compute the quantities by dressing the designedground level (a designed ground level can also be the status afteractivation) on the existing ground level, and computation quantityintervals between the two layers.

As a rule, in both cases you can receive a detailed report in which the project

area will be divided into a grid for computing volumes according to our definition,as the volumes grid will be “set” on the drawing .

Defining topography status

To begin working, you must prepare a design of the existing topography. You willfind samples and methods on how to prepare an existing ground level topographydesign in chapter “Road Plann ing – preparation of settings”. In this chapter you willfind more methods:

We will now discuss the full list of commands that must be followed in order tocompute Earthworks using planes division. This explanation will include all thesteps (from starting a new project to receiving an Earthworks quantity report), andmight repeat some topics discussed in previous chapters. It is recommended toread this chapter thoroughly and follow the instructions step-by-step in order toavoid mistakes and repetition.

Opening a project –To keep things simple, open a new project, nameit ‘test’ and save it in the CivilCAD/ directory. (Saving in the /CivilCADdirectory is usually not recommended. It is both more convenient andorderly to open a new directory for each project.) From the main menu

open : File -> New Project . You will see a ‘New Project’ files dialogbox. Click in the project name ‘test’ in the empty line situated left to the








“file name” and click ‘Enter’. The program will transfer you to the newproject environment (you can see this by the new blue heading that willappear at the top of the page and will include the library and the newproject name you are currently working on (for example: C:\ProgramFiles\CivilCAD\Test).

Creating/importing a coordinator file – existing status. In thefollowing example, two methods on how to prepare an existing groundlevel will be detailed:

1. Type the coordinates2. Import an external file(note - it is possible to fully combine the two methods).

1. Typing the CoordinatesBring the text cursor to the points editing line (the empty line is exactlyunder the blue label: ‘Topography Coordinates’ at the bottom of the screen.Remember: to bring the text cursor to the line, point on it with your mouseand single mouse click). Type the following coordinates list :

01.05 1 1 0 00. 1 011 0 011 011 00.5 011 1 0 .5 51 51 C1

Arrange the points in the columns: click on the arrange columns button inthe (left top button from the list of buttons at the bottom of the screen).

Refresh the drawing by clicking .

2. Reading an External Coordinates File

As promised, it is possible to import an external coordinates file in ASCIIformat. On this file must be a simple text file (as files with a .reg typeending, text files with .txt type endings, .pin type files etc.). The programcan read any type of ASCII file format but in order to work with it, you willhave to edit the file after reading it (in order to get the existing status). Theprogram supplies strong work tools for dealing with ASCII files (reductionof columns, addition of characters etc.), in order to enable compatibility toall files types existing in the market.

In this chapter we will not be discussing these options, only mention that atthe end we must work with ASCII file format : elevation x y name/pointnumber. Note- elevation is not necessary.

Click on ‘Load’ ( ): to open the dialog box – ‘Load from text file’. Nowyou must tell the program the name of the file you wish to import. In the








sample before you, you can exercise on a coordinates file from a differentproject that exists in your computer (example project that was installed withthe program). Enter the ‘Samples’ directory and choose file Sample 7.Tco.

In Windows XP OS the default location is:C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ApplicationData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Samples\Sample7\

In Windows Vista or Windows 7/8 OS the default location is:C:\ProgramData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Samples\Sample7\

Building the existing ground level – You will now be instructed how to buildan existing topography design that will serve as a working background. Forthis purpose you will need to build contour lines from the topography pointsat hand. From the main menu choose: ‘Topography -> Cont ours’. On theright side of the screen, in the work board area, a contour lines drawingwindow will appear. Since we are practicing working in optimal conditionswith only minimum commands, all you need to do in order to draw thecontour lines is to click ‘Apply”. The program will compute and draw thecontour lines.

We have now finished preparing the existing ground level topography.

Defining designed planes After having learned to prepare the existing topography, you can proceedto defining the designed planes.

CivilCAD 2014 stores two lists of coordinates for each project – the existingstatus list of coordinates, and the design status list. At the bottom windowappears the list of points for the existing topography status. By choosing‘Design -> Coor dinates’ from the main menu, you can transfer to viewingthe designed status list of points. In order to return and watch the existingstatus points list, choose – ‘Topography -> Coordinates’.

1. Transfer to designed coordinates list (‘Design -> Coordinat es’), and clickthe following points:

001 D1001 13 D20.1 0 0.1 0.1 1 3 0.1 13 .

2. Space the column coordinates using the ‘ Reorder ’ button .








3. Click to refresh the drawing.

Defining planes – Before we start to define the planes in the project, wewill talk about the definition of a plane. We will distinguish between twotypes of planes :

A plane that has been defined by border points will be a closedshape of any kind. The plane ground level will be computed only by itsborder points (meaning that if there are additional points within theshape, after defining the shape, the program will ignore these pointsand build the plane only by its border points).

A plane that is a base line and slope is defined by the two points that

are the base slope and the slope ratio (1:2, 1:3 and so on) for cut andfill. The plane will be built automatically up to the dibbling line andground.

In our example we will make use of two methods, but instead of defining aseparate base line and slope for each area, we will order the program tobuild us a “ continues slope” for all areas at one time (this will be madeclearer later on).

1. From the main menu activate : ‘Design ->Planes’. In theright screen a ‘designed planes’ w ill appear. Since no planeswere defined previously, the program had automaticallyopened a new plane, giving it the name ‘1’. This plane willappear in the planes list at the bottom of the designedplanes window, and its definition will appear at the upperside of this window (see: plane name). We will continue tothe definition of the plane.

2. Defining the first plane (1 in our example): using yourmouse – move the work status from the status list (a list inthe designed planes window that contains 3 positions), from‘unused’ status to ‘locate’ by pointing your mouse to theword ‘locate’ from the list. Move your mouse to the planedrawing area and choose point ‘1’. Continue to choose thefollowing points according to this order: D1, D2, 2. Whenyou finish c hoosing the points, click ‘ C' in AutoCADCommand Line ('C'= Close). The program will close theplane for the first point that was chosen.

3. Opening and defining a new plane – In order to define the

second plane, you must first open it. Click on from ther ight window. A new plane, labeled ‘2’, will be added to theplanes list, and its definition will appear at the top’ designed








planes’ window. Define the new plane by these points: 2, 3,4, D2.

4. Refresh the drawing – Click the button above thedrawing. The drawing will be refreshed the planes nameswill appear on it.

*Note: “Refreshing” is not mandatory at this present stage. In ourexample we used it to emphasize the importance of this buttonthat actually “reorganizes” our drawing for us.

No marginal slopes were defines for the planes in this chapter, so they willbe built vertically. In the next chapter we will show how to define planes

that will carry the borders up to the dibbling line.

More options from the ‘Designed planes' window

Top Window allows activity on the specific plane at hand:

Locating the plane points from the bottom list of designed points

– button click this button, to locate the all the designed points in thein the current plane. These points will be marked so they can be editedand changed using the various – ‘Block’ commands.

Erasing a point from the list of points that define the plane – markthe point you wish to delete and press .

From the bottom window options you can work on all planes:

Reading plane files – use the button to open the file dialog box.You can choose between .dpl type files and .tpl type files that areplanes files created by CivilCAD 2014 and Lot files. This option isuseful for transferring planes files that were created in a surveyingsetting of a particular project, onto a new surveying background in anew project. Please notice that in addition to the .dpl type file thatshould be read from the other project, the designed points list file(.dco), should also be read into the designed coordinates list window atthe bottom.

Deleting a plane/groups of planes – mark the desired plane/group of

planes and click on the erase button - . After a warning confirmationthe files will be deleted.








Locating a plane in the drawing – in order to locate a plane in thedrawing, mark the plane you want and click the button. The marked

plane will be located and its borders painted in yellow. To remove themarking click .

Re-building the planes – button with picture of wall – it is possible thata group of planes had been lowered or elevated, by changing theelevation of the border points that have created them. In this case, after

clicking , the program will automatically change the plane elevationaccording to elevation points that were changed. However, in placeswhere elevated planes were created and defined as base line andslope, the program must again compute the dibbling lines of those

planes. This is not done automatically (meaning after you click ). Toactivate this option, you must click on the present button. The programwill notify when this procedure has been completed. After confirmation,all planes will be re-built, including all slopes according to the newdibbling lines.

Filtering planes with their names from DWG file - click button.‘Filtering ’ wintow will open on the right side of the screen.Click ‘Select’

button . S elect planes’ layer from the drawing and click ‘Enter’.The layer and its entity will be marked in the right window relevanttables.

To filter planes names from DWG file, click on button. The windowon Notice that the right has changed to ‘Options’ window. Mark ‘V’ in ‘Scan planes names’ and select the planes names layerfrom the list.

Click OK to return to ‘Filtering’ window and ‘Apply’ to run filteroperation.When filter operation is finished a message window will appear: ‘Xplanes were filtered’. Click OK. Notice that the right window has changed to ‘Design planes’ window. Click ‘Apply’ to build planes and update drawing.

Finding a plane in planes list – click on button. Enter plane’sname and click OK. You can also find a plane by clicking ‘Find’ fromright window status box and click inside plane’s area on drawing. The plane will be marked in blue in planes list.








Defining slopes

In this chapter we will show how to define slopes according to base lineand slope definition. When joined with planes that have been defined byborder points, these planes can serve as slopes for closing up to thedibbling point.

The explanation in this chapter relies on the example from the previoussection –“Defining Designed Planes”.

Create Continuous slope Click on the ‘continuous slope’ button – the button from the right

. The secondary “continuous slope” window will open, enabling todefine a continuous slope.

Enter the “slope in ‘cut’ area and in ‘fill’ area” – bring the cursor tothe field with the lettering “S1. Cut 1:”, and enter the cut (insert “3” forthe example). Click ‘Enter’ and the cursor will move to the box on theright for defining the fill: “S1. Fill 1:”. Click 2.

Transfer the status table from the ‘continuous slope’ to ‘Locate’position and mark the points that define the slope according to thefollowing order:D1, D2, 4, 3, 2, 1 and close to 1. Please notice that unlike the definingof a plane according to border points, you will have to go back andclose point 1. When you have finished choosing the points, click ‘ S' (for'Set') in AutoCAD Command Line.

Click to refresh the drawing.

Create line slope

Click on the ‘ Create line slope’ butto n . The option 'Select plane' will appear at the command line.

Select the desired plane by clicking inside the plane's area. The plane'sborder will be marked in yellow.

The option 'Select side' will appear at the command line.

Click on the drawing, outside the plane's area.

Type the desired slope at the command line and click 'Enter'.

The software will create slope on the selected side.

Build corners slopes - click on 'Locate' , mark the corner's

points and click on the 'Rebuild' button .








Changing plane characteristicsOnce you define the designed planes and refresh the drawing (R button),the names of all the planes will appear on the drawing. CivilCAD 2014 canadd many data fields in addition to name such as, cut volume, fill volume,area and so on. This chapter will discuss the Status Index options ofdesigned planes.

The explanation in this chapter relies on the example introduced earlier inthis chapter, in the section –“Volume Calculations Using Planes”.

1. Mark the planes that you want to change in the ‘planes list’ fromthe right window . To mark a group of planes, click on the first,scroll the list to the last plane of your choice, hold the ‘shift’button and mark.

2. Go into the plane's options using the ‘options button - . Theoptions window will appear. Any change in the options will affectall the planes marked in the “planes list”.

Options from the options window:

Font size - Scale – to change the plane font size (plane name,quantities, etc.), click on the little arrow to the right of ‘Default’ in theScale field. Chose the desired font size from the list that will open. (Toview/edit the scales list activate: File->Configuration, press on thedrawing environment tab and click on 'system scale' button)Color Area – Fill color + Solid – If you want to color the marked area,you must first mark it as ‘Solid’. Afterwards you can choose the coloryou wish to fill the area by clicking the color square next to the label ‘fillcolor’. Choose the color you want from the window that opens. Cut volume – Show the plan’s cut volume. For the program tocalculate the cut volume of a certain plain, each of its border pointsmust have elevation (in a base line and slope plane, this conditionexists from the very definition of a plane).Fill volume – Show t he plane’s fill volume. Area – Show the plane’s area. Perimeter - Show the plane’s perimeter. Distances - Show the plane’s perimeter distances. Show contours - Draw the contours of the designed plane. Theintervals between the contour lines are the same as those in theIntervals field in the designed contours window.Names – The names of planes border points. Please note thatCivilCAD 2014 creates a layer of border points already as part of the








designed points. The presentation of point names in this option willcreate them in the plane’s data layer, positioning the writing in aconvenient and easy-to-read place.Elevations – The designed elevations of the plane’s border points. Circled – Drawing circles around the plane’s border points. Topo. Elevations – Elevation of existing topography status borderpoints. The elevation will be will be computed in interpolation from thecontour lines.Height intervals – Presentation of elevation intervals between existingtopography status to designed border points status.Coor_ borders – Presentation of border points coordinates.Location – The location of the labeling next to the border points. Oneof the biggest problems that occurs when you show the border point’sdata on a drawing (elevation interval, designated elevation, currentelevation, etc.), is the excess of information. Most often, since oneborder point belongs to one or more planes, and has a differentelevation in each (and for the most part, different intervals), the labelswill overlap. In order to solve this problem, define a different location foreach of the data labels:Top – Inserting the elevation name above the point.Inside - Inserting the elevation name inside the plane to which itbelongs. If you choose –“inside” for joint elevations and a scal e that isnot too big, the data will be inserted into the planes without overlapping.

After you have chosen the desired planes definitions, click ‘OK’ to close theoptions window and Apply on the planes window from the right. Theprogram will present the data on the drawing in the relevant locations.

Clear unused plane's names from coordinates list - . Aftererasing a plane from planes list, click this button to erase unusedplanes coordinates from coordinates list.

Update current plane - . When designing a largenumber of planes, use this option to update planes without performing

3D model. Changes will appear on screen but 3D model of planes with the newchanges will not be built.Note : earthworks will be calculated according to the last 3D modelperformed.

Update all planes - . After designing a large number ofplanes, use this option to build planes 3D model. Changes will appear on screen and 3d model of planes with the newchanges will be built.

Sort - . Click this button to sort planes list by name automatically.








Order planes list - . Select the desired plane from planes list andclick 'Up' arrow or 'Down' arrow to move the plane up or down in thePlanes list.

Add Height To Current Plane - . Click this button. 1. Select the plane by clicking inside its area. The plane's border will be

marked in Yellow.

2. At the command line, type the height and click 'Enter'.

Define Planes Height By Line & Slope

1. Click the ‘Add height to current plane’ button.

2. In AutoCAD Command line, you will be asked to select a plane.

3. Click using the left mouse button inside the plane on the drawing. Theplane’s contour will be marked in yellow.

4. In AutoCAD Command line, type ‘S’ for ‘Slope’ and hit ‘Enter’ button.

5. In AutoCAD Command line, you will be asked to select a side.

6. Click using the left mouse button inside the plane close to the sidewhere you want the slope to begin from.

7. In AutoCAD Command line, you will be asked to enter height for thefirst point.

8. Type the height for the first point (clockwise).

9. In AutoCAD Command line, you will be asked to enter height for thesecond point.

10. Type the height for the second point (clockwise).

11. In AutoCAD Command line, you will be asked to enter the slope.

12. Type the desired slope (%) and hit ‘Enter’ button.

13. CivilCAD will calculate the planes heights in each vertex according todefinitions.

14. Click ‘Apply’ button to build the 3D model of the plane.

Note: The heights will be calculated in perpendicular to the side of theplane which was selected.

The heights will be added to the plane's corners according to the slope.








The Height will be calculated perpendicular to the selected line forthe slope to start from.

Design planes with corner radius

1. From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Design Planes’.

2. Select the polyline of the plane and hit the ‘Enter’ button. The planeshould have a corner radius in one or more of its corners.

3. ‘Arc Segmentation’ window will be opened.

4. Define the segment’s length (in meters) and click the ‘OK’ button.

5. CivilCAD will create the plane and divide the radius to segments.

Calculate plane’s heights according to 3 points(with heights)

1. From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Design Planes’.

2. Design a plane a click the ‘Apply’ button to build 3D model of theplane.

3. Click the ‘Add height to current plane’ button.

4. In AutoCAD Command line, you will be asked to select a plane.5. Click using the left mouse button inside the plane on the drawing. The

plane’s contour will be marked in yellow.

6. In AutoCAD Command line, type ‘C’ for ‘Calculate Heights by 3 Points’ and hit ‘Enter’ butto n.

7. In AutoCAD Command line, you will be asked to mark the first point.

8. Click using the left mouse button on one of the plane’s vertex (withheight).

9. In AutoCAD Command line, you will be asked to mark the secondpoint.








10. Click using the left mouse button on o ne of the plane’s vertex (withheight).

11. In AutoCAD Command line, you will be asked to mark the third point.

12. Click again using the left mouse button on one of the plane’s vertex(with height).

13. CivilCAD will calculate the plane’s heights according to these 3 points.

14. Click ‘Apply’ button to build 3D model of the plane.

Summarizing table

In section “Volumes computations using planes”, we have explained howto define designed planes. At the final stage of the planes definitionprocess, you will receive the cut and fill volume quantities summarizingtable.

Use the example from chapter “Volume computations using planes” andapply in to this section:

1. From the main menu go to – Earthworks --> Designed planes, fromthe right side of the screen the ‘Designed Planes Earthwork” windowwill open.

2. Check ‘v’ next to the ‘full report’ option and click Apply. TheEarthworks report will appear. The report will include a summarizingtable with the list of all the planes that were defined in the project,including slopes. For each plane the following data will appear – cutvolume, fill volume, cut area, fill area, the entire area and perimeter.To scroll the report, use the arrows from the right. You will getdetails on the coordinates that define each and every plane.

3. P lease note that the ‘full report’ mark introduces a full report thatincludes the detailing of planes data but does not include thesummarizing report.

4. Print the report by clicking the ‘print’ button at the bottom. In theprint window that opens, define the parameters you want and click‘continue’.

5. We will now go over the options for this window:

Plane’s list – This list will contain all the designed planes in the projectwith the addition of the ‘Total’ line. When the window opens, all the








planes will be marked automatically including ‘total’. When you click‘Apply’ to get the report, the data will be computed for all the markedplanes. If you wish to present only some of the planes in the report,mark the ones you wish to display. The word ‘Total’ sig nifies that inaddition to the chosen planes data, the summarizing/full report willinclude a total line.

dH - The height interval field allows a quick and easy leveling ofEarthworks. With the help of this field it is possible to know theEarthworks height, had you changed the height of all designed planesby a certain interval. Insert the desired height interval in this field, inmeters, and click ‘ Apply. The new report that will appear will be basedon the original designed elevation in addition to the height intervals thatwere inserted. This makes it easy to get quantity estimations for thedifferent elevations, and after you have attained the proper elevation,you can go back and manually change the designed elevation in theplanes as you see fit.

Note - To lower the elevation insert a negative height interval.

Setting the desired report data:Cut vol -1 The cut volume in planes.Fill vol -1 The fill volume in planes.Area - Plane Area.Cut area - The cut planes.

Fill area- The fill planes area.Perimeter - The planes perimeter.

Full report – A detailed report of the planes (in addition to thesummarizing table).Scale – The font size of the quantity report, for when the report isadded on the drawing (see button – “adding report onto drawing”).Caption -The title of the report received. To change the title in thereport erase the title “Planes earthworks” and insert the new title. Note:this option exists only for reports in English.

Adding the report to the drawing – . To activate click this button,move to the drawing area and choose the desired location for thereport:

Stand alone users only – position the report where you want itto appear and click your mouse. The report will appear in thelocation of your choice.AutoCAD users – position the report and click your mouse. Atemporary yellow frame will appear in the location you chose. Ifyou wish to change the location of the report, choose a newlocation and mouse click again. After you choosing, insert “S”

(option ‘Set’) in the AutoCAD command l ine. The report willappear in the desired location.








Elaboration: designed elevation of planes

During this chapter, in the “Defining designed planes” section, we haveshown how to define designed planes in the program. We have insertedthe elevat ions definition to the plane’s points as part of the coordinate of

the point, in the ‘designed coordinates’ list. Each time you click on ,CivilCAD goes through all the designed planes and updates the plane’selevations points according to the bottom list. This means that if you wantto change the elevation of a designed plane, change it in the points list and

click on . The elevation change will be inserted automatically into the

plane’s point definition, so that if you point on a plane from the ‘planes list’in order to view it in the upper side of the planes window, you will see thatthe elevation of the point has been updated. One of the main problemsoccurs when a certain point has more than one elevation. When a point is

joint to more than one plane, this creates a problem. One solution iscreating a new point with a new name, at the same location as the existingpoint, and define it for the new plane. There is also another solution.

Defining an elevation for a point can be done by these two methods:1. Inserting the elevation, as was demonstrated , as part of the

coordinate of the point in the list of designed points.2. Inserting elevation to a point in the plane itself . To define

elevation in the plane itself, choose the desired point in the planefrom the list of the plane’s point list in the right window. The pointwill be transferred to the head of the window, to the editing line, andthe cursor will be located exactly in the elevation field. Insert thenew elevation and click ‘Enter’. After the change click on the ‘ Apply'button.

Please notice this important rule : If a point has elevation in the list of‘designed coordinates’ (bottom list), then the elevation is the one that“counts”. This means that even if you change this elevation in the point

definition of the plane, after clicking on , the elevation from the bottomlist will return and erase the inserted elevation. In order to insert elevationto a point using method 2 (in the plane definition itself), you will first haveto first erase the ele vation of the point from the ‘Designed coordinates’ list,and only then change it in the plane itself.








Chapter 8: Computation ofearthworks volumes using

the model-to-modelsystem








Computation of earthworks volumes using themodel-to-model system

In the last chapter we discussed the computation of volumes by divisioninto planes. This method of quantity computation is typical of an area thatunderwent homogenous development work such as ground leveling,parcellation division etc. The part of the chapter discusses quantitycomputations on the entire work area. The advantage of this method is thatis compatible with all area types. Its disadvantage in comparison to the firstmethod, is that it is harder and less convenient to control when applied tothe above-mentioned areas (parceling etc.).

We shall demonstrate the computation method in this chapter using anexample. In this example, we will briefly cover the basic line of operationsfor a standard project, and will go into detail on subjects connected toquantity computations. The computation steps are as follows:

1. Open a new project2. Input the data for the existing topography – define “existing

topography” as the topography area before it was changed.3. Compute the contour lines of the existing topography.4. Input the data for the designed topography – define “designed

topography” as the status of the area after it was changed. 5. Process the designed data and define the computation area/ and

the areas that are not for computation.6. Compute the contour lines designed topography status.7. Produce a report and detailing of the Earthwork quantity.








Preparing a model of the existing topography

Preparing the contour lines of the topography for the purpose of computingquantities is identical to the preparation of contour lines, described inchapter 4: “Creating Contour lines”. We shall review the steps briefly:

1. Open up a new project.2. Type in the following list of coordinates into the coordinate table in

the bottom, “Topography Coordinates” window:

00 1 1 0 12.5 011 1

0 . 011 011 01 1 011 05.7 51 51 5 0 . 7. 5 5 2 00.5 01 01 7 00.7 01 1 00. 1.5 00

These coordinates will constitute an existing Topography status, i.e. the

topography area before it was changed. When you have finished typing thelist, click on to present it in the drawing.

Note : the example used here uses manual data typing. In order to read the

measurement data from the file, click on the ‘files open’ button , andselect the desired file (see example in chapter “Creating Contour Lines”).

3. Computation of contour linesFrom the main menu, go to Topography -> Contours. On the rightside of the screen, the ‘Topography Contours’ window will open.Click OK to compute contour lines. Since the spaces betweencontour lines have not been defined, they will be selectedautomatically and will be set to 1 meter (for space definitions seechapter 4)

At this stage, the three-dimensional model which will be used as abasis for volumes computation has been prepared. This mode willbe computed in triangles interpolation.

You can see the interpolation elevations by bringing the cursor to

the drawing area and clicking the left mouse button. The existingelevation of the cursor position will appear at the bottom of the








window, near the Height_T label. Please notice the Height_D label,showing the designed elevation (if available).Note AutoCAD users- to get the existing elevation, please press the

Pick height ( ) button (located in CivilCAD 2014 standard toolbar),go to the drawing area and click to receive the elevation of thecursor position.

By clicking your mouse button in different areas of the drawing, youcan know precisely where the designed model was computed, evenif the drawing layer of the designed contour lines was frozen, erasedor more simply there were no designed contour lines in the area (i.e.a plateau). All you have to do is move on the drawing, click yourmouse and locate the intervals between Height_T and Height_D.

4. Changing the color of the Existing Topography layer:For the sake of convenience, change the color of the existingtopography layers to light gray, so that it will seem as background.CivilCAD 2014 creates fixed layers to existing topography contourlines, and fixed layers for the designed topography contour lines.The contour lines layers of the existing topography will start at‘Topography Contours’ (for AutoCAD users, the names of theselayers will start at ‘Tcontours’).








Input of designed topography data/ or As Made

As mentioned above, we defined the as made data as the design data. Inthis part of the chapter, we will now show how to input the designed dataonto the existing topography.The example relies on the same example from an earlier section in thischapter “Computation of Earthworks Volumes Using the Model to ModelSystem”.

1. Go to Design -> Coordinates. The list of coordinates in the bottomwindow will change from ‘Topography Coordinates’ to ‘DesignedCoordinates’.

2. Type in the following list as designed coordinates:

Name East North Height1 51.66 78.79 14.152 71.13 66.72 15.013 62.90 45.29 14.944 85.94 39.29 12.725 69.21 22.01 13.422 77.71 14.06 12.517 48.64 11.87 12.35

8 22.59 23.39 13.59 11.34 40.39 12.28

01 20.67 67.82 13.8611 50.56 25.58 13.9812 56.32 36.55 14.9413 40.96 36.55 15.1014 46.45 30.52 14.5015 46.45 19.82 13.3002 59.34 21.19 13.44

After typing the list click on to refresh the draw and present the points.

CivilCAD 2014 manages two lists for each project: a list of points for theexisting topography and a list of coordinates for the designed topography.When CivilCAD 2014 is activated, it presents in the bottom window theexisting Topography list only (Topography Coordinates). You can browsefrom one list to the other by choosing between ‘To pography ->Coordinates’ and ‘Design -> Topography’ from the main menu. With eachselection, the bottom list will be replaced with the list of your choice.








Defining zones excluded from the earthworkscomputation

Often enough, you will come across areas on which you will notwant to perform volumes computations. In order to define theseareas, we will have to make sure that the CivilCAD 2014 does notcreate contour lines for them. The CivilCAD 2014 programcomputes volumes only for areas where there is an overlapbetween existing and designed contour lines (unless one of theareas is a plateau, and even then in the program will do thevolumes computations). The best way to define an area that isnot intended to undergo volume computations is to border it witha breakline that is defined as closed. It shall be noted that aclosed breakline can be defined both in the Existing and in theDesigned Topography, so that for every area defined by such aline, either in the Existing or in the Designed Topography (or inboth), the program will not perform volume computations.

Note : for a detailed explanation on defining a closed breakline,see “Creating Contour lines – breaklines/defining ranges to beexcluded from the contours computation”.

We shall continue with the example we have been using in thepresent chapter to explain the subject.

From the main menu toolbar, choose Design -> Lines. On theright, the Design-Lines window will appear.

Several methods for defining or choosing coordinates for definingbreaklines have been enumerated in this booklet. We shall useone of these methods:

Make sure that the text cursor (a blinking hook) is located within

the breaklines typing line. This is the empty line located underthe blue title ‘Designed Lines on the right sid e of the screen (ifthe text cursor is not within this line, you can bring it there byclicking the mouse cursor on the said line). Type in the followinglist: 3,5,16,15,11,14,13,12,3 (press ENTER after each number).

Since we wish a closed shape without contours, we will open theoptions window and define this line as closed. To open the

options window, click on button and mark "V" near thecaption 'Closed' in the opened window (below caption "Lines").Incertain situations, we may wish a closed breakline that willcontain the contours (and earthworks computation) . To do so,we'll close the form as we did earlier but this time, we won't








mark "V" near the caption 'Closed. To finish the line/shape

definition, click 'OK ' and in the right window click .

Defining zones that are included in theearthworks computation

The volumes computation area will include areas where there isan overlap between the Existing Topography contour lines, andthe Designed Topography contour lines. Defining the range of anexisting contour lines area is not highly important for computingvolumes. In contrast the defining a range of the designed contour

lines area is important and has to be done in a meticulousmanner. When running contour lines for a designed topographywithout defining the range, we run the risk of having the programperform interpolations we do not want. These interpolations willmainly be at the edges of the topography, since the programperforms interpolations between every two adjacent coordinates,even if they are far apart from each other, which sometimesleads to the creation of unwanted triangles (interpolationtriangles). There are 3 main methods that we can use in order toavoid creating such triangles. These 3 methods are activated in

the Design ->Contours window (activation from the main menutoolbar):

Defining a border with border coordinates – defining aprecise border by defining its perimeter, within which theprogram will create the designed contour lines.The ‘Fix Borders’ method – activating an automatic option,with which the program will minimize the designed contour lineborders to an optimum, set in a way that is not in the user’scontrol.The Max Interpolation Length method – defining a maximumdistance for interpolating between coordinates. After definingsuch a distance, the program will create interpolation trianglesonly between coordinates that are separated by a length shorterthan the one that has been defined.

For a detailed explanation of operating each of these methods,see “C reating contour lines - basic issues and defining the rangeof contour lines”.








Preparing a model of the designed topography

In principle, the process of creating contour lines for thedesigned topography is almost entirely identical to the process ofcreating contour lines for the existing topography, except for thescreens in which the process is carried out. The contour lines forthe designed topography can be created only on the backgroundof contour lines for an existing topography. CivilCAD 2014 willcreate these lines automatically in new layers for the existingtopography contours layers.

From the main menu toolbar, go to Design -> Coordinates . Onthe right-hand side, a contour line creation window will open.In the right-hand side window, click Apply . The program willcompute contour lines and will create them.

As explained, in the two previous parts of the chapter (“Definingzone to be excluded from the computation” and “Defining zone tobe excluded from the computation”), the same operations thatcan be performed on the designed contour lines, can beperformed on existing contours. All the operations having to dowith designed contour lines will be performed on the designed list

of coordinates, i.e. ‘Designed Coordinates’ (the contour lines of the existing topography are computed on the existing list ofcoordinates – ‘Topography Coordinates’), the breaklines will bedefined in the ‘Designed Lines’ window, and as mentioned above,the borders of the designed contour lines will be defined in the

‘Designed Contours’ window.

After computing the designed contour lines, the program createsa new three-dimensional model, in addition to the existingmodel. If we go in the drawing, to an area where both existing

contour lines and designed contour lines were computed (overlapareas), and click with the mouse button, we will be able to seetwo elevations for these areas. These elevations can be viewed inboth fields, Height_T for the existing and Height_D for thedesigned, which appear under the drawing window. AutoCADusers will use the ‘Pick Height’ option for carrying out this

process, as follows: Click on , located above the drawingwindow on the main toolbar, with a ‘v’. Go over to the drawingarea and click with the mouse on an area of contour linesoverlap. You will notice that the program presents theinterpolation in the Height_T and Height_D fields as explainedabove.








Volumes table – 'General Earthworks' window

In the course of this chapter, we followed the steps forperforming earthworks compu tations using the “model to model”system. Having finished the computation for the designedcontour lines, all that is left to do, is to obtain the sum of thequantity computations. In order to do so, we will open theGeneral Earthworks window. From the main menu toolbar, go toEarthworks General. On the right- hand side, a “GeneralEarthworks” window will open.

Computing general earthworks without a grid (“the exactmethod”) – in the window that has opened, click OK. Theprogram will compute the differences between the two layers(existing topography model and designed topography model), forthe entire project, and present a volumes report, which willinclude: cut volume, fill volume, cut area (approximately), fillarea (approximately).CivilCAD 2014 offers several methods forcomputing Earthworks (one of these methods, “the squares gridmethod”), will be explained shortly. Inevitably, there will bedifferences between these methods. It shall be noted that themethod that had just been presented (clicking OK in the window

with no prior definitions), is the most exact method, hence itsname. The problem with this method is lies in verifying thecomputation. This method does not allow for any follow-up of theway the quantities were computed (by the user), and this leadsto problems in presenting these quantities, for example, forinspection purposes.

The squares/quadrangular grid method – in the right-handwindow, mark with a ‘v’ the ‘Create Full Grid’ field. In the “Grid’ssteps” fields, type in X and Y th e spaces in the squares grid, in

the X direction and in the Y direction (default is 10x10). Click ‘OK’ in this window. The program will compute volumes for theentire project, using the squares method. The grid division willappear on the drawing, and in addition the program will create aquantities report in which the ‘cut’ and ‘fill’ volumes will bementioned for each square, intermediate sums for every 10squares, and the total concentrated quantities for the entireproject. Differences in result in calculation will exist if the boxnear caption "Create full grid" was marked or not. In order to getan accurate result when the “create full grid” box is marked, click

"V" near the caption “Use accurate system" (this caption will be








displayed only when "Create full grid" option is marked) and click"Apply"

Defining the volumes computation area – in the methodsthat we have just seen, the computation of quantities for theentire project was presented. In general, the computation areacan be defined by the designed contour lines area. However, inthe squares grid method, when computing quantities for theentire project, a grid will be created even in areas where there isno overlap between an existing topography and a designedtopography. The cut volume for these squares will be 0, andtherefore they will not affect the volume computations. Foraesthetical and convenience reasons, we may therefore prefer to

minimize the grid (which includes minimizing the accompanyingreport). In order to define an area for volume computations (bothfor the squares method and for the exact method), perform thefollowing steps:

- In the right-hand window, make sure you are using the desiredmethod (‘ Create full grid’ – marked for the squares grid methodor unmarked for the exact method).- Select ‘Pick’ in the check box on the right, go over to thedrawing area and define the borders for the desired area for

computation purposes. To complete defining the borders, click onthe “Set” button on the right (AutoCAD users can type in ‘S’ inthe commands line). AutoCAD users can define the computationborders by taking the following steps:

Draw a polyline that will define the computation area.Choose ‘Select’ from the check box on the right. Go over to the drawing area and select the polyline that you have drawn.

- Click Apply. The program will compute the volumes according tothe defined method within the selected area only.

Balancing quantities using the Add to design field – thisfield is intended mainly for Earthworks leveling in a designedproject. Such a project can be a water reservoir, designed planesor contour lines designed according to elevation points. This fieldcan be used by entering the desired elevation addition to theproject (in meters) and clicking OK. The program will computeand present a new report in which quantities will be computed sothat the project’s design is higher than the original design by theelevation that has been entered. To lower the project’s elevation,enter a negative addition (for example: “ - 1.05”). Using this








method of changing the designed height of the project, a levelingof earthworks can be easily obtained, without changing thephysical contours. Note: In the quantities report that is obtained,you will also see the ratio between the cut and the fill in theproject. This data allows for easier follow-up of the leveling thatwas obtained.

Stripping earthworks - Stripping depth – to computevolumes in a project that requires stripping of the work area,enter the stripping depth (in meters) in the cut area (Cut ar.),and in the fill area (Full ar.), and click ‘OK’. The program willrecompute the project volumes, and will present a report whichwill include earthworks quantities after taking into account the

depth of the stripping that has been entered, including thestripping volumes for ‘cut’ and ‘fill’.

Note : if there is no stripping in one of the areas (cut or ‘fill’),leave the desired field blank or enter “0”.

Presenting the quantities report on the drawing – topresent the quantities report on the drawing, perform thefollowing steps:First, produce a report in a regular manner by clicking OK.

Click on the button .Go over to the drawing area:

For Stand alone version : place the table in the desired area, and click withthe mouse. The program will create a layer for the report.For AutoCAD version : place the table in the desired area, and click withthe mouse. A yellow frame will appear in the place that is intended for thereport. If the placement is acceptable, enter “S” in the com mand line. If not,go back and place the table in the desired place. After clicking “S”, a layercontaining the desired report will be created.

Buttons appearing in this window and their functions:

Locating the computation borders – - clicking this button will locatethe volume computation borders and color them yellow. After clicking “R”(the big button on the right side of the drawing), these borders willdisappear. This way you can locate the borders of the volumescomputations which you have defined.

Erasing the computation borders – – after clicking this button, theprogram will warn you that it is about to erase the computation borders that








have been defined. After confirming this notice, if no new borders aredefined, the next set of computations will be made for the entire area of theproject.

Erasing a border coordinate – – highlight the point in the right-handwindow and click this button. The point will be erased from the list and thenew computation borders will be redefined. To confirm this action, click onthe “Set” button. Clicking OK will lead to a re -computation according to thenew borders. Using this function combined with the ‘Pick’ function, you canedit the volumes computation borders as desired. It shall be noted that inorder to modify the computation borders, it is possible to highlight one ofthe points in the points list on the right, click on ‘Pick’ once more and go tothe drawing area. The program will draw a line from the points to which you

were pointing, so that choosing new computation border points will beadded after the highlighted point.

Modifying the computation border for the entire project – – afterclicking this button, a warning notice will appear. After confirming thisnotice, the volume computation borders will be modified so that thecomputed area will be that of the entire project. This action is in effectidentical to the action of erasing drawing borders.

The Options button – window definitions for the general Earthworkswindow – this button will open the Definition window that is part of thegeneral earthworks window. For more options from this window, continuereading.

Options from the Status window (general earthworks definitionwindow):

Scale – setting the text size – in this field, you can define the text size inboth the volumes grid and the volumes report location in the drawing. Tomodify the presented size, click on the small arrow button on the right sideof the field, and re-select the size. The presented size is a factor. Witheach larger factor, the text size will be larger.

*Note: the text size will not change immediately. Click ‘OK’ to confirmthe change, and perform an additional computation (OK button) in themain window. To construct a new volume table, go back and repeatthe necessary steps.

Volumes – presenting volumes within the grid. For each square in thevolumes grid, the square number and its cut and fill volumes are

presented. Unchecking the ‘v’ from this field will remove the volumes








labeling within the drawing, and will leave only the square number. Thequantities report accompanying the drawing will not change.

Designed elevations – presenting the designed height in every corner ofthe grid. Unchecking the ‘v’ from this field will remove the presentation ofthis elevation.Brackets - Presenting the designed elevation in brackets.

Topo. Elevations – presenting the existing elevation in every corner of thegrid. Removing the ‘v’ from this field will remove the presentation of theexisting elevation.Barracks - Presenting the existing elevation in brackets.

Height intervals – presenting the heights intervals between the existingand the designed in the grid corners. Unchecking the ‘v’ from the field willremove the presentation of these intervals.








Chapter 9: Earthworks -additional issues








Earthworks - additional issues

In chapters “Volumes computations using planes” and “Volumescomputations using the Model-to- Model system”, two methods forcomputing Earthworks were taught:

Showing the quantities in a planes report – this method is possible onlywhen you are computing quantities by planes – for details see chapter 6“Volumes computations using planes – receiving a summary report”.

Showing the quantities in the exact method – this method is possible bothfor computation using the planes method, and the mode-to-model method.

For details see chapter 7 “Volumes computations using the Model -to-Model system – receiving the volumes table general Earthworks Window”.

Showing the quantities using a square grid – this method is possiblecomputation using both the planes method, and the mode-to-modelmethod. For details see chapter 7 “Volumes computations using theModel-to-Model system – receiving the volumes table general EarthworksWindow”.

This chapter introduces a number of issues connected with Earthworks

made possible by our program, and that have not been specified inprevious chapters:

Earthworks computations using triangles.Earthworks leveling grid.Earthworks contour lines (including the "0" line).

Earthworks computations using the trianglessystem

As a rule, computing Earthworks in the triangles system is possible onlywhen you compute volumes in the “Model to Model” system. This system enables the presenting of volumes computations in thedrawing, and is accompanied by a triangle interpolation report of thedesigned contour lines. We will go over the steps to operate this option:

Go back and compute the topography contour linesagainst the designed contour lines, as explained inchapter 7 “Computing Volu mes in the Model to ModelSystem”. After you finish preparing the designed

contour lines, continue to follow the instructions fromthis chapter (not in the original chapter).








After you have the original contour lines on theexisting contour lines, activate : ‘Earthworks ->Triangles’, from the main menu. The trianglescomputation window will open from the right.Click ‘OK’ from the window that opens. The programwill compute and show the triangle grid on thedrawing. For each triangle the program will show aserial number and the existing and designed heightinterval intervals at its edges. A report showing thearea and volume for ‘cut’ and ‘fill’ for each of thesetriangles, will accompany the drawing.

The triangle grid will be built on the basis of the contour lines and thedesigned breaklines. In each triangle corner, a triangle grid data of thedrawing layer will be received along with the designed elevation pointslayer.

Additional options from this window

1. Adding to the designed elevation – Add to design – in this field youcan enter an addition to the designed elevation (in meters), so thereport is computed according to this addition. To lower the elevation,enter a negative number (for example “ -1.05”). The advantage here isthe speed of operation – the program will not change the elevation of

the designed points in the project, but compute the quantities andpresent the report according to this change.

2. Stripping depth – to a project that has stripping in the work area. Enterthe stripping as depth (in meters), while separating to stripping depth‘cut’ area (Cut ar.) and stripping depth ‘fill’ area. Enter ‘0’ (or leave thefield empty) for the desired area, in a project in which there is strippingfor only one of its areas. The program will compute the quantitiesaccording to the stripping that was entered, as the stripping depth in‘cut’ will reduce from the cut quantity, and the stripping depth in ‘fill’ willadd to the fill quantity.

3. Adding the Volumes table to the drawing - – allows for addingthe volumes table in a desired place in the drawing. To operate followthese steps:

Note: These steps are possible only after computing a report as explainedin the beginning of the chapter, and producing an ordinary report. Go overthe following steps in order to position the report in the drawing:

Click on the button.

Move to the drawing area and position the table inthe desired location.








Users of Stand-Alone version – click with yourmouse to set the table in the drawing. The programwill create a layer of the report that will be saved aspart of the drawing.Users of AutoCAD – click with your mouse to setthe table. A yellow frame will appear on thedrawing, in which the table will be positioned. Tochoose a different location, move to the new areaand click again with your mouse. After choosingthe new location, enter “S” in the AutoCADcommand line. The yellow frames will be deleted,and the report will be positioned in the last chosenlocation.

4. Triangle grid display settings – the ‘Status’ button - - click thisbutton to open the triangle grid display window. More details onfunctions from this window are introduced below.

Options from the triangle display window (Status)

1. Scale – enlarging the font size – in this field you can define the textfont size both in the triangle grid and in the volumes report on thedrawing. To change the size that appears click on the small arrowbutton right of the field, and choose the new size. The numberspresented are a certain factor and as the factor grows, so will thefont size.

Note: The font size will not change immediately. Click ‘OK’ toconfirm the change, go back and compute (Apply button) from themain window. To build a new volumes report, go back and performthe proper function.

2. Designed elevations – Presenting the designed heights in thetriangles corners. Uncheck the ‘v’ from the field and remove thepresentation of these elevations.Brackets - Present the designed heights inbrackets.

3. Topo. Elevations - Presenting the elevations of the existing groundin the triangles corners. Uncheck the ‘v’ mark from this field toremove the presentation of these elevations.Brackets - Present the designed elevations inbrackets.

4. Height intervals – Presenting the difference between the designed

height t o the existing height in the triangle corners. Uncheck the ‘v’mark from this field to remove the presentation of these intervals.








5. Cancel/OK – confirm/cancel the changes from this window.

Earthworks leveling grid

The option for Earthworks computations in the balancing grid system ispossible for volumes computation in the “Planes system” and forcomputing volumes in the “Mode -to- model system”. This system allows forthe reception of a grid of volume squares, at desired spaces. Thecomputation and presentation system here is very similar to the volumecomputation method learned in chapter 7 “Computing Volumes using theModel-to-Model System – receiving a volumes table – general Earthworks

window”, but different in two major points:

1. The grid presentation.2. The Earthworks leveling grid can be made in any

desired direction, while the volume square grid can bemade only in the North direction.

We will now go over the steps for operating this option:

1. Return and perform all the steps in the quantity computations – in theplanes system, do the steps until you finish defining the designedplanes, and in the mode-to-model system, do the steps until you getthe designed contours.

2. After you have the designed contour lines on existing contour lines,(or designed pl anes on existing contour lines), go to ‘Earthworks ->Grid’ from the main menu. From the right hand window, the‘Earthworks leveling grid’ window will open.

3. In the ‘Grid steps’ field, enter the desired space in direction ‘X’ andthe desired space in dire ction ‘Y’ (the default is 10X10).

4. Defining the grid boundaries – the measurements of the window inwhich the grid will be made, will be defined by three points: two pointsthat will define the base window and a third point that will define itselevation. From the right window you will see the coordinates (X andY), of the coordinates grid three border points, with ‘Base first’ and‘Base second’ as the base points, and ‘End corner’ as the closingpoint. There are three methods to define the window grid:

Type in the points coordinates that define the grid in the followingfields.

Use ‘Pick’ – click on ‘Pick’ to move to the drawing area and mark(using a mouse click), the left bottom border point of the grid. Move








and mark the bottom right border point, to create the grid base line.Continue to mark the base line cross point with which you candefine the grid elevation (from this line). The points coordinates youhave defined will appear in the right window fields.

Using ‘Select’ for AutoCAD users only – first, transfer two lines in AutoCAD that will that will define the coordinates grid in thefollowing way: the first line will define the grid base line and thesecond line will define the grid elevation in relation to the base line.

After drawing the lines c hoose ‘Select’. Move to the drawing areaand choose the lines you have defined by the following order: firstthe baseline then the line that defines the grid height. The pointscoordinates that have been defined meaning the lines you chose,will appear in the right window.

5. Click ‘ Apply ’ from the right window. The program will create acoordinates grid by the existing definitions. The grid will be formedperpendicular to the baseline, as in each corner of the grid thetopography height and the designed height will appear along with thedifference between them (if design data is available at these points).Every square in the grid will be numbered in an ascending order, andin each square will appear the ‘cut’ and ‘fill’ volume. The grid will beaccompanied by a detailed report in which the ‘cut’ and ‘fill’ volumewill appear for every square, with a partial summary of thecomputation and an over-all summary of the computed volumes.*Note : This computation is been done according to the averagessum of the squares corners. To receive an accurate computationof each square, check the "Use accurate system" option thatappears in the window.

6. It is possible to calculate earthworks by defining a border whichvolumes will not be calculated within its area.In addition to picking 3 points option, earthworks can becalculated only on desired area by creating a border

around the area which will not be calculated (such asroad), and selecting the border.The area within the border will not be calculated.To use this feature:Create a border on the drawing by Polyline.From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Earthworks Grid'.On the upper right side of the window, click on ‘Select’and select the Polyline.








Note : If a border is selected, the Borders table will befilled with ‘Noname’ (red arrow) and the grid will becreated according to the 3 points but the area outsidethe border will not be calculated.If the border is not selected, the Borders table will be

filled with ‘Extents’ (blue arrow) and the grid will becreated only according to the 3 points, meaning thewhole area within the grid will be calculated.

At the middle right side of the window, click on ‘Pick’ tocreate 3 points or ‘Select’ to select the border for theearthworks calculation.

Note : the grid, made by 3 points (Pick option) orPolyline (Select option), must include the whole area forcalculation (including the border made by Polyline orPick option).If no border has been defined as a specific area to be

calculated, the calculation will include the whole areaaccording to the grid!









1. Creating a coordinates list of a rotated grid . This option is forreceiving a coordinates list of a certain grid when the baseline andgrid elevation are known. This option is very useful for computingthe grid coordinates, even with no relation to the Earthworks. Tocreate a coordinates list follow these steps:

Define the grid spaces as explained in at the top of section three.Define the desired grid borders for computing in one of thesystems detailed at the top, section 4.Click the blue ‘Topo’ button. The program will add to the existingcoordinates list, (the ‘Topography coordinates’ list in the bottomwindow), the coordinates grid points that were defined. To createpoints in the designed coordinates list, push the red button withthe ‘Design’ label.

Click the button to get the points list on the drawing.

2. Erasing grid definition fields – – clicking this button willclear the grid fields.

3. Define the grid borders for the entire project area – – clickthis button to enter the project borders as the border points of thegrid in its proper fields. Click ‘OK’ (or on one of the Topo/Designbuttons) to create the desired grid.

4. Stripping depth – stripping depth is made for a project withstripping in the work area. Enter the stripping as depth (in meters),while separating between the stripping depth and the cut area andbetween the stripping depth and the Fill area. Enter ‘0’ (or leavethe field empty) for the desired area, in a project which hasstripping for only one of its areas. The program will compute thequantities according to the stripping that was entered, as thestripping depth in ‘dig’ will reduce from the cut quantity, and thestripping depth in ‘fill’ wi ll add to the fill quantity.

5. Adding the Volumes table to the drawing – – this functionis for adding the volumes table in a desired location in thedrawing. To operate follow these steps:








Note: These steps are possible only after a computing the report, asexplained in the beginning of the chapter. After the regular report wasproduced, go over the next steps to position the report in the drawing.

Click on the button.Move to the drawing area and position the report in the desired place. Users of Stand-Alone – click with your mouse to set the table in thedrawing. The program will create a layer of the report that will be savedas part of the drawing.Users of AutoCAD – click with your mouse to set the table. A yellowframe will appear on the drawing, in which the table will be positioned.To choose a different position move to the new area and click againwith your mouse. After you have chosen the desired location, enter “S”in the AutoCAD command line. The yellow frames you had created willbe erased, and the report positioned in the last place that was chosen.

6. Defining a triangle grid display – - click this button to openthe triangle grid display window. More details on functions fromthis window are coming up.

A detailing of the triangle display window (Status):

1. Scale – setting the text size – in this field, you can define the textsize in both the volumes grid and the volumes report location in thedrawing. To modify the presented size, click on the small arrowbutton on the right side of the field, and re-select the size. Thepresented size is a factor. With each larger factor, the text size willbe larger. Note : the text size will not change immediately. Click ‘OK’to confirm the change, and perform an additional computation(Apply button) in the main window. To construct a new volume table,go back and repeat the steps from section 5 above.

2. Volumes – presenting volumes within the grid. For each square inthe volumes grid, the square number and its cut and fill volumes arepresented. Unche cking the ‘v’ from this field will remove thevolumes labeling within the drawing, and will leave only the squarenumber. The quantities report accompanying the drawing will notchange.

3. Designed elevations – presenting the designed height in everycorner of the grid. Unchecking the ‘v’ from this field will remove thepresentation of this elevation.Brackets - Presenting the designed elevation in brackets.

4. Topo. Elevations – presenting the existing elevation in everycorner of the grid.








Removing the ‘v’ from this field will remove the presentation of theexisting

elevation.- Brackets - Presenting the existing elevation in brackets.

5. Height intervals – presenting the heights intervals between theexisting and the designed in the grid corners. Unchecking the ‘v’ fromthe field will remove the presentation of these intervals.

Earthworks contour lines (including the “0” line)

The “0 line” is the line that separates the cut area from the fill area in thearea of the project. Presenting this line on the program allows clear

distinction between the different areas. The Earthworks contour lines arecontour lines + or – relative to the zero line. CivilCAD 2014 enables thedrawing of these lines in a project where Earthworks were computed in oneof these two methods – computing using planes, and computing using themodel-to-model system.We will go over the necessary steps for creating these lines:

1. Compute the Earthworks in one of these two existingsystems according to the steps detailed in chapters“Computing Volumes using Planes” and “Computing Volumesusing the Model-to- Model System”.

2. From the main menu go to ‘Earthworks -> Contours’. Fromthe right, the creating designed contour lines window willopen.

3. The contour lines intervals default in the window are 100meters (see ‘Intervals’ field). This implies that for any projectin which the elevation intervals between cut and fill are notover a 100 meters (and these are most of the projects), theprogram will create the zero line. Click ‘OK’ to receive theEarthworks contour lines. The contour lines will be computedand drawn in the new layer.

More functions from this window:

1. Changing the contour lines intervals so that additional Earthworkscontour lines are formed for the zero line – enter the desired intervalin the ‘Intervals’ field (for example 1 meter), and click ‘ Apply ’. Theprogram will create a new layer for the lines it had computed. Makesure the ‘0 line’ is kept in a separate layer.

2. ‘Auto Elevations’ labeling – the default of the program is automaticelevation labeling on the contour lines. Removing the ‘v’ from thisfield, will cancel this command. Use the ‘Pick’ command to manuallyadd elevation labeling.








3. Brackets for elevation labeling – this field is for presentingEarthworks contour lines in with brackets or without.

4. Elevation labeling format – format “#.##” – elevation labeling oncontour lines in a two digit format after the decimal point. Elevation“1” for example, will appear as “1.00”.

5. Emphasizing the zero line as a double line ‘Double d (0) – this optionwill cause the zero line to appear in bold.

6. Changing the elevation labeling font (Scale) – the elevation labelingfont on the contour line (size of text) is set by the factor appearing inthis field. Changing the factor to a bigger number will increase theelevation labeling size and the opposite – a smaller number willdecrease its size.

7. Manual elevation labeling on the contour line - ‘Pick’ – in order toadd contour lines labeling in the desired place in the drawing followthese steps:

- Mark the ‘Pick’ field - Move to the drawing area and draw a line that will cross the

contour lines at the desired location for elevation labeling.The program will add elevations at the cross points, between

theline that was drawn to the contour line. You can continue toadd elevations as you wish. To finish click ‘Esc’ from the

AutoCAD command line (in Stand-Alone version remove the‘V’ from the ‘Pick’ field).

Note: All the options mentioned above ( except ‘Pick’), require a new“running” of the Earthworks contour lines (and a new click on ‘ Apply ’) inorder to view the changes made.








Chapter 10: Quick sectionsand the 3D model








Quick sections

CivilCAD 2014 supports the creation of sections upon existing anddesigned ground, roads, and designed planes by marking two points thatare the two ends of the section on the plan. The advantage of this systemis that it is quick, and easy to operate. Its disadvantages are detailedbelow:

1. Accuracy of the system – The ground section performed by thissystem is computed differently from the computation of the groundsection in the cross sections or vertical alignment of the road(Roads menu). In this system the sections will be computed veryquickly, but not very accurately. While the sections in the roads

design, will be computed at a very high accuracy interpolation level(by millimeters), the cross sections in this system will be computedby approximately based on the parameter definitions of the project(for detail see chapter – “General Issues – changing the AccuracyModel”). The more accurate you are at defining the parameters, themore accurate are the sections you make using this system.

2. This system does not allow for the making of road sections, onlyplanes, or planes that have been computed using only the TwoModel System only.

3. This system only supports creating a section between two points.

We will now go over the steps required for a quick section:Note- To create a section, you must make, at least, existing contour lines.

1. Choose: Design-> Sections from the main menu. From the right,the quick section window. will open the

2. Use any one of these methods to make a section:Insert the section coordinates manually – in the X, and Y field of the‘First corner’ and ‘End corner’. Insert the coordinates of the two endpoints of the section (beginning and end) and click ‘ Apply'. Theprogram will show a section between these two points.Using Pick – Choose ‘pick’ from the list on the right. Move to thedrawing area and draw a line between the two points needed to makethe section. The program will show the section between these twopoints. For users of Stand alone version only, click ‘ Apply ’ to receivethe section.Using Locate – (for stand alone version only) – Choose ‘Locate’ fromthe list on the right. Move to the drawing area and choose the twopoints between which the section will be made. Click ‘ Apply ’ to receivethe section. The two points must be points that appear in thecoordinates list from the bo ttom window (or the ‘Topographycoordinates’ list or the ‘Designed coordinates’ list). This option allows(for users of Stand alone version only), the transference of a sectionbetween two given points unlike the use of the ‘pick’ option.








Using Select – (AutoCAD version) – Draw a line in AutoCAD that willbe the section you wish to see. Choose ‘Select’ from the window on theright and, move to the drawing area and choose the drawn line. Theprogram will show the section across this line.


1. Erasing the coordinate fields of the section edges – – Click on this button to erase the coordinates fields of thebeginning and end sections.

2. Adding elevation to points – ‘Pick Height’ – As part of thecreation of a section, CivilCAD 2014 creates a data report of

the existing status, designed status, and the (running)distance throughout the section. The elevations will bepresented in a running distance according to the elevationstatus window (see status next section). Elevations can beadded on to the section, graphically at the desired runningdistance, not including the elevations that the programcreated automatically.To add elevation to a section check “v” next to the ‘PickHeight’ field. Move to the area of the section and click yourmouse on the desired running distance. The program willadd the running distance that had been chosen automaticallyfrom the from the bottom data table, as well as in the‘Design’, ‘Exist’, and ‘Dist’ fields in the right window.

3. The ‘Status’ e levations labeling Window - – clickingthis button will open will open the elevations labeling statuswindow from the right. This window defines the automaticsettings for the elevations labeling on the drawing (asexplained in the previous paragraph, 2, it is possible to addthe labeling manually). The options from this window are:

Dibbling points – Elevations labeling names at the cross-points of theexisting and designed ground.Turning Points - Elevations labeling at points where there is a strongslope change in the ground (ground break points).Steps - Elevations labeling names at a fixed running distance. Theelevations will be written upon the section at running distances thatwere determined in the field.

4. Manual removal of elevations labeling – – click thisbutton to remove from the drawing all the manually inserted

elevations labeling using the ‘Pick height’ command.








5. Changing the color of the section layers – in the colorfields under the heading “color”, appear the different colorlayers o f the section. Click on the layer’s color square to openCivilCAD’s 2012 color window. Pick the color you want fromthe window and click ‘ Apply ’. The color of the layer willchange accordingly.

Activities in the drawing section window

1. Print section – – clicking on this button will open a windowon the right. Insert the scale for the ‘Height’ and ‘Long’ (width) ofthe section. To print click ‘OK’. The ‘Print Section’ window alsosupport these additional options:

Choosing a ‘New Origin’ for the section drawing – if youwish to print the section, not in the bottom left hand cornerof the page (new origin), you can set a new origin. Thenew axis origin will be given in meter units, relative to thescale of the drawing, in direction X and direction Y.

2. Creating a DXF file of the section – – clicking this buttonwill open the window on the right. Insert the scale for the ‘Height’and ‘Long’ (width) of the section and click ‘OK’. Enter the file

name of the section in the file window that opens and click

Three-dimensional model

During the computation of present status contour lines, CivilCAD 2014creates a 3D Model. The program uses this model to make the differentsections, the computations of Earthworks quantities, and also allowsreceipt of elevation at desirable points by choosing ‘Pick height’. Theprogram can store two models simultaneously for a single project, one forthe existing status and one for the designed status. In the situation ofdesigned contour lines, designed planes or any other form of design, theprogram will create a second model and “dress” it on the existing one.

The 3D Model allows the presentation of each of the models (existing anddesign) in 3D perspective.

1. To start this option, open ‘Design -> 3D view’, from the mainmenu. The 3D model presentation window will open from theright.

2. Click ‘OK’ from the right window. The program will compute themodel and present it on a separate window. Clicking on the leftmouse button from inside the drawing will bring it closer, whileright-clicking will move it further away. It is possible to use the








scroll- bar to scroll the drawing. Click ‘OK’ to present the entiredrawing.

More options using this window

1. Defining the area of Model Presentation as default - CivilCAD 2014presents a model of each area of the project. The coordinates ofthe area of the designated window for presentation appear in thefields- ‘First corner’ and ‘End corner’ in the right window. It ispossible to define a specific window in which the model will becomputed. For this you have these two options:

A manual change of the coordinates in the corners of the window.Define the coordinates range of the window, bottom left hand cornerand top right hand corner, and click ‘OK’. The model presented willbe according to the defined range.Marking the desired window upon the drawing – check “V” in the‘Windows’ field in the right window, and move to the drawing area.Choose a window, bottom left hand corner and top right handcorner. The program will update the coordinates at the right fields,and present the 3D model of the chosen window.

2. Returning the Boundaries to the entire area of the project – if theborders of the project have been changed, by Windows or

manually, you can return the project’s coordinates drawing limit s tothe fields by clicking on the ‘ Set ’ button.

3. ‘Height factor’ - in this field, you can decide on an elevation 3D-model distortion coefficient. The default of this field is the coefficient“1”. The more we enlarge the coefficient distortion, the more t hemodel will “stretch” perpendicularly. It situations where the heightintervals in the project are small, enlarging the coefficient will causedistortion of ground to elevation so that the height intervals will befelt more radically. After changing the coefficient click ‘OK’ to getthe new model.

4. Extrapolate borders – CivilCAD 2014 creates a rectangular model.When the model is not rectangular, the program completes theborders of the rectangle by extrapolation of elevations. This act is ofaesthetic importance, that might effect in a model that lacksaccuracy. To cancel the extrapolation uncheck the “v” mark andclick ‘OK’ again.

5. ‘Layer - exist/design’ - Switching between the existing and designedmodel. By default, the program presents the designed groundmodel. When there is no designed ground model (no design), the

program will show the existing ground status. If both models doexist in the project (exist and design), and you wish to view the








existing model, move the layer field in the window fro m ‘Design’ to‘Exist’, and click ‘OK’.

6. Viewing Direction - the program creates, by definition, a “frontal”viewing angle of the model. This direction is the bottom side of theproject. You can change the viewing angle in the model in one outof the following directions – front, right, rear, and left. Afterchanging this field, click ‘OK’ to get the updated drawing.








Chapter 11: Distomat datacomputations








Distomat data computations

This chapter discusses the way the computation of data observations(distances, angels) received from a Distomat tool. CivilCAD 2014 providesan easy-to-use flexible appliance for editing distomats data, makingchanges and various coordinations, and computing the coordinates filealong with a detailed traverse report.

The topics covered in this chapter are:

Activating the Distomat window.Stations shifting.

Traverse adjustment.Options window review.Input angles formats.Options from the Distomats data window

Appendix 1 – Least square traverse adjustment

Activating the Distomat window

To activate, open menu : Geometry Distomat data , from themain menu.

We will now perform a short exercise which will exemplify the use of thisoption:(start the exercise by opening a new project- File New project ).

1. Bring the cursor to the Points editing line in the Topographycoordinates (bottom window). The Distomat data window uses theexisting list of coordinates to compute the data. Enter the followingknown control points (Name East North Elevation Code):

CP10010001000ST1CP10010002000TRG0

Note: Enter the data with at least one space between each entry. TheCP code is used to define the point as a Control Point (known/ fixed).

2. Open Distomats data window by opening menu Geometry

Distomats window .3. Bring the cursor to the first line in the table and type the station

name and tool height like so : move to the forth column (under'Station' ) and enter ST1, move to the fifth column (under ‘Height’ )and type 1.5. As a rule, the first line will always be the station (there

is no significance to empty lines before the first line in the table).








4. Add another line by right clicking and choosing ‘New Line’ . Enterthe first observation – this point will serve as an orientation point(Backsight ). In the third column (under ‘Name’), click ‘TRG0’ and inthe forth column (under ‘Ho’), click 2500302.

Note : The meaning of this line is that point ‘TRG0’ is the orientation bydirection 2500302 – towards it. The horizontal angle (H) has beenentered as 2500302 with no spaces, commas, or points (more detailson angles format will be given in the next pages).In the Ve column enter 0951010 (vertical angle). In the Slope dist.Column enter 1005 – the sloped distance and in the Prism columnenter 1.6. When you finish click ‘Enter’.

5. Enter the continuation of the list in the following fashion:

1.5ST11.6100509510102500302TRG01.65009015150302101001.678.7609000002121010101

6. Click Apply button and you’ll get the following message:

7. Click OK . A calculations report will be displayed. The report willinclude the computed coordinates and the errors:

a.

We got a Max. Delta L error – a parameter which can be defined in theoptions window (see details in the next pages). The default is 0.1 m. Inour example the difference between the measured distance to the point(0.912 m – in horizontal distance) and the computed distance is largerthan 0.1 m, the software displays an error warning.

b. For the Traverse adjustment we got:

Errors have been found in thecom utations.

Error in DISTANCE check points: ST1 - TRG0 Max delta L = 0.100 Distances' difference = 0.912 .

Measured distance = 1000.912 . Computed distance = 1000.000

VTPV = No ad ustment








Note: The meaning of such message is that there is no traverse, thereis no closure, so it’s not possible to compute the adjustment (seeappendix 1 at the end of this chapter).

c. We got a detailed coordinates report – known and computed.

8. Close the ‘Distomat data’ window.

9. Click on the - - button to refresh the drawing and get the newcomputed points on the drawing.

10. Save the project as ‘Distomat1’.

Stations shifting

We’ll demonstrate how to move to the next station and continuing ourcoordinates computation from the new station. We’ll continu e the projectfrom the last chapter:

1. Open the ‘Distomat1’ project. Open window Geometry Distomatsdata

2. Let’s add some new observations. Add an empty line after the last

line in the table (by pressing ENTER or button). Type theinformation for point ST2 and press ENTER again to create anotherempty line.

3. complete the table as follows:

1.5ST11.6100509510102500302TRG01.65009015150302101001.678.7609000002121010101

100.508030400402015ST2

1.6ST21.6100.522050542204532ST11.625075210104022111031.649.25090053005003041041.685.5608010202100503105

Note : It’s obligatory to insert at least 1 empty line when shifting to thenext station.

4. Press Apply , then OK and Yes to All – that means that changeswere applied to the coordinates and we can overwrite the old ones.In addition to the former error we got the following message:

Error in MEASURED DISTANCES check points: ST1 - ST2

Max delta L = 0.100 Distances' difference = 1.375 . Measured distance ST1-ST2 = 99.125 . Measured distance ST2-ST1 = 100.500








We got a difference of 1.375m between the measured distancebetween ST1 to ST2 and the measured distance between ST2 to ST1(back measured distance)5. Close the report and the distomats data windows. Click Refresh to

view the new points in the drawing. Save the project.

Traverse adjustment

We’ll demonstrate how adjust a traverse. Let’s start with an open -fixedtraverse with 2 known (fixed) points at the start and 2 known (fixed) pointsat the end.

1. Open the sample project ‘Traverse -4CP.

In Windows XP OS the default location is:C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ApplicationData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Samples\Traverse-4CP\

In Windows Vista or Windows 7/8 OS the default location is:C:\ProgramData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Samples\Traverse-4CP\

2. Open Geometry->Distomats data 3. Pay attention to how the measurements are displayed (space line

when moving to the next station). Press Apply . We’ ll get thefollowing errors:

a.

The software located a traverse starting with 48R and ending

with 25R. We got this warning since the max bearing differencein our options is 0º00’10” and the bearings diference we got is0º00’45” (see a detailed descript ion of the options window in thenext pages).b. The next 2 warnings point out the linear difference in X and Y

axis in the same traverse (48R & 25R). Try to change thevalues of e(X) and e(Y) in the options window and see whathappens after pressing Apply.

c. The traverse iteration number equals to 3 and the VTPV is1.337851 (more details in appendix 1). We also got 2 reports

– traverse report for adjustment of all points with correction inangles, distances and error ellipse values (see details ahead)and computed points and stations report.

Error in BEARINGS DIFFERENCE check traverse: 48R - 25R Max bearings difference = 10.000 . Bearings difference = 0 ° 00’45”








4. Close the report and the distomats data windows. Click Refresh toview the new points in the drawing. Save the project.

In the next sample we’ll demonstrate on a closed-loop traverse with 2known (fixed) points at the start at the end (same 2 points).

1. Open project ‘Traverse_round_4CP.prj’ from the Samples folder.

2. Open Geometry Distomats data

3. Press Apply to get the computations report, but this time withoutany warnings.

4. Close the report window and open the Options window by

pressing the button. Change the ‘Max bearings difference’ to100 instead of 500 and close the options window. Press Apply again to re-compute the traverse. This time we got a warningerror. Click OK and ‘ Yes to all ’. The report shows the error ofbear ing difference of 0º2’19” which is larger than the max. valuewe defined – 100”.

5. Close the report window by pressing ‘Close’.

6. Open the traverse diagram window by pressing ‘ Preview

traverse diagram ’ button . Use the right and left mousebuttons to zoom in and out. Use the scrolling bars to move up/down and left/ right. The known points are displayed as redtriangles and the computed points are displayed with the errorellipse around them (see error ellipse chapter). It’s possibl e to

print the screen, or to save it as DXF file by pressing or .

In our last example we’ll demonstrate a case of a traverse whichcloses with only 1 known point at the end. The minimumrequirement for such traverse is measured direction and distancefrom the known station to this point (*):

- Known - Computed

)*(








We’ll use the same file from the last example ‘Traverse_4CP.prj’.We’ll delete the known point 25R from the Topography coordinateslist. In addition we’ll delete from the distomat data window all therows from the last station 24R till the end. Press Apply to get thecomplete report and computed points. To view the traverse diagram

click on .

Options window review

The options window defines all the parameters of the traverse adjustment

computations. Open the options window by pressing the button.

Working units – Angles - define the working units for angles by degrees orgrads. Grads angles can be used either with or without decimalpoint. Distances – Work either with meters or centimeters.

Traverse iteration – the number of iterations which the softwareruns in order to get the correct solution. Auto – the default value is 3iterations. When the user assume it’s possible to get a solution withmore than 3 iterations, it’s possible to change this value. Standard deviation

Bearings precision (STDD) – the standard deviation for the

direction. This value will be used to determine the weights of thebearings in the adjustment. The default value is 15”. Distances precision (STDL) – the standard deviation for thedistance. This value will be used to determine the weights of thedistances in the adjustment. The default value is 25mm.

Traverse miscolusre Max bearings difference – the maximum allowed difference forthe total bearings misclosure. The system will display a warningwhen the computed bearings difference is higher than thedefined (default value is 500”).

n

i

ni Az n Az 0

0 )1(180difference bearings i - the bearings in all the traverse stations.

n – the number of traverse stations.n

Az Az ,0 - the first and last azimuths.The software will continue the computation even if the result ishigher than the allowed, but will only display it.Max linear difference – the maximum allowed linear misclosurefor X and Y axis. The software will display a warning when thecomputed linear difference is higher than the defined. Default

value is 0.3m both for e(X) and e(Y).








Max. misclosure/ distance – the maximum allowed relativemisclosure (the total linear difference divided by the totaltraverse distance). Default value is 1/3000.

Face Right/ Left – Max epsilon – The software checks the difference betweenmeasurements of Face Right and measurements made withFace Left between each 2 points. The warning message willappear if the computed value is higher than the defined. Thedefault value is 100”. Max delta L – the software warns in the following cases:

When the difference between the computed and measureddistance between 2 known points is higher than the allowed(default value is 0.1 m).In every station an average of the distance measured to acertain station (x) is calculated. These distances includeseveral measurements in the same “face” or in both “faces”(left & right). The software will display a warning when thedifference between one of the measured distances to target xand the average distance is higher than the allowed value.When the difference between the measured distance (or theaverage of measured distances) from one point to anotherand the measured distance from the back side is higher thanthe allowed.

Max orient. difference – check of orientation in stations which fromthem a direction was measured to at least 2 known points. In thefirst phase, the azimuths will be calculated using the knowncoordinates. In the second phase, the bearings between themeasured orientation will be calculated. In the last phase, thebearings will be calculated using the azimnnuths from the firstphase. If the bearings difference is higher then allowed, a warningwill be displayed. The default value is 100”. Max height difference – check of heights difference between 2known points. The software will display a warning if the differencebetween the measured height and the known height is larger thanthe allowed (default value is 0.2m).

Report – a list of reports to display:Non computed points – the software will display a list of pointswhich could not be computed due to lack of information.Traverse adjustment – the adjustment report:

Full Report – the computation report will include thetopography points and adjustment, in addition to theadjustment of the known stations and points.Semi-major | semi-manor – displaying the error ellipseparameters: semi-manor axis, semi-major axis and theorientation angle of the semi-major axis.ΣY| ΣXY ΣX – Displaying the precision of the coordinates X,

Y and the covariance of them (see appendix 1). Poitns – The software will display the points report.








Display – Max distance – the maximum distance of a point to bedisplayed in the traverse diagram. If the distance between thepoints is above the defined (default value is 2000m) then thefar points will be displayed only schematically).

Input angle format

1. Working in Degrees: As a rule, both the horizontal and vertical angles will be in format:DDDMMSS, meaning: 3 digits for degrees, 2 digits for minutes, 2digits for seconds.

Examples: 1732010, 2122012, 53230, (meaning 5 degrees, 32minutes, and 30 seconds). The numbers will be entered with nospace, comma, or period between them. The two digits forminutes and seconds are mandatory, while only 1, 2, or 3 digitsmay be entered for the degrees. There is one exception to thisrule: In case less than 5 digits are entered (a total for all angles),the entered number will be read as degrees only (for example, ifyou type 173-it will be interpreted as exactly 173 degrees – 1730000). Therefore, entering zero is an option and it is notnecessary to type – 00000 ( it’s possible to type 0 only, instead of

00000).

2. Working in Grads:In grads the angles w ill be typed in a simple numerical manner. It’spossible to use the decimal point by choosing the ‘Decimal point’ fromthe options window.For example : 89.723, 135.231 – with decimal point

89723, 135231 – without decimal pointNote : Pay attention that working without decimal point, the software isreading the 4 most right digits as numbers before the decimal point.

Options from the Distomat Data window

1. Exporting the entire distomat table to an Excel file. Theprogram will open the Excel file (if installed) and automatically fill asheet with all the report data.

2. Load from text file – reading the data from a distomat data file – this option support reading a distomat data file in different formats.The file will be read and automatically translated to a format whichthe program is familiar with, so that it can be arranged in the

proper columns for processing, editing and computing.








It is possible to import data from these files formats:

(txt) – Text files(job) – Job files(dat/ gt7/ gts7) - Data files (Topcon GTS7)(gsi/gif) - Leica data tc300/tc700(gsi/gif) - Leica data tc1100(crd/sdr) – Sokkia data files(dat) – NTS600 data files

To set the format which the program uses during the reading of the file,activate ‘ File-> configuration ’ from the main menu. The ‘configuration’window will open from the right. In the ‘Save/Load from text file’ frame, youcan determine the type of format that will be used by the program.

(A reminder – In order to determine a format that will be used as a default byall projects, enter project ‘Prototype’ and change the name of this option).

Available formats:

Standard Ascii – Reading the format in its original form as it willappear without a change in every Dos editor.Geodimeter-Geotool – Reading from a job/are file that is readfrom a Geodimeter tool using the communication programGeotool.Pentax – Sc5/CMT Mc II (Kermit) – Reading a file that hasbeen transferred from the Sc5-collector data of a Pentax toolusing a Kermit program or any other similar program.Pentax-DC-1Z – Reading from a file that had been transferredfrom a data collector –DCIZ of a Pentax tool using a Kermitprogram or any other program similar to it.TopCon – 210 - Reading from a file that was created using thecommunication program TopComm, from a TopCon-210 tool.(note – there is no need to use the Converter, the program willread the transferred file directly.

TopCon-Fc5 – As TopCon210, only for the Fc-5 data collector.Hp-48/Topcon_700 - Reading a “raw” file that was made by thestandard communication program for the transference of filesfrom – HP to - 48.Topcon_700- Dat files – Reading a Dat file that can be readdirectly from a disconnected server (PCMCIA) of a Topcon_700model tool.Topcon_2102 - Reading from a file created with help of thecommunication program TopComm, from the TopCon-210 tool.The difference is the transference type from inside the Topcon.NTS600 - Reading a Dat file from NTS600 (Chinese 'South'

Company)








3. Save as text file – save the data in a ‘Text’ f ile. After clicking this

button, a dialog files text box will appear. The distomat data will besaved in a file that was determined in Ascii format (for example forwork and process in DOS).

4. Print – printing the file data. As a rule it is best to enter a report thatwas received as a result of the computation and to print it.

5. Preview traverse diagram – The traverse diagram can bedisplayed only after the computation was completed (by pressing

Apply)

6. Clear all - clears all the distomat existing data (in case the datawas read from an external file using the ‘Load form text file’, theoriginal file will not be damaged).

7. Erase – erasing a line or a block of lines.

8. Mark all – marking all the lines.

9. Insert – inserting a space line. It is important to mention that theexisting space line has a crucial effect on the distomat data – as itsignifies the moving of a passage.

10. Copy - copies a line or a block of lines to memory. The content thathad been copied can be pasted anywhere using ‘paste’.

11. Paste – pastes the content in memory (that had been copied usingthe ‘Copy’ command) into the desired location – the location of thecursor.

12. Undo – go one step back. Remember that the undo button isrelevant only for the action completed from the distomat datawindow.

13. Distomats Data – reading data from a Distomat toll. Clicking thisbutton will open the distomat data input window (see attachment b’

– “communication and compliance to tools”).

14. Report – viewing the distomat data computation report.








15. Status – opening the Distomat data ‘Status’ window.

16. Intersection 2 distances – this command supports theintersection of two known points, using a given distance for eachof the points. Click this button to open the intersection windowfrom the right from two distances. The data on which we are aboutto perform the intersection will be automatically copied to thecorrect cells.

Station name (assuming you want to compute the station’scoordinates), will be entered as ‘New point’.The first reading under the station line will be inserted as the leftpoint from our point of view, and the distance measured to it, willbe translated into horizontal distance and will be entered into‘Radius 1’ field. The second reading under the station line will be entered as aright point. The distance to it will be translated to horizontaldistance and will be entered into ‘Radius 2’ field. Click ‘OK’ to do the computation – the coordinates will becomputed, and the point will be added to your coordinates list sothat you can perform various activities on it (such as thecontinuation of the computation of all distomat data).

17. Intersection 3 angles (Resection) - click this button to open theintersection window from the right, from three directions.

The first three readings will be copied to this window immediatelyfollowing the station.The data will be copied in an ascending order from left to right,as for each point will be copied the reading horizontal to it.The station will be copied as ‘New point’. Click ‘OK’ to performthe computation and store the results in the coordinates list, sothat now you can compute the distomat data from this station.

18. Intersection 2 angels & distance - click this button to open the

intersection window from two angels & distance. The data of thefirst two points after the station will be copied to this window fromleft to right. For the first point the reading and distance will becopied, and for the second point, only the reading will be copied(the distance copied will be automatically translated to horizontaldistance). The station will be copied in the ‘New point’ field. Click‘OK’ to compute the station and add it to the list of coordinates, sothat it can be operated on again.

19. Apply – pressing this button will run the computation and creation of thereport.








20. Close – The distomat data is stored in the memory and it’s possible toopen the window again any time.

21. It’s possible to freeze points which we want to neglect in thecomputation of the traverse adjustment. Mark the row you wish tofreeze and right click on the mouse. Choose the option ‘FreezePoints ’. It’s also possible to double click the left column “Fr”. Tounfreeze double click again or choose the option “Unfreeze allpoints” from the right click options.

22. Prism height definition for 2D surveying

In case 2D surveying is required (Coordinates that needs toappear on drawing without being considered at interpolation), youcan define prism height as -99 in the total station and when youwill perform traverse adjustment, all coordinates with prism height-99 definition will be recognized as 0.00.To locate all points with height 0.00 in coordinates list, click on

‘Find’ button .

In ‘Find’ Window, define search by accurate height, type 0.00 or 0and click ‘Find All’ button.

All points with 0.00 heights in coordinates list will be marked inblue.Mark ‘V’ in ‘Block’ checkbox (on the right side of coordinates list)and click ‘Freeze current line \block’ button . <Fr.> symbol willbe added to selected point’s names. This operation will freeze the selected points and they will not beconsidered at interpolation








Appendix 1 – Least Square Traverse adjustment

Computation process

The software allocates all available traverses. Each traverses are defined as one of the following 3 types:

Open traverse. Closed (fixed) traverse to a single known point Closed (fixed) traverse with 2 known points.

The software computes the whole traverses and takes into accountthe weights and precisions of each point. The software can also solve a reverse traverse – starting at 2unknown points and closing to 2 known points (open traverse). In addition, the software can solve closed-round traverse (where the2 known points are at the start and at the end of the traverse).

Types of traverses

An open traverse is the simplest traverse. It is based on two known pointsand is not accurate since there is no control on the measurement. Theerror along the traverse is growing without ability to control and maintain.

Figure A-1, Type I, Open traverse

A Closed traverse to single known point at the end, enables a bettercontrol on the results. Looking at figure A-2, the traverse must comply withthe computed coordinated for point C. Meaning, if we compute the traverseas an open one (without considering point C as known point), we’ll getcomputed coordinates for point C. In reality, due to errors inmeasurements, errors in the equipment and operator errors it would neverbe the same. The traverse adjustment makes correction to all the anglesand distances and location point C in its real (known) coordinates.

Az0 = StartAzimuth

Known

Unknown

0Az

1P

2P

3P

4P








Figure A-2, type II, Close traverse to single Known point at the end

A Closed traverse to 2 known points at the end (C and D), enables to add

additional equations for the solution. Computing the first azimuth and theazimuth in each station, it’s possible to compute the azimuth of line CD, butthis azimuth should be different then the azimuth computed by using onlythe known points C & D. The difference between these azimuths is calledbearings misclosure. As long as the total bearings misclose is acceptable,the difference will be computed along the traverse by the traverseadjustment.

Figure A-3, type III, Close polygon to 2 Known points at the end

During surveying in the field it’s recommended to measure additionalmeasurements if possible. For example, if a surveyor is standing at P3 andtaking a reading to P2 and to P4, he should also take the reading to P1 (ifpossible). That will add better control to the measurements and mightimprove the precision of the computation in some points.

Az0 = StartAzimuth

Known

Unknown

Az0 = StartAzimuth

Known

Unknown

0Az

nAzA

B

C

D1P

2P

3P

4P

0Az

A

B

C

1P

2P

3P

4P








The least square traverse adjustment process automatically identify all thepossible connections and equations. The meaning of minimum leastsquare solution is that the sum of the adjustments squares must be theminimum possible.

Each country has its own standards of linear and bearings misclosure. Thesoftware will run the computation without almost any limitation but it will

display warnings for errors as been defined by the user in the optionswindow. In case the bearings misclosure is above a certain limit, thesoftware will stop the computation. The limit in CivilCAD 2014 is W1<5*n^0.5 , where W1 is the bearings misclosure and n is the number ofstations.

Az0 = StartAzimuth

Known

Unknown

0Az

nAzA

B

C

D

1P

2P

3P

4P








The error ellipse

As part of the traverse adjustment, the precisions for each point arecomputed:ΣX – describe the precision of coordinate XΣY – describe the precision of coordinate Y ΣXY – describe the dependency between X & Y

For example:

X = 302341.23 +/- 3CmY = 122555.20 +/- 4Cm

ΣX = 3CmΣY = 4Cm

If we assume that there is dependency

between X & Y, then the covariance would be

ΣXY = 0.5Cm

It’s possible to find a direction for which we can

get ΣXY = 0 .

Given these values, it’s possible to define the precision of the point by the

error ellipse.

Remark: The error ellipse is computed with a 95% level of confidence.

The error ellipse around a certain point is defined as follows: there is

a probability of 76.18% that the correct coordinates of this point are inside

the ellipse, which her semi-major and semi-manor axis are equal to the

maximum and minimum values of the STD (standard deviation).

Remark: MX & MY are not corrections but they are the precisions of X & Y.

Error warnings for traverse adjustment

During the computation process, the software is running a number ofchecks on height, angles and distances. The system will display a warningwhen there is a difference beyond normal.

Here are the possible warnings of the system:

Semi-Ma or=M

Semi-Manor=M

Az








The difference between the computed and measured distance or thedifference between the forward distance and the back distance ishigher than the maximum allowed (Max delta L).

The difference between the Face left measurement and the Faceright measurement in the horizontal angle or the vertical angle ishigher than the maximum allowed (Max epsilon).

The computed bearings difference is higher than the maximumallowed (Max bearings difference).

Error in MISCLOSURE ACCURACY check (Max. misclosure/distance).

The computed linear difference is higher than the maximum allowed(Max linear difference).

Orientation control between 2 known points. The computed orient.difference is higher than the maximum allowed (Max orient.difference).

Height control between 2 known points. The computed heightdifference is higher than the maximum allowed (Max orient.difference).

There are not enough points to find a solution. Either the softwarecould not find a traverse adjustment solution or we didn’t write thecontrol points in the topography coordinates list (or we didn’t markthe known points with code ‘cp’).








Chapter 12: Coordinatesgeometry








Coordinates geometry

This chapter discusses geometric computation on coordinates (COGO). Itdetails all geometric activities possible from CivilCAD 2014. In addition tothis chapter, separate chapters were dedicated to topics of - “DistomatsDa ta Computation” (chapter 10), and “Polygon Adjustment” (chapter 11).

Another geometric computation supported by the program, but not detailedin this chapter is coordinates computation – running distance and offsetsacross the horizontal alignment, straight or including arches. Thiscomputation is possible and will be explained in chapter 14 “Roads Design

– geometric computation along the center line”.

Coordinates geometry definitions As a rule, CivilCAD 2014 performs its computations on the basis of a“bank” of points. These points are entered in the coordinates list at thebottom window (‘Topography/Designed coordinates), so that all that needsto be added in the coordinates geometry windows are their name/number.There are a number of options for some of the geographic computationsthat enable the computation of new coordinates. CivilCAD 2014 works withtwo lists of coordinates – topography coordinates, and designedcoordinates. The designed coordinates list is mostly useful in cases ofcomputation of quantities/and or design, therefore in most cases ofgeographic computation you will not use this list at all. You can instructCivilCAD 2014 with which of the lists you would like to work, and furtheryet, it possible to join the work between the two lists and define it in theprogram:

From the main menu activate : Geometry -> Geometry parameters. Fromthe right will open the geometric computations definition Window.In this window appears two frames:Points use – Choosing the list with which you wish to work (topography ordesigned or both).Working units – the working units for angles- grads or degrees.

Points use : the options from this list are – Designed points only – All the commands will be done on the designedpoints list, only.Topo. Points only - All the commands will be done on the topographypoints list, only.Topo. + Designed- Create designed – The program will use the existingcoordinates in both lists for the computations, but each new pointcomputed will be created in the designed points list only.Topo. + Designed- Create topo - The program will use the existing

coordinates in both lists for the computations, but each new pointcomputed will be created in the topography points list only.








Working units - (for angles)

The working units that are determined here, that will define the angleduring the work process, will be in grads or degrees. These definitions willalso change the work units for the ‘distomat data’ window and so for thehorizontal and vertical observations in it.

When yo u complete the definition changes click ‘OK’. Click ‘Cancel’ tocancel the changes that were made.

Note: Changing the work units inside a certain project will have an affectonly on the particular project . In order to set general definitions for the

way the program works, you must first enter ‘Prototype’ project from theprogram’s installment library, and change the required definitions in it. Afterthis adjustment was made, any new project opened by the program willwork with the new definitions you have set.

General remarks

There are several possibilities shared for all or some of the geometriccomputations. We will focus here on explaining them:

The options table : Unused, Pick, Locate, Select. This table enables anintegration of the computations with the graphic option.

Unused – the default for opening the window signifies that all activities inthe list are not of use at this time.Pick – the arbitrary choosing of points from inside the drawing, which donot appear in the points list from the bottom window. To use this option,mark it, move to the drawing area and choose the points you want.Locate – Choose points that exist in the points list at the bottom window.The program will search for the chosen point, and finds in the bottom list – ‘topography points’ or ‘designed points’ list, according to the definitions thatwere set (on choosing a list see section “Coordinates GeometryDefinitions” in this chapter). Select – Choose a Polyline or Line that was drawn by AutoCAD. Thisoption is useful, of-course, for users of AutoCAD version only.

– The erasing of the last point from the list of points, if such a list doesexist. For commands with no points list, the erase button will be used toerase all the fields in the window.

– Erasing all the points in the commands that have a point list.








Please Notice: All geometric commands are arranged by alphabeticalorder, under ‘Geometry’ menu.

Grouping Computation Reports:

For each project, CivilCAD 2014 saves a report that groups all thegeometric computations that were made. For each working stage, you canpresent or print the proper report. Inside the geometric computation activitywindows, appears a ‘present report’ button (a button with a picture of abook). Press this button to present the report, print it, save it in an Ascii file,or delete it.

Area computations Activate ‘ Geometry -> Area ’ from the main menu. The window will openfrom the right.

This option enables to compute the area locked inside the points lists. Use‘Pick’ and ‘Locate’ as explained in section “General Remarks”. From the liston the right in the upper field - you can insert the list of points that bordersthe computation area. Enter the names of the points and click ‘Enter’. Youcan enter a group of points by entering the field in the form of: 10-15 andclick ‘Enter’. In this case, all the points between 10 to 15 will be added to

the list. To compute the area click ‘ Apply ’. The area between these pointswill appear under ‘area’ and will be added to the computatio n report forprinting.

Arc by center and point on arc

Activate ‘Geometry -> Arc Center + 1 point’ from the main menu. Thewindow will open from the right.

You can use ‘Pick’ and ‘Locate’ as explained in section “GeneralRemarks”.

This option is for computing an arc by a known center point coordinates,and an additional known point on an arc. Enter the following details in thefields that appear in the window:

Center point – The known arc center point.From point - This known point on the arc will serve as starting point for arccomputations.Distance – The distance of the new point/points computed from the knownpoint on the arc. This distance can be:

A single space – in this case the single point will be computed according tothe distance that was entered.








A formula in format X>Y : Z with ‘X’ as the distance of the first point to becreated, ‘Y’ the distance of the last point to be created, and ‘Z’ the distancebetween the points. For example 10: 50<0. The program will distributepoints across the arc at stations that vary from 0 to 50, each 10 meters.

New point – the name of the new point the program will create. In case agroup of

points is formulated, the program will number these points startingfrom the number

that has been entered in the field.

Note : You can move between the different fields in the window, by clicking‘Enter’.

To perform the computation click ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute thepoints and enter them into the points list (topography coordinates list ordesigned coordinates list), as was defined by in the ‘Setting Window’ (seesection “Coordinates Geometry Definitions”). If a single point is computed,its coordinates will appear in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’ in the window, as well.Clicking on the report button will activate the ‘report window’ in which thecurrent computation will be displayed.

Arc by two points and a radius

Activate ‘Geometry -> Arc 2 points’ from the main menu. The window willopen from the right.


This option is for computing an arc by two known points on an arc andradius. Enter the following data in the fields that appear in the window:

From point – the first known point on the arc.From point - the second point on the arc. The second point will be on the

continuation of the arc, clock-wise.Radius – the arc radiusDistance – The distance of the new point/points computed from the firstknown point on the arc. This distance can be:

A single space – in this case the single point will be computed accordingto the distance that was entered.

A formula in format X>Y : Z with ‘X’ as the distance of the first point to thecreation, ‘Y’ the distance of the last point to creation, and ‘Z’ the distancebetween the points. For example 10: 50<0. The program will distributepoints across the arc at stations that vary from 0 to 50, each 10 meters.Division of the segment between the two known points to ‘X’ equal parts – “/X”. For example, entering /5, will divide the segment to- 5 equal parts.








Division of the segment between the two known points by the distance of‘X’ meters –“X:”. For example, entering 2:, will create points every 2 meterson the arc.

New point – the name of the new point the program will create. In case agroup of points is formulated, the program will number these points startingfrom the first number that was first entered in the field.


To perform the computation clic k ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute thepoints and enter them into the points list (topography coordinates list ordesigned coordinates list), as was defined by in the ‘Setting Window’ (seesection “Coordinates Geometry Definitions”). If a single point is computed,its coordinates will appear in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’ in the window, as well.Clicking on the report button will activate the ‘report window’ in which thecurrent computation will be displayed.

Arc by three points

Activate ‘Geometry -> Arc 3 poin ts’ from the main menu. The window willopen from the right.You can use ‘Pick’ and ‘Locate’ as explained in section “General

Remarks”. This option is for computing an arc by three known points on an arc andradius. Enter the following data in the fields that appear in the window:

Point 1 – the first known point on the arc.Point 2 - the second known point on the arc.Point 3 – the third known point on the arc.

The three points will be arranged clock-wise on the arc.

Distance – The distance of the new point/points computed from the first

known point on the arc. This distance can be: A single space – in this case the single point will be computed according tothe distance that was entered.

A formula in format X>Y : Z with ‘X’ as the distance of the first point to thecreation, ‘Y’ the distance of the last point to creation, and ‘Z’ the distancebetween the points. For example 10: 50<0. The program will distributepoints across the arc at stations that vary from 0 to 50, each 10 meters.Division of the segment between the first and the third known points on an

Arc, to ‘X’ equal parts – “/X”. For example, entering /5, will divide thesegment to- 5 equal parts.Division of the segment between the first and the third known points on an

Arc by ‘X’ meters –“X:”. For example, entering 2:, will create points every 2meters on the arc.








New point – the name of the new point the program will create. In case agroup of points is formulated, the program will number these points startingfrom the number that was first entered in the field.


To perform the computation click ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute thepoints and enter them into the points list (topography coordinates list ordesigned coordinates list), as was defined by in the ‘Setting Window’ (seesection “Coordinates Geometry Definitions”). If a single point is computed,its coordinates will appear in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’ in the window, as well.Clicking on the report bu tton will activate the ‘report window’ in which thecurrent computation will be displayed.

Arc by three outside points

Activate ‘Geometry -> Arc 3 points’ from the main menu. The window willopen from the right.


This option is for computing an arc by three known points that block the arc(see drawing in window), and the radius of the arc for the creation. Enterthe following data in the fields that appear in the window:

Point 1 – the first known point.Point 2 - the second known point.Point 3 – the third known point.Radius – the radius of the arc is blocked by the three points.

The three points will be arranged so they block the arc clock-wise.

Note : You can move between the different fields in the window, byclicking ‘Enter’.

To perform the computation click ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute thepoints across the arc.








Arc segment

Activate ‘Geometry -> Arc segment’ from main menu. The window willopen from the right.


This option is for computing the locked area between the arc and a straightline. In addition the program will compute the length of the straight line andthe length of the arc segment that is blocking the area. To compute thefield data, insert the following:

From point – the first known point of the segment.To point - the second known point of the segment.Radius – the radius of the segment arc.


To perform the computation click ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute thedata segment and present them in the following fields:

Arc – the length of the segment arc.Dist – the length of the straight line between the two points.

Area – the area of the segment locked between the points.

Clicking the report button to present the report window in which this recentcomputation will appear.

Continuous distance

Activate ‘Geometry -> Continuous distance’ from the main menu. Thewindow will open from the right.

This option is for computing the sum distance of a line defined by itsnumber of points. You can use the ‘Pick’ and ‘Locate’ and ‘Select’ optionas explained in section “general remarks”. From the list on the right -upperfield, you can enter the list of points that define the line that is beingcomputed. Enter the points names and click ‘Enter’. You can enter a groupof points by entering the field in the form of: 15- 10 and click ‘Enter’. In thiscase, all the points between 10 to 15 will be added to the list. To computethe station click ‘ Apply ’. The distance between these points will appear as

‘Distance’. The detailing of the intermediate distances between the points








including the accumulating and final distance will appear in thecomputation report.

Transformation of coordinates system

Activate ‘Geometry -> Coordinates transformation’ from the main menu.The window will open from the right.

This option is for transforming the points coordinates in the list by insertingthe coordinates of two points in the current system, and inserting thecoordinates of these two points in the new system to which we want totransform. Insert the following in the window on the right:

Old system:

Insert coordinates ‘X’ and ‘Y’ of the first point (point 1), and of the secondpoint (point 2) known in the old system.

New system:Insert the coordinates of the same two points in the new system.

You can use ‘Select and ‘Pick’ in order to choose the two points in the oldsystem (current), graphically out of the drawing.

After entering these four points click ‘ Apply ’ to activate. Before you performthe transformation you will be requested to confirm this action. After thetransformation, the new coordinates will appear in the bottom window.Click ‘R’ to draw them again on your screen.

More options from this window:The program’s default is the transformation of two coordinates lists, bothtopography and designed coordinates. If you wish to transform only one ofthe lists, remove the ‘v’ mark next to one of the following:

Topo points – the topography points list.Designed points - the designed points list.

Distance and angle of a group of points

Activate Geometry -> Distance & angle from the main menu. The windowwill open from the right.

This option is for computation of distance, azimuth and relative angle of aknown point (any station) to a group of points for marking. From the

window on the right enter:








Station - the name of the station from which the data will be computed.Zero point – CivilCAD 2014 produces a report that includes both azimuthfor points and orientation angles for points from stations that will serve asthe zero point. In the ‘Zero point’ field, enter the point that will ser ve as thezero point. If such a point does not exist, enter the station name as youentered in ‘Station’.To point list - To this list you can enter all the points whose data you wishto compute. Stand on the field at the top of the list and enter the requiredpoints. You can enter one point after another (click ‘Enter’ between them),a group of points by defining ‘from’ and ‘to’ (for example 1 -10), or type theword ‘All’ and click ‘Enter’, in order to contain all the points in the points list.

After yo u have the list, click ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute the list ofdistances and angles and present them in a report. Notice the differencebetween the Azimuth column and the angle column.

Note : The report you get from this option does not belong to the inclusivecomputation report of the program, which can be received from activatingother options.

Distance and azimuth

Activate – ‘Operate Geometry -> Distance & Azimuth’ from the main menu.

The window will open from the right.

You can use ‘Pick’ and ‘Locate’ as explained in section “general remarks”.

This option is for computing the distance and angle between two knownpoints. Enter the following data in the fields that appear in this window.

From point – first known point.To point – second known point.


After clicking ‘Enter’ in the ‘To point’ field, the program will compute theazimuth and distance between the two points and show the data in fields‘Distance’ and ‘Azimuth’. The program will also update the computation inthe computation report.








Intersection by two distances

Activate ‘Geometry -> Arc 2 points” from the main menu. The window willopen from the right.


This option is for finding a point by distance intersection into two knownpoints. In the fields of this window enter:

Center point 1 – the first intersection point. This is the left point to theobservation (the def inition of “left “is for minimizing the location of the

intersection to a single point from the two points from which the distancesare intersection).Distance 1 – The distance to the first known point (left point).Center point 2 – The second point from which the intersection is made.This point will be the right point to the observation.Distance 2 – The distance to the second known point (right point).New point – The name of the new point that will be formed.


To perform the intersection click ‘ Apply ’. The program will show thecoordinates intersection (if the distances intersect!), in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’.The computation report will be updated accordingly.

Intersection by two angles and a distance

Activate - ‘Geometry -> Intersection – 2 angles + distance’ from the mainmenu. The window will open from the right.

You can use ‘Locate’ as explained in section “general remarks”.

This option is for finding a point by a intersecting between observations totwo known points and the distance to the point on the left.

Point 1 – first point from which the intersection is made. This point will bethe left point to the observation (the left will be determined by the angle tothe point).

Angle 1 – The observation to the first point (the left).Distance – The distance to the first known point (left point)Point 2 – The second point from which the intersection is made. This pointis the right point to the observation.

Angle 2 – The observation to the second point (the right).New point – The name of the new point that will be created.








Working in Degrees:We emphasize here that the angles will be entered completely,

separated by commas in the following fashion : DDD,MM,SS. Examples forangles : 5,17,10 56,12,10 186,22,32 and so on. It is possible to insertthe given angles in full degrees, only by the degree grade, for example : 90(for 90 degrees).

Please notice : The angles format in Coordinates Geometry isdifferent from the format at Distomat data computation, where angles areentered without separation.

Working in Grads:The angle in grads will be entered as usual, including a decimal point, ifneeded.

Note: You can move between the different fields in the window, by clicking‘Enter’.

Click ‘ Apply ’ to perform the intersection. The program will present thecoordinates of the intersection (if the data is being intersected!), also infields ‘X’ and ‘Y’. The computation report will be updated accordingly.

Intersection by three angles

Activate - ‘Geometry -> Intersection- 3 angles’ from the main menu. Thewindow will open from the right.

You can use ‘Locate’ as explained in section “general remarks”.

This option is for finding a point by intersecting between observations tothree known points. The accuracy of this intersection is affected directlyfrom the difference in angles between the observations, and as long as thisdifference is equally distributed between all three directio ns (“ Mercedesshape”), the more accurate the intersection will be. In the fields of thiswindow enter:

Point 1- the first intersection point. Angle 1 – observation for first station.Point 2 – the second intersection point.

Angle 2 – observation to the second station.Point 3 – the third intersection point.

Angle 3 – the observation to the third point.New point – the name of the new point that will be created.

Working in Degrees:








We emphasize here that the angles will be entered completely, separatedby commas in the following fashion : DDD,MM,SS. Examples for angles :5,17,10 56,12,10 186,22,32 and so on. It is possible to insert the givenangles in full degrees, only by the degree grade, for example : 90 (for 90degrees).Please notice : The angles format in Coordinates Geometry is differentfrom the format at Distomat data computation, where angles are enteredwithout separation.

Working in grads:The angle in grads will be entered as usual, including a decimal point, if

needed.


Click ‘ Apply ’ to perform the intersection. The program will present thecoordinates of theintersection (if the data is being intersected!), also in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’. The computation report will be updated accordingly.

Intersection by arc and a straight line

Activate - ‘Geometry -> Intersection line- arc’ from the main menu. Thewindow will open from the right.


This option is for finding the intersection point between the arc defined byits center point and radius, and the line defined by two points. In the fieldsof this window enter:

Center point - the center point of the arc.Radius – the radius of the arc.From point – the first point on a straight line.To point - the second point on a straight line.New point 1- the name of the first intersection point for creation.New point 2 – the name of the second intersection point for creation.


Click ‘ Apply ’ to perform the intersection. The program will show theintersectioncoordinate points in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’ of ‘Point 1’ and ‘Point 2’. Thecomputationreport will be updated accordingly.








Intersection point between two lines

Activate - ‘Geometry -> Intersection line- line’ from the main menu. Thewindow will open from the right.


This option is for finding the intersection point between two lines. In thefields of this window enter:

Point 1- the first point on the first line.Point 2 - the second point on the first line.

Point 1 - the first point on the second line.Point 2 – the second point on the second line.New point – the point name to be created.


Click ‘ Apply ’ to perform the intersection. The program will show theintersection c oordinate points in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’. The computation reportwill be updated accordingly.

Locating points on a line Activate – ‘Operate Geometry -> Locate point on a line’ from the mainmenu. The window will open from the right.


This option is for calculating points on a line. In the fields of this windowenter:

From point – A point on a straight line that serves as the starting point forcomputing points. (the starting point is the point from which distances areentered).To point – the second point on a line.

Note: After the two points that define the line were gathered, the distancebetween these two points will appear in the bottom field (under the ‘X’ and‘Y’ fields).

Distance – The distance of the new point/points computed from the firstknown point on the arc. This distance can be:








A single space – in this case the single point will be computed according tothe distance

that was entered. A formula in format X>Y : Z with ‘X’ as the distance of the first point to thecreation, ‘Y’ the distance of the last point to creation, and ‘Z’ the distancebetween the points. For example 10: 50<0. The program will distributepoints across the arc at stations that vary from 0 to 50, each 10 meters.Division of the segment between the two known points to ‘X’ equal parts – “/X”. For example, entering /5, will divide the segment to - 5 equal parts.Division of the segment between the two known points by the distance of‘X’ meters –“X:”. For example, entering 2:, will create points every 2 meterson the arc.

New point – the name of the new point the program will create. In case agroup of points is formulated, the program will number these points startingfrom the number that was first entered in the field.

Note : You can move between the different fields in the window, by clicking‘Enter’. To perform the computation click ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute thepoints and enter them into the points list (topography coordinates list ordesigned coordinates list), as was defined by in the ‘Setting Window’ (seesection “Coordinates Geometry Definitions”). If a single point is computed,its coordinates will appear in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’ in the window, as well Clicking on the report button will activate the ‘report window’ in which thecurrent computation will be displayed.

Locating a point by azimuth and distance

Activate – ‘Operate Geometry -> Locate point by azimuth’ from the mainmenu. The window will open from the right.


This option is for computing a point by azimuth and distance from a known

point. In the fields of this window enter:

From point – the known point from which the other points will be computed. Azimuth – azimuth for the computed point.

Working in degrees:we emphasize here that the azimuth will be entered completely, separatedby commas in the following fashion : DDD,MM,SS. Examples for angles :5,17,10 56,12,10 186,22,32 and so on. It is possible to insert the givenangles in full degrees, only by the degree grade, for example: 90 (for 90degrees).








please notice : the angles format in the Coordinates Geometry is differentfrom the format of the Distomat data computation where angles areentered without separation.

Working with grads:the angle in grids will be entered as usual, including a decimal point, ifneeded.

Distance – the distance to the computed point.New point – the new point the program will create.


To perform the computation click ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute thepoints and enter it into the points list (topography coordinates list ordesigned coordinates list), as w as defined in the ‘Setting Window’ (seesection “Coordinates Geometry Definitions”). The coordinates points willappear in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’ of the window. Clicking on the report button willactivate the ‘report window’ which will display the current comp utation.

Locating a point by distance and angle

Activate - ‘Operate Geometry -> Locate point by angle’ from the mainmenu. The window will open from the right.


This option is for computing a point by distance from a known point, andorientation angle created from the same point and from another knownpoint. In the fields of this window enter:

From point – the known point from which points are computed.To point – another known point that will create the base-line (the o point)for determining direction.

Angle – the opening angle from the base-line to the new point you wish tocompute.

We emphasize here that the angles will be entered completely, separatedby commas in the following fashion : DDD,MM,SS. Examples for angles :5,17,10 56,12,10 186,22,32 and so on. It is possible to insert the givenangles in full degrees, only by the degree grade, for example : 90 (for 90degrees).








Please notice : The angles format in the Coordinates Geometry is differentfrom the format of the Distomat data computation where angles areentered without separation.

Distance – the distance to a new point.New point – the name of the new point the program will create.

Note : You can move between the different fields in the window, by clicking‘Enter’. To perform the computation click ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute thepoints and enter it into the points list (topography coordinates list ordesigned coordinates list), as was defined in the ‘Setting Window’ (seesection “Coordinates Geometry Definitions”). The coordinates points willappear in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’ of the window. Clicking on the report button willactivate the ‘report window’ which will display the current computation.

Offset from a point to a line

Activate – ‘Operate Geometry -> Offset on line’ from the main menu. Thewindow will open from the right.


This option is for computing an offset point of a known point external of any

line, on the line itself. This offset point is the meeting place between theline and the line offset to it, leaving the known point (see diagram inwindow). In the fields of this window enter:

From point – The first known point on the line.To point – Another known point on the line.External Point – A known point outside the line for which the offset pointwill be computed.New point – the name of the section point to be created.

Note : You can move between the different fields in the window, by clicking

‘Enter’.

To perform the computation click ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute thepoints and enter it into the points list (topography coordinates list ordesigned coordinates list), as was defined in the ‘Setting Window’ (seesection “Coordinates Geometry Definitions”). The coordinates points willappear in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’ of the window. Clicking on the report button willactivate the ‘report window’ which will display the current computation.








Parallel lines

Activate – ‘Operate Geometry -> Parallel lines’ from the main menu. Thewindow will open from the right.


This option is for computing two points on a line parallel to the line with twoknown points, when the distance between the two line is known. In thefields of this window enter:

Point 1 – The first known point on a line.Point 2 – The second known point on a line.Offset – The distance between the two parallel lines. This distance will beentered as a positive number when the parallel line is to the right to theknown line, and as a negative number when the parallel line is left to theknown line. The definitions “left” and “right” will be determined according tothe order of the points that define the known line (Point 1, Point 2).New point 1 – the new point for computation on the parallel line. This pointis counter to Point 1.New point 2 – the second parallel point for computation on the parallel line.This point is counter to Point 2.


To perform the computation click ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute thepoints and enter it into the points list (topography coordinates list ordesigned coordinates list), as was defined in the ‘Setting Window’ (seesection “Coordinates Geometry Definitions”). The coordinates points willappear in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’ of the window. Clicking on the report button willactivate the ‘report window’ which will display the current computation.

Tangents

Activate – ‘Operate Geometry -> Tangents’ from the main menu. Thewindow will open from the right.


This option is for computing two tangent points to the arc, when the knowndata are the arc center point, the arc radius, and a point outside the arc

through which pass the tangents lines.In the fields of this window enter:








Center point – the known arc center pointRadius – the known arc radiusExternal point – the known point outside the arc through which thetangents lines cross.New Point 1 – The first computation tangents point.New Point 2 – The second computation tangents point.


To perform the computation click ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute thepoints and enter it into the points list (topography coordinates list ordesigned coordinates list), as was defined in the ‘Setting Window’ (seesect ion “Coordinates Geometry Definitions”). The coordinates points willappear in fields ‘X’ and ‘Y’ of the window. Clicking on the report button willactivate the ‘report window’ which will display the current computation.








Chapter 13: Earthworks onroads








Earthworks computation on roads

In this chapter we will discuss Earthworks on roads.CivilCAD 2014 is one of the leading, convenient programs for thecomputation of Earthworks across roads. CivilCAD 2014 is also thestrongest tool for Roads Design. In this chapter we will focus, usingexamples, mostly on quantity computations and less on the design aspect,keeping in mind that it is not fully possible to break them up.

In order to explain the use of this program for Earthworks computations onroads, we will look at samples that illustrate this process. During thediscussion of the examples, we will review the program’s command

buttons and study their functions.

Note : In order to expand your knowledge on the operation of CivilCAD2014 for quantitie s computations, it is recommended to read section “RoadDesign’ in chapter 14. You will find a detailed description of all of theprogram’s functions along center lines and roads, which will be useful alsofor computing quantities in sections.

Sample

We will now demonstrate the work stages for computing Earthworks in

sections. This example is relatively simple and does not combine thecomplex techniques that exist in the program.

Open a new project (see: chapter 1 -working with projects) Activate ‘Road s - > Cross sections’

From the right window, click on the button . The ‘Define sections’window will open. Define the cross sections in the following manner:Start at station – station of the first section, we will leave the data ‘0’. End at station - st ation of the last section, type ‘100’. Distance between stations – distance between sections, leave the data

‘20’. Name of first section – the name of the first section, leave ‘1’.

To end click ‘OK’.

From the right window, click on the ‘Status’ button ( picture of a handholding a card-index). In the window that opens define the following:Sections width – define the maximum width to the sections left and rightof the center line: Right, left. We will define a work range of “ -20” – from theleft (the dis tances to the left of the center line are negative), and “20” fromthe right.

From ‘ Sections format’ choose ‘Earthworks’, and mark ‘Existing’ and‘Design’. This definition sets the presentation of the section configuration in








the drawing. For computation of Earthworks quantities, we will use mostlythe ‘Earthworks’ format, and for design – ‘Design’.

Another work status that must be defined from this window is : Elevation (see Elevation and dH). This is where we tell the program that the heightsentered are absolute in relation to the sea level (in contrast to relativeheights to the vertical alignment that had been defined – see: “RoadsDesign”). To finish, click ‘OK’.

Once the definition process is done, a chart will appear to the right of thesections l ist from ‘1’ to ‘6’ (Name), according to stations from ‘0’ to ‘100’.We will now add an intermediate section to the sections list at station ‘15’.Using your mouse, stand on section number ‘2’ and click ‘Enter’. Open anempty line. Stand on the empty line and insert section ‘1.1’, click on theright arrow to go to ‘Station’ column, and enter station ‘15’.

Note : If you wish to delete a section that was entered by accident, you cando so in the following manner: stand on the desired section from the chart

on the right and click the button from the group of buttons.

Now we will begin to enter the sections data. Mark section number ‘1’ fromthe chart on the right. You will notice that at the head of the screen in thehead title appears the labeling: ‘Sections name: 1’, that implies that you arecurrently working on section number ‘1’. Move to the bottom left chart(Existing G.L) and begin to type the topography data of section number ‘1’.

Segment Offset Elevation-2 -10 100-1 -5 100.320 0 100.171 5 99.152 10 100.153 20 100.37

Offset is the distance (in meters) from the center line, when negativenumbers are to the left of the center line, and the positive, to the right.Elevation is the height at the given distance. In the column on the far leftappears the serial number that is the segment number. The serial numbersare between -40 to 40, so that for each section you can insert up to 81segments (40 X 2 + segment number 0). You can scroll the table up anddown using the scroll bar from the right. When you finish entering the data,click ‘OK’ from the window on the right to get the drawing section.








Move your mouse to the bottom right table (Designed G.L), and enter thefollowing data as designed status:

Segment Offset Elevation-1 -5 99.50 0 99.51 5 99.5

This entering of data is similar to the existing topography status. The thirdcolumn (Slope%) represents the slope in percentage between the previoussegment and the current one, in the direction leaving the center line. It ispossible, therefore, to enter the data either as height or slope: when youenter one, the other will be automatically computed. The forth column(Cover), will not be discussed here, only in ‘Roads Design’. When youfinish typing th e data, click on the ‘OK’ button from the right. You will noticethat the ends of the section slopes were built vertically. This is because wehave not defined a dibbling slope. The following labeling will appear at bothends of the section, up and down:

Slp. Left: Cut 1: Fill 1:

Slp. Right: Cut 1: Fill 1:

In these places it is possible to enter the dibbling slopes. Enter the leftslope at the top, and the right slope at the bottom. In ‘Section’ enter theslo pe for ‘Cut’ and ‘Fill’ for fill status (the program will check whether thesection is at “cut” or “fill” and use the correct data). Enter the slope dibblingas the ratio of ‘1’ to X, implying that if we want the ratio from the left side ofthe section, on the condition it is in ‘cut’ status, to be ‘1’ to ‘2’, we will enterunder ‘Slp. Left:Cut1:’ - the data ‘2’ (note: the ratio of 2:1 we will enter as0.5).

In our example, we will enter the section ratio of 1:2 for all positions. To doso, enter the data ‘2’ in all four boxes. Click ‘ Apply ’ in order to get the newsection structure.

Continue to fill the rest of the sections data. Move to section ‘2’ by markingit in the table from the right. Enter the following data into the tables.

Existing Topography Status:

Segment Offset Elevation-2 -7.5 100.97








-1 -5 99.560 0 99.361 5 99.152 7.2 100.153 15 100.55

Designed Status:Segment Offset Elevation-1 -5 99.70 0 99.71 5 99.7

Once again, enter the 1:2 slope s into all four positions. Click ‘ Apply ’ to getthe structure of the section.

We will not enter manually the remaining sections. Instead we willdemonstrate here the use of interpolation between sections.

Click on the button of the existing topography status in order to copythis data into the computer’s memory (the Copy button is located to the leftof the topography table).Move in the table right of the last section (section number 6).

Click on to the left of the topography table in order to copy this datainto the current section.

Click ‘ Apply ’.Go to the last section and enter the design data into this section. Click‘ Apply ’. We will now elevate the designed data in the last section by – 1 meter.Click on the dH button from the right window. Ent er ‘1’ and click ‘OK’. In thewindow that opens, move from topography status to designed status(Designed G.L). Choose the last section from the ‘Section lists’ windowand click ‘OK’ again. The designed state data will be elevated by thedesired difference.Click ‘Apply’ to get the new dibbling .

Now we have three sections in our project: ‘1’, ‘2’ and ‘6’ full, and the rest without data. We will now perform interpolation to the empty sections:

Click on the interpolation button from the right window ( ).Choose ‘All’ and ‘OK’ from the window that opens. Now the interpolationfor all the empty sections will be performed.Note : After the interpolation all the empty sections will be filled with data.To repeat the interpolation you will have to erase the desired data sections,and only then command its performance.








To print the sections click on the button right of the drawing:Define the scale for Printing from the window that opens: Height scale,

Long scale. Enter ‘100’, ‘100’ ( scale of 1:100/1:100). Cl ick ‘OK’ to continue.From the window that opens, define the type, size and other desiredparameters connected to the printer you have at hand. Click ‘OK’ (or“confirmation”) to continue.Now choose any one of the sections you would like to type. To choose allthe sections click on the ‘A’ button from the bottom of the window. Click‘OK’ to print.

The program will print the sections continuously, according to the languagedefined in the system. To change the language perform the followingsteps:Exist the ‘cross sections’ using ‘Cancel’.

Activate – ‘File -> configuration’. From the right hand window, choose the desired language from under‘Languages’. Click ‘OK’ and return to cross sections - ‘File -> Cross sections’.Return and print the desired sections as we have shown.

We will now go to quantity computation:Exit the ‘cross sections’ window by clicking ‘Cancel’ from the window onthe right. The program will return to the main window.From the main menu activate : ‘Roads -> Earthworks’. The Earthw orksquantity computation window will open from the right.Click ‘OK’ to get the summarizing table of the volumes computations. Thereports window will open with two reports:Earthworks report.stripping areas report (this report follows the Earthworks report – to view,scroll the window downward using the scroll arrows).To print the report click on the ‘printer’ button at appears at the bottom.It is possible to choose the columns that will appear in the reports (in theEarthworks report and in the stripping areas report). To do so click on the

‘Status’ button from the right window. Check (or uncheck) the desiredcolumns in your report. Click ‘OK’ to confirm.

You can get a detailed report of all the sections data. Click on the ‘Sections

data report’ , and a window will open with the report. For every sectionyou will get the data that had been entered, the ‘cut’ section area, the ‘fill’section area, and it’s length in ‘cut’ and in ‘fill’. Click on the ‘printer’ buttonat the bottom, to print the report.Earthworks report can be performed on selected roads from a list.From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Roads Earthworks’.Click ‘Select’, mark the desired roads for earthworks calculation and click‘OK’.

Click on ‘Apply’ button to perform roads earthwor ks report.








In order to exclude ditches in roads earthworks report, from CivilCAD mainmenu, go to 'Roads Earthworks’.

Mark ‘V’ in ‘Exclude ditches’ option and click ‘Apply’ tocreate roads earthworks report.

Notice that ditches volume calculations are separated from cross sectionsvolume calculations.

Creating mass haul diagram using Excel

A diagram of accumulated mass haul curve displaying the accumulated

quantities (cut or fill) at each mass along the current centerline or in a non-accumulated display (this option is possible only if Microsoft Excel isinstalled in the computer).

Click button " Excel mass haul diagram ". A window will be openedpresenting two options:Accumulated mass haul diagram – diagram presenting the accumulatedcut/fill quantities along the centerline .Sections volumes diagram – diagram displaying the cut/fill quantities ateach cross-section.Choose one of these options and click "OK". The software will display the

diagram in the Excel window.This document has to be saved by the Excel because it's not saved withother project data.If Microsoft Excel isn't installed on the computer in which the software isactivated, a warning will be displayed and the action will be terminated.

Importing Excel data

CivilCAD 2014 allows for the importing of sections data from an Excel file.To visualize this process go to the example below:

Preparation of Data File

Open a new Excel document and fill in the data according to theexplanation below:Every line in the table represents a section. The first column represents apermanent value that will always be ’1’, the second column represents thesection name and the third column represents the station for the samesection. The remaining columns represent the section’s ‘Offset’ values and height accordingly. The values are entered in the order of Offset HeightOffset Height …. Etc. A negative value offset represents the distance fromthe left to the center of the section (see column drawing – D, E and so on).








Permanent Section's name Station Offset Elevation …

After entering the data, save it to Excel as a text file.From Excel menu open ‘File->save as’From the window that opens choose: Text (Tab delimited) (*.txt)Enter the file name and click ‘Save’

Importing of Excel data to CivilCAD 2014

After creating a text file containing the data from the Excel sheet, it can beimported into the desired table in the cross sections.

Activate CivilCAD 2014 and open a new project:

Open ‘ Roads - > Roads list’ Enter a road to the roads list.Open ‘ Roads - > Cross Sections’

Click on the button ‘Load sections from text file’ Choose - Text (Tab delimited) (*.txt) : Files of typeChoose the file with the data.From the window that opens, choose the table to which you would like to

import the data.








Chapter 14: Roads design








Roads design

This chapter will discuss one of the progr am’s main options – RoadsDesign. The process of Roads Design includes many aspects to which theprogram, as a whole, answers to. The arrangement of fields and lots at theside of the road, is not specified in this chapter, and can be read about ingreat length in chapter 7 - “Computation of Earthworks Volumes UsingPlanes”. This chapter will discuss design phases that inc lude:

Preparing the background (existing background).Organizing the project Roads list.Horizontal Alignment.Vertical Alignment.Roads intersections in Vertical Alignment.

Alternative Vertical AlignmentCross Sections.Super Elevations.Side Ditches and additional Cover functions.Berms design.Working with typical sections.

Advanced topics on cross sections.Geometric computation along the centerline.Changing the Horizontal Alignment.

Changing the road's alignment after a full design. Automatic junctions design.Field of view planning.Breaking distance test.Design lots between roads.Bridges design.Tunnels design.

We will now proceed throughout the chapter step-by-step, observing all theaspects that are connected to roads design. The steps are presented bytheir recommended order. After gaining experience with the program, each

user can define his/or her own work order according to his/her personalwork habits.

Preparing the background (existing background)

Open a new Project (File-> New Project) and name it.From the AutoCAD/Bricscad menu, insert the background DWG file (if any)as a block (Insert -> Block command in the AutoCAD's menu) and explodeit.Save your project (File -> Save, in the CivilCAD 2014 menu).








The key to CivilCAD 2014 is its 3-D model. On the basis of this model theprogram enables functions such as: taking out sections, quantitycomputation and so on. In order to create this model, the program musthave a coordinates file. If you have a coordinates file in an ASCII (Text)format, read it into the project using the following steps: (If the file does notexist, skip these 3 steps).

From the bottom window, click on (‘Load from text file’ button) andchoose the desired coordinates file. After choosing the file, a list of pointswill appear at the bottom window.

Click on button. The program will create a drawing layer of existing topography points from the list.

To actualize the explanation we will use a coordinates' file that exists in thesystem and installed with the program. To do so, use the file – ‘Sample7.Tco’ from folder ‘Samples’ .



- Continue to 5. As aforesaid, the program needs a coordinates file. If this file does notexist, the program can create it from the drawing file (the DWG), using thefollowing procedure:

From the main menu, activate – ‘General -> Filtering’. A window will openfrom the right. The key to creating a coordinates file from the drawing is tofilter a layer (AutoCAD drawing layer), in which the points or contour lineare at. Therefore, you must first trace the desired layer in AutoCAD. Theentities in the layer must have a dimension of height.

The right window is divided into two sections. In the top section appears alist of the drawing layers, and at the bottom an entities selection list.Mark the level you want to filter.Choose the entity type for filtering.

Now we will specify how to determine the desired entity type. At first we willcheck if the drawing has a measured points' layer. If this layer does notexist, filter the contour lines layer instead (assuming it exists). After findingthe layer/layers where the measured points are, check the entity type. As arule, it is best to filter blocks by filtering the layer on which they lay. If thedrawing does not have any blocks, check if there are points entities in thedrawing, and if they have height (have z), filter them. At a lower priority you








can also filter the text entities, taking into account that the location of thetext can be a bit different from the location of the measured point itself.








If the file has no measured heights (measured points), move on to filteringcontour lines. To do so, check if the contour lines are lines or polylines,and if they have height (z).When filtering contour line, the software will create a large number ofpoints, especially in circular or complex contour line. Therefore, it'simperative to narrow the distance of filtered points. For full explanation onthis option see clause " Narrowing the number of filtered points" inchapter " Handling DWG files ".

Choose the caption Topography (the program will filter the points toTopography Coordinates list).Click ‘ Apply ’ in the right window. The program will begin to filter the chosenlayer by to entity type. At the end of this process the filtered coordinates listwill appear at the bottom window (Topography coordinates).

Click on the button. The program will create a *new points layer on thedrawing.

* CivilCAD 2014 creates a new points list of its own. This layer will be inaddition to an already existing level.

It is possible that the surveying file will have breaklines in addition topoints. An extensive section in chapter 4 - “Creating Contour lines -Breaklines ” is dedicated to this issue, so we will not discuss it further here.

If such lines do exist (in the drawing or as a separated file), they are aninseparable part of the surveying file and must undergo another filteringprocess ( in case you do not know whether there are breaklines in thedrawing, skip to number 6).

The same as for the coordinates file, the breaklines file can be either readfrom an ASCII (Text file) or can be filtered from the drawing. Use one of thetwo methods to read/create the breaklines file:

Reading the breaklines file from an ASCII file:From the main menu activate: ‘ Topography - > Lines’ . A window will openform the right.

Click on (Load from text file button). The files window will open, andyou will be asked to choose . dis file types only (the files type Filter is *.dis).Choose the breaklines file and press 'Yes' for the message. The file willload, and the list of breaklines will appear at the right window. The programwill create a drawing layer of the breaklines.

Filtering the breaklines from the drawing:

Activate Topography->Lines .

Click on button - Filter breaklines








In the Filter breaklines window choose Select . Go over the drawing andclick on one of the lines from the lines' layer or choose the layer and typeof line from the lists at the right window.Press 'Apply'. In the message that appears - click ‘Yes’ to c reate breaklinesonly, without adding points to the existing topography points list. Click ‘No’to create the breaklines and add the Vertex point of the breaklines, to theexisting topography points list.

Note : In most cases there is no need to add the vertex points to theexisting list since these points already exist there. Therefore, click ‘No’ onlyif you know for certain that you wish to add the vertex point. In any othercase, click ‘Yes’.

After the confirmation notice, the breaklines will be filtered and added tothe project.

Creating Contour lines.

The last stage in preparing the existing topography status is creatingcontour lines. Even if you posses a DWG file that already has contourlines, you will have to perform this step, since during the creation ofcontour lines, the program creates also the 3D-model on which it is based.This model cannot be seen by the user (even though it is possible topresent it), but important in order to continue working with the program.

From the main menu activate: ‘ Topography - > Contours’ . A window willopen from the right.From the right hand window, define the vertical interval between thecontour lines. To do so, erase the word ‘default’ right to the ‘Intervals’, andenter the desired interval in meters (sample: 1).Click ‘ Apply ’. The program will begin to create contour lines. It is possiblethat the program will find a certain problem points in the points file, that willdisenable the creation of lines. If the problem has a relatively simplesolution, a message will be appear warning about the problem/problems.

The detailing of the problems will appear in the Log file (that can beopened using a simple editor). Since we do not want to get into detail onthe creation of contour lines, confirm the warning message, and theprogram will continue to work as usual.

The process of creating contour lines is a function of the number of pointsin the project, and the number of breaklines (if you have any). There mightbe cases where the program will work for a long time. Wait patiently untilthis process is completed. The outcomes of this process, if executedproperly, are compatible drawing layers, created by the program, in whichthe contour lines will appear. If such layers do not appear, then this is a

problem that cannot be solved automatically and you will have to process








the coordinates file (on the creation and process of contour lines seeseparate chapter).

We will now study how to perform regularity tests along with the 3-Dmodel:

Locating an existing height at a certain point.

Click on the (Pick Height) located over the drawing window. Move withyour mouse to the drawing and place the "Pick Height" mark in the heightline vicinity. Click the mouse. The point where your pointer is located, willappear on the lower side of the software's window near the captionheight_d and height_t.

This tool for locating height is the most convenient option to check theregulation of the 3-D model. H(T) is the existing topography height andH(D) is the designed height. With the ‘design’ lacking, these two heightswill be equal.

Organizing the project Roads list

After you have finished preparing the background settings, you can startthe design. You will learn in this section how CivilCAD 2014 organizes therelevant center lines for the current project.

From the main menu activate: ‘Roads -> Roads list’. A window will open toyour right. In the window you will see the project center lines list. If there isno center line definition, CivilCAD 2014 automatically opens a center linelabeled ‘Road 1’. If the center lines list screen (current screen) is entere d,the center line will be erased and the list will be empty.Type in the table from the right the list of center lines in the current project.Every center line in the project must be given a name. The name can be a

number or an alphanumeric number. The names of the center lines arenot important and there are only to help you organize the data. After eachcenter line you name, click ‘Enter’. When you finish typing the list click ‘Cancel’.

To assimilate this example enter a single center line and name i t ‘Road 1’.

At the head of every window that appears during the Roads design(defining the horizontal alignment and the vertical alignment design, etc.),will appear the road presently at work. If there are several center lines inthe project, you can always browse through them using the small arrow

that appears next to the name of the road in process.








A detailing of additional activity from this window:

The button is for deleting all center lines in the project . Before theoperation you will receive the proper warning.

The button is for deleting a single center line . The center line erasedis the center line marked on the list. Before the operation you will receive awarning notice.

- adding remarks . Mark (in the list) the road you want to add notes to,and press the remarks button. In the new window, enter the remark for thisroad and press OK.

Horizontal Alignment

Activate ‘Roads -> Horizontal Alignment’ from the main menu. Thewindow will open from the right. Pay attention that the ‘Topogr aphycoordinates’ list at the bottom window had been replaced by a new,empty list, of the ‘Designed coordinates’.

Entering the center line IP data.There are several methods of entering the IP center line data. We willstudy two:

Method A:In AutoCAD, draw a Polyline (2D Polyline) that will serve as the Horizontal

Alignment of the center line.Choose ‘Select’ from the table on the right (with the list of ‘Select, ‘Locate’,‘Pick’, ‘Unused’). In the AutoCAD's command line, press 'Enter' for <Polyline>.Move to the drawing area and choose the drawn Polyline and click ‘Enter’.The table from the window on the right will fill with the center line IP list.

Every vertex in the Polyline will be set as the IP of the center line, and inthe bottom window their coordinates list will appear.

* Note : The names of the IP points to the center line will be determined by:‘xIPy’, with ‘x’ as the center line number, and ‘y’ as the IP number. In thefirst center line chosen, (first act of ‘Select’), the IP’s will b e numbered inthe following fashion: 1IP1, 1IP2, 1IP3, 1IP4, and so on. In each new act of‘Select’, the ‘x’ will grow.








Method B :In the bottom window, type the IP center line list. For example:

256123.76175143.56IP1256325.56175200.40IP2256327.12175256.00IP3

Type in the IP names as they were typed in the bottom list in the table fromthe right. Type the IP under the labeling – ‘IP’ in the table. In this examplewe will enter the list in the following manner:

Entering the radius of the center line . The next step in the Horizontal Alignment is defining the radiuses at the IPpoints. If we do not define them, the program will regard the radiuses as – 0.Enter the desired radius for each of the IP’s in the ri ght table. Do not definea radius for the first and last radius.Click on the ‘ Apply ’ button from the right. The ‘Layout & contours’ windowwill open.Click ‘OK’ again in the window that opens (we will not detail here the usesof this window. Later on we will return to this window and explain itsusage).

The program will create the Horizontal Alignment of the center line, that willappear inseveral separate layers. Next to each IP will appear it’s coordinate, andnext to each arc – the arc data.

To assimilate the example (see two previous chapters), move a polyline inthe projectvalley (surveying file \Samples\Sample7.Tco). Transfer the Polyline toinclude both the lines and the arcs (choose \Arc\ during the drawing of the

– Polyline). Entering : Clothoid

Entering clothoides :To create clothoides in the center line, enter the transition length in theentrance to the arc, in the field ‘ Clot.In’ , and the length of the transition

curve exiting the arc, in the field ‘ Clot.Out’ .








After entering the cloth oides click ‘ Apply ’ and ‘ OK ’ to see all the changeson the drawing.

After entering the clothoides and clicking ‘ Apply ’, you will notice thefollowing changes on the arc:TS - transition from a straight segment to the transition curveSC - transition from a transition arc to a full curveCS - transition from a full curve to an exit transition arcST – exit from a transition curve back to a straight segment

Changing the IP Location .

The program binds the bottom list, in which appears the center linecoordinates, and the top list (right), of the center line definition, accordingto points names. Therefore, as long as you keep similar name points, bothin the top and bottom list, this connection will be kept. Changing thecoordinate of a certain point, i n the bottom list, and clicking ‘OK’ in the rightwindow, and again ‘OK’ in the window that opens, will move the entirecenter line alignment according to the new location. Now you will see howto move IP not by manually changing the coordinate, but by making agraphic change:

From the bottom window choose ‘Move’ from the list (Unused, Locate, Picketc.).For AutoCAD users only:Move to the drawing and chose the point you wish to move (you will noticethat the ‘Object Snap’ for ‘Node’ has been operated). Mark the reference point for movement (most likely that you will chooseagain the same point itself as the relevancy point).Mark the location to where you wish to move the point.

To complete this action, click on the button. This point will move to itsnew location.Click 'Apply' from the right window, and 'Ok' in the window that opens. Thecenter line will move according to the new location of the IP.

For users of the Stand Alone version:Move to the drawing and chose the desired point (enter the point in thesquare that appears).Mark the new location of the IP.

Click from the toolbar above the drawing.Click ‘Apply ’ from the right window, and 'Ok' in the window that opens. Thecenter line will move according to the new location of the IP.

When you finish defining the Horizontal Alignment, click ‘ Close ’.








Additional functions

- 'Load from text file ' – reading the center line data fromDis/LLD/xml/Rds type file.

– deleting all center line data . A warning will appear before thisfunction is activated.

– erasing a single IP in the center line . After erasing the IP, click‘OK’, and in the window that opens, click ‘OK’ again, to get the new centerline alignment.

- Reversal order of IP's (reversal of the road's direction). After clickingthis button, the program will alter the order of IP's. First IP will become last.on the coordinates' list - after creating the IP, the program will construct theroad's layout in the opposite direction (click on 'Apply' and 'OK').

- Reorder all roads . This option is very useful when dealing with aproject that includes multi roads, and whereas the numbering of the roadsor IPs are not in order (for example, if we have deleted a certain road fromthe project and later add some new roads, the prefix of the IP's will not befollowing between the roads). To maintain the order in the project you canuse this option. After pressing the button, a window with the followingoptions will be opened:

Option 1: Changing the numbers in the prefix and suffix of each IP(xIPy).Check the option "Rename roads numbers (xIPy) first number (X)".In the field, enter the first number (X) that will represent the current road'sIPs prefixes. To apply the changes to the entire roads in the project (notonly the current road) check the "Apply changes to all roads" option). Forexample enter 1.To renumber the inside numbering of IPs in each road (Y), check the"Rename IPs numbers (xIPy) first number (Y)" option, and enter the firstnumber in the field. For the example enter 0.When checking the above option, another option labeled "Fit IPs names inlayout boxed to IP" will appear. Checking this option will fit the insidenumber in each IP box (in the layout drawing) to the Y value.

After pressing OK, the IPs numbers will change according to the settingsyou have entered.

Option 2: Changing the numbers from the first IP to the last IP at a

serial order (no roads numbers).Check the option: Rename all IPs in all roads without prefix number.








Enter the number of the first IP in the first road. For example you can enter0.

After pressing OK, please notice that the first road's IPs is numbered as:IP0, IP1, IP2…, the second road's IPs starts after the last IP number of thefirst road and so on.

Additional options in this window:Clear unused IPs from coordinates list – Checking this option andpressing OK will clear all the points (from the lower coordinates list) thattheir names contain the letters 'IP' and that are not included in one of theroads. This option is very useful after deleting roads from a project.Update layout automatically- Checking this option and pressing OK willperform a layout creation in addition to other changes applied in thewindow.

- Options button – click on this button to open a new window. In thiswindow you can determine these settings:

Changing the ‘Scale’ font size .In order to change the font size in the center line data, choose your desiredscale from the list. To do so click on the small arrow button next to thegiven number in the box, and choose your desired font size (the scale is inmeter units according to the ratio of 1:X, with ‘X’ as the chosen size). Afterselecting click ‘OK’ to close this window. To change the drawing, you willneed to click again on the ‘ Apply ’ button from the righ t, and ‘OK’ in thewindow that opens.

Create Layout - the format of layout's drawing.2D Polyline + bulges - the software will draw the layout lines without notingelevation. This option is useful when the drawing file has to be reduced insize, because the software will draw fewer points on the line and usebulges (radiuses) to create curviness.3D Polyline - the software will draw the layout line with elevation but willalso create the line of a larger number of points because in 3D mode,Drawing of Polyline comprised of radiuses is impossible.

Changing the IP numbering when working with ‘Pick’ (“IP counter incoordinates”). You can define the Horizontal Alignment by selecting ‘pick’ from the list(see previous window – ‘Pick’, ‘Select’, ‘Locate’ et c.). To determine the IPnumbering as it will be done using ‘Pick’, enter the desired number. Thenext time you use ‘pick’, the IP numbering will be determined by thenumber entered.

IP counter in layout - changing the IP numbering in layout. For every center line, the program numbers an IP starting from –0 in anascending order. We will emphasize that there is no connection between








the coordinate IP name as it appears in the center line alignment/ designedcoordinates list, and the IP numbering on this layout. The assumption isthat it is possible that in the table (IP Radius Clothoid) will appear the nameof a certain point (that must be identical to the name that appears in the listfrom the bottom window), and on this layout, will appear a differentnumbering for the same IP. Entering a number in this current field willdetermine the number from which the IP names will be picked for thecurrent center line on the layout.

Define Sections - determination of cross sections. The software enablesto determine the cross section distribution without defining the sections'data itself. After clicking on this window, the following options will bedisplayed:

Sections format - sections numbering format. The first option is"Format1", displaying the sections' names in ascending order from thename of the first section onwards. In choosing "Format2" by altering theparameters displayed, the software will display the name of the section asfollows: station+ KM, for example: the value at field KM remains 0, thesoftware will display the sections as follows: 0+000, 0+025… 1+1000,1+025… Distance between sections - the distance between the cross sections. Asthe next chapters demonstrate, you can define serial cross sections, non-serial cross section, or any combination of both methods.

Show all sections - this option will instruct the program to display on thelayout all the cross-sections' names (if cross-sections are defined and thedistance between them is not necessarily serial).Show sections by steps - this option will instruct the software to display onthe layout only the cross-sections in the constant running distances definedin option "Distance between sections".Show slopes on edges - in the event of a steep slope at the edges'vicinity. The software will outline lines (beard) according to necessity.Show side slopes – this option is possible when "Outside layout" option ismarked. This option is displayed on the road over the section's mark.

Show stations of tangents - the software will mark the tangents' locationin addition to the sections.

Cross-sections display Inside layout - The sections' names will appear on the layout near thecenterline.Outside layout - The sections' names will appear outside the layout.

Direction of the sections' names display (Format2 only) Parallel to C.L. - the sections' names will appear in parallel to thecenterline.

Perpendicular to C.L . - the sections' names will appear perpendicularly tothe centerline.








Text position :

According to the road's direction – The text along the road (sections'names, elevations etc.) will be written either to the left or to the right of theC.L, automatically defined by the software. Fixed to the right – The text along the road will always be written at theright side of the C.L.Fixed to the left – The text along the road will always be written at the leftside of the C.L.

Angle's units - angle's format on the road's elevations.Grads - the elevations' values will be displayed in grads.Degrees - the elevations' values will be displayed in degrees.

IP's dataIP's data in standard mode - the data display mode with text only. Markthe fields to be displayed on the layout.

IP's data in blocks modeShow only coordinates - the software will display all coordinates withblocks. Show all data - the software will display all road and coordinates' datausing blocks.

Click ‘OK’ to confirm the changes, and ‘Cancel’ to leave without changes.

Display the transition point between Cut Zone and Fill Zone in theHorizontal Alignment:

From CivilCAD mai n menu, go to ‘Roads Horizontal Alignment’ .

Click the ‘Options’ button.

Checkmark the 'Cut/Fill Zone Display' option.


In ‘Roads Horizontal Alignment’ menu, click the 'Apply' button and

then the 'OK' button .

CivilCAD will display a line representing the transition point from cut to

fill or from fill to cut along the road's alignment.








Pick, Locate.The ‘Pick’ and ‘Locate’ commands enable a graphic definition of the centerline, in addition to the ‘Select’ functio n that has been studied at thebeginning of the chapter. We will show how to use these functions.

Using ‘Pick’ :Choose ‘Pick’ from the list. Move to the drawing area, and begin to mark the center line. When youfinish, click ‘Set’ and ‘Enter’ (in the Stan d-Alone version click on the rightbutton to finish).Continue to insert radiuses and other road design steps.

Using ‘Locate’ :Choose ‘Locate’ from the list. Move to the drawing area and mark the points in the drawing that will formthe IP. If you are us ing AutoCAD version, notice that in ‘Object Snap’ to‘Node’ has been automatically activated. In the Stand -Alone version, thecursor will turn into a square into which you should enter the chosenpoints. When you finish, click ‘Set’ and ‘Enter’ (in the Sta nd-Alone version,click on the right button).Continue to insert radiuses and go through the remaining stages of Roadsdesign.

The main difference between ‘Pick’ and ‘Locate’ is that ‘Pick’ createsnew points, while locate’ chooses points that exist in t he database. Theadvantage of ‘locate’ is that it does not “weight down” the list. Anotherimportant advantage is the addition of two center line by ‘Locate’, to thesame point, so that if you move this point, the two center ines will movetogether.

- Pick Station – click the button and then click on the center line in thehorizontal alignment to display station in AutoCAD command line.

To add this station as an intermediate section to Cross Sections list – type'A' (for Add), click the 'Enter' button and then the 'O.K.' button.The station will be added to the Cross Sections list with nor Existing G.L. orDesigned data.

Horizontal alignment advanced design tools:

CivilCAD 2014 Software enables an easy way to design horizontalalignment layout by using advanced tools. These tools enable designing acomplete horizontal alignment layout by connecting lines and arcs. Afterthe design is complete, CivilCAD 2014 can define the Road's layout in the

project by selecting the design segments from the drawing. First, we willexplain all these commands:








Line Line Curve – Connecting a curve between two lines.

Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->Line_Line_Curve.

AutoCAD* will display: " Select first line" , select the first line from thedrawing.

AutoCAD will display: "Select second line" , select the second line fromthe drawing.

AutoCAD will display: "Enter cloto in (0) **" , Insert the length of thetransition-curve in the entrance to the arc and press Enter.

AutoCAD will display: "Enter radius" , Insert the arc's radius value for thecurve and press Enter.

AutoCAD will display: " Enter cloto out (0)", Insert the length of thetransition-curve exiting the arc and press Enter.In case a wrong radius value was entered and a tangent between the linescan't be created, CivilCAD 2014 will display message: "Tangent not online".

* All the commands identicalness for both AutoCAD and IntelliCAD.** Pressing enter without inserting a value will create an arc without a transition

curve (Clot. length 0).

Line Line ReCurve – Connecting a reversed curve between twolines. Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->Line_Line_ReCurve.

AutoCAD will display: " Select first line" , select the first line from thedrawing.


AutoCAD will display: "Enter cloto (0)" , Insert the lengths for transition-curve in the entrance and exit of the arc (same length) and press Enter.

AutoCAD will display: "Enter radius" , Insert the arc's radius value for the

curve and press Enter.In case a wrong radius value was entered and a tangent between the linescan't be created, CivilCAD 2014 will display message: "Tangent not online".

Line Line Fit Cloto (Radius) – Connecting a curve between twolines without arc, from 2 joined transition curves and by insertingtheir radius value. Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->Line_Line_Fit_Cloto(Rad).










AutoCAD will display: "Enter radius" , Insert a maximum radius value forthe curve and press Enter.In case a wrong radius value was entered and a tangent between the linescan't be created, CivilCAD 2014 will display message: "Tangent not online".

Line Line Fit Cloto (Len) – Connecting a curve between two lineswithout arc, from 2 joined transition curves and by inserting theirlength value. Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignment

tools->Line_Line_Fit_Cloto(Len). AutoCAD will display: " Select first line" , select the first line from thedrawing.


AutoCAD will display: "Enter cloto in (0)" , Insert length for the firsttransition-curve and press Enter.

AutoCAD will display: "Enter cloto out (0)" , Insert length for the secondtransition-curve and press Enter.In case wrong length values were entered, CivilCAD 2014 will displaymessage: "Tangent not on line".

Line Line Fit ReCloto – Connecting a reversed curve between twolines without arc, from 2 joined transition curves and by insertingtheir radius value. Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->Line_Line_Fit_Recloto.


AutoCAD will display: "Select second line" , select the second line from

the drawing. AutoCAD will display: "Enter radius" , Insert a maximum radius value forthe curve and press Enter.In case a wrong radius value was entered and a tangent between the linescan't be created, CivilCAD 2014 will display message: "Tangent not online".

Line Arc Line Fit Cloto – Connecting a curve from two lines andarc, by transition-curves.

Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->Line_Arc_Line_Fit_Cloto.









AutoCAD will display: " Select arc" , select the arc from the drawing. AutoCAD will display: "Select second line" , select the second line fromthe drawing.In case the curve can't be solved, CivilCAD 2014 will display message:"Can't create requested segment ".

Line Arc Line Fit ReCloto – Connecting a reversed curve from twolines and arc, by transition-curves. Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->Line_Arc_Line_Fit_ReCloto.


AutoCAD will display: " Select arc" , select the arc from the drawing. AutoCAD will display: "Select second line" , select the second line fromthe drawing.In case the curve can't be solved, CivilCAD 2014 will display message:"Can't create requested segment ".

Arc Arc Fit Tangent (Clo) – Connecting two arcs by tangent and

two transition curves and by inserting the transition curves' lengths. Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->Arc_Arc_Fit_Tangent(Clo).

AutoCAD will display: " Select first arc" , select the first arc from thedrawing.

AutoCAD will display: " Select second arc" , select the second arc from thedrawing.

AutoCAD will display: "Enter cloto out (0)" , Insert length for the transition-curve exiting the first arc and press Enter.

AutoCAD will display: "Enter cloto in (0)" , Insert length for the transition-curve in the entrance to the second arc and press Enter. In case the curve can't be solved, CivilCAD 2014 will display message:"Can't create requested segment ".

Arc Arc Fit Tangent (Len) – Connecting two arcs by tangent andtwo transition curves and by inserting the tangent's length. Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->Arc_Arc_Fit_Tangent(Len).


AutoCAD will display: " Select second arc" , select the second arc from thedrawing.








AutoCAD will display: "Enter length" , Insert length for the line betweenthe 2 tangents and press Enter.In case the curve can't be solved, CivilCAD 2014 will display message:"Can't create requested segment ".

Arc Point Fit Tangent – Connecting point to arc by tangent(completing tangent by selecting a point). Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->Arc_Point_Fit_Tangent.

AutoCAD will display: " Select arc" , select the arc from the drawing. AutoCAD will display: " Select point" , select the end point of the tangent. AutoCAD will display: "Enter cloto (0)" , Insert length for the transition-

curve exiting the arc and press Enter.In case of inserting irrational values, CivilCAD 2014 will display message:"Can't create requested segment ".

LineEdge Line Fit Arc – Connecting line-edge* to a tangent byarc**. Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->LineEdge_Line_Fit_Arc.

AutoCAD will display: " Select first line" , select the line which its edge

connects to the arc. AutoCAD will display: " Select second" , select the tangent to the arc.

* The arc will be connected to the Edge of the first line selected.** The arc will be tangential to the second line selected.*** No transition curves values will be given in this function.

LineEdge Point Fit Arc – Connecting line-edge to a specific pointby arc. Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignment

tools->LineEdge_Point_Fit_Arc. AutoCAD will display: " Select first line" , select the line which its edgeconnects to the arc.

AutoCAD will display: " Pick point" , select the point which the arc willconnect to.

LineEdge Radius Fit Arc – Connecting Line edge to arc by givenradius. Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->LineEdge_Radius_Fit_Arc.








AutoCAD will display: " Select first line" , select the line which its edgeconnects to the arc.

AutoCAD will display: " Pick side" , select side to define the arc directionfrom the line (left or right).

AutoCAD will display: "Enter radius" , Insert the arc's radius value andpress Enter.

Line_Arc Fit Clotho - create a clothoid between line and arc.

Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->Line_Arc_Fit Clotho.

AutoCAD will display: " Select line" , select the line which its edge connectsto the arc.

AutoCAD will display: " Select arc" , select the arc.CivilCAD will create a line and an arc with a clothoid between them.

Connect arc – Connect two arcs in a row.

Press this button or from the main menu: Roads->Horizontal alignmenttools->Connect arc.


AutoCAD will display: " Select second arc" , select the second arc from the

drawing.CivilCAD will create two arcs with in a row.

Creating the road's layout from the drawing

After finishing defining the layout by the tools above, we will create theroad's layout from it. To do so, perform the following steps:

From the main menu, activate: Roads->Horizontal alignment.Select the desired road name from the list above.Press "Select".

AutoCAD will display: " Enter an option (<Polyline>/Segment)" , Press "S"and Enter.Select each segment from the drawing by order. Notice that the programmarked the segments by circles on the tangents. After each selection theprogram will add an arrow mark near the segment.Press Enter to finish.CivilCAD 2014 will automatically fill the IP's table and insert the radiusesand transition-curves values accordingly.To create the layout press Apply. A small window will appear, press OK.








Vertical Alignment

After the definition of the horizontal alignment of the road, the longitudinalsection should be defined. CivilCAD 2014 enables to plan the longitudinalsection in two methods:Planning on the software's drawing environment (stand-aloneenvironment).Planning on AutoCAD environment (available in AutoCAD version 2000and up).In order to define the work method, follow these steps:From the Main menu activate: File-> Configuration.Near caption "Vertical alignment mode", choose one of the followingoptions:Stand alone - Working in the drawing environment of the software (oldversion).Drawing environment interface - AutoCAD work environment.

Tip: For both methods it is recommended to read the entire chapter.

Method 1 – Planning on the software's drawing environment

For demonstrational purposes, Stand alone option is chosen. The secondoption will be explained in the next clause.

From the main menu activate: ‘Roads -> Vertical Alignment’ . TheVertical Alignment window will open. This window is divided into :The drawing area – the main area of this window (the black screen).The existing ground data table – the table from the left down (topo).The designed data table – the right bottom table.The function window - the window on the right.

Click ‘Apply' in the right window. The program will move along theHorizontal Alignment and compute the heights of the Vertical Alignment.These heights appear in the existing status ‘Topo’ window (left bottomtable), as a function of station and height. In the drawing window, the

section drawing will appear vertically – existing status.

We will clarify number of points :The section is given in a distorted scale of length in relation to height,mentioned in the field ‘Height factor’.The heights on the table at the bottom of the section appear according tothe location of the cross sections. If, for example, the cross sectionsappear every 20 meters, the heights in the vertical alignment will appearevery 20 meters. In order to control the given height’s location, press theoption button in the right window, and change the data interval. Press 'OK'and 'Apply' to effect changes.

Even if the Horizontal Alignment does not exist, or we do not have thetopography, the section can be created by manually entering the data into








the topography coordinates table. To do so, enter the distance station (ST)data, and elevation (Elev.) into the table. To get the section after the datahas been entered, click ' Apply ' in the right window. If the Vertical

Alignment received was found partly incorrect, due to incorrect topographydata, you can edit the existing topography coordinates data, manually. Inorder to erase a line from the table, stand on the serial number column ofthe desired row (the column to the left), and click ‘Del’ (in the keyboard).The line will be erased. To get the change on the drawing, click 'Apply' from the window on the right.

Designing the vertical IP:

A vertical design of the section can be done graphically, by entering of datain t table or using both methods simultaneously:

Mehtod A - entering data in the table:The ‘Design data’ table (bottom right table), is divided into the followingcolumns - station (ST), elevation (Ele), a slope between segments given inpercentage (Slope%), and the length of the vertical arc (2T).Enter this data into the table, while defining the station and elevation forevery segment. The program will compute the slope between every twosegments, and present it to the relevant segment. Instead ofelevation, you can enter the slope from a previous segment, and then theprogram will enter the elevation column. To delete an error line, stand withyour mouse on the serial number column (the left column) at the relevantline and press ‘Del’. To get the designed section press ‘Apply' .

Method B – designing the vertical alignment graphicallyThere are two methods to draw the designed data on the existingtopography status:Choose ‘ Pick ’ from the bottom list (Unused, Pick, Locate, Overwrite). Moveto the drawing area, stand on the most left side of the section and (you candeviate a bit left of the existing topography state), and click your mousebutton. The point you have selected will be set as the vertical IP and its

data will appear in the ‘Design Table (bottom). Continue to draw thevertical alignment. While moving on the drawing area, you will see yourexact location, height and distance, under the ‘St’ and ‘Elevation’ labels, t othe right of the drawing. When you finish your drawing click ‘ Apply ’ fromthe right window.

Note. If you choose a point outside the existing topography borders, fromthe left or from the right, the program will determine the IP, at the mostextreme station (0 to the left, or end of natural ground to the right) in thesame elevation you were in.

Choose ‘ Locate ' from the bottom list (Unused, Pick, Locate, Overwrite).Using ‘Locate’ is very similar to using ‘Pick’, except for when you choose








an IP at a certain station, it will be set at the exact existing topographyelevation status at the same distance.Using ‘Move’ – if you wish to move a vertical existing IP to a new location,do so using ‘Move’. From the bottom table, mark the IP line you wish tomove and, choose ‘Move’ from the list and move to the drawing and setthe new IP location. Click ‘Apply’ from the window on the right to renewthe drawing.

It is also possible to combine the two methods, (manual feeding andgraphic design). After the graphic section had been selected, it will bepossible to change the data received in the bottom window and to click‘OK’ to receive the changes (you can, for example, change the slope at acertain segment. Click ‘Enter’ to change the height according to the sl ope,and click ‘OK’ to update the drawing). The graphic design is from the last IP to the new IP continued. To add anIP in the middle of a section, mark with your mouse the list of previous IPs(the point after the new point you wish to add), move to the drawing andmark the new IP. The new point will be added to the table at the desirablelocation. Click ‘ Apply ’ from the right to fix the drawing.

Vertical Arc Design:

After you have added the vertical IPs design data, it is time to add thevertical arc in the most right column (2T). You can enter the arc data intwo ways:the length of the arc – the length of the arc will be give as a function of thedistance between the tangents f the vertical arc. After entering the dataclick ‘Apply ’ in the right wi ndow to update the drawing 1 the radius of the arc – in order to enter the vertical radius of the arc(instead o f length), click with your mouse on the ‘2T’ labeling (the columnheading). The label will switch to ‘R’. Now you can enter the radius of thear c. Another click on ‘R’, will return you to work at – ‘2T’.

To check this out for yourself, enter the following data in the design table.

At the end click ‘Apply’ .

Click 'Close' from the right window to finish the vertical alignment design.








Method 2 – Planning on the AutoCAD environment

In the previous clause we explained how to plan the longitudinal section byusing an independent drawing environment (without AutoCAD software). inthis clause, we'll explain the planning possibilities with AutoCAD (version2000 and up).

Activate section's window Roads ->Vertical Alignment and continueaccording to following steps:*noticed , that the drawing area is the AutoCAD window. The layout islocated in a different drawing that is located under the 'Vertical Alignment'window.Click ' Apply' from the right window – the program will go through the

length of the road and calculate the vertical alignment's elevations. Theseelevations will appear in the existing table (the lower left table). Theexisting G.L drawing will appear in the drawing window.We will clarify number of points:The drawing scale is been defined according to the values in the 'Height'and 'Length' fields (under the 'View' caption).By default, the elevations, located in the drawing's table, appear accordingto the cross sections' locations. If the cross sections are each 20m – thevertical alignment elevations will appear each 20m'. To control theelevations' locations (without changing the cross sections) follow thesesteps:

Click button . Enter the request distance in the 'Data intervals' field.To close the window click 'Ok'.Click 'Apply' in the right window to refresh the drawing.If no topography exists, you may create the profile through manual dataentering into the existing table. To do so enter the data of station (St) andelevation (Elev.). Click 'Apply' in the right window to receive the section.If received the incorrect vertical section, as a result of wrong topography,you can change the existing data manually. To erase a row from the table,stand with the mouse on the serial number's column of the row (the leftcolumn) and press Del. The row will be erased. Click 'Apply' in the rightwindow to refresh the drawing.

Vertical IPs design

You can design the vertical alignment by either entering data into the tableor drawing.

Entering data into the table

The design table includes the following columns:serial number (the left column without the title);Station (St).Elevation (Elev.).








Slope between the segments (Slope %); Arc length (2T).

Enter the data into the table. Start by entering the first IP's station(probably '0') and elevation. Continue to the second row and enter the nextIP's station followed by either its elevation or the slope from the previousstation. Continue to the end of the profile & press 'Apply' to refresh thedrawing (you can press 'Apply' to see the result at every stage of thedesign).

Tip: When entering data in the table, press 'Enter' after each databeen entered.

Planning on the AutoCAD environment

Draw your vertical alignment in 'VerEdit' layer (when entering to thewindow will be the current layer) by using a 'Polyline'. To build the profile,press 'Apply'. The software will translate your 'Polyline' into the designedtable (below) and a drawing of the profile will appear. Please notice that anew 'Design' layer has been created under the 'VerEdit' layer.

We will clarify number of points:You can continue and change the profile by editing the profile's 'Polyline'('VerEdit' layer). Press 'Apply' to apply your changes.You can change the data in the table below and affect the drawing bypressing 'Apply'.When drawing your profile's 'Polyline' do not enter arcs. The Verticalcurves will be defined in the lower design table (for more details see formerclause).Entering changes in the table and the drawing in the same phase is notpossible. Press 'Apply' after changing the 'Polyline' or changing the table (ifyou will change the 'Polyline' and change the table without pressing 'Apply'between the actions, the changes in the 'Polyline' will be discarded).

Design of vertical curvesInsertion data into the table

Add the data of the vertical curves into the right column (2T). You mayenter the data by two ways:Length of curve – will given as the function of the distance betweentangent points of the vertical curve. After entering the data, click Apply inthe right window for drawing updates.Radius of curve – to insert radius of the vertical curves (instead of length),click on the caption 2T (on the title of column). The caption will turn into R.Now enter the curve's radius. Another pressing on the caption R will return

it back to 2T.For illustration insert the following data and press Apply .








Marking the point where the arc will pass through (in AutoCAD workenvironment only)

Another way to define a curve is to mark a point where the arc will gothrough:In the design table, mark the line of the desired curve.

Click on the button located on the left of the design table.Go to the AutoCAD window and mark the point which the arc will passthrough. If the software is unable to complete this action because of aninvalid choice, the notice: " No such a curve " will appear.

After the point is chosen, the software will calculate the new radius valueand update it in the Design table.In order to update the drawing, click ' Apply ' on the right window.

Additional functions:

Functions at the lower window

Design table:

Pick point - checking ground level in a specified point. After clickingthe button, choose the desired point in the drawing. The software willdisplay over the Design table, the following data:Station - the station of this point.Elevation - the elevation of the point.Slp(T) - the slope of existing ground level.

Slp (D) - the slope of designated ground level at current point.

Define designed slope - this action enables to design the profile at a certain slope. In order to do so, execute the following steps:Click on the button.In the AutoCAD's command line, type the desired slope's value & 'Enter'.Switch the AutoCAD to ORTHO mode (F8).Draw the profile in the chosen slope.

Erase all data – erase all the data from the table. A warning notice willappear before execution.








dH – Changing the profile elevation by a fixed value. To use this optionfollow these steps:

Click on the ‘dH’ button . A new window will be opened.In the dH field (lower part of the window), enter the height difference. Entera positive value to higher the profile or negative value for lowering it.In the list, choose the segments you want to change. You can press 'A'(All) button to choose all.Click ‘Ok ’ to activate.

Topography table:

Erase all data – erase all the data from the table. A warning notice willappear before execution.

Read data from the topography contours – click on this button toopen the window. From this window, choose the table to which thetopography data will be entered, the Existing G.L (Topography) table, orthe Designed G.L (Design) table . Click ‘OK’ to continue . The data will beread from the topography and will be entered into the table accordingly.

Read data from the designed contours – click on this button to open

the window. From this window, choose the table to which the design datawill be entered, the Existing G.L (Topography) table, or the Designed G.L(Design) table . Click ‘OK’ to continue. The data will be read from thedesigned contours and will be entered into the table accordingly.

Copying the station of the Topography table into the Design table- Clicking this button will copy the stations only (without the height) fromthe Topography table into the Design table.

Functions at the right window

Input of vertical alignment section data from a text file (ASCII) – ‘Load from text file’ – this button reads the existing topography data intothe table (the bottom left table) out of a simple text file, which holds a list ofstations and height. The file structure has to be of lines, with station andheight separated by a space/comma.

Saving the vertical alignment data at a text file (ASCII) – the ‘Savefile’ button – this button saves the existing topography data read from thetopography (or entered manually), into the text file. The structure of the text

file is a list of stations and height.








Adding ditch edges data to the vertical alignment – the ‘Get edges’ button – CivilCAD 2014 can be used for designing a ditch/ regulating

rivers. This design will be done similar to Roads design, except that thevertical alignment will be used as ‘Invert level’ (IL) of the bottom of theditch. The program can also add the vertical alignment of the ditchedges/river from left to right, to the vertical alignment of the ditch. This isthe order of commands for receiving these vertical alignments:Define the vertical alignment of the bottom of the ditch (as detailed in thissection).Move to the Cross sections and regulate the cross sections of theditch/river (for details see section ‘The Cross sections’). Return to the vertical alignment window and click this button. The programwill read the design data from the cross sections of the ditch edges, and

add them to the vertical alignment – as a drawing and as additional lines tothe bottom table.

Extracting topographic elevations on a specified offset - In orderto display the existing ground level in a specified distance from thecenterline, execute the following steps:Mark option G.L. at "Offset" and type in the field on the right of this optionthe distance from the left side of the centerline.Mark option G.L. at "Offset" and type in the field on the right of this optionthe distance from the right side of the centerline.

After filling this data click ' Apply '. The software will add these layers on topof the section.

‘Accurate/By sections’ – Introducing an accurate vertical alignment orby-sections only - When CivilCAD 2014 reads the vertical alignment fromthe topography, it does it accurately, effected by the density of themeasured points (the program builds the vertical alignment according tothe meeting point of the triangle sides it creates from the measuring file).You can see the stations in which the program had sampled the heights,from the bottom left (topo) table. At times, even if the sample is accurate, isnot good for the user (for example: in the measuring file there was a

mistake that appears in the vertical alignment, but it is not relevant since itis not in any one of the Cross sections). M oving from ‘Accurate’ to ‘Bysections’, will solve this problem in the following way: Accurate – an accurate sample of the section. The section drawing linewill accurate according to the topography sample. The heights from thebottom table will appear according to the cross sections (default – every 20meters), and in addition heights will appear at critical points.By sections – An accurate sample of the section, but the drawing line ofthe section will be built according to heights at cross sections only. Thebottom table will remain the same.The advantage to this system is “smoothing” the ve rtical alignment. Itsdisadvantage is lack of accuracy.








Centerline/DitchR/DitchL - moving between the vertical alignmentdesign of the center line /right side ditch/left side ditch - CivilCAD2014 enables separation between the vertical alignment definition of thecenter line, and the IL definition of the bottom of the ditch, to the left or rightof the center line, if it exists. To move to an IL definition of one of theditches, you can choose your desired ditch (to learn about the full processof defining side ditches, see section “Side ditches”, from this chapter).

Include R. Ditch/ L. Ditch – if there is a ditch design in the cross sectionsof the current road, and these options are marked, the program will presentthe ‘Invert level’ on the section of t he ditch bottom on the left and right side,according to the marks ‘R.Ditch’ -right and ‘L.Ditch -left’.

Unlock datum (Work in AutoCAD window only) - ff the drawing of thesection exceeds into the data table, click this option and then click "Apply".The software will elevate the section's net so the lines in the drawing willnot exceed into the data. If this option is unmarked, the net's elevation willbe "Locked".

View - establishing a scale for the section's display. CivilCAD 2014enables to determine the scale in which the section in the drawing windowwill be presented. Type the desired scale in fields: Elevation, Length(Under caption "View") and click ' Apply ' to update the drawing.

Note : Changing the View scales when designing is dangerous and candamage your design. It is recommended to define the View scales beforestarting the design.

Functions at the drawing window

Changing the display color – it is possible to change for every layer inthe display – its color, by clicking on any one of the color buttons located atthe upper right-hand side of the drawing window. Clicking on any one ofthese colors, will open the ‘Color’ window, from which the desired color can

be chosen. The colors are divided as so:C.L – Center Level – designed vertical alignmentG.L – Ground Level – existing status sectionD.R – Ditch Right – Right ditch sectionD.L. – Ditch Left – Left ditch section

Note : the color buttons will not appear when working with AutoCADenvironment. You can change the layer's colors from the AutoCAD layers'list.








Zoom Extents – viewing the entire section. Clicking on this button willreturn the view option for the entire drawing. In case the user had moved

the drawing left/right using the scroll bars, or decreased/increased thedrawing by clicking the left/right button in the drawing area, clicking the Ebutton will return viewer ship to the entire drawing area.

Note : The zoom extents button will not appear when working with AutoCAD environment. Instead use the regular zooming commands in AutoCAD.

Save project - save the entire project's data.

Dividing the section into frames (paper space) or DXF files forprintouts

Creation of DXF files

Press the button located in the toolbar over the drawing window.In the opened window, define the Elevation's and Length's scale. The scaleis in 1: X. In the elevation box, type the scale for the Elevation (example:100) and in the length box, type length's scale (example: 1000).In order to create a DXF file without division, choose option "No division"under the caption 'Divide by paper size'. if you wish to divide according tothe paper's size, choose from the list the desired page size. To continue,click "OK".In the opened dialogue box, enter the drawing file's name. Click ' Save' tosave the file.

Dividing the profile into sheets

CivilCAD 2014 enables division of longitudinal section to several sheetsautomatically. This option is possible only in working with AutoCAD 2000version and up. In order to divide the section to sheets, execute thefollowing steps:

Click on the button of the toolbar over the drawing's window. In theopened window establish the following definitions:Type the scale parameter below caption ' Scale '.Choose the sheet’s size for dividing near caption 'Divide by paper size' .To include in the sheet the longitudinal alignment on the same section,mark option Show layout .To include the section itself in the sheet, mark option Show sections .Type overlapping distance between the sheets near caption 'Paperoverlapping'.








Type the net’s grid near caption 'Frames grid steps' .In order to import a block file containing the north arrow, click on the buttonnear the caption 'Table block' and choose the file’s location. If the file’slocation was chosen, click the b lock’s location on the right or left side ofTable-Block chart in option 'Table position' .Type the section’s range to appear in the sheets below caption 'Range '. Tocontinue, click 'OK'.The software will create the sheet division in 'Paper space' .

Roads intersections on Vertical Alignment

Along the profile, built by Vertical Alignment , the intersection of thepresent road with other roads will be shown 1

On the intersection points, flags will appear indicating the direction of theother road (flags in two directions indicate that the present road crossesthe other road).The name of the intersecting road, the station of intersection point and thedesigned elevation of the other road, at the intersection point, will beprinted beside the flags

Notes : In case that the other road is defined only by horizontal alignment, withoutdesigned profile, the existing ground level will be printed instead designedelevation.Upon changing the design of the roads, data of the intersection points willbe updated accordingly 1 In case that the other road is fully defined including designed profile, theflag will include the road's profile of the other road in the intersection point.








Alternative Vertical Alignment

In order to design alternatives for Vertical Alignment,From CivilCAD main menu’ go to 'Roads Vertical Alignment'.

Click on ‘Add new alternative’ button and enter a name to thealternative (e.g. Alternative1).Click ‘OK’ and then design the alternative vertical alignment. To define the alternative a s the centerline, click on the ‘Set as centerline’

button . ‘Set as centerline’ window will open. Click on the desired operation:

Note: The alternative layer will remain ‘VerEdit’ but clicking on ‘Apply’

button will update only the alternative table and drawing.To also update the Cross sections, the alternative must be set ascenterline.

Note: Some buttons will be enabled only after designing an alternative

.

Every alternative will appear at the ‘Layer Properties Manager’window in a separate layer according to the alternative’s name.

To erase an alternative, click on the ‘Erase current alternative’ buttonand click ‘OK’.

To delete all alternatives, click on the ‘Delete all alternative’ button and

click ‘OK’.

To copy/paste data between alt ernatives/centerline, use the ‘Copy/Paste’

buttons .








Cross sections

Designing cross sections is the most complex part of Roads design. Wewill show here how to define a typical section, project it along the entireroad, define numerous typical sections, define super-elevations etc.

Having defined a vertical alignment for the road (previous section), we willcontinue to define the ‘Cross sections’.

Activate: ‘ Roads-> Cross sections ’ from the main menu, to open the‘Cross sections’ window. This window is divided into three parts:The drawing area – the main area where the drawing of the section will

appear. The name of the current section that is being worked on, willappear in the heading above the drawing.The list of cross sections – right window.The existing and designed topography tables for every section – the tablesat the lower section of your screen:Existing G.L . – the existing status topography data from the left table.Designed G.L – the designed topography data from the right hand table.

From the next section up to the end of the chapter, the explanations will befollowed by a demonstration. The demonstration can be done on the

project that was opened in the “Preparation of Settings” se ction, which

followed the Roads design instructions up until now.Click on the button from the right window ( Define sections ) – to openthe Cross roads setting window. Select ‘Format’ status: Format 1 – the first option presents the sections names as they appear inthe sections list.Format 2 –by changing the parameters that appear in the bottom window,the program will use this option to present the section’s name in thefollowing fashion: station + km. For example, if you leave the value in field0:KM, the program will present the sections like so: 0+000, 0+020,0+040……, 0+380.

From this window determine the following data:

Start at station – the station of the first section. The default is ‘0’. At mosttimes, we will want the station for the first section in the designed segmentof the center line, to be ‘0’. However, there are cases where we plan asegment that is the continuation of the center line. In such a case, thestation of the first section will be different.End at station – the station for the last section. The default is according tothe length of the center line as it was computed by the program (this lengthappears immediately when the cross section window opens, at the right

window – ‘Roads length’).








Station of first section – define station of first section’s name as will bedisplayed in vertical alignment and horizontal alignment output (DXF).Distance between sections – the distance between the cross sections.The default is 20 meters. Later on we will see that creating sequentialcross sections is not mandatory (a must), and furthermore, that all sectionscan be determined vertically in a way that is not sequential.Name of first section – the name of the first section (a number). Theprogram will number the remaining sections in an ascending orderaccording to the format specified in the window.Choice box – ‘By stations/By Ips’ – this box proposes a choice betweendefining a road/center line, with its cross sections arranged in ascendingorder, to a definition of an center line with sections determined by the IPsof the horizontal al ignment. Moving the status to ‘By Ips’, will remove theother fields from your screen.Defining cross sections by its Ips’ is mostly useful for River design, inwhich we will want cross sections at specific points. To learn more seechapter 15: “Ditch and Reservoir Design”. Click ‘OK’ to build the sections. The list of sections that were built willappear in the table from the right according your selection of setting, andfor each section will appear a ‘Name’ and ‘Station’.Intermediate sections can be added to the project at any given moment. Todo so:Position the cursor (using your mouse) on the line before which you wish toadd a section.Click ‘Enter’ (from your key -board). The line will jump down and a new linewill appear.In the new line, enter the name (number) of the new section. The sectioncan include numbers, “.” And “/” (but not letters). If the new section is, forexample, between section ‘1’ – and ‘2’, you can call it ‘1.1’. Move with theright arrow to column ‘Station’, and enter the s tation of the section you justadded.Note: Instead of defining the sections automatically using the white button,it is possible to move immediately to the right window and build the tablemanually, name and station for each and every section.

Altering names of existing sections - it’s possible to re -define the namesof the sections without deleting the data in it. In order to change thesections’ names, define them as explained in this chapter by clicking the

button . W hen option “Define sections” is a ctivated, a check will belaunched to trace existing sections. For every existing section (a sectionthat its station is available in the table) the software will inquire whether theuser would like to execute one of the following three options:Rename section – altering the name of the section to the new name (bythe new definition).Overwrite section - deleting the existing section and define the newsection instead.








Leave existing section – leaving the same section as it was prior to thealteration.The software will display a message to each section. The action can beratified for each of the sections. To ratify the action to all sections, click OKto all, for discarding, click Cancel.

Click the Option button from the right window. A new window will beopened.

Define the width of section for the project. We are referring to the width ofthe ground that the program will sample for the existing status out of thetopography. We will define a distance from the left center line and adistance from the right center line that will together define the width of the

ground strip. The left end of the section we will defined in the ‘ Left ’ field(default of – 20 meters), and its right end in the ‘ Right’ field (default – 20meters), when the distance left of the center line is a negative number andthe distance from the right is a positive one.There might be a case where you will want a center line band that is all tothe right (or left) of your center line. In such cases it is possible to define asection that is all on the right (or left), by using the correct stations.

In order to define cross sections width by reference,From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Roads Horizontal Alignment'.Draw a Polyline on the desired side of the road (if there are 2 Polylines,one on each side of the road – they must be according to road’s directionand in the same layer!).From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Roads Cross sections'.

Click on the ‘Options' button . ‘Options’ window will open.

Check the checkbox and then click on ‘Get section width by layer’

button .‘Width by layer’ window will open.

Select the desired layer and click 'OK' or click on 'Select' , select the

desired layer from the horizontal alignment, then Press 'Enter' and 'OK'.The software will perform filtering and the following message will appear:

.

The selected layer’s name will appear near the ‘Get section width by layer’

buttonClick ‘OK’ to save definitions.

Click on ‘Get topo data for all sections’ button and click ‘OK’.








Click on ‘Interpolate empty sections’ button to update the drawing inthe cross sections window.

Transfer from Elevation to dH . Using CivilCAD 2014 you can define crosssections of absolute heights, or sections of relative heights. Working withabsolute heights will actually cancel the effect of the vertical alignment onthe cross sections, and commit you to defining a separate design for eachand every section (or fill the intermediate sections by interpolation asillustrated in chapter 13 “ Earthworks computations on Roads”). Duri ng therest of the chapter we will discuss working with typical sections, and soheights will be defined in a relative manner.

Move from Earthworks to Design . This option defines the graphicpresentation form of the section. The program has two options for definingthe section: a section for presenting Earthworks, and a section forpresenting designed sections. The difference in presentation will be shownboth by the form of the sections in the drawing window, both by printingthrough the program to the printer, and by creating sections file on an

AutoCAD sheet. These are the main differences between the two forms ofpresentation:

In the Earthworks format appear two layers only. In the ‘Design’ format,there is the option of showing three layers (existing, Earthworks, sectionstructure).You can determine which two layers will appear out of the three. Whenchoosing ‘Earthworks’, the list of all three possible layers will be shown.Mark the two layers you want to include in your section.In the design section, there are several options for defining the surface,such as defining the thickness of the asphalt, adding blocks to the section

– like side-walk rims, security railing etc. In the design section it is alsopossible to define retaining walls and side ditches 1 The data table is presented differently for the Design section, and theEarthworks section. In the Design section appears the table with thebottom ground data, and the design data is positioned on the section – the‘Earthworks’ is underneath, and th e structure elevation above. In theEarthworks sections, all the data will appear in the bottom table, along withtwo extra lines in the table that represent the computation method of thesection area at ‘cut’ and ‘fill’, when divided into segments.

Move from ‘Close design to existing’ to ‘Close design to structure’ .This option marks the form of closing the sides' sticks at the design edges.The option ‘Close design to structure’ will close the edges of the designedlevel to the structure level , and the ‘Close design to existing’ will closedesigned level edges to the existing G.L.

In order to close Design to Existing in each Cross Section separately,








From CivilCAD main menu’ go to 'Roads Cross sections'.Note: The default setting in ‘Options’ window is ,meaning that the Designed G.L. will continue the structure slopes based onthe parameters in the Structure table.This option affects the entire cross sections and does not apply to a singlecross section.

To close Design G.L. to Existing G.L. in a single cross section,

check checkbox in the Designed G.L. table and click on the‘Apply’ button.

In order to send this definition to other sections, right click on thecheckbox.

‘Send to’ window will open. Select the section or sections that the definition will be sent to or click on

'All' button for sending the definition to all sections.


To restore default definition, uncheck checkbox in theDesigned G.L. table and click on the ‘Apply’ button. In order to send this definition to other sections, right click on the

checkbox.‘Send to’ window will open. Select the section or sections that the definition will be sent to or click on



Click on the ‘GetT all’ button . From the window that opens after

clicking button (the ‘Select table ' window), you will be asked to choosethe table, to which the topography data will be entered. The default of theprogram is entering the data into the ‘Existing G.L’ of the sections. Theremight be cases were you will want to read the topography data into othertables, such as designed status. To do so select the desired table and click‘OK’. In our sample, just click "OK" to read the data into the 'Existing G.L'.When the reading of the existing topography data is finished, the firstsection will appear in the drawing window, and the existing topographydata will appear in the table from the left down. At the head of the page (inthe heading above the drawing), will appear the name of the presentedsection, for example ‘Sections name: 1’, and the designed level at thecenter line of this section (the height set in the profile), for example -/Elevation: 233.85. It is possible to move between sections by pointing to








the desired section in the table at the right. Every section selected, willappear automatically on the drawing, and its data will appear in the tablesbelow. To continue the instructions make sure you are in the first section.

We will now go to defining the design of the typical section. We will startwith the top level (Structure). Afterwards we will move to defining the Sub-grade level.

From the bottom right hand table appears the label – ‘Designed G.L’ .Move, using the little arrow from right of the label, to ‘Structure’ (asaforesaid, we begin designing the Structure level, and only afterwardsdefine the elevation of 'Designed G.L'/Sub-grade).

We will shortly explain the structure of the design table. In the table thereare lines, each line representing a segment. The segments are numberedfrom -40 to +40 (a sum of 81 possible segments for each section). In thetable there are five columns (the one on the far left is without a heading).To explain this, number these columns in an ascending order from left toright, so the column on the far left is number 1:

Column number 1 - in this column appear the segment’s serial number.This number does not represent a distance of any kind. Segments left tothe center line will be represented by a negative number, and numbersright of the center line will be represented by a positive number.

Column number 2 (Offset) – this column represents the distance of thesegment from the center line. The distance left of the center line will beentered as negative, and the number from the right as positive. There aretwo options for the distance from the center line: absolute distance orrelative distance. When working with dH, as shown here (see section 3),the data will be entered as a relative distance, meaning that the distanceentered is actually the length of the segment and not the absolute distancefrom the center li ne. When working with ‘Elevation’, this data will beentered as absolute heights.

Column number 3 (dH) – this column has two options : dH (as shownhere) or ‘Elevation’. The options are determined from the ‘Status’ window(see section 3). When working with dH, the heights will be entered asrelative, compared to the height of the previous segment, so the heightentered is actually the height of the segment. When working with‘Elevation’, the entered heights will be absolute.

Column number 4 (Slope%) – in this column you can enter the slope ofthe segment. You can enter any one of two data: Entering dH at column 3,will automatically compute the slope of the segment and enter it in column4. In contrast, entering the slope will compute the dH and enter it in column

3.








Column number 5 (Cover) – this column defines the type of the segment.It has a number of options (see details on ‘Cover’ in the continuation of thissectio n, and in section “Side ditches and additional C over functions”).

Begin by entering the design data in the table. To clear this issue, we willdemonstrate the data for a typical section, followed by a detailedexplanation. Enter the following data in the table:

Stand on segment 0 with your mouse, in column number 2. Type “0”, click‘Enter’ and again “0”. You have just determined that the height of thiscenter line is similar to the height designed in the vertical alignment (thecrown-level point).

Move with the arrows to segment 1, column 2. Enter “3” click ‘Enter’, movewith the right arr ow to column number 3, insert “ -2” and click ‘Enter’. Theprogram will compute the dH interval. The segment that had just beendefined is the asphalt segment to the right lane that was defined as 3meters with a slope of 2% (the slope was defined as minus since it is lowerfrom the crown-level point).

Before we continue, we will shortly explain a number of editing commandsfrom the table:Clicking on ‘Del’ from a certain field will delete the field. Clicking on ‘Backspace’ (back arrow), to work as usual. To delete an entire line, or reduce lines, stand on the most left column(column number 1) in the desired segment and click ‘Del’. The software willdelete the segment and reduce the lines.It is possible to copy a segment from the existing cross section to othercross sections. To copy, stand on the desired segment and right click withyour mouse button. From the table that opens, mark the sections to whichthe segment data will be copied and (to choose all sections, click on button‘All’ from the bottom), and click ‘OK’. The program will copy the segmentdata for all the selected sections.It is important to press 'Enter' after entering each data in the table.Pressing 'Enter' will perform internal calculation.

When designing a cross section, we will start entering the data from theC.L (segment 0) outside. This order of entering data is very important sinceeach segment of data been entered is relative to the former segment.When designing, each segment's value is partial and not accumulative.Segments like the shoulders or sidewalk will be entered at its actual sizeand not accumulative from C.L.

Continue to fill the table:Make sure you are in segment 3, column 2, enter “0” and click ‘Enter’. Incolumn number 3 of this segment, enter “0.17” and click ‘Enter’. Thissegment marks the side-walk rim at 0.17 meter height 1

Move with the arrows to segment number 4, column 2, enter “2” and click‘Enter’. Move to column 4, and enter the slope of “2” percentage followed








by 'Enter' (“2” as a positive number). This segment is a sidewalk of 2 meterwidth and 2% slope.Note: The sidewalk slope is opposite to the slope of the road (the road'sslope is '-2' and the sidewalk's slope is '2'). The drainage been designed inthis sample is at the collector drain near the sidewalk.Continue and complete the same exact data for the negative segments (-1,-2,-3), but this time mark the distances as negative values (minus). Donot forget to click 'Enter' after each data and to start the design from theC.L outside.

After defining the segment's size and slopes, we will define eachsegment's type. Note that this stage is optional but will affect later stageslike location of designed contours on the road's layout and the outlook ofthe Cross-Section's drawing.

Double-click the cell on segment '-1', column 5 ('Cover'). Press the smallarrow to pull the list down, and select '1 – Asphalt'. Repeat the process forsegment '1'.

Repeat the same process for segments '-3' and '3' but this time select '3 – Sidewalk' instead of Asphalt.

When you finish entering the data, the table should look like this:

We will continue by entering the side-slopes of the cross section (slopesfrom end of carriage way to the side-sticks at the section's edges). In theupper and lower ends of the Structure table (the table we have just finishedfilling in), the following fields appear:

Slp. left : Cut 1: Fill 1:

Slp. right: Cut 1: Fill 1:

These fields represent the side-slopes of the section, left and right, for Cutand Fill situation (we will enter values for both cut and fill. The software willuse the relevant value according to the section's edge situation). The slopewill be entered as a ratio of 1 to X (1:X), built between the most extreme

points in the section (the far left/the far right), to the natural ground.Note: Ratio of 2:1 will be entered as 1:0.5.








Enter ‘2’ (ratio = 1:2), in the cut ratio field for right slope (next to the label‘Slp. Right: Cut 1: ’ located at the bottom of the 'Structure' table ), and ‘3’

(ratio = 1:3) in the fill ratio field next to it. Enter the same values for left side(top of the table).

Click on the 'Apply' from the right hand window. The design will appear onthe drawing. You have now completed defining your section structure. Wewill now go to define the Design G.L (Sub-grade) levels.

From the left table, move, using the small arrow next to the ‘Existing G.L’labeling, to the ‘Designed G.L’ table. Enter the following data, the sameway you have entered for the section's Structure :

Note: There is no need to define the 'Cover' type – all segments are Sub-grade's segments.

Click 'Apply' when you finish entering the data.

In order to s end last segment’s slope to the next segment inStructure\Design tableFrom CivilCAD main menu’ go to 'Roads Cross sections'.Choose the desired table (Designed G.L. / Structure) and click on ‘Slopes

Inheritance' button . ‘Slopes Inheritance' window will open:

Select the segment that will inherit the slope of the prior segment.








Click ‘OK’ and at the ‘Send To’ window, select the section or sections that

the new slope will be sent to or click on the 'All' button for sending the

new slope to all sections.

We have finished defining our typical cross-section. This typical crosssection has a total structure width of 60 CM in the Asphalt's segments(notice the '-0.6' value in segment '0') and a width of 20 CM in thesidewalks segments (defined by the '0.57' value in segments '2' and '-2' ->-0.6 + 0.57 = -0.03 -0.17 (sidewalk height) = 0.2M).

Now we will project the typical section on the entire road we have built :

Click on the ‘Copy’ button from the right window. After you click, thesoftware will copy all the tables of the current section ('Design G.L' +'Structure') – to the clipboard memory.

Scroll to the last section of the sections' list (right window) and click it. Click

on the ‘Paste’ button in order to copy the data from the clipboard intothe tables ('Design G.L' + 'Structure') of this section.

The main principle of working with CivilCAD 2014, is entering ofdata in the sections in which the road changes (only in those sections!),and filling the remaining road parts with intermediate interpolation. Now wehave two sections filled with data. The rest of the sections are still empty(you can see this by browsing between them by clicking on a certainsection from the right hand- sections list table).

Intermediate interpolation . Click on the ‘Interpolation empty sections’

button from the right. From the window that opens, switch from the‘Designed’ table to ‘All’ (we are interested in doing interpolation for both‘Designed G.L’ and ‘Structure’). Click on ‘OK’. The program will perform theinterpolation for all the empty sections in the project, and since we have

two identical sections only, (first and last) the software will fill all thesections with the same design data.

At the end of the interpolation, you can browse between the sections. Atthis stage, if you are interested, you can move to a certain section andchange its data.

Printing the sections (dividing the sections into sheets for printout)

Click on the frames division button located at the top of the drawing.

The 'Frames division' window will be opened.








Choose ' Model space ' to create DXF files of cross section sheets, or'Paper space ' to divide the sections into sheets on the AutoCAD's paperspace (available for AutoCAD 14 users and up. Not available for Bricscadusers).Choose sections' scale for height and length. In our example use '200' forboth scales (1:200 for height and length).Choose paper-size . In our example use A3 paper.

Note: When working with Model space division, two additional optionsavailable in the paper-size list:Other - choosing 'Other' will show two additional fields - 'Page length' and'Page height' enabling the user to define any paper size needed.No division - all the sections will be located on the same sheet (file).When choosing this option, a new window will be opened. Choose one ofthe two following options:'Auto arrange ' - automatically arrange the sections on the sheet.'Define arrangement ' - manually arrange the sections on the sheet. Enterthe following values:'Sections in each column' – number of sections to be located on eachcolumn.'dY (CM) between sections datum line' – the distance (in CM – printoutunits) between the sections on the column.Press ' Arrange ' button for preview.Press 'OK' to finish.

Arrange drawings in columns/Arrange drawings in rows - defines howto arrange the sections on the sheets. Choosing 'Arrange drawings incolumns' will locate the second section above the first section, the thirdabove the second and so on.Table block - When creating the sections' sheets, the softwareautomatically add a header table to each sheet (company's logo, 'Createdby…', 'Checked by…' etc.). The 'Table block' field contains the path to theblock file, later to be used as the header table. By default, this file is'Logo.dwg' located in the software's folder. By pressing the '…' buttonlocated on the right side of the field you can browse your own company's

logo file.

Tip: It is strongly advised to use a logo that is at the same scale as theCivilCAD 2014 original 'Logo.dwg'. To do so, open 'Logo.dwg' (in thesoftware's folder) and change it according to your needs, keeping it at thesame drawing's extents.

Table position – define location of the logo, right or left to the drawing.Range – select the sections to plot. The default is set to all sections. Whenchoosing 'Select', a window containing the list of sections will appear.Select the sections to be included in the plot and press 'OK'.

Align sections by row – By choosing this option, all the sections is acertain row will be aligned. If this option is not set, the software will try to








locate as many as possible sections in each sheet, not keeping thesections aligned by rows.

Press 'OK' to finish. Two situations are available:'Model space' – if model space has been chosen (see the 1 st setting in thewindow), the file browser window will be opened. Enter filename and press'Save'. The software will create files with the filename that has beenentered followed by a serial number for each sheet ('MySection_1.DXF','MySection_2.DXF' …). 'Paper space' – when working in paper space mode, a message willappear warning the user that a 'Purge' command is about to be preformed(in the AutoCAD). Press 'OK' to continue. The AutoCAD's printing windowwill be shown. Press 'OK' again. The software will create sheets in paperspace according to your settings.Notes:If you do not see the sections' sheets, try to manually change (in the

AutoCAD) from the 'Model' to the 'cv_section' space. After sending your sheets to print (or saving them for later use), make surethat the current space if 'Model' and if not, change it.When the sheets have been created, the cross-sections window has beenminimized. To continue working, maximize it back to its regular size (clickon it in the window's lower tasks bar).

Creating layout . Click on the ‘Layout’ button from the right. From thewindow that opens, mark ‘v’ next to the three possible options (Layout,Contours, and Distances). Click ‘OK’ to continue. The program will create alayout on the drawing. This layout will not include contour lines. We willnow show how to combine contour lines in a layout. The Layout window includes three options:Layout – mark ‘v’ next to this option to create the layout lines of the roadand the sections height labeling.Contours - mark ‘v’ next to this option to create road 's contour lines. Thecontour lines will be created at intervals according to what appears in theintervals box in the window. For the program to create contours, you mustspecify the segments in which these lines should be positioned. For moredetails see next section.Distances - mark ‘v’ next to this option to create a distance layer betweenthe sections. The program will show the distances between the sections,as well as the distances between the section and the tangent point closestto it.

Note . After clicking ‘OK’ from the Layout window, the cros s section windowwill be minimized (so that you can see the changes in the layout). Tomaximize the screen, click on it from the Windows “Task -Bar” at the bottomof your screen.

Setting the contour lines segments: As aforesaid, you should instruct theprogram at which of these segments it should create contour lines.








The contour lines are been defined by the 'Cover' definition of the'Structure' segments. In our example we have defined segments '1' and '-1'as '1 – Asphalt'. By doing so, we have instructed the software that thesesegments showed be shown with contours when creating the layout.

Another option is to choose '2 – Contours' as 'Cover'. The difference is thatin the section's drawing, no bold line (marking the Asphalt will be shown).

Press the 'Save project' button on the upper-left corner of the window tosave all changes .Click on the ‘ Close ’ button to finish.

Find Section – Click this button to find a section by name or by station

.

Hide Intermediate Sections – Check mark this cell to hide intermediate sections (sections with *)

Additional Functions in the Cross Sections Window

Functions on the right window

We will now explain in detail additional functions from the cross sections

window that were not discusses during the sample stages:

Functions from the cross sections list (right window):

The ‘Road’ box from the top of the right window – from this box you canbrowse the various roads of a multiple center line project.

Deleting a single section – stand on the section you wish to delete from

the list, and click on the button from the sections list window (rightwindow). The program will erase this section from the list.

Delete all road's sections – click on the button from the right window.The program will send a warning befo re deleting all the sections. Click ‘OK’to confirm this action.‘Load from text file’ - Loading the text file of all the sections:

Load sections from text file - the loading and saving of a sectionstext file has many uses, one of them being the data transference fromproject to project and the other, the transference of data between existingto designed ground level and vice-versa. In order to leaf between thiswindow’s options – use the opening list ‘Files of type’ and choose fromone of these options:








Roads (*.Pas files) - these files are unique to CivilCAD 2014 previousversions, and enable opening projects that were done using the ‘Alongroads’ software.Sec files (*Sec) - sec files are text files in a special format, that can becreated by CivilCAD 2014, or IDAN ®.Text (Tab delimited) (*.Txt) – reading a text file created in Excel. Formore details see Chapter ‘Earthworks on Roads’ – Importing Data fromExcel.Template(*.Tml) – reading a typical sections file, for more details seesection ‘ Work ing with Typical Sections’. Geopak sections (*.XSR) – reading cross sections data been created inGeopak ® software (Bently).LDD ® sections (*.*) – reading sections data from AutoDesk Landdevelopment desktop software.Cross sections coordinates (*.*) – this option enables the user to read acoordinates' file directly into the cross sections. The software willautomatically translate the coordinates into offsets and elevation,projecting them into the relevant sections. This option saves the need ofcreating contours before reading the data into the cross sections.Max. distance - this parameter defines the distance from the section thatthe software will use to assign the coordinates to it.

Save sections to file - Click on the button from the right window. Fromthe window that opens, choose one of the options from the ' Save of type 'list.Sec files (*.Sec) - Sec files can be used to transfer one of the levels(Existing G.L, Design G.L …) from one project to another. Enter the filename, and click ‘Save’. In the new window choose the table with the datato be saved (existing status, Earthworks height, road structure height level)and click ‘OK '.

Tip: If you wish to copy the Design G.L data of one project to theExisting G.L another, save the project Design G.L as '*.Sec' file, open anew project, enter to the cross sections window and read the file into theExisting G.L table.

Template (*.Tml) – saving a typical sections file, for more details seesection ‘Working with Typical Sections’.

GetD all – at one of the stages of roads design, we have seen how toimport cross section data from the existing topography (contour lines). Wehave also emphasized that it is possible to import this data into thesection's Existing G.L table, or to any other of its tables. We have alsomentioned that in CivilCAD 2014 it is possible to create designedtopography . The ‘GetD all’ button allows the creation of cross sections fromthe designed topography (contour lines), and import them into the section’stables. To extract Design G.L data, first open the 'Options' window andmark 'Design Devote -40 to 40 segments' . By marking this option, the








software will sample the Design G.L by using the entire 81 segments in theDesign G.L table. Otherwise, parts of these segments are been saved formiscellaneous additions in the design such as: ditches, berms etc.Therefore if this option isn’t marked, it’s possible that the software will notsample all the Design G.L. data. Close the Option window by clicking 'OK'.

To execute click . In the new window choose the table to be filled andpress 'OK'. The software will send out a warning that it is about to deletethe design data from all sections. Click ’OK’ to continue. The data will beread into the Design G.L tables of the sections.

Clear all - click on the button to delete data from several (or all)sections at once. From the window that opens, choose the data (table) youwant to delete and c lick ‘OK’ to continue. From the table that opens, markthe sections that their data will be deleted. To choose all sections, click onthe ‘All’ button from the bottom. Click ‘OK’. The software will delete thechosen sections data.

Adding height to the sections' data - This option is useful mainly forworking with absolute elevations (at relative heights it is best to change theheight of the vertical alignment to changing the data of the cross sections).To activate click the button. In the window that opens, enter the neededaddition to the height (to decrease the height, enter a negative height). Tocontinue click ‘OK’. From the window that opens, choose the data you wishto change ('Existing G.L', 'Design G.L' or 'Structure'). Click ‘OK’ tocontinue. In the additional window, choose the sections you wish to change(to choose all click the ‘All’button at the bottom of the window ). Click ‘OK’.The software will add the desired height to the selection of sections in thetable you selected (topography, designed etc.).

Super Elevations - for more details see section Super Elevations.

Functions at the ‘ Options ’ window (activate using the ‘ Options'button from the right window

Some of the functions of this window have been discussed. Here are somemore details about the function available in the window:

Max/Min interval – at times, there might be a situation when irregular datawill be read into from the topography into the sections. There are severalreasons for this occurrence such as incorrect measuring data, measuringborder narrower than the desired section, extrapolation at the contour linesand more. To avoid this occurrence, you can define for the program themaximum interval between the given ground level to the center lineelevation . The assumption is that the center line height is always true (orat least does not deviate from the topography ranges), and is thus used asa reference point. You instruct the program what the maximum interval is








at the height we allow a ground break in the section. Each ground breakthat deviates from this interval (up or down), will be deleted from theground data.For example – if the height at the center line is – 230.55, and we enteredMax/Min interval of – 3 meters, every ground data lower than 227.55 orhigher than 233.55, will be deleted from the ground data of the section.The affect of the data will occur only after we will perform a ground sampleusing the ‘GetT all’ button. If there are existing ground data that you wish tochange, enter the desired interval, click ‘OK’ to leave, and repeat all the‘GetT all’ functions.

Include edges – the key to CivilCAD 2014 sampling ground data is : theprogram will always sample the center line existing data, and any groundbreak identified at the cross section area, will be also entered into thetable. In addition to this data, the program will sample the height of theexisting status at the end of the section, from left to right, according to thewidth that was defined. In order to cancel the ends sampling, uncheck (the‘V’ mark), and repeat all the ‘GetT all’ commands. The program will samplethe data all over again, without sampling the ends.

Include center – According to the principle explained in section 2 and up,it is possible to instruct the program, not to sample the center point, by un-checking this field.

Close Design to Structure/ Close Design to Existing – defining thesection's edge closure. The software always calculates the Structure andthe Design G.L side-sticks points, even if not been defined. The followingoptions defines the method to calculate these points:Close Design to Structure – The Design G.L (sub-grade) will be closed tothe structure level. This option is more common when designing.Close Design to Existing – The Design G.L will be closed to the ExistingG.L.

Depth check between Existing Road & Designed Road to determineearthworks - from CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Roads Horizontal

Alignment'.Draw Polylines which will define the existing road’s edges.

From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Roads Cross sections'.

Click on the ‘Get references by layers' butto n . ‘References’ window willopen.

Select the desired layer and click 'OK' or click on 'Select' , select thedesired layer from the drawing, press 'Enter' and 'OK'.The software will perform filtering and the following message will appear:








.

Change one of the tables in the bottom of the window to ‘References’. At ‘References’ table, define the reference as ‘Break’ (under the ‘Cover’column).

In order to send this definition to other sections, right click on the ‘Cover’cell in the reference’s line. ‘Send to’ window w ill open.Select ‘Yes’ for ‘Current cell’ and click ‘OK’. Mark the section or sections that the definition will be sent to or click on



To determine where earthworks will be calculated, click on ‘Options’

Button .

At ‘Road Expansion’ dialog box , define Min. andMax. depth.

The Software will check the depth between the existing road (Existing G.L.)and the designed road (Designed G.L.) in each section - right side and leftside (separately) at 3 points : center point, right break point and left breakpoint.

In each section, if the depth is bigger than the definition in Max depth orsmaller than the definition in Min depth, the software will not create Break,meaning earth works will be calculated in the break area.

In each section, if the depth is at the range of Max depth definition and Mindepth definition, the software will create Break, meaning earth works willnot be calculated in the break area.

Guard rails definition in cross sections (In fill only)

f rom CivilCAD main menu’ go to 'Roads Cross sections'Change one of the tables at the bottom of the screen to ‘Guard Rails’table.








If you w ant to use the default values, click the ‘Set Default Values’button. ‘Height Difference Condition’ and ‘Working Width’ Tables will be filled

with the default values

You can fill the tables manually and click the ‘Save’ button to savedefinitions.In order to load the saved definitions in another project, click the ‘Load’

button.Select the file and click the ‘Open’ button.

Note: Notice that there are 3 segments in ‘Working Width’ table, fordesigning a working width with sidewalk.

To delete data from a cell, click the left mouse button inside the cell.Then click the ‘Delete’ button in the keyboard.

To delete all data from both tables, click the ‘Delete’ button andthen click the ‘OK’ button.








Note: The default definition for displaying guard rails with working widthis ‘According To Conditions’. In order to display guard rails in any case, mark the ‘Always’ option.

CivilCAD will add the working width’s data to segments -18, -17, -16,16, 17, 18 according to definitions. The guard rail’s block data will bedisplayed in segments -16, 16.

Note: Make sure that ‘Enable Automatic Guard Rails’ option is checkmarked 1 Otherwise, CivilCAD will not create guard rails.

If there is already existing data in segments -18, -17, -16, 16, 17, 18

which were manually defined by the user, the following warningmessage will appear:










Now choose the sections you want to print. To choose all sections, click

the on the button from the bottom window. Click ‘OK’ to print.

The software will print all the sections sequentially, according to thelanguage defined in the settings. To change the language, follow thesteps below:Leave the cross sections by clicking ‘ Close ’.

Activate – ‘File- > Configuration’ .From the right hand window - choose from ‘ languages ’ the desiredlanguage.Click ‘OK’ and return to the cr oss sections (File-> Cross sections). Return and print the sections as you have learned.

Zoom extents – there are several methods of controlling the settingof your section :The scroll bars to the bottom and left of the drawing.Clicking the left button from the drawing area will enlarge the drawing by 2.Clicking on the button from the right, will decrease it by 2.The button 'Zoom extents' – returns ‘view’ to the entire drawing.

Functions from the tables' window (bottom window)

Left of every table (left table and right table), appear a number of buttons:

Deleting the table data in the current section.

– import the existing G.L data of the current section out of theexisting topography. Unlike the ‘GetTall’ button, this button imports theexisting status data of the current section only. Before proceeding, awarning notice will appear and will ask whether you are sure you want todelete the existing status data. To continue you must confirm.

- importing the existing G.L data of the current section out of the

designed topography. Unlike the ‘GetD all’ button, this button imports thedesigned status data of the current section only. Before proceeding, awarning notice will appear and will ask whether you are sure you want todelete the current status design data. To continue you must confirm.‘Copy ’ and ‘ Paste ’ – Copy and paste the current table into the clipboard.Unlike the 'Copy' and 'Paste' button the right window, these buttons are forthe current table only and not for the entire section's tables.








Super Elevations

In the cross sections section we have shown how to define aroad’s cross sections. We have dealt with defining a typicalsection, and shown how to project it in interpolation along theentire road. We will now show how it is possible to define SuperElevations along the road. The principle of building SuperElevations is based on setting the side slopes percentage at eachchange in slopes (beginning and end of transaction curves) andinterpolate between these changes.

Defining the Super Elevations stations

Open a project containing a road's design including cross sections design.For illustrating the process, open the following project: Sample7.



Go to ‘Roads -> Cross sections’ .

Click on the Super Elevations button from the right window on yourscreen. A Define & Create Super Elevations window will open presentingthis table:

Understanding the table structure:

IP – IP name – The list of the road's IPs, excluding of the 1 st IP.Geometry – Tangents along the road, including radiuses and clothoids.Each radius will include size and direction (a small arrow is showing thedirection) and each clothoid will include its length.Geometry station – Station of each tangent (including spirals tangents)along the C.L.SuperElev. Station – the distances that will set the start and end of Super

Elevations. These distances will be entered by the user, and do not have tobe according to the software's computations ( as they are in the ‘Geometry








Station’ field ). When values are not entered in these fields at a certain IP,the program will not create the Super Elevations in the cross sections atthe same segment.SlopeLeft/SlopeRight - For these fields the desired SuperElevations willbe entered for any status. You can see from this sample that at the start ofthe Super Elevation the for both sides is – 2 at the curve peak and up to thecurve exit it is 2, and after the curve exit it is 2 again.

In the table sample, 2 stations (in addition to the station of the end of theroad) have been calculated at the beginning and the end of the curve.Since no transition curves exist (there is no clothoid in this sample) we willcreate the transition at the following way:Stand on the 'SuperElev. Station' column of the 1 st tangent row (near'Geometry station = 59.47') and enter '49.47' followed by 'Enter'.We have just set the transition to start 10M before the tangent of the curve.Stand on the 'SuperElev. Station' column of the row below the data youhave just entered, right-click with the mouse, and choose 'Insert row' in thepull-down menu. In the new row enter '69.49'.We have just set the transition to reach its peak at 10M after the tangent.Repeat the process for the second tangent: enter '202.89' at the tangent'srow, open a new row below and enter '222.89'.

At the end of this stage the table should be like this:

Defining the Super Elevations side slopes

After entering the S.E (Super Elevations) stations, we will now precede todefine the S.E side slopes. In our sample, the typical cross section is beendefined with a side slope of '-2' for left and right lanes, creating a standardcamber from the C.L. The lanes (Asphalt segments) have been defined assegments '-1' and '1'. Therefore, we will enter the S.E side slopes for thesesegments*:

* '-1' and '1' are the default segments of the S.E table (please notice thecaptions 'Slope left % -1' and 'Slope right % 1'). You can define a separateS.E for each segment by choosing the segment to control from the drop-down list of segments at these captions.

Stand on the cell at the 'Slope left' column of the '49.47' station's row andenter '-2' as the side slope. Move to the 'Slope right' column (at the samerow) and enter '-2' again.








The beginning of the transition will start at side slopes of '-2' for each lane,exactly as the typical cross section.Stand on the cell at the 'Slope left' column of the '69.47' station's row andenter '3' as the side slope. Move to the 'Slope right' column (the same row)and enter '-3'.In our sample we will super elevate the curve to a maximum side slope of3%. Since the curve is turning right (notice the small arrow's direction inthe geometry column. You can also verify the same from the layout), theleft lane will change from '-2' to '3' (positive) while the right lane will changefrom '-2' to '-3'.Stand on the cell at the 'Slope left' column of the '202.89' station's row andenter '3' as the side slope. Move to the 'Slope right' column (the same row)and enter '-3'.The slopes will remain the same for the entire curve. The changes inslopes will start at the end of the curve while '202.89' is the station wherewe have decided to start the transition back.Stand on the cell at the 'Slope left' column of the 222.89' station's row andenter '-2' as the side slope. Move to the 'Slope right' column (the samerow) and enter '-2'.

At the end of the curve we are back at the typical C.S's side slopes: '-2' forleft and right lanes.

The complete table should be like this:

Click 'OK' to execute the super-elevation.To see the affect of the S.E you can click (on the right side table) on anysection within the curve (sections 50 to 220) and notice the carriage wayslopes. To effect changes in the road's contours (designed contours)recreate the layout (click the layout button on the right window, mark allfields in the new window and press 'OK').

Additional functions in the Super Elevations window

Super elevating the Design G.L (sub-grade) – when performing superelevations (in our example) we have referred to the 'Structure' segments.By default, the software automatically super-elevate the 'Design G.L'segments along with the 'Structure' segments. Nevertheless, there are

unique situation whereas the 'Structure' segments are not identical to the'Design G.L' segments. In this situation, you might want to match between








the 'Structure' segments and the 'Design G.L' segments that relates to it.When choosing the segment to be edit (clicking the drop-down list at thecaption of the S.E table, near the 'Slope left' and 'Slope right' fields), awindow will be opened showing one of the following options:Use identical designed G.L segments.Use different designed G.L segments, for left/right structure segment (X)use designed G.L segments: ….. By choosing the 1 st option, the software will use the same segments tosuper-elevate the 'Design G.L' and 'Structure'. Using the 2 nd option willmatch the selected 'Design G.L' segment (in the drop-down list in the newwindow) with the 'Structure' segment been chosen at the caption of the S.Ewindow.

- Clear all Super Elevations stations and all its slopes – this buttonerases all the data entered into the ‘Superelev. Station ’ and the ‘ Slopes ’.

- Erase current Super Elevations slopes – this button erases thevalues entered in the curren t line under the fields ‘ Slope left ’, ‘Sloperight’ .

- Load segment super-elevation data – read the entire superelevation data from a text file been saved by the software.

- Save segment super-elevation data – save the entire superelevation table into a text file, later to be read to another project or anothersegments.

- Insert an empty row - (alternatively you can right click with themouse and select 'Insert row' from the pull-down list).

- Copy Geo. stations to Superelev. stations – Copy all the stations

from the 'Geometry stations' column to the 'Superelev. stations' column.

- Send s egment’s slope automatically to other segments - definethe leader segments (on the upper part of the window) and thencheck the conforming segments that will inherit the leaders slope(on the lower part of the window).

Change shoulders according to current segments/Change currentsegments only – This option controls the segments that will be affected bythe Super elevations:








Change shoulders according to current segments – When superelevating the lanes segments, the software will automatically super elevatethe shoulders so they will follow the lane's slopes.Change current segments only - The super elevation will affect thecurrent segments (table) only.

Side ditches and additional cover functions

So far, we have shown how to design a road and all its parts, starting withthe Horizontal Alignment and ending with the cross sections. We have alsoshown how to define Super Elevations. In this chapter we will discuss two

additional options in cross sections:Defining side ditches.

Additional ‘Cover’ functions .

Defining Side Ditches

Defining side ditches along the road is done by entering ditches data in theCross Sections Window ( ‘Roads ->Cross sections’ ) into designatedtables (‘Right ditch’ and ‘Left ditch’).

Defining the Ditch Typical Cross Section

Designing Ditches In Cut.

1. Change one of the tables (Existing G.L. or Designed G.L.) to 'Right\Leftditch'.

2. Define the ditch's left and right side slope and bottom width.

3. Define the ditch's depth in cut. The depth will start from the section'sedge.

4. The depth will be determined by the "lowest" datum, in this case - FromExisting G.L. and the depth will be calculated from the bottom center ofthe ditch to the Existing G.L.








Check the 'From Design G.L.' checkbox to start the ditch from thedesign height. The depth will be calculated from the design height.

Check the 'From Structure lev.' Checkbox to start the ditch from thestructure height. The depth will be calculated from the structure height.

5. Check the 'At Design G.L.' checkbox to end the ditch at the designheight.

6. Check the 'At Structure level' checkbox to end the ditch at the structureheight.

Sending ditch's datum to other sections :

7. Right click on one of the ditch's datum.

8. At the selection window, click 'No' for sending current cell only or 'Yes'for all ditch.

9. At the 'Send to' window, select the section or sections that the ditch's

datum will be sent to or click on the 'All' button forsending the ditch's datum to all sections.

Designing Ditches In Fill


2. Define the ditch's left and right side slope and bottom width.

3. Check the 'From Side-stick' checkbox to start the ditch at the closure ofthe section with the ground.








4. Check the 'From Sec. edge' checkbox to start the ditch at the section'sedge.

5. If the section's edge is (In Fill) is higher than the definition in "Fromsection's edge", the depth of the ditch will be determined by thedefinition in "In Fill".

6. Check the 'From Design G.L.' checkbox to start the ditch from thedesign height. The depth will be calculated from the design height.

7. Check the 'From Structure lev.' Checkbox to start the ditch from thestructure height. The depth will be calculated from the structure height.

8. Check the 'At Design G.L.' checkbox to end the ditch at the designheight.

9. Check the 'At Structure level' checkbox to end the ditch at the structureheight.

Sending ditch's datum to other sections:

1. Right click on one of the ditch's datum.


3. At the 'Send to' window, select the section or sections that the ditch's

datum will be sent to or click on the 'All' button for sending theditch's datum to all sections.

Designing Ditches' Shoulders


2. At the bottom of the table, select 'Shoulders in Cut' or 'Shoulders in Fill'according to the status of the ditch.








3. Type Width and slope for each shoulder (Right and Left).

Sending shoulder's datum to other sections:

1. Right click on one of the shoulder's datum.


3. At the 'Send to' window, select the section or sections that the

shoulder's datum will be sent to or click on the 'All' button forsending the shoulder's datum to all sections.

Existing G.L. Natural Slope Check


2. At the bottom of the table, check the Check existing G.L. slope at offset'checkbox.

3. Define the offset and dH for there will not be a ditch if the differencebetween the section's edge to the offset definition will be higher thanthe dH definition.

Sending the slope check datum to other sections:

1. Right click on one of the datum.


3. At the 'Send to' window, select the section or sections that the datum

will be sent to or click on the 'All' button for sending thedatum to all sections.








Copying data into additional sections

After entering the data for the left and right ditch, we would like to projectthe same data along the entire road. Make sure you are in the first field ofthe left embankment data ( Slope L ). If you are not in this field, left clickwith the mouse inside this field. In order to copy the data to the remainingsections follow these steps:

Click on the right button in this field (right mouse click).The program will ask if you wish to copy the entire ditch's data or just thefield you clicked on – via the dialog box ‘Send the whole ditch? ’ Click'Yes' to copy the entire data.The program will present a window containing the list of sections. From thiswindow, mark the sections you wish to copy the current section to, andclick ‘OK’. You can choose the desired sections by marking them or typingtheir name s next to ‘ Names ’. In order to copy the data into all the sections,

click on the button to mark the entire list.Click ‘OK’. Repeat this process for the second ditch as well.Interpolate the entire sections* – press the 'interpolate empty sections'button in the right window and in the new window, press 'OK' for 'Alldesign'.You can now move between the entire sections and see the result of theditches' projection.

* Note: After each projection of data (left ditch, right ditch, berms etc.) toseveral/all sections, you much interpolate to recalculate the section.

Alternatively you can go to each section and press 'Apply' in the rightwindow.








Controlling the ditches' I.L from the vertical alignment

CivilCAD 2014 allows presenting and controlling the side ditches' I.L on thevertical alignment. Following the changes in the vertical alignment, theprogram will automatically change the ditches in cross sections. In order topresent the ditches data on the vertical alignment, follow these steps:

After defining the left and right ditches in the Cross Sections, enter into thevertical alignment window (from main menu activate: Roads -> verticalalignment ).Mark the 'L. ditch' and 'R. ditch' checkbox in the right window (under the'Include' caption), and press 'Apply'. Two new vertical alignment of the leftand right ditches' I.L will be presented. In the table at the bottom of thesection, new rows will be shown showing the left and right ditches' I.Lelevations.From the pull-down list in the right window, next to the ' Centerline’ label,move to ‘ DitchR ’ (use the small arrow right of the ‘ Centerline ’). The lower'Design' table (at the lower window) will change and the 'VerEdit' layer inthe drawing will contain the right ditch's I.L profile.In the right window appears the label 'Right ditch dist. From road edge '.In the field next to it enter ‘1’, press the 'GetT' button on the left of the lower'Topography' table and click ‘Apply'. The profile of the existing ground atthe right edge of the road + 1M will appear before you. The verticalalignment will be built at a distance of 1 meter (as we have just defined) tothe right of the defined cross section end.To sample the ditches' I.L into the lower 'Design' table, press the 'Get ditchfrom C.S depth' button (a button to the left of the 'Design' table, showing ablue ditch). The software will project the ditches' I.L from the C.S into thetable. A break in the I.L profile (C.S that do not have ditch) will be shownas an empty line in the table.Change I.L profile the same way you have designed the road's verticalalignment, either by drawing it (in the 'VerEdit' layer) or changing the datain the lower 'Design' table.Press the 'Close' button in the right window.

Enter to the cross sections window ('Roads -> Cross Sections').Change the lower left table to 'Left ditch' and the lower right table to 'Rightditch'.Go into the 'Depth' fields ('Cut', 'Fill' and 'In between') and change them to'0' (both for left and right), and press 'Apply'.Project the entire change ('Depth = 0') onto the entire road (for moredetails see former stage - '2. Copying data into additional sections').The I.L of the Cross sections will be defined according to the I.L profilebeen designed in the Vertical Alignment window.








Additional 'Cover' functions

In the tables that define the cross sections, both ‘Structure’ and ‘DesignedG.L’, appears column 5 titled ‘ Cover ’. In Roads design, this column will bemainly used in the ‘Structure’ table. In ditch es design (not side ditches),where there will be no structure at all, (to learn more, see chapter 15 “Ditchand Reservoir Design”), we will use the ‘Cover’ column of the ‘DesignedG.L’. Two functions of this column: ‘1 – Asphalt' and '3 – Sidewalks' arediscusses at length in section “Cross sections” (from this chapter). We willnow expand the discussion to the remaining ‘Cover’ functions.

For each of the segments in the cross section (reminder: each line in thecross section is called a segment and is numbered by positive sequential

numbers right of the center line, and negative to its left), there is a separate‘Cover’ definition. The default to all the segments is no cover or as it isdefined ‘ 0 - None’. To define a ‘Cover’ to a particular segment, stand oncolumn 5 - in front of the segment and double click your mouse. An optionslist will open in this field, from which you can choose the desired cover.These are your choice options:

None – the default of every segment. An empty field that is equivalent to – 0, that signifies that the segment has no definite ‘Cover’.Asphalt – The selection of Asphalt for a particular segment will affect thesegment in two ways: contour lines will be defined for this segment, in thesame exact way, as if it was ‘Cover’ was chosen of ‘Contours -2’ type (seedetailing later on), and thickness will be given to the road structure line, inthis segment. To see the effect of the selection on the section, click‘Apply ’. The chosen segment will be marked by a bold line. Contours – (contour lines). The usage of ‘Contours’ type ‘Cover’ has beendemonstrated during the ‘cross sections’ section of this chapter. This typeof cover is used for defining the area in which contour lines will be shownin the layout. If you want contour lines only in the asphalt road area,choose ‘Contours’ only for segments that define asphalt. To receivesample sidewalk contour lines, mark these segments also with ‘Contours’.It is important to mention that in order to get contour line in a layout at the

desired segments, you should d efine ‘Contours’ along numerous sectionsin a parallel segment. After ‘Contours’ is selected, no effect will be seen onthe cross section. The affect will only be realized during the layout drawingstage.Sidewalk - Selecting sidewalk for a certain segment will cause a double-line drawing in the segment on the on the cross section.Garden - Selecting garden for a certain segment will draw a garden in thechosen segment, on the cross section.Block - This option is for “planting” blocks such as side -walk rim stonessecurity railing etc., in the cross section. CivilCAD 2014 is installed with alibrary which contains a collection of block (we are referring to the drawing

blocks), in format DWG, that can be added to the cross sections. In thetypical section/ specific cross section, we will define the location and type








of block, and afterwards it will appear as part of the section drawing. To doso follow these commands:Select ‘Block’ from the list.

In Windows XP OS the default location is:C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ApplicationData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Road Blocks\

In Windows Vista or Windows 7/8 OS the default location is:C:\ProgramData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Road Blocks\

After choosing click on “open”.Press 'Apply'.The software will position the chosen block in the section, at the end of thesegment to where it belongs.Note : In order to watch the block that was selected for a certain field,choose this field (one mouse click), and remain on it with your mousecursor. After two seconds, the file name will appear in yellow writing.In cut only – (cut only). This option enables to define the segment towhich it belongs, as the segment that will only appear if it is in ‘cut’.In fill only – (fill only). This option enables to define the segment to whichit belongs, as the segment that will appear only if it is in ‘fill’.

Tip: Adding 'Cover' to an existing cross section will change the currentsection only. To project the change to the entire sections, use the 'Send to'method – right click on the cell to be projected, select 'Send to', choose thesections to project to and press 'OK'.

Berms Design

CivilCAD 2014 makes it possible to add berms at cross sectionsautomatically, using ‘Berms’ mode. =We will demonstrate using thisexample:

Activate - ‘File ->Open project ’.Choose project 'Sample7' from the Samples folder.










Enter into the cross sections using ‘Roads- > Cross sections’ .Move to the first section from the list of sections from the right handwindow.Move the ‘ Designed G.L. ’ table to ‘ Berms ’ from the list that opens .Fill in the details in the table that appears according to the sample below:

Click ’Apply ’ to show the changes on the drawing .Click inside the 'Width' cell of the 'Cut_zone' row. Right-click (with themouse) and choose 'Send to'. Click 'Yes' to send the whole Berm data.Select the sections to send the data to and press OK.Press the 'Interpolate empty sections' button at the right window.

We will explain the table structure:The lines ‘ R’ and ‘ L’ marked in green, are not the line for entering this data,lines that separate between the Berms design at the right edge, to the leftedge of the section.The lines ‘ Cut Zone ’ - mark the Berms design in Cut.The lines ‘ Fill Zone ’- mark the Berms design in Fill.Width – the width of Berm's step.Height – the height of the Berm itself.Slope – the Berms step's slope.

The Berms slopes will be identical to the slope that determines for theedges slopes which is defined from the ‘ Designed G.L. ’ in fields:

Slp. Left: Cut 1: Fill 1:Slp. Right: Cut 1: Fill 1:








Working with typical sections

CivilCAD 2014 makes it possible to create ‘Template’ files in cross sectionsdesign. This file saves a typical design of all the statuses in a certainsection including the design, structure, side ditches, berms etc. We willexplain using the following example, how it is possible to create a ‘TML’file, save it, and afterwards use it to fill the section in a certain project.

Creating a ‘Template’ File

Start a new project and create a regular cross section (you can follow theexplanation appears in the Cross-Section part of this chapter). The cross

section can contain 'Structure', 'Design', 'Side ditches' or any other designelement.Note: The cross section can be created at any one of the sections in thelist.

After creating the cross section , click on ‘ Save sections to file ’ button .From the files window that opens switch to ‘ Template (*.Tml )' type, next to‘Save as type ’. Choose the template's file name and click ‘ Save ’.

Having saved the section, it can be used from here on in any project inwhich cross sections will be designed. It is best to save the ‘Template’ file

in a special designated folder for holding files of such sort, so they areeasy to find for future use.

Importing from a ‘Template’ file to Cross Sections

In order to create a project with cross sections filled by a ‘Template’ file,follow these steps:

Open a new project in CivilCAD 2014 ‘File- >New project’ .Define a new road and the horizontal alignment by ‘Roads -> horizontal

alignment’ as explained in section ‘horizontal alignment’.Go to the vertical alignment window by ‘ Roads- >vertical alignment’ andpress 'Apply' in the right window.Define the designed vertical alignment.Exit ‘vertical alignment’ window by clicking the ‘ Close ’ button.Move to ‘cross sections’ window by – ‘Roads->cross sections ’.

Click on the ‘ Options' button and move from ‘Elevations’ to ‘dH ’status. As you are importing a typical section, you will have to move to awork mode at relative heights.Define the number of sections and the distances between them using the

‘Define sections ’ button .








Click on the ‘ GetTAll ’ button to sample the existing status into the‘Existing ’ table.

Click on the ‘Load sections from text file’ button .From the files window* choose the TML file for which you want to load intothe sections. The section will be shown at the preview window.Click ‘Open’ , to fill the cross sections with TML file data.

In Windows XP OS the default location is:C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ApplicationData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Templates\

In Windows Vista or Windows 7/8 OS the default location is:C:\ProgramData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Templates\

Advanced topics on cross sectionsIn this clause, we will discuss the following topics:

Changing side slopes – breaking the elevation in the edges’sections.

Beside road - designing beyond the road's edges .Land development.

Automatic creation of Cross Sections for closing road’s edges todesigned planes

Utilities – crossing infrastructures.Side slope by road height.

Attach lines to roads – altering sections by choosing lines from thelayout.Quick thumbing through cross sectionsSub-Layers

Changing side slopes – breaking the el evation in the edges’ sections

CivilCAD enables defining changes in side slopes of the cross- sections’edge. Changes can be defined at a specific depth/height from existing G.Lor from Design G.L. In order to execute this, follow the next steps:

From the Main Menu activate 'Roads->Cross-sections '.Transfer one of the tables from the list in the bottom of the screen to'Changing side slopes'. The table is divided to 'Left edge' and 'Rightedge' and to 'Cut' mode and 'Fill' mode.Define the elevation (difference) from which the slope has to bechanged in Depth/Height columns, by the following rules:Positive value - breaking of the slope will be executed on thedifference from the existing G.L.Negative value - breaking of the slope will be executed on thedifference from the height of the design G.L.








Define the slope's ratio after the changing point (the slope before thechanging point will be defined in the 'Slope' column of the side slopesof the 'Design G.L.')

A space can be defined to create a step between the two slopes. Thespace in the space column will be defined in Meters.In order to view the changes in the section's draw, click 'Apply'.In order to copy the entire data to all sections or to part of the sections,right click on the table and choose all sections. In the opened window,choose the number of sections or click 'Send to' and then click 'OK'.

Beside road - designing beyond the road's edges CivilCAD enables the addition of planning in sections edges (for example ifa one wishes to plan a ditch beyond the edge's line). In order to do so,execute the following steps:

From the main menu activate ‘Roads->Cross sections ’.Transfer to one of the tables from the list in the bottom of the screen toBeside road. The table is divided to right side and Left side edge, to Fillmode and Cut mode.Enter the following data to Right side/ Left side and to Cut and Fillmode :Distance - distance of planning from the edge of the section.Width - width of the section.Dh(+/-) - height of the section relatively to the elevation at thesection’s edge. (A negative value can be entered by typingthe minus sign).Slope - the slope of the ditch/structure's edges (for example,entering the value: 2 will define a slope with a 1:2 ratio).In order to view the changes in the section's drawing, click ‘Apply’ .To copy these data to all sections or to part of these sections, right-click on the table and choose ‘Send to’. In the opened window, choosethe number of sections or click A to select all the sections, click ‘OK ’.

Land development

CivilCAD enables the marking definition of the land development on bothsides of the cross-section. To clarify the matter, we'll explain an examplethrough the following stages:

From the main menu activate ‘Roads- > cross sections’ .Transfer from the list in one of the tables in the bottom of the screen to‘Land development’ .Fill the following data to Left/Right side:Parcel No. - Name/number of parcel.Development elev. - elevation of ‘Zero’ point of parcel.Earthworks elev. - elevation of Design G.L. of parcel.








In order to view the changes in the section's drawing, click ‘Apply’ . Themarking on the development Height can be noticed on the drawing.To copy these data to all sections or to part of these sections, right-click on the table and choose ‘Send to’. In the opened window, choosethe number of sections or click A to select all the sections, click ‘OK ’.

Automatic creation of Cross Sections for closing road’s edges to

designed planes

Make sure that you explode the planes and change its layer beforeusing this function.From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Roads Cross sections'.

Click on the 'Get references by layers' button. ‘References’ windowwill be opened. At the 'References' window, select the desired layer and click the 'OK'button, or mark the 'Select' option, select the desired layer from thehorizontal alignment and press 'Enter' and 'OK'.Make sure that the ‘Add sections according to reference’ is checkmarked.

The software will perform filtering and the following message will appear:

Select one of the tables (Existing G.L. or Designed G.L.) and change to'References'.Double click the cell that is located on the References segments, underthe 'Cover' column.From the Drop-down list, select 'Edges attachment' option.

To send the ‘Edge Attachment’ definition to other sections:

Right click on the cell. At the selection window, click 'No' for sending current cell. At the 'Send to' window, select the section or sections that the datum

will be sent to or click the 'All' button for sending the datum to allsections.

Click the 'Interpolate empty sections' button and 'OK'.

The software will close the road's edges to the designed planes at thepoints which are defined by the 3D line.








In order to return the planes back to a 3D layer:

From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Design planes'.Click the 'Apply' button.

Utilities - infrastructure

CivilCAD enables to present infrastructure lines that intersect the road inthe cross-sections. We'll explain an example by the following stages:

From the main menu activate ‘Roads -> cros s sections’ .Transfer from the list in one of the tables in the bottom of the screen

to ‘Utilities ’.

There are two methods to enter data:

Method 1 - entering the following data to a table manually, as follows:Name - name of the infrastructure line (for example:electricity, sewage, water etc.).Offset – offset from the centerline.Elevation – elevation of the infrastructure.Depth - depth of the infrastructure relatively to the road'sstructure.Diam (cm) - diameter of the infrastructure's pipeline (in

centimeters).

Method 2 – extracting data from an AutoCAD's layer that containsthe infrastructure:

Click the button on the right hand side of the section'swindow.The layout's drawing will appear and on top of it, a windowwill open containing the list of layers.Mark the layers that include the infrastructure to extract fromor click ‘Select ’, s elect the desired layers on the drawing and

press 'Enter'.When the process is finished, a message will appear – press'OK' to end the process or 'Cancel' to continue and chooseanother layer.The marking of the infrastructure on top the relevant sectionscan be noticed by clicking them in the right window section'slist.








Side slope by road height

Side slopes can be defined according to the height or depth of the road.The software will calculate the side slopes according to the definedoptions. Several options can be defined by necessity. To define the sideslopes this way, execute the following steps:

From main menu activate ‘Roads- >Cross sections’ .Transfer out the list in the bottom of the screen to ‘Side slopes byroad height ’ table.Enter the following data to table:Depth Height - enter depth/height (for example, whenentering "1" the software will define the side slope where theheight or depth of the road will be up to 1 meter).Cut 1: - side slope in ‘Cut ’ zone (entering "2" will create aslope with the ratio of 1:2).Fill 1: - side slope in ‘Fill’ zone.In order to see the changes in the drawing, click ‘Apply’ .To copy these data to all sections or to part of these sections, right-click on the table and choose ‘Send to’. In the opened window, choosethe number of sections or click A to select all the sections, click ‘OK ’.

Side slope will be determined according to the Depth/Height datumratio filled in the table.

If the height difference between Existing G.L. and Designed G.L. isbigger than the highest Depth/Height datum – side slope will bedetermined according to the highest Depth/Height datum ratio.

Attach lines to roads - Changing the cross sections by choosing lines inthe layoutIn CivilCAD, sections' planning can be altered by moving the segments inthe tables. Attach lines to the road segments by choosing specific lines(layers) in the layout drawing. The software will pinpoint the desired

segment (Offset) to the lines in the designated layer. To execute thisaction, execute the following steps:

In the cross section window, click button . The sections window will minimize and the layout window will appearabove it.Choose the desired segment in the Sections segments ’ list.If you wish to accept this segment without changing its elevation, markoption ‘Don't change elevation ’.If you wish to change the segment's elevation without moving it, clickoption ‘Don't change Offsets ’.

Choose the table you wish to change: ‘Design ’ or ‘Structure ’.








Type maximum distance (in meters) from centerline for line near caption‘search range ’ switch to drawing and click on one line that represents thelayer of lines we wish to pinpoint. Click ‘Select ’ for plan and press ‘ Enter ’.For section's updating, click ‘OK’.

Attach ditch to line – attaching side ditch to a reference line by choosingthe line from the layout

From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Roads Horizontal Alignment'.Draw a polyline which will use as reference line for the side ditchattachment.From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Roads Cross Sections'.

Click the 'Attach Ditch To Line' button. 'Attach Ditch To Line'window will open.Mark the relevant side (Left Ditch or Right Ditch).Select the reference's layer from the layers list or click the 'Select'button and select the reference line from the drawing.Click the 'OK' button.

Note: The ditch will be attached to the reference line at the intersectionpoint between the ditch's slope (closest to the road) and the bottom of theditch respectively to the side of the ditch (Right or Left).

Quick thumbing through cross sections - according to step &station definition

In order to thumb through cross sections the Horizontal Alignment must bebuilt with ‘Triangles’ option:

From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Roads Horizontal Alignment'.Click the ‘Apply’ button. ‘Layout & Contours’ window will open. Make sure that ‘Triangles’ option is checked and click ‘OK’. From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Roads Cross Sections’.

Click the ‘Quick Sections View’ button. ‘Quick Sections View’window will open.Define the distance between sections (Step Size) and the station forstart thumbing (Start from Station).Click the right arrow to go to the next section and the left arrow forreturning to the last section








Sub Layers – creating sub layers for detailed earthworks report

In CivilCAD, sub layers can be defined for Structure, Designed G.L. andExisting G.L.

1. Click on ‘Insert Layers’ button. ‘Layers Manager’ window will ope n.

2. Select the desired layer (Existing G.L. , Designed G.L. or Structure) foradding sub layers.

3. Click on ‘Define a new layer’ button . ‘New Layer’ window will open.

4. Enter new layer name and click ‘OK’.

5. Click on the right cell to define sub layer’s color. Repeat steps 3-5 for each sub layer.

6. Use ‘Order’ arrows to define the order of sub layers on drawing.

7. Click ‘OK’ to save definitions.

8. Change one of the tables (Existing G.L. or Designed G.L.) to ‘Structure’and the other table to ‘Structure’ with sub laye r (will open automaticallywith sub layer).

9. Copy ‘Structu r e’ table to sub layer’s table and change dH of segment 0(should be lower than dH in ‘Structure’ table).

Repeat steps 8-9 for each sub layer.

10. Copy first section to last section and click ‘Apply’.

11. Cl ick on ‘Interpolate empty sections’ button to update all sections.

Sub Layers - Creating structure layers for each segment in cross sections

From CivilCAD main menu, go to 'Roads Cross Sections'.

Click on ‘Options’ button . ‘Options’ window will open .

Click on the Materials button . ‘Materials’ window will open. Enter the elements that component the structure layers and click ‘OK’.










For example:

Total thickness (in cm) will be presented in ‘Template width’ cell.

In order to change the order of elements in the current template, use‘Order’ arrows on the right side of the window.








Additional function buttons in the upper part of the window:

To erase a template from the list, cl ick on ‘Erase one template’ button

and click ‘OK’.

To erase all templates from the list, click on ‘Clear all templates’ button

and click ‘OK’.

To save templates list, click on button, enter name and path andclick ‘Save’.

To load templates list, click on button, select the desired file andclick ‘Open’.

Additional function buttons in the lower part of the window:

To erase an element from the list, click on ‘Erase one material’ button

and click ‘OK’.

To erase all materials from the list, click on ‘Clear all materials’ button

and click ‘OK’.

To copy elements from one template to another, use ‘Copy /Paste’

Buttons .

In order to add new line for a new material, Click on ‘New material’

Button .

Click ‘OK’ to save definitions.

Change one of the tab les in the bottom of the window to ‘Structure’.

At the Structure table, change from ‘Cover’ to ‘Sublayers’

For each segment attach the desired template.

In order to send a template to other sections right click on the desiredtemplate.

‘Send to’ window will open.

Select the section or sections that the template will be sent to or click

on the 'All' button for sending the template to all sections.








From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Roads EarthWorks’ and click‘Apply’ for full report.

Note : In order to use these templates in future projects, create thestructure layers templates in Prototype and Save.

In order to update Designed G.L. according to the Structure Sub Layers

definitions, click the Update Designed G.L. by Structure SubLayers .

‘Sent To’ windo w will open. Select the desired cross sections for

updating or click the 'All' button for updating all cross sections.

Click the ‘OK’ button and then Click the ‘OK’ button again.

Geometric computations along the center line

CivilCAD 2014 enables geometric computations along the center lineincluding several options such as coordinate's computations at station andoffset along the center line, geometric data reports of the center line andmore. Most of the functions from this window can be activated immediately,following the center line definition (Horizontal Alignment window), and withno definition of cross sections. To start, go to 'Roads -> Coordinatescomputations’ . These are the options available at the window that opens:

1. Coordinates computations along the center line – calculatinga single point.

Make sure that you choose ‘Coord’ from the options that appear in thewindow - ‘Coord’ or ‘Geom’. In the ‘ Station ’ field - enter the station (in meters), of the point you wishto compute. To compute a point in the second section, for example,enter 20 (or 25, depend on the distance between cross-sections). Click‘Enter’ to continue.

In the ‘ Offset ’ field - enter the computed point offset from the centerline. To compute the point in the center line itself, enter 0 or leave thefield empty. To compute a point left of the center line, enter a negativedistance, and to the right a positive one. Click ‘Enter’ to continue.In the ‘ New point’ field - enter the name of the new point to becomputed. It can be a number or an alphanumeric name that includesletters.Click ‘Enter’, or ‘ Apply ’ button. The program will compute the desiredcoordinate and add it to the list of coordinates at the bottom window.

As default, the computed coordinate will be added to the

‘Designed coordinates ’ list (browsing between lists is done, asaforesaid, by choosing ‘ Topography -> Coordinates ’ or








‘Design-> Coordinates ’ from the main menu). It is possible toinstruct the program for which list to perform its computation. Todo so, follow these steps:

From the main menu activate: ‘ Geometry-> Geometry parameters ’. Awindow will open from the right.From the window that opens choose ‘ Topo points only ’ to computethe data for the existing table, or ‘ Designed points only ’ to computatethem into the designed table.Click ‘OK’ to confirm.

(In order to determine this definition for all projects, follow this order ofcomma nds in the ‘Prototype’ project. )

2. Coordinates computations along or offset to the center line – computing a points' sequence

Make sure that you choose ‘Coord ’ from the options that appear in thewindow - ‘Coord ’ or ‘Geom’ .In field ‘ From ’, enter the station of the first point you want to computeand click ‘Enter’. For the beginning of the center line enter ‘0’. In field ‘ To ’ enter the station of the last point you want to compute andclick ‘Enter’.The program had computed the length of the center line and presentedit next to the ‘ Roads length ’ field. In order to compute points along theentire center line, enter the leng th near the ‘ To ’ field, and click ‘Enter’ tocontinue.In the ‘ Offset ’ field, enter the offset points computed from the centerline (and offset to it). To compute the center line points themselves,enter 0 or leave the field empty. To compute a point left of the centerline, enter a negative number, and to the right a positive one. Click‘Enter’ to continue.

It is possible to compute numerous points at different offsets in oneaction. To enter several offsets, separate the offsets using spaces. Forexample, if you want to compute the road section points, when for eachsection we are interested in the center line point itself and in the points tothe left and right of it at the offset of 5 meters, then enter “ -5 0 5 ” into the‘Offset ’ field.

In the ‘ New point ’ field, enter the first point number created. Theprogram will number the points from here on.

When working on a sequence of points (unlike computing a singlepoint), the name of the point entered in the ‘New point’ field, must bea number, in order for the program to number the points in anascending. You might want to give the points a characteristic prefix

name. To do so use the ‘prefix’ field. If you wish, for example, tocompute the actual center line points, enter ‘ CL ’ in the ‘ Prefix ’ field.








Click ‘Enter’, or ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute the desired pointsand add them to the coordinates list at the bottom window. If ‘ Prefix ’

was entered, then the names of the points will be added with theirmatching prefix. After you finish the computation, click to get thepoints on the drawing.

After you finish the computations, and confirm that in the bottom listappears the desired coordinates database, you can save the list in fileAscii , or print it (for more detail on saving or printing coordinates in aText file, see chapter 2 section 3 “Coordinates Database – commandbuttons connected to the list”).

3. Coordinates computations of the side-sticks points alongthe center line

This option enables coordinates computations of the cross sections'side-sticks points along the road, to its left and right. Using thisfunction requires, naturally, cross section definitions aside from thecenter line. To perform follow these steps:

Click on the side-sticks points' computation button from the righthand window (a button with a picture of a red stripe and two bluearrows). The window will open.

From the window that opens, you have the following options:1) By default, the program will compute the side-sticks points

for the ‘ Designed G.L'. If you wish to compute the side-sticks points for the ‘Structure’, move the small arrow fromthe ‘ Designed G.L ’ dialog box, to ‘ Structure ’.

2) E ntering a “security distance” to the side-sticks points- leftand right. If you want the software to compute the side-sticks points at an offset from their real location, enter thisdistance at the proper fields : for field ‘ Lef t’ enter t hedistance to the left edge , and for field ‘Right’ the distanceto the right edge. The distance entered, will always befrom the center line and outwards, (distances will alwaysbe entered as an absolute value without the '-' sign).

3) Enter the ‘Prefix ’ to the points about to be created. If youwant to add any kind of text to the names of the pointscreated (say the name of the road to which they belong),enter this text in the ‘ Prefix ’ field.

After determining the desired window setting, click ‘ Apply ’ to performthe computation. The program will compute the points according todefinitions and they will be added to the ‘ Designed coordinates ’ list atthe bottom. The names of the points will be chosen according to thename of the section to which they belong, with the addition of ‘L’ or ‘R’to mark the point left or right of the section. In addition, if the ‘Prefix ’








was entered, it will appear at the beginning of the points' names. For

report preview click button from the right.

4. The center line geometric data computations

In order to get the geometric data list, choose ‘ Geom ’ (choose between

‘Coord ’ and ‘ Geom ’ options), and click on the report butto n . In thereport that opens you will see the center line geometric data with the IPcoordinates data and arch data. To print this data, click on the printerbutton from the bottom of this window. The geometric data report canbe placed on the drawing. To do so, first compute the report as detailedabove, and perform the following steps:

Click on the 'Locate table on drawing' button .

In the AutoCAD command ruler appears the labeling – ‘Locate table.Pick Location/Set/(Esc)nd :’. Mark the cursor in the location you wantit to appear in the table. Mouse click to get the table’s borders frame.The borders will appear at a temporary layer that will be erased onceyou finish positioning the table. You may choose from a number oflocations for your table, i.e. receive the frame an unlimited number oftimes, until it’s final location is set. After choosing the final location,click ‘S ’ from the ‘ AutoCAD ’ line and ‘Enter’. The temporary borderswill be erased and the table will be positioned at the location of yourlast choice.

The table font size can also be changed. In order to make a change,

click on the ‘ Option' button from the right window . From thewindow that opens, choose the desired font size using the small arrownext to ‘ Scale ’ field. After choosing, click ‘OK’. To change the table onthe drawing, you will have to go back and position it as explained at thetop.

Changing the Horizontal Alignment

In section “Horizontal Alignment” from this chapter, we have shown manyways to define the Horizontal Alignment of an center line. During thecourse of the proceeding chapters, we have shown how, relying on thisalignment, it is possible to base the vertical alignment and cross sectionsof a designed road. During the discussion, we have shown a case where achange of a certain IP location is needed. In this chapter we will expandthe discussion on the topic of changing the Horizontal Alignment of thecenter line and its effects.








On the basis of this example, we will detail the order of commands thatmust be followed to change the Horizontal Alignment of a center line, andthe affect of this alignment change:

1. Changing the alignment – the Horizontal Alignment definition of thecenter line is performed, as aforesaid, from the Horizontal Alignmentwindow. CivilCAD 2014 binds the IP list from the right hand table in theHorizontal Alignment window, to the IP list of the bottom windowcoordinates list (‘Designed coordinates’), by the points names. In caseyou change an IP coordinate in the ‘Designed coordinates’ list, and click‘Apply ’ and ‘OK’ , your center line alignment will change as well. If youchange the name of a certain point from the ‘Designed coordinates’ list,‘CivilCAD 2014 will lose the connection to the point, and then thecoordinates change of the same point will not affect the Horizontal

Alignment. We have shown that there numerous systems to defining theHorizontal Alignment. We will now show how to change the Alignmentusing different methods:

Using ‘ Select ’ – a t every choice of ‘Polyline’, the program creates an IPlist according to its location. To change the alignment used by ‘Select’,start moving first, the base center line alignment (the center line onwhich you initially marked as ‘Select’), with the help of AutoCAD usingthe ‘ Stretch ’ functions, and choose ‘Select’ again. You can see thateach time you choose ‘Select’, the program creates a new IP list withdifferent names than the previous list, and adds the points to the‘Designed coordinates’ list. At this stage, to avoid confusion, yo u canphysically change the previous points list from the ‘Designedcoordinates’ list (to delete a point or a number of points, see chapter 2section 3 “Coordinates Database – command buttons connected to thelist”).

Using ‘ Pick ’, ‘Locate ’, or manually en tering points – in any case wehave created the Horizontal Alignment of the center line, without theuse of the ‘Select’ command, we will move its IP location or the entirealignment, by physically changing the coordinate point from the

‘Designed coordinates’ list. Another method of graphically changing thepoint's coordinate is the ‘ Move ’ option as explained in section – “Horizontal Alignment”.

2. Effects of the Horizontal Alignment on the Vertical Alignment – afterchanging the horizontal alignment, in order to get the new groundsection, enter ‘Vertical Alignment’. The section that appears in thewindow, will remain identical to the previous section. Click on the ‘ GetT ’button. The program will perform a re-sampling of the ground surfaceaccording to the new alignment. When you finish, click ‘ Apply ’ to getthe new section drawing.








Note: It is possible that changing the Horizontal Alignment willchange length of the Vertical Alignment. If there was already anexisting design for Vertical Alignment, it will immediately appear onthe new surface ground. However, there might be a case where thelength of the designed section does not fit the existing Vertical

Alignment, and here you must make changes as required.

3. The effect of the Horizontal Alignment on Cross Sections – afterchanging the Horizontal Alignment, it is likely the length of the centerline will be changed. When you enter the ‘ Cross sections ’ window, theprogram will compute the length of the new center line, and present it in

– ‘Roads length ’. In case there were (before the changing of theHorizontal Alignment), cross sections along the entire center line, afterchanging the length of the center line, they will no longer exist. We willseparate between two cases : the length of the center line decreasesrelatively to its previous length, or increases. We will explain therequired change in the cross sections using these two examples:

Example A : the decreasing center line length – let us say that beforethe change, the length of our center line was about – 215.32 meters,and we divided the center line to cross sections every 20 meters. Thelast two sections in the center line were therefore the station of 200meters and 215.32 meters. Now let us assume that after the change,the length of the center line has changed to – 187.32 meters. Thisdistance will appear at ‘ Roads length’ , while in the list of sections theprevious sections will appear, including these two sections. We willmatch between the length and the list of sections in the followingmanner:

Delete the sections at the distance of 200meters and 215.32 from the list of sections.Now the last section will be at a 180 meterdistance. Move to the end of the list ofsections and add a section 187.32 metersstation.

Example B : the increasing center line length – let us say that beforethe change the length of the center line was 215.32, and we assumethat it is divided every 20 meters to cross sections. Let us now assumethat the length of the center line grew to – 240.56 meters. We willdelete section 215.32 from the list of sections, and add these sectionsto the list: 220, 240, and 240.56.

After we have adjusted the sections along the new center line, we will readthe existing ground data again. Do this for all the sections, both new and

old (as they changed their position). Click on the ‘ GetT all’ button , andin the window that opens, click ‘OK’. The program will read the newexisting status data into the sections. Complete the design of the new








sections you have created (you can do so by using ‘Copy’ and ‘Paste’ asshown in section “Cross Sections”).

Note: After sampling the existing status G.L data, the program willcompute again the dibblings and various stages of the sections segments,and fit the sections to the change in the surface of the existing ground.However, there are exceptional cases especially in side ditches, for whichthe program will not do this properly and the change will not be felt. In suchcases, you will have to perform a new interpolation of the section. It is

important to mention that the interpolation button , apart from doinginterpolation to empty intermediate sections, moves and updates allexisting cross sections.

Changing the road's alignment after a full design

CivilCAD allow you to change the route of the road's alignment(centerline alignment), either at the beginning, during or after, whilemaintaining the stations and the design of the cross sections whichremain unchanged.

Note: you can use CivilCAD sample project: 'Changing-Road-

Alignment'.

In Windows XP OS the default location is:C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ApplicationData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Samples\Changing-Road-Alignment.prj\

In Windows Vista or Windows 7/8 OS the default location is:C:\ProgramData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\ Samples\Changing-Road-Alignment.prj\

You can also use CivilCAD2012 V1.0 Newsletter (paragraph 11).

To use this feature: From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Roads Horizontal Alignment’ .

Note: changing the road's alignment can be done only by using

CivilCAD Horizontal Alignment Tools (Roads Horizontal Alignment

Tools).

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Roads Horizontal Alignment Tools’

and select ‘Line_Line_Curve’ option.








In AutoCAD Command Line you will be asked to select the ‘first’ line.

Select the new geometry line.

In AutoCAD Command Line you will be asked to select the ‘second’line. Select the line for extension.

In AutoCAD Command Line you will be asked to enter Cloto. In. Enter

the desired datum and click ‘Enter’.

In AutoCAD Command Line you will be asked to enter Radius. Enter

the desired datum and click ‘Enter’.

In AutoCAD Command Line you will be asked to enter Cloto. Out.

Enter the desired datum and click ‘Enter’. Repeat these steps for all segments if required.

From ‘Roads Horizontal Alignment' menu, click the 'Change

Alignment' button. (If you are using the Sample Project – start

from this stage)

In AutoCAD Command Line you will be asked to Select corrected

segment.

Select the new Centerline from the drawing. CivilCAD will automatically

recognize the centerline's segments and mark them with yellow

arrows.

Note: in case the first segment is not on the existing centerline, the

following message window will appear:

Click the 'Yes' button and in the next message window click the 'OK'

button to confirm the changes in the road's centerline.








Click the 'Apply' button to build the road's centerline and update the

alignment.

CivilCAD keeps the sections' names and stations up to the point of the

geometry change and starting from the point where the change ends

and creates intermediate sections along the new segment of the new

centerline.

Note: the distance between the intermediate sections will be based on

the 'Distance between sections' definition.

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Roads Vertical Alignment’ .

Click the 'Apply' button.

CivilCAD keeps the sections' names and stations up to the point of the

geometry change and starting from the point where the change ends

and creates a new segment.

Note: CivilCAD automatically adds -1 under 2T column to the line where

the geometrical change starts.

Delete the -1 from the cell.

Draw a Polyline connecting the existing segments or enter the data

manually in the 'Centerline Design' table.

Define the radius if necessary and click the 'Apply' button.

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Roads Cross Sections' .

CivilCAD added intermediate sections with the letter A to the sections

list.

Design the road in the sections which were added to the sections list

and click the 'Create Layout' button.








Note: for roads which are designed by 'Extract' – you can perform the

Extract operation only on the added sections.

Automatic junctions design

CivilCAD enables designing junctions and display the junctions in theroad's horizontal alignment and cross sections, including traffic islands.

Note : At this stage, CivilCAD creates the junctions automatically. Theuser cannot define the junctions elements prior to the junctions creation.To use this feature (after full roads design):

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Roads Vertical Alignment ’. Vertical

Alignment ’ menu will open on the right side of the screen.

From the Roads List, select the road which will be the main road.

Define the centerlines elevation at the intersection point and click the

'Apply' button.

In the opened window, click the 'Update All' button.

From CivilCAD main menu, go to: 'Roads Horizontal Alignment'.

Click the 'Apply' button. 'Create Layout' window will open.

Checkmark the 'Create Junctions' option and click the 'OK' button.

Note: CivilCAD will automatically create the junctions and update theroads layout, including the roads contours and cross sections.

From CivilCAD main menu, go to: 'Junctions Junctions Definition'.

'Junctions Definition' window will open on the right side of the screen.

Note: It is possible to change the Start Station & End Station of the junction:

Under Range', define the Start Station in 'Start St.' cell and the End

Station in 'End St.' cell or click the 'Pick' button and mark the Start &

End stations on the centerline of the road which was defined as Main

Road.

Click the 'OK' button.









Click the 'Apply' button and then click the 'OK' button.

In order to define Traffic Islands:

From CivilCAD main menu, go to: 'Junctions Junctions Islands'.

'Junctions Islands' menu will open on the right side of the screen.

Note: CivilCAD will automatically identify the roads which creates the junction.

Click the 'New Island' button. CivilCAD will add a traffic island to

the 'Junctions Islands List'.

Click the 'Select' button and select the traffic island from the drawing

(the traffic island must be a Polyline).

Note: CivilCAD will automatically identify the number of points whichcreates the Polyline.

Click the 'OK' button to save the definitions.


Click the 'Apply' button and then click the 'OK' button.








Field of view planning

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Roads Visibility' . 'Visibility' windowwill open.

For visibility report, click the 'Report' button on the top left side of'Visibility' window.

In order to export the sections to DXF file, click the 'DXF' button onthe top left side of 'Visibility' window. 'Save to DXF' window will open.

Define From/To Station

Define the Steps (distance between sections) and click the 'OK' button.

Save the DXF file.

Offset from the centerline

Driver's eyeheight

Driving direction

Obstacle height

Delay between frames seconds

Sections List

Road's name








Breaking distance test

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Roads Visibility' . 'Visibility' windowwill open.

For breaking distance report, click the 'Report' button on the top left

side of 'Visibility' window. In order to export the sections to DXF file, click the 'DXF' button on

the top left side of 'Visibility' window. 'Save to DXF' window will open.

Define From/To Station

Define the Steps (distance between sections) and click the 'OK' button.

Save the DXF file.

Offset from Centerline

Driver's eye height

Driving Direction

Sidewalk's height

Road's name

Cross Sections list

Delay between steps (seconds)








Bridges Design

It is possible to design bridges with CivilCAD and display the

bridges in the road's vertical alignment and cross sections.

not take the At this stage, road's earthworks module does:Note

slopes cancelation in the bridge area under consideration.

To use this feature (after full road design):

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Roads Bridges/Tunnels’ .

'Bridges/Tunnels’ menu will open on the right side of the screen.

Define the bridge's name and under 'Bridge Name', double click in the

'Type' cell and select the 'Bridge' option.

Click the ‘Pick’ button and mark with your mouse the start point and end

point of the bridge (on the road's centerline) or type manually in 'From

station' and 'To station'.

Define the bridge's width in each side of the road's centerline (under

Offset) in 'Left/Right' cells.

Click the 'Apply' button to save the definitions and then click the 'Close'

button.

Click the 'Create Layout' button to update the road's horizontal

alignment.

To erase a bridge, from CivilCAD main menu, go to:

'Roads Bridges/Tunnels' and click the 'Erase Bridges/Tunnels'

button.

Click 'OK' to confirm.








Tunnels Design

It is possible to design tunnels with CivilCAD and display the tunnels

in the road's vertical alignment and cross sections.

At this stage, road's earthworks module does not take the:Note

slopes cancelation in the tunnel area under consideration.

To use this feature (after full road design):

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Roads Bridges/Tunnels’ .

'Bridges/Tunnels’ menu will open on the right side of the screen.

Define the tunnel's name and under 'Bridge Name', double click in the

'Type' cell and select the option 'Tunnel'.

Click the ‘Pick’ button and mark with your mouse t he start point and end

point of the Tunnel (on the road's centerline) or type manually in 'From

station' and 'To station'.

Define the Tunnel's width in each side of the road's centerline (under

Offset) in 'Left/Right' cells.

Click the 'Apply' button to save the definitions and then click the 'Close'

button.

Click the 'Create Layout' button to update the road's horizontal

alignment.

To erase a tunnel, from CivilCAD main menu, go to:

'Roads Bridges/Tunnels' and click the 'Erase Bridges/Tunnels'

button.

Click 'OK' to confirm.








Design lots between roads

CivilCAD enables designing lots between roads, with inverted

slopes, in order to avoid duplication of earthworks volumes between

the roads and the lots.

To use this feature :

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘ Roads Roads Lots'. 'Roads Lots'

menu will open on the right side of the screen.

Click the 'Filter Roads Lots from Drawing' button'. 'Roads Lots'

menu will change to 'Filtering' menu. Click the 'Select' button, mark the desired lot in the drawing and hit the

'ENTER' button.

Click the 'Apply' button. A message window will appear with the number

of lots which were found by CivilCAD.

Click the 'OK' button. 'Filtering' menu will change back to 'Roads Lots'

menu, with a list of the lots.

In case of lots with rounded corners, define the radius division tosegments (meters) in 'Steps (m)' cell.

Click the 'Apply' button.


Click the 'Apply' button and then click the 'OK' button. CivilCAD will build

the lots between the roads.

From CivilCAD main menu, go to: 'Roads Cross Sections'. CivilCAD

will display the lots in the cross sections.








Chapter 15: Retaining walls








Designing retaining walls

The retaining wall design module is exclusive to the CivilCAD 2014program. It offers the user a comprehensive retaining wall design facility,both for walls that support roads and for free standing walls. It should benoted that the module deals with the various design features, but not withwall stability and structure.

This chapter deals with the steps involved in retaining wall design:Walls list.Horizontal alignment.Vertical Alignment.

Wall dimension.Report generation.

All the steps involved in carrying out retaining walls design are within thescope of the 'Walls' menu. The design options are available only whenworking with AutoCAD/IntelliCAD, and are not available on a Stand-Alonebasis.

Designing retaining walls Attached to road (Format 1)

Creating the walls list

The first design step is identifying each wall by naming it and bydetermining if it is part of one of the roads comprising the project.

1. In the main menu box click 'Walls -> Walls List' . This opens theWalls List dialogue box.

2. Enter the name of each wall that is to be designed in the Wall name column.

3. To the right of the name chosen, select the road the wall supports

(or supports its surrounds) in the Attach road cell.4. If a road has been selected in the previous step, select Left or Right(according to side of the road it supports) in the Side cell.

Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each wall. There is no limit on the number of walls. At the end of each iteration, click Close to exit.









After defining the walls, proceed to specifying their horizontal alignments

1. Whilst in AutoCAD (or IntelliCAD), specify the line of wall by auniform Polyline extending the whole length of the wall. ThePolyline can have both straight and curved elements. It isrecommended that the Polyline be drawn as a separate layer, atyour discretion.

2. In the main menu, select Walls > Horizontal alignment, whichwill open the Horizontal Alignment box, on the right.

3. Select the wall to be aligned from the list displayed.4. Click Select , switch to drafting and select the appropriate

Polyline. Press 'Enter' , and the wall’s list of IP points, includingradiuses, will appear on the right.

5. Press Apply . The draft will show the line ’s geometric data.

An automatic feature is available for defining a wall that runs parallelto the road's centerline.

This will define a wall running the length of the road, thereby obviating theneed to draw the wall separately.

1. Select the appropriate wall from the list displayed.

2. Click the button Create wall at offset from CL. In thebox , enter the offset distance and click 'OK' . The program willprovide a wall at the appropriate offset.

3. Click 'Apply' to view the line of the aforementioned wall.

Additional options in the Horizontal Alignment window

Clear all IPs – deletes all IPs from the list.

Erase current IP – deletes only the current IP.

Walls options - this window features capping the distance forgenerating changes arising out of changes in the road cross section, for aroad attached wall, using the 'Wall range' facility. If the distance betweenthe wall and the road center for a specific cross-section is above the rangeentered, the program will not display the wall for that cross-section.








Vertical Alignment

The following procedure defines the longitudinal cross-section of the wall.

1. Click Walls > Vertical alignment in the main menu to obtain thewindow for designing the longitudinal cross-section. The upper part ofthe window shows the cross-section, and the lower part contains twotables. The left hand table is for topographical data and the right handtable is for wall data. The topographical data table has three sub-tableseach of which can be accessed independently by clicking it in the listabove the tableExisting - for the existing ground level.Design – for the required ground data (e.g. open areas).Road level – if the wall is supporting a road in the project, the table willshow the elevation of the road from the beginning to the end of the roadin question.

2. Click on the required wall in the list at the top right of the window.3. Clicking on the Apply button will automatically enter the topographical

data in the table on the lower left – the existing ground data and, for aroad supporting wall, and the elevation of the road at the centerline ofthe wall.

4. Two options are provided for laying out the wall1. Entering the data in the Wall data table.

Station - wall lengthTop Elev. - the height of the top of the wallBase Elev. - the height at the bottom of the wallDrop in base – an additional (stepped) reduction in elevation;this feature provides for reducing the slope of the road baseshould this be excessively steep.

2. Setting initial criteria, using the button, which opens theWalls – Init options window.Enter the following data for dig and fill.

Min. height [h] – the program will create a retaining wall atlocations where the height difference between theexisting/planned height and that of the road is above the valueenteredMin. dist – the value of this parameter will determine the depthof the base of the wall according to its horizontal distance to theground surface. This value is the horizontal distance of the baseof the wall from the edge of the existing ground (and will alsoautomatically deepen the wall base if this horizontal distance isinsufficient).








Pop - this sets the height distance of the wall above the plannedor existing ground, or the planned road, in accordance with theground to be supported.Base depth - this sets the depth of the wall base, and can be

specified by a formula which takes the wall’s height into account,e.g. the default setting is according to the formula

H*O.15 + 0.4 .Max. base slope[%] – the maximum slope of the wall base .Max. drop in base.Min. drop in base.

Once the initial values have been set, they can be altered manually bykeying in the appropriate values in the table. When the data have beenentered, click on the Apply button. The program will display the drawingand the data table. If the wall is supporting a road in the project, the bottomline in the data table displays the names of the road sections in questionopposite the rubric No. (The distance at which these names are shown isthat measured on the wall C.L). If the wall ends before a given cross-section of the road, the display will show the name of the previous section,and the suffix “1”. (For example, if the name of the last section that the wallimpinges on is 14, the display will be 14.1).Sharp non-cur ved changes of the wall’s horizontal direction will be flaggedon the drawing, and show the angle of turn.

Additional options in this window

Topographical data + ground as planned + road height .When this button is clicked, the program will transfer thetopographical data at the bottom left to the display. (If the wall isattached to a road in the project, opening the Road level list canfetch its data). This feature will be activated if one of the tableshas been accidentally deleted and is to be restored. When thewindow is first opened, clicking Apply will restore the data.

Transferring the section to .DXF files – after clicking thisbutton, insert the scale required, click OK and select the filename, including its path. Click OK .

Deleting data from tables – after clicking the button, select thename of the table to be deleted and click OK .

Update design to cross section land dev. – for the insertionof retaining wall heights to road cross-sections (if the wall isattached to a road in the project). After clicking, transfer to theCross-sections window by selecting the Roads > Cross








sections menu, and transfer the appropriate table from thebottom of the screen. Note that the wall heights have beenentered in the table for all cross-sections along the road.

Land development data extracts distances and elevation, fromthe drawing, employing the procedure set out below:

1 Clicking on the button displays a small window above thewindow of the drawing.

2. To select a particular distance, click on Pick in the smallwindow, transfer to the drawing, and click at the point on theline the data of which are required. The program will displaythe point’s distance in the Station cell.3. One or two heights can be entered at the point in question,by inserting in the cells Elevation 1 and Elevation 2

respectively, and clicking OK .4. Repeat as required, and to exit click Cancel.5. The heights and distances abstracted will be shown

in Design in the left hand table.6. Click Apply to update the drawing with the data selected.

Cross Section Display Range affords a view of the cross-sectionover a given range. Set the initial distance at From and the enddistance at To , and click Apply .

Wall dimensions (Cross section)

After determining the wall’s vertical alignment, the next step isprescribing its dimensions. If a particular configuration is to berepeated, the program allows for creating types of wall. The steps to be carried out are set out below.1. Click Wall > Dimensions in the main menu to obtain the

dimension definition window.2. Select the subject wall from the list at the top right.

3. If the wall is to be divided into sections (having differentdimensions), enter the station for each section in the upper rightof the window. Alternatively, to select the distance by position,click on Pick underneath the table, to and mark the section orsections to be added to the table . If the wall is to have unitary dimensions, ignore step 3, and thetable will have only one row.

4. The window shows the drawing and the dimensional standardsfor a retaining wall.It also shows the sections and the slopes specified in the data

tables.








Enter the required dimensions in the table and click Apply at theright of the screen. The drawing will show the wall dimensions asspecified. To view the aforementioned standard wall, click on

. (A second click will redisplay the dimensions specified.

Entering formula generated specifications

The program offers the choice of keying the absolute values ofthe dimensions or by formula *, related to the wall height [h] (withthe height being supplied by the program) or based on otherdata ** in the program.For example, h/4+0.20 can be specified in field B, and 2*B infield C, i.e. B is height relative, and C is governed by B.

All five available fields may be utilized (a,b,c,d,e).* It is advisable to check that no mutually dependent formula hasbeen employed.**Formula calculations operate from left to right, and allmathematical calculations should be specified bearing this inmind.

5. Should the wall have been divided into sections, repeat theforegoing for each section in the table by clicking on the sectionin the table and entering the data.

6. When data entry is complete, click Close. If required, return tothe cross-section to view the wall. If the wall supports a road inthe project, the program automatically updates the cross-sections of the road with the specifications of the wall.

7. To display a wall in Quick Section:From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Roads Horizontal

Alignment’. Click the ‘Apply’ button. ‘Layout and Contours’ window willopen.Make sure that ‘Triangles’ option is checked and click ‘OK’. From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Design Section’. Select ‘Pick’ option and create a line on drawing whichrepresent the quick section.Click ‘Apply’ button. ‘Section’ window will open and the wallwill be displayed in the section’s drawing.


Transfer the wall dimension drawing to the .DXF file - afterclicking this button, insert the scale required, click OK and selectthe place and the file name.

Zoom Extents clicking on this buttons shows the drawing in full.








Designing free standing retaining walls (Format 2)

Creating the walls list

The first design step is identifying each wall by naming it and bydetermining it as a free standing wall.

1. In the main menu box click 'Walls -> Walls List' . This opens theWalls List dialogue box.

2. Define wall format as ‘Format 2’ .3. Enter the name of each wall that is to be designed in the Wall name

column.4. Enter a wall prefix .

5. Enter the desired starting point number.Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each wall. There is no limit on the number of walls.

At the end of each iteration, click Close to exit.


After defining the walls, proceed to specifying their horizontal alignments

1. Whilst in AutoCAD (or IntelliCAD), specify the line of wall by auniform Polyline extending the whole length of the wall. ThePolyline can have both straight and curved elements. It isrecommended that the Polyline be drawn as a separate layer, atyour discretion.

2. In the main menu, select Walls > Horizontal alignment, whichwill open the Horizontal Alignment box, on the right.

3. Select the wall to be aligned from the list displayed.4. Click Select , switch to drafting and select the appropriate

Polyline. Press 'Enter' , and the wall’s list of IP points, includingradiuses, will appear on the right.

5. Press Apply . The draft will show the line’s geometric data. 6. From AutoCAD (or IntelliCAD) main menu, click Insert menu

and select Block .7. Select the ‘USER_WDLEVEL’ block .

In Windows XP OS the default location is:C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ApplicationData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Road Blocks\

In Windows Vista or Windows 7/8 OS the default location is:C:\ProgramData\SivanDesign\CivilCAD\Road Blocks\

8. Attach the block to the wall’s first IP on drawing.








9. In AutoCAD (or IntelliCAD) command line, type the desireddatum defining the wall’s data for the specific IP according to thediagram below:

A. LEVEL 1 (Wall)

B. DLEVEL 1 (Back Design GL)C. LEVEL 2 (Wall)D. DLEVEL 2 (Back Design GL)E. DFLEVEL 1 (Front Design GL)F. DFLEVEL 2 (Front Design GL)

10. Press Apply . The drawing will be updated according to wall’sdefinition.

11. Repeat steps 6 – 10 for each wall’s IP.

Additional options in the Horizontal Alignment window

Clear all IPs – deletes all IPs from the list.

Erase current IP – deletes only the current IP.

Walls option - In this window you can define CivilCAD to add wallprefix to wall’s IP’s automatically .

DesignGL FD

C

A

B E








Vertical Alignment

The following procedure defines the longitudinal cross-section of the wall.

1. Click Walls Vertical alignment in the main menu to obtain thewindow for designing the longitudinal cross-section. The upper part ofthe window shows the cross-section, and the lower part contains twotables. The left hand table is for topographical data and the right handtable is for wall data. The topographical data table has three sub-tableseach of which can be accessed independently by clicking it in the listabove the tableExisting - for the existing ground level.Front G.L. – for the front designed ground data according to IPnumbering.Back G.L. – for the back designed ground data according to IPnumbering.

2. Click on the required wall in the list at the top right of the window.3. Clicking on the Apply button will automatically enter the topographical

data in the table on the lower left – the existing ground data.4. Two options are provided for laying out the wall

1. Entering the data in the Wall data table.

Station - wall lengthTop Elev. - the height of the top of the wallBase Elev. - the height at the bottom of the wallThe base elevation must be defined. Otherwise the report willnot be performed.Drop in base – an additional (stepped) reduction in elevation;this feature provides for reducing the slope of the road baseshould this be excessively steep.

2. Setting initial criteria, using the button, which opens theWalls – Init options window.Enter the following data for dig and fill.

Length – the wall’s length in meters will be automatically filled inthat cell.Dist – the value of this parameter will determine the distancebetween steps.Delta Height - the value of this parameter will determine thestep height.Start Height - the value of this parameter will determine thewall’s sta rt height.

Once the initial values have been set, they can be altered manually by

keying in the appropriate values in the table. When the data have beenentered, click on the Apply button. The program will display the drawing








and the data table. (The distance at which these names are shown is thatmeasured on the wall C.L).


Topographical data + Designed ground data height .When this button is clicked, the program will transfer thetopographical data at the bottom left to the display. ForBack\Front designed data, change the bottom left dialog box tothe relevant window, click ‘Get data from general project’ button and click ‘OK’. Click Apply to update drawing and restore data.

Transferring the section to .DXF files – after clicking thisbutton, insert the scale required, click OK and select the filename, including its path. Click OK .

Deleting data from tables – after clicking the button, select thename of the table to be deleted and click OK .

Land development data extracts distances and elevation, fromthe drawing, employing the procedure set out below:

1 Clicking on the button displays a small window above thewindow of the drawing.2. To select a particular distance, click on Pick in the smallwindow, transfer to the drawing, and click at the point on theline the data of which are required. The program will displaythe point’s distance in the Station cell.3. One or two heights can be entered at the point in question,by inserting in the cells Elevation 1 and Elevation 2respectively, and clicking OK .4. Repeat as required, and to exit click Cancel.5. The heights and distances abstracted will be shown in

Design in the left hand table.6. Click Apply to update the drawing with the data selected.

Cross Section Display Range affords a view of the cross-section over a given range. Set the initial distance at Fromand the end distance at To , and click Apply .










Report generation

After the definition process has been completed, a quantities report isavailable. This gives the area and volume of the wall in each cross-section(according to the distance markers in the horizontal alignment). Togenerate the report:

In the menu, select Walls > Quantities , this opens a window on theright.From the wall list at the top of the window, select the appropriatewall.Click Apply to show the report.








Chapter 16: Extract andurban design








Extract and urban design

This chapter will deal with the ‘ Extract ’ option - used mainly for roadsurban design. This feature is optional only for IntelliCAD/AutoCAD users.Using thi s tool, you can automatically design a road’s cross -sections in justa few easy steps. This command is based on the definition of a typicalsection and sampling of the road structure from the layout itself. In thedesign of a typical road using cross sections, we have performed theopposite, i.e., after defining the cross sections the program created thelayout on the drawing.

In this chapter we will show a step by step of all the fundamentals of urban

roads design:Preparing the background.Defining the project centerlines.Creating the cross sections using Extract.Saving and reading typical cross sections from a ‘Tml’ file. Functions from the Extract window.

Preparing the work background

In the project preliminary background preparation stage, a drawing will becreated in AutoCAD containing the road structure drawing andmeasurement of the existing status. The existing status can also bedefined by ‘Reg’ and ‘Dis’ files and it is not obligatory to define it on thedrawing. In addition, it is possible to begin a new project without a pre-defined background, and import or draw the lines that describe the roadstructure after the project has begun. These lines should be drawn inseparate designated layers. It is also best to define new layers (theirnames have no meaning) that will contain only the lines describing theroad structure. We will define the horizontal alignment and the linesshowing the road structure on the drawing, for example:








1. Open a new project (‘ File- > New Project’ ) and name your project.2. * For AutoCAD users only:

From AutoCAD menu open ‘File -> Open ’.In the files window that opens choose the ‘Dwg’ file as workbackground and open itFrom the CivilCAD 2014 menu open ‘File -> Save’ . The programwill create a copy of the original ‘Dwg ’ file you have chosen in yourproject library (later on this file will receive a name similar to theproject name in CivilCAD 2014 with the addition of the character ‘_’). * Users of AutoCAD - are users that work with CivilCAD 2014 and

AutoCAD combin ed, as opposed to ‘Stand -alone’.

The principle of working with CivilCAD 2014 is a 3D-model. On the basis ofthis model the software performs activities such as exporting sections,quantities computation etc. In order to create this model, the program musthave a coordinates file. If you have a coordinates file in an ordinary (ASCII)text format, skip to number 5 in this section.

As aforesaid, the program requires a coordinates file. If this file does notexit, the program can create it from the Dwg drawing file under thefollowing conditions:

3. * For AutoCAD users only:Go to ‘ General -> Filtering ’. A window will open from the right. The principle of creating a coordinates file from the drawing is the*‘Filtering’ of a layer (an AutoCAD layer) - containing the points orcontour lines. First, locate the desired layer in AutoCAD. This layermust have ‘Z’ dimension in AutoCAD.

* For more on ‘Filtering’ see Chapter 23 – “Handling DWG Files”.

The right window in divided into 2 sections. In the top section appears a listof the drawing layers and at the bottom a list of ‘ Entities ’.










Click ‘Apply ’. A new message will appear. Clicking ‘ Yes ’ willcreate the breaklines alone without the addition of points to theexisting points list. Clicking on ‘ No ’ will create the breaklines inaddition to adding the ‘ Vertex ’ points of the breaklines to the listof existing points.

Note : in most cases there is no need to add the vertex to the list as thesepoints already appear there. Consequentially, only if you are sure you wantto add the vertex, click ‘No’, and in any other case click ‘Yes’.

After the confirmation the message, the breaklines will befiltered and added to the project.

If you followed the ‘ filtering ’ command and the bottom points list‘Topography coordinates’ is filled, skip to 7 from this section.

5. Receipt of existing status coordinates file:

In the bottom window, click on button (‘Load fro m text file’ )and choose the desired coordinates file. After choosing the file,the list of points will appear in the bottom window.

Click on button right of the drawing. The program will createa drawing layer of the points from list.

To realize this explanation, we will use an existing coordinates file that isinstalled with the program. To do so open (according to the explanation inthe paragraph above) ‘Sample7.Tco’



If you do not have a breaklines file skip to 7.

6. Receipt of breaklines file:

From the ma in menu ruler activate: ‘ Topography -> Lines ’. Awindow will open from the right.

Click on button (‘Load from text file’ ) from this window.The files window will open and the files you will be asked tochoose will be ‘ Dis ’ files only (the ‘Filter’ for t he files types willbe *.Dis).








Choose the breaklines file. The file will be loaded and thebreaklines list will appear in the right window. The programwill create a drawing layer of the breaklines.

For more information on breaklines see Chapter 5 – ‘Line sConnections’

7. Creating contour lines:

The last phase in creating existing status is creating contour lines. Even ifyou have a Dwg file that already has contour lines, you will still have tofollow this step, given that at the contour lines creation phase, the programalso creates the 3-D model on which it is based. This model is not visible tothe user (even though it is possible to view), but it is important for theworking procedure.

From the main tool-bar open - ‘Topography - > Contours’ . Awindow will open from the right.In the right window define the vertical interval between thecontour lines. To do so erase the word ‘Default’ to the right of‘Intervals’, and enter the desired interval in meters (forexample:1).Click ‘Apply ’. The program will begin to create contour lines. Itis possible that the program will locate a certain problem in thepoint's file that will prevent the structure of lines. If the problemis relatively easy to solve, an error message will appear. Adetailing of the problem s will appear in the ‘Log’ file (which canbe opened using a simple editor). Since we do not wish to getinto the details of constructing contour lines, confirm the errormessage, and the program will continue to work as usual.

The process of creating contour lines is a function of the number of pointsin a project and the number of breaklines (if there are any). In some casesthe program will work for a long time, and you must wait patiently until theprocedure is over.

Once this is over, the program will have created proper drawing layers inwhich the contour lines will appear. If these layers do not appear, then thisproblem cannot be solved automatically and you will have to process thepoint’s file (on the creation of contour lines and their process see separatechapter).

Now we will check the means for standardization testing and the 3-Dmodel:








8. Locating an elevation at a particular point:

For AutoCAD users – click the button ‘Pick Height’ (underthe AutoCAD window). Move with your mouse to the drawingand position the curser in the vicinity of the contour lines. Clickwith your mouse. The elevation of the point you are at willappear under the drawing, next to ‘H(T) and ‘H(D)’.For Standalone version, move with your mouse to the drawingand position the cursor in the contour lines area. Click with yourmouse. The elevation of the point you are at will appear underthe drawing, next to the heading ‘H(T) and ‘H(D)’.

This tool for locating elevation is the most convenient index for theexistence and the standardization of the 3D model. H(T) is the existingstatus elevation, and H(D) is the designed elevation. In the absence ofdesign, both these elevations will be the equal.

Defining the project centerlines

After you have finished preparing the work background (existing status),you can begin the design. In this part of the chapter you will learn howCivilCAD 2014 arranges the relevant centerlines for the current project.

From the main toolbar open ‘ Roads - > Roads list’ . A windowwill open from the right containing the project centerlines. Incase the centerlines definition is missing, CivilCAD 2014 willautomatically open the centerline ‘Road1’. Once you haveentered the centerlines list, (current screen), this centerline willbe erased and the list will be empty.In the table from the right enter the list of centerlines in thecurrent project. Every centerline in the project must receive aname. The name can be alpha-numeric or a number. The

centerline’s names are not important and are for the solepurpose of organizing the material. After each centerline name,click ‘Enter ’. Once you finish typing the list - click ‘Close’.

To realize the example, enter a single centerline and label it‘Road1’.

At the head of each window that appears during the Roads Design stages(defining the horizontal alignment, vertical alignment design etc.) – willappear the road that is at work. If there are a few centerlines in the project,

you can always browse between them using the small arrow that appearsnear the name of the road.








Note : as opposed to typical cross section, the urban road width is variable.Therefore, attribution of different layers to each structure segment isneeded in order to create a road layout according to structure layers.

After defining the centerline names, define the horizontal alignment asexplained in Chapter ‘ Roads Design - Horizontal Alignment ’. Following,define the vertical alignment as explained in chapter ‘ Roads Design -Vertical Alignment ’.

Creating the cross sections using Extract

Having defined existing status and the centerlines in the project, we willproceed with the design of cross-sections. Following is a step-by-step ofthis automatic process using ‘Extract’.

1. Enter the ‘Extract’ screen from the CivilCAD 2014 menu andopen –‘Roads> Extract’ . The right side window that contains thecenterlines list, the list of segments for each centerline, and thelayers list and activations buttons, will open. At the left window side,there is a screen that introduces the typical section, andunderneath it the structure height tables and Earthworks elevationDesigned G.L. of the typical section. Notice that the screen

structure is similar to the typical cross sections window.

2. Choosing a centerline – choose from the list at the top of thescreen (next to ‘Road’), the centerline for cross section design.

3. Defining segments – in a certain situation you might want to usemore than one typical section per one cross section design. In sucha case, define the segments for each section type in the sectionslist, at the top of the window. In this table every row represents asegment in which the starting and final distance for every segmentcan be entered (under the heading ‘ To ST’ and ‘ From ST’ . In order

to add rows to the segments table, stand on the row before the rowyou wish to add and click ‘ Enter ’. If you wish to define a singletypical section along the entire center-line, enter one row only in thesegments list and enter ‘0’ under the heading ‘From ST’, and thegeneral d istance (next to ‘ Road’s length’ ), under ‘ToST’. A moreconvenient way would be to mark the segments on the drawing.Click on ‘ Pick ’ (right window), move to the drawing area and clickon the centerline at the desired points. After using ‘Pick’ , thesegments table will automatically fill with the desired distances.

4. Attributing structure layers to structure segments – For eachsegment in ‘Structure’ table, double click in ‘Layer’ cell and selectthe relevant layer.








5. Defining the typical section – similar to cross section design, it ispossible to create a typical section by entering the data in the‘Design’ and ‘Structure’ tables at the bottom of the screen. Inaddition to this option, it is possible to import a Template Section(*.Tml) from the list of sections saved in the system (later on we willalso show how to save the typical sections created in the system).If the designed road includes, for example, sections with mediansand sections without medians, we will define the typical sectiondifferently for both these segments.

6. Erasing segments from the table – in order to erase a certain rowfrom a segments table, mark the row you wish to delete and click

. It is possible to delete the entire table by clicking on .

Defining the section : enter the road structure data in a table under‘Typical Structure’ . Enter the designed data in a table under‘Typical Design’ (notice that the section structure is supposed toreflect the structure according to the layout already drawn on thecenterline. The program will change the distances in the sectionautomatically). After filling the data, click O.K to update the sectiondrawing. Observe the samples below:

Sample 1: data for bi-directional typical section with sidewalkand no median

Enter the desired segment (from which we will feed thetypical section data), from the right window and type…

Typical Structure Table








Typical Design Table

Note : the length of each segment (2 meter, 1.23 meter etc.) willchange according to the layout section width)

In case the designed road is built from median segments andwithout median, you will need to make a change in sample 1entered here as sample 1, so that there will be a match between theasphalt segments of the median sections and the sections withoutthe median. In this case sample 1 will look like so (the DesignedG.L. will remain unchanged)


Add 2 empty segments to each side by marking segment 1 or -1and clicking ‘Enter’ button.








Sample 2: Data for bi-directional section with sidewalk andmedian


Define median offset and slope as mentioned in typical structure table.

Typical Design Table

7. Go to the next segment from the segment list defined from the rightand define the second typical section. Continue this way so all thesections are filled (it is possible to use ‘Copy’ and ‘Paste’ buttonsfrom the window on the right, in order to copy the typical sectionsfrom one segment to another).

8. Set the definitions for the division of sections – click on the

button, and set the definitions from the window that opensaccording to the explanation below:

‘Get structure and designed G.L. only each step’ – whenthe option is marked, the software will fill the cross sections inthe design only according to division of steps, and will notconsider the break points on the layout lines.Get existing G.L. only each step’ – when this option ismarked, the program will fill the existing status cross sectionsonly according to the division of steps, and will not considerthe break points on the layout lines.

‘Resolution (m)’ - maximum distance to create intermediatesections. For example: if the value 2 is typed, the software








will not create intermediate sections that the distancebetween them is shorter than 2 meters.‘Sections width ’ - a positive value should be typed to thewidth of the right side of the section from the center and anegative value to the left side of the section from the center.

In order to determine the distance between the sections

and the name of the first section, click on button , inthe opened window, establish the following definitions andclick OK when finished.

‘Format 1’ – this option displays the names of the sectionsby numbers.‘Format 2’ – by changing the parameters that appear at the

bottom window, the program will introduce the section in thefollowing manner: station + km, for example: if you leave thefield value as 0: KM, the program will introduce the sectionsin the following way: 0+000, 0+020, 0+040, 0+380… ‘Steps ’ – the distance between the cross sections theprogram will create (in addition to the possibility of alsocreating intermediate sections at breakpoints).‘Name of first section ’ - the software will number thesections in ascending order from this name onward).Click ‘OK’ when you are finished.

9. Activating Extract

Press on button , if there are already existing G.L. data inthe cross-sections, the software will indicate that and awindow containing the option: ‘ Get existing G.L. again’ willbe displayed. Mark this option if you wish to re-importtopography data to the sections. If this option will remainunmarked, the Extract action will be executed faster. Click‘OK’ to continue.The software will show the 'Layout and contours' window, to

get the whole layout mark all of the options: Layout,Contours, Distances. If you have some of roads in yourproject and you wish to update the current road only (thisoperation will save the time) – mark the option Updatecurrent road only . Click 'Ok' to continue.

After the extract action, the software will display the full layoutthat includes elevations and contours.

10. The super elevation's definition can be completed by clicking the

button (this button is located in the cross-section's window).








Saving and reading typical cross sections from a

‘.Tml ’ fileIn many cases of Road Design, we will use similar typical sections. So asnot to re-define the cross sections data for every design, the programallows saving the typical section defined in the typical sections database,so that later on it can be read into the design of a new road. After creatingthe typical cross sections (defining its structure and design) – click on the

‘Save’ button from the right window. Enter the name of the typicalsection, and click save (it is best to keep all the typical sections in asecti on’s ‘bank’ from CivilCAD 2014\Typicals library). Using the same

method, each time you start designing you can read by clicking , to a‘.Tml ’ file, from the list of existing sections, inst ead of defining the sectionsall over again.

Functions from the Extract window

Clear current section – removal of the typical section from currentsegment.

Clear all sections - removal of all typical sections segments.

Copy current tables to clipboard – copying of typical section(Design +

Structure) from current segment onto the clipboard .

Paste all from clipboard – copying of typical section(Design +Structure) from

the clipboard onto the current segment.

Load sections from text file – loading the typical section from a textfile (Typ .).

Save sections to file - saving the typical section to a text file (Typ ( .

Extract – creating cross sections.

Options – definitions for the Extract operation.










Typical section - detailing of options from ‘Typical section’ window

Save project – saving of all projects data .

Zoom extents - complete view of section.

Erase current section – erasing of current table.

Copy current table to clipboard – copying of current table toclipboard.

Paste all from clipboard -copying of the final table from clipboard tothe current.








Chapter 17: Ditch Design








Ditch Design

These are the work stages of ditch design:

Defining the Horizontal Alignment of the ditch. Defining the Invert level of the ditch bottom in the vertical alignment.Ditch cross section design.

Additional functions from the cross sections window. Computation of earthworks.The vertical alignment showing the top of the ditch banks.The geometric alignment of the ditch and calculating coordinates alongit.

In this chapter we will cover all of these stages.

Horizontal Alignment of the ditch

The first stage of ditch design is to prepare the topography settings (formore details on preparation of existing status background, see chapter“Road Design – Preparation of Settings”.) After preparing the settings, wewill continue to define the Horizontal Alignment by following these steps:

Activate ‘ Roads -> Horizontal Alignment ’ from the main menu. Thewindow will open on the right. Note that the ‘ Topography coordinates’ listat the bottom window has been replaced by a new, empty list, of the‘Designed coordinates’ .

Enter the centerline ’s IP data:

Defining the Horizontal Alignment of the ditch will be done according to thenew ‘ Center line ’ of the future ditch alignment. This alignment will bedefined by the horizontal IP’s. In addition to the horizontal IP’s, you maywant to enter rad iuses at IP’s, although unlike for roads, this data is notnecessary. There are a number of methods for entering the IP data of acenter point. We will examine two methods:

Method A: (For users of AutoCAD only) In AutoCAD, transfer a Polyline (2D Polyline) that will serve as theHorizontal Alignment of the center line.Choose ‘ Select ’ from the table on the right (with the list of ‘Select,‘Locate’, ‘Pick’, ‘Unused’).

In command line of AutoCAD enter ' P ' and ‘ Enter ’. Move to thedrawing area and choose the Polyline , and press ' Enter '.The table








from the window on the right will fill with the center line IP list. Everyvertex in the Polyline will be set as the IP of the center line, and in thebottom window their coordinates list will appear.

Note: the IP center line points will be determined by: xIPy, with ‘x’ - asthe center line number, and ‘y’ - the IP number. In the first chosencenter line (first ‘Select’ function), the IP’s will be numbered in thefollowing fashion: 1IP1, 1IP2, 1IP3, 1IP4 and so on. In each new‘Select’ function, ‘x’ will grow longer.

Method B:

Type the center line IP list in the bottom window. For example:

Type the IP names in the right hand table as was done in the bottomlist. The IP will be typed, of-course, under ‘IP’ in the table. In ourexample, enter the list the following way:

Entering the center line radiuses:

The next stage in defining the horizontal alignment is defining the radiusesat the IP points. If you do not define them, the program will treat them as – ‘0’.

For every IP in the right hand table, enter the desired radius. For thefirst and last IP, do not define any radius.Click on the ‘ Apply ’ button from the right to open the ‘ Layout &contours ’ window.Click ‘OK’ again, from the window that opens (we will not detail the useof this window. We will return to this window at a later stage, andexplain it in detail).

The program will create the horizontal alignment of the center line, that willappear in separate layers. Near each ‘IP’, will a ppear its coordinates, andnear every arc – the arc data.










Click ‘Apply ’ from the right win dow, and again in the window thatopens. The center line will move according to the new location of theIP.

When you finish defining the Horizontal Alignment, click ‘ Close ’.

Additional functions:

- 'Load from text file' – reading the center line data from the .distype file.

- 'Delete button ' – deleting all center line data. A warning willappear before this function is activated.

– 'Erase button' - erasing a single IP in the center line. Aftererasing the IP, click ‘OK’, and in the window that opens, click ‘OK’again, to get the new center line alignment.

- ‘Options ’ button – click on this button to open a new window. Inthis window you can determine this setting:

1. Changing the ‘Scale’ font size : In order to change the fontsize in the center line data, choose your desired scale fromthe list. To do so click on the small arrow button next to the

given number in the box, and choose your desired font size(the scale is in meter units according to the ratio of 1:X, with‘X’ as the chosen size). After selecting click ‘ OK’ to close thiswindow. To change the drawing, you will need to click on the‘Apply’ button from the right, and ‘OK’ in the window thatopens.

2. Changing the IP numbering when working with ‘Pick’ (“IPcounter in coordinates”).You can define the Horizontal

Alignment by selecting ‘pick’ from the list (see previouswindow – ‘Pick’, ‘Select’, ‘Locate’ etc.). To determine the IP

numbering as it will be done using ‘Pick’, enter the desirednumber. The next time you use ‘pick’, the IP nu mbering willbe determined by the number entered.

3. IP counter in layout - changing the IP numbering in layoutFor every center line, the program numbers an IP startingfrom – 0 in an ascending order. We will emphasize that thereis no connection between the coordinate IP name as itappears in the center line alignment/ designed coordinateslist, and the IP numbering on this layout. The assumption isthat it is possible that in the table (IP Radius Clothoid) willappear the name of a certain point (that must be identical tothe name that appears in the list from the bottom window),








and on this layout, will appear a different numbering for thesame IP. Entering a number in this current field will determinethe number from which the IP names will be picked for thecurrent center line on the layout.Click ‘Apply ’ to confirm the changes, and ‘ Close ’ to leavewithout saving.

Pick, Locate:

The ‘Pick’ and ‘Locate’ commands enable a graphic definition of thecenter line, in addition to the ‘Select’ function th at has been studiedat the beginning of the chapter. We will show how to use thesefunctions:

Using ‘Pick’: Choose ‘Pick’ from the list. Move to the drawing area, and begin to mark the center line. When youfinish, click ‘ Set ’ and ‘ Enter ’ (in the Stand -lone version click on the rightbutton to finish). Continue to insert radiuses and other road design steps.

Using ‘Locate’: Choose ‘Locate’ from the list. Move to the drawing area and mark the points in the drawing that willform the IP. If you are using AutoCAD version, notice that in ‘ObjectSnap’ to ‘Node’ has been automatically activated. In the Stand -Aloneversion, the cursor will turn into a square into which you should enterthe chosen points. When you finish, click ‘ Set ’ and ‘ Enter ’ (in theStand-Alone version, click on the right button).Continue to insert radiuses and go through the remaining stages ofRoads design. The main difference between ‘Pick’ and ‘Locate’ is that‘Pick’ creates new points, while ‘locate’ chooses points that exist in theda tabase. The advantage of ‘locate’ is that it does not “weight down”the list.








Defining the Invert level of the ditch bottom in the

vertical alignment.

After we have defined the Horizontal Alignment of the road, we will moveon to the Vertical Alignment of the center line:

From the main menu activate: ‘ Roads -> Vertical Alignment ’. The Vertical Alignment window will open. This window is divided into :

Drawing area - the main area of the window. Displayed in the regulardrawing interface or by the AutoCAD, according to the project's

definitions (in order to change this definition, activate from main menuFile-> Configuration, near caption Vertical alignment mode, choose"Drawing Environment interface" for the section's display by AutoCADor by Stand alone for regular display. For demonstrational purposes,the method described will be the "Stand alone", to learn how to operatewith the alternative method., see details in chapter: Road design ,clause: Definition of Longitudinal section by AutoCAD .The existing ground data table – the table from the left down (topo).The designed data table – the right bottom table.The function window - the window on the right.

Please notice that the drawing area is not an AutoCAD window (for usersof AutoCAD also). The main drawing – the Horizontal Alignment andexisting topography status, are in a separate window under the Vertical

Alignment window (reducing this window to a minimum will reveal onceagain, the previous window).

1. Click ‘Apply ’ in the right window. Th e program will move along theHorizontal Alignment and compute the heights of the Vertical

Alignment. These heights appear in the existing status ‘Topo’ window(left bottom table), as a function of station and height. In the drawingwindow, the section drawing will appear vertically – existing status.

We will clarify a number of points:

The section is given in a distorted scale of height in relation to length.This is something the program chooses to do (the program creates thedistortion so you get a convenient working environment).

At the table from the bottom of the section, appear heights anddistances stations every 20 meters. This is a default of the program,assuming the Cross sections have yet been defined. In order to changethis data, you should redefine the Cross sections and return to the

Along Alignment that will be updated automatically.








Even if the Horizontal Alignment does not exist, or we do not have thetopography, the section can be created by manually entering the datainto the topography coordinates table. To do so, enter the distancestation (ST) data, and elevation (Elev) into the table. To get the sectionafter the data has been entered, click ‘OK’ in the right window.If the Vertical Alignment received was found partly incorrect, due toincorrect topography data, you can edit the existing topographycoordinates data, manually. In order to erase a line from the table,stand with your mouse on the row of the line serial number (the columnto the far left), and click ‘Del’. The lin e will be erased. To get the changeon the drawing, click ‘ Apply ’ from the window on the right.

Designing the vertical IP:

A vertical design of the section can be done by the entering of data in atable or by a graphic drawing:

Method A – entering data in the table.The ‘Design data’ table (bottom right table), is divided into columnsaccording to serial number (the column on the far left is without aheading) - station (ST), elevation (Ele), a slope between segmentsgiven in percentage (Slope%), and the length of the vertical arc(2T).

Enter this data into the table, while defining the station and elevationfor every segment. The program will compute the slope betweenevery two segments, and present it to the relevant segment. Insteadof elevation, you can enter the slope from a previous segment, andthen the program will enter the elevation column. To delete an errorline, stand with your mouse on the serial number column (the far leftcolumn) at the relevant line and press ‘Del’. To get the desig nedsection drawing click ‘ Apply ’ from the right window.

Method B – a graphic data drawingThere are two methods to draw the designed data on the existing

topography status:

a) Choose ‘ Pick ’ from the bottom list (Unused, Pick, Locate).Move to the drawing area, stand on the most left side ofthe section and (you can deviate a bit left of the existingtopography state), and click your mouse button. The pointyou have selected will be set as the vertical IP and itsdata will appear in the ‘Design Table(bo ttom). Continue todraw the vertical alignment. While moving on the drawingarea, you will see your exact location, height anddistance, under the ‘St’ and ‘Elevation’ labels, to the right

of the drawing. When you finish your drawing click ‘ Apply ’from the right window.








Please notice: If you choose a point outside the existingtopography borders, from the left or from the right, theprogram will determine the IP, at the most extremestation (0 to the left, or end of natural ground to the right)in the same elevation you were in.

b) The second method to drawing the vertical alignment isusing ‘ Locate ’. Using ‘Locate’ is very similar to using‘Pick ’, except for when you choose an IP at a certainstation, it will be set at the exact existing topographyelevation status at the same distance.

c) It is also possible to combine the two methods, (manualentering and graphic design). After the graphic sectionhad been selected, it will be possible to change the datareceived in the bottom window and to click ‘Apply’ toreceive the changes (you can, for example, change theslope at a certain segment. Click ‘Enter’ to change theheight according to the slope, and click ‘ Apply ’ to updatethe drawing).The graphic design is from the last IP to the new IPcontinued. To add an IP in the middle of a section, markwith your mouse the list of previous IPs (the point after thenew point you wish to add), move to the drawing andmark the new IP. The new point will be added to the tableat the desirable location. Click ‘ Apply ’ from the right to fixthe drawing.

Vertical Arc Design.

After you have added the vertical IPs design data, it is time to add thevertical arc in the far right column (2T). You can enter the arc data in twoways :

The length of the arc – the length of the arc will be give as a function ofthe distance between the tangents f the vertical arc. After entering the

data click ‘ Apply ’ in the right window to update the drawing. The radius of the arc – in order to enter the vertical radius of the arc(instead of l ength), click with your mouse on the ‘2T’ labeling (thecolumn heading). The label will switch to ‘R’. Now you can enter theradius of the arc. Another click on ‘R’, will return you to work at – ‘2T’.

To check this out for yourself, enter the following data in the designtable. At the end click ‘OK’

ST 2T Elev 0 232 200.88 100 233.25 315.74 235.108








Create a DXF file of the vertical alignment.

After completing the design, you will need to take out a DXF fileof the vertical alignment (you can, of-course do the same for theexisting topography state alone):

Click on the DXF button right of the drawing.In the window that opens, define a scale for length and width. The scaleis a ratio of 1 to –x. In the ‘Height’ box, enter the scale for elevat ion (forexample: 100), and in the ‘Long’ box enter the scale for length (forexample: 1000). To continue, click ‘OK’. In the file dialog box thatopens, enter the name of the drawing file. Click ‘Save’ to save the file. Click ‘Cancel’ from the right hand window to finish the vertical alignment

designDivision of the vertical alignment into sheets. CivilCAD 2014 allowsfor the automatic division of the vertical alignment into several sheets.In order to do so, choose the desired sheet size (by which the divisionwill be done), from the scroll-down list – ‘Divide by paper size’ , andclick ‘OK’. After naming the file, click ‘Save’. The program will createseveral files with your chosen name, numbered going up, starting from‘1’.

Additional functions.

Buttons in the right window :

- Input of vertical alignment section data from a text file (ASCII ) – ‘Load from text file’ – this button reads the existing topography datainto the table (the bottom left table) out of a simple text file, which holdsa list of stations and height. The file structure has to be of lines, withstation and height separated by a space/comma.

- Keeping the vertical alignment data at a text file (ASCII ) – the‘Save file’ button – this button saves the existing topography data readfrom the topography (or entered manually), into the text file. Thestructure of the text file is a list of stations and height.

- Adding ditch edges to the vertical alignment – the ‘Get edges’button – more details will be coming up.‘Accurate/By se ctions’ – Introducing an accurate vertical alignment or

by-sections only. When CivilCAD 2014 reads the vertical alignmentfrom the topography, it does it accurately, affected by the density of themeasured points (the program builds the vertical alignment according tothe meeting point of the triangle sides it creates from the measuringfile). You can see the stations in which the program had sampled theheights, from the bottom left (topo) table. At times, even if the sample isaccurate, is not good for the user (for example: in the measuring file










The button from the ‘Topo’ table – delete all existing status ‘topo’data from the table. Before operation, a warning notice will appear.

- reading the vertical alignm ent from the ‘GetT’ topography – Click on this button to open the window. From this window, choose thetable to which the topography data will be entered, the existing statustable, OR the ‘Designed G.L’. Click ‘OK’ to continue. The data will beentered into the table accordingly.

- this button is for copying existing status stations intodesigned status . Click this button to get the stations only (withoutheight), from the existing status table into the designed status table.

Note. In the order of commands that were introduced in this chapter,clicking on the ‘ Apply ’ button from the right window triggered the readingof the topography data into the vertical alignment. This move will only becorrect only if the existing status topography data table is empty! In anyother case, the program will not perform an additional reading of thetopography data when clicking ‘ Apply ’, but renew the drawing according tothe data that already exists in the table. The main problem will occur, ifduring the project, the horizontal alignment of the center line was changed,and/or changes were made to the topography. To renew the existing

topography status of the section, use the button, which we have justexplained.

Ditch cross section design

Having determined the vertical alignment of the ditch bottom in theprevious chapter, we will proceed to define the cross sections.

1. Activate: ‘ Roads- > Cross sections’ from the main menu, toopen the ‘Cross sections’ window. This window is divided intothree parts:

2. The drawing area – the main area where the drawing of thesection will appear. The name of the current section that isbeing worked on, will appear in the heading above thedrawing.

3. The list of cross sections – right window.4. The existing and designed topography tables for every

section – the tables at the lower section of your screen:5. Existing G.L. – the existing status topography data from the

left table. Designed G.L the designed topography data fromthe right hand table.








6. Click on the button from the right window (Definesections ) – to open the Cross roads setting window. From

this window determine the following data:Start at station – the station of the first section. The default is ‘0’. Atmost times, we will want the station for the first section in the designedsegment of the center line, to be ‘0’. However, there are cases wherewe plan a segment that is the continuation of the center line. In such acase, the station of the first section will be different.End at station – the station for the last section. The default isaccording to the length of the center line as it was computed by theprogram (this length appears immediately when the cross sectionwindow opens, at the right window – ‘Roads length’).

Distance between sections – the distance between the crosssections. The default is 20 meters. Later on we will see that creatingsequential cross sections is not mandatory (a must), and furthermore,that all sections can be determined vertically in a way that is notsequential.Name of first section – the name of the first section (a number). Theprogram will number the remaining sections in an ascending orderaccording to the format specified in the window. We will explain boththese ‘Format’ statuses:

1. Format 1 – the first option presents the sectionsnames as they appear in the sections list.

2. Format 2 – by changing the parameters that appear inthe bottom window, the program will use this option topresent the section’s name in the following fashion:station + km. For example, if you leave the value infield 0:KM, the program will present the sections likeso: 0+000, 0+020, 0+040……, 0+380.

Another option for defining cross sections, is by marking their locationat the horizontal alignment design stage, so the sections arepositioned at fixed places against the measuring background. To doso follow these steps:

1. When defining the horizontal alignment (first phase of ditchdesign), transfer the polyline that will determine the Center line,so its vertex points will be in the same exact places where wewant the sections to be.

2. From the Cross Section Window (present window), go to ‘ ByIps’ . The program will create sections at stations that aredetermined by the vertex points along the center line.

3. After you have finished defining the sections (using any one ofthe selected systems), click ‘OK’ to build the sections. The list ofsections that had been built will appear in the right table








according to the definitions. Every section will be given a nameand Station.

4. It is possible to add intermediate sections to the project at anygiven moment. To do so, follow the steps below:

5. Position your cursor (using your mouse) on the line before theline you wish to insert the section.

6. Click ‘Enter ’ (key -board). The line will jump down and a new linewill appear.

7. In the new line insert the name (number) of the new section. Thename of the section can include numbers “.” And “/” (but not theletters). If the new section is, for example, between section 1-and 2, you can name it 1.1. Move with the right arrow to the‘Station’ column, and insert station of the section you just added.

Note. It is possible, instead of defining sections automatically usingthe white button, to immediately move to the right window and buildthe table manually – name and station for each and every section.

Activate the Options button from the right window . The ‘Definesections width’ will open.

1. Define the width of section for the project. We are referring tothe width of the ground that the program will sample for theexisting status out of the topography. We will define adistance from the left center line and a distance from the rightcenter line that will together define the width of the groundstrip. The left end of the section we will defined in the ‘Left’field (default of – 20 meters), and its right end in the ‘Right’field (default – 20 meters), when the distance left of thecenter line is a negative number and the distance from theright is a positive one.

2. There might be a case where you will want a center line bandthat is all to the right (or left) of your center line. In suchcases it is possible to define a section that is all on the right(or left), by using the correct stations.

3. Transfer from Elevation to dH . Using CivilCAD 2014 you candefine cross sections of absolute heights, or sections ofrelative heights. Working with absolute heights will actuallycancel the effect of the vertical alignment on the crosssections, and commit you to defining a separate design foreach and every section (or fill the intermediate sections usinginterpolation). During the rest of the chapter we will discussworking with typical sections, and so heights will be definedin a relative manner.








4. Move from Earthworks to Design . This option defines thegraphic presentation form of the section. The program hastwo options for defining the section: a section for presentingEarthworks, and a section for presenting designed sections.The difference in presentation will be shown both by the formof the sections in the drawing window, both by printingthrough the program to the printer, and by creating a sectionsfile on an AutoCAD sheet.

Click on the ‘ GetT all’ button . Click ‘OK’ in the window that opens.The program will warn that it is about to change the existing topographystatus data to new data, and that the old data will be deleted. Click ‘OK’to continue. The program will move along the center line and sample

the existing topography data, using the sections that were defined.

The sampling of the existing topography data is dependent upon thenumber of measuring points in the project, the number of break-lines,and number of cross sections that have been defined. In large projects,this activity might take a long time. CivilCAD 2014 does not limit theproject size, or the length of the center line, although in slow computersor computers with little memory, this might take a while, or even causethe computer to “crash”.

When the reading of the existing topography data is finished, the firstsection will appear in the drawing window, and the existing topographydata will appear in the table from the left down. At the head of the page(in the heading above the drawing), will appear the name of thepresented section, for example ‘Sections name: 1’, and in addition thedesigned height will appear in the center line of this section (the heightset in the section length), for example - /Elevation: 233.85. It is possibleto move between sections by pointing to the desired section in the tableat the right. Every section selected, will appear automatically on thedrawing, and its data will appear in the tables below. To continue theinstructions make sure you are in the first section.

We will shortly explain the structure of the design table. In the tablethere are lines, each line representing a segment. The segments arenumbered from -40 to +40 (a sum of 81 possible segments for eachsection). In the table there are five columns (the one on the far left iswithout a heading). To explain this, number these columns in anascending order from left to right, so the column on the far left isnumber 1:

1. Column number 1 : In this column appear the segment’sserial number. This number does not represent a distance ofany kind. Segments left to the center line will be represented








by a negative number, and numbers right of the center linewill be represented by a positive number.

2. Column number 2 (Offset) – this column represents thedistance of the segment from the center line. The distanceleft of the center line will be entered as negative, and thenumber from the right as positive. There are two options forthe distance from the center line: absolute distance or relativedistance. When working with dH, as shown here (see section3), the data will be entered as a relative distance, meaningthat the distance entered is actually the length of the segmentand not the absolute distance from the center line. Whenworking with ‘Elevation’, this data will be entered as absoluteheights.

3. Column number 3 (dH) – this column has two options : dH(as shown here ) or ‘Elevation’. The options are determinedfrom the ‘Status’ window (see section 3). When working withdH, the heights will be entered as relative, compared to theheight of the previous segment, so the height entered isactually the height of the segment. When working with‘Elevation’, the entered heights will be absolute.

4. Column number 4 (Slope%) – In this column you can enterthe slope of the segment. You can enter any one of two data:Entering dH at column 3, will automatically compute the slopeof the segment and enter it in column 4. In contrast, enteringthe slope will compute the dH and enter it in column 3.

Before we continue, we will shortly explain a number of editingcommands from the table:

1. Clicking on ‘Del’ from a certain field will delete the field.2. Clicking on ‘Backspace’ (back arrow), to work as usual. 3. To delete an entire line, or reduce lines, stand on the far left

column (column number 1) in the desired segment and click‘Del’. The program will delete the segment and reduce the

lines.4. It is possible to copy a segment from the existing crosssection to other cross sections. To copy, stand on the desiredsegment and right click with your mouse button. From thetable that opens, mark the sections to which the segmentdata will be copied and (to choose all sections, click onbutton ‘A1’ from the bottom), and click ‘OK’. The program willcopy the segment data for all the selected sections.

Now we will go to the typical designed section definition:








Begin by entering the design data in th e table (‘Designed GL table).To clear this issue, we will demonstrate the data for a typical sectionthat will be followed by a detailed explanation. Enter the followingdata in the table:

Stand on segment ‘0’ with your mouse, in column number 2. Type“0”, Enter and again “0”. You have just determined that the height ofthis cross section is similar to the designed height in the verticalalignment.Move with the arrows to section 1, column number 2. Insert “1.5”,click ‘Enter’ move with your arrow right of column number 3, insert“1.5” and ‘Enter’. The segment that had just been defined is abottom of the ditch and has the width of approx. 3 meters (1.5meters on each side).

When you finish inserting the data, the table should look like this:

Offset dH Slope% Cover-1 -1.5 0 -2.000 0 01 1.5 0 -2.00

This writing appears, at the top and bottom section of the table:Slp. left : Cut 1: Fill 1:

Slp right: Cut 1: Fill 1:right), to the natural ground :

These fields represent the slope of the ditch banks, from left andright :Enter in field: Cut 1, from the bottom of the table (next to – ‘Slpright’), the number “2”.Enter the same value in the field at the headof the table (field: Cut 1 near ‘Fill 1’). You have just defined that theslopes of the ditch to the right and to the left are 1:2.

Click ‘Apply’ from the right hand window. The design will appear onthe drawing.

Now we will project the typical section on the entire center line wehave built.

1. Clic k on the ‘ Copy ’ button left of the Earthworks heighttable (Designed G.L). The button is located to the left of thetable, second from the bottom, with a picture of two pages.

After you click, the ‘Designed G.L’ table will be copied to the

computer’s mem ory.








2. Using the table from the left window (the sections list table,left of the drawing), move to the last section on the list. Click

on the ‘ Paste ’ button (the button under the ‘Copy’ ), inorder to copy the data from memory into the table, in thissection.

The main principle of working with CivilCAD 2014, is entering the datain the sections in which the cross section changes (only in thosesections!), and filling the remaining center line parts with intermediateinterpolation. Now we have two sections full of data. The remainingsections are still empty (you can see this by browsing between them byclicking on a certain section from the right hand table – the sectionstable list):

Intermediate interpolation .

Click on the ‘ Interpolation empty sec tions’ button from the right.Choose 'All Design' and c lick on ‘OK’. The program will do interpolationfor all the empty sections in the project, and since we have two sectionsonly, (first and last), that are similar in capacity, the program will fill allthe sections with the same design data. At the end of the interpolation,you can browse through the sections. At this stage, if you areinterested, you can move to a certain section and change its capacity.

Moving the sections to the drawing sheet:

Click on the ‘DXF’ button to the right of the drawing A window containing the sections' list will open. Click on the desired

sections or click on button to choose all the sections and click 'OK'.In the next opened window, choose scale of the section to the Height("Height") and to the length ("Long"). The scale will be entered as ascale of 1:X. for example, type 100 for "Height" and 100 for "Long".Click "OK".

The software will display a message " DO you want to manuallyarrange cross sections , or CivilCAD 2014 to do it for you?. If youwish to design the file's structure click "Yes", otherwise, click "No" andthe software will arrange the cross-sections automatically.If you choose to arrange the file's structure ("Yes"), the software willdisplay a window to arrange the sections in this window. Enter thenumber of sections to appear in each column near the caption"sections in every column" and the vertical distance to the nextsection: dY Between sections (cm ). Click " Arrange " in order to seethe structure's chart. To finish, click "OK".

Choose a name to the file created by the software and click 'Save' .








Note . The DXF file is a drawing file that can be imported by mostdrawing programs. In AutoCAD, for example, you can import this file,using the ‘DXFI’ command, or by ‘File ->Open’ , and transferring thefilter of the files to ‘DXF’. After importing the file, click ‘Zoom’ and‘Extents’, to show all the sections.

Receiving the ditch layout: Click on the ‘ Create Layout’ button ,from the right. F rom the window that opens, mark ‘v’ next to the threepossible options ( Layout , Contours, Distances ). Click ‘OK’ tocontinue. The program will create a layout on the drawing that includescontour lines of the ditch, as well as dibbling lines.

The Layout window includes three options:Layout – mark ‘v’ next to this option to create the layout ofthe ditch and sections elevation labels.Contours - this option will not be active in ditch design.Distances - mark ‘v’ next to this option to create a distance layer between the sections. The program will write thedistances between each and every section and the distancesbetween the section and the tangency closest to it . Update current road only - Marking "V" near this option willinstruct the software to update only the current road's layout.When removing the mark, the software will update the layoutfor all the roads of the project.

Note. After clicking ‘OK’ in the Layout window, the cross sectionwindow will be minimized (so that you can see the changes inlayout). To maximize the screen, click on it from the Windows“Task-Bar ” from the bottom of your screen. Continue to edit thesections according to need including extracting the proper layout.When you finish editing the sections, click ‘ Close ’.

Additional functions from the cross sectionswindow

We will now explain in detail additional functions from the cross sectionswindow that were not discusses during the sample stages:


1. - deleting a single section – stand on the section youwish to delete from the list, and click on the button with the

picture of an eraser from the sections list window (rightwindow). The program will erase this section from the list.








2. - delete all the project sections – click on the button with

the picture of – x from the right window. The program will senda warning before deleting all the sections. Click ‘OK’ to confirmthis action.

3. - deleting sections group data : - to delete in unity thedata of numerou s sections, click on the ‘ Clear all’ button fromthe ‘sections list’ window (right window). From the window thatopens, choose the Existing G.L. data you want to delete, theDesigned G.L of Earthworks height, and the height of roadstructure, or ditch edge s data. Click ‘OK’ to continue. From thetable that opens, mark the sections whose data you want todelete. To choose all sections, click on the ‘ All’ button from thebottom. Click ‘OK’. The program will delete the chosen sectionsdata.

4. - adding height to the sections data . This option isuseful mainly for working with absolute heights (at relativeheights it is best to change the height of the vertical alignmentto changing the data of the cross sections). To activate clickthis button. In the window that opens, enter the neededaddition to the height (to decrease the height, enter a negativeheight). To continue click ‘OK’. From the window that opens,choose the data you wish to change (existing G.L, Earthworksheight, or height of structure). Click ‘OK’ to continue. In theadditional window, choose the sections you wish to change(click on ‘All’ from the bottom, and choose all the sections).Click ‘OK’. The program will add the desired height to theselection of sections in the table you selected (topography,designed etc.).

Functions from the ‘ Define section width’ window (activate using the

‘Options ’ button from the sections list right window).Some of the functions of this window have been discussed. Here we willexplain the ones we have not:

1. Max/Min interval – At times, there might be a situation whenirregular data will be read into from the topography into thesections. There are several reasons for this occurrence suchas incorrect measuring data, measuring border narrower thanthe desired section, extrapolation at the contour lines andmore. To avoid this occurrence, you can define for the programthe maximum interval between the given ground level to thecenter line elevation. The assumption is that the center line








height is always true (or at least does not deviate from thetopography ranges), and is thus used as a reference point. Youinstruct the program what the maximum interval is at the heightwe allow a ground break in the section. Each ground break thatdeviates from this interval (up or down), will be deleted fromthe ground data.For example – if the height at the center line is – 230.55, andwe entered Max/Min interval of – 3 meters, every ground datalower than 227.55 or higher than 233.55, will be deleted fromthe ground data of the section. The affect of the data will occuronly after we will perform a ground sample using the ‘GetT all’button. If there are existing ground data that you wish tochange, enter the desired interval, click ‘OK’ to leave, andrepeat all the ‘GetT all’ functions.

2. Include edges – the key to CivilCAD 2014 sampling grounddata is : the program will always sample the center line existingdata, and any ground break identified at the cross section area,will be also entered into the table. In addition to this data, theprogram will sample the height of the existing status at the endof the section, from left to right, according to the width that wasdefined. In order to cancel the ends sampling, uncheck (the ‘V’mark), and repeat all the ‘GetT all’ commands. The programwill sample the data all over again, without sampling the ends.

Functions from the Drawing Window

The drawing window (the main window on which appears the sectiondrawing), has three buttons on its right hand side. In a previous section wehave explained the functionality of the DXF button. We will now explain thefunctionality of the two additional buttons:

1. Printing the sections into the printer:

Click on the ‘printer’ button .In the window that opens define the printing scale : Height – scale forheight, Long – scale for length. We will enter 100, 100 (scale of1:100/1:100). Click ‘OK’ to continue.From the window that opens, define the type and paper size, and allother required parameters that have to do with your printer . Click ‘OK’(or “confirm”) to continue.Now choose the sections you want to print. To choose all sections, click

the on the button from the bottom window. Click ‘OK’ to print.

The program will print all the sections sequentially, according to thelanguage defined in the settings. To change the language, follow the stepsbelow:








Leave the cross sections by clicking ‘ Close’ . Activate – ‘File -> Configuration’ .From the right hand window - choose from ‘l anguages ’ the desiredlanguage.Click ‘OK’ and retu rn to the cross sections ( File-> Cross sections ).Return and print the sections as you have learned.

2. – Zoom extents – there are several methods of controlling thesetting of your section :

The scroll bars to the bottom and left of the drawing.Clicking the left button from the drawing area will enlarge the drawingby 2. Clicking on the button from the right, will decrease it by 2.

button ( Zoom extents ) – returns ‘view’ to the entire drawing.

Functions from the tables window (bottom window).

Left of every table (left table and right table), appear a number of tableoptions buttons:

- Erase button – deleting the table data in the current section.

- ‘GetT’ button – import the existing G.L data of the current section

out of the existing topograp hy. Unlike the ‘ GetTall ’ button , thisbutton imports the existing status data of the current section only.Before proceeding, a warning notice will appear and will ask whetheryou are sure you want to delete the existing status data. To continueyou must confirm.

- GetD - Importing data from the designated topography. In contrast

to the GetD all button , this button imports the status' data of thecurrent section alone. Before executing this action, a notice will bedisplayed, warning about deleting of current data, confirm to continue.

In the event of using designated ground level's data samples, thefollowing actions should be executed prior to the actions describedabove:

Click on options button . In the opened window click Option Design :devote -40 to 40segments. By marking this option, the software will sampletopographic data into the planning data by using all 81segments in the table. Part of these segments is saved formiscellaneous additions in the planning such as:ditches,berms etc.








Earthworks computations in ditches

Once you have finished defining the ditch cross sections, you might wantto know the Earthworks quantities (volumes) in the project according to thedesign. In this chapter we will show how to compute these quantities.(Wh en you finish designing the cross sections, click ‘Cancel’ to close thewindow and keep the data).

1. From the main menu Activate ‘ Road - > Earthworks’ . From the right,the quantity computation window will open.

2. Click ‘Apply ’. The program will compute and present the quantitiestable. It will divide the quantities table into two sections.Volume computation table.Stripping areas summarizing table.(Both tables are arranged one after the other. In order to view thesecond table, scroll the report using the right scroll bar).The volume computation table is the table in which the work volumesare centered as the multiplication of the distance between the sectionsareas. The stripping areas summarizing table presents the worksurface as a double the length of the sections in ‘dig’ and ‘fill’ and thedistance between them.

3. Click on the printer button from the bottom of the report. In the window

that is selected determine the printer settings and continue to print thetables.Note. The table’s language depen ds on the type of installation that wasperformed. If you wish to change the language in which the reportsappears (for example from Hebrew to English) follow these steps:Go to ‘ Files- > Configuration’ .Identify the ‘Language’ labeling from the window that opens from theright. Click on the small arrow right of the language field and choose thedesired language from the list.Click ‘OK’ to close the window. Go back and complete steps 1-3 from the top of this page.

4. To close the report window Click ‘ Close’ .

5. Click on the ‘ Sections data report’ from the right. The program willcompute and present a detailed table with the data of each and everysection. Use the scroll bar from the right to view the data of theremaining sections. In the detailed report will appear the height anddistance data for every section of every segment (please notice: thisdata includes the data entered in the section tables, and the datacomputed as the dibbling data sample), slope dibbling, the ‘dig’ and ‘fill’

area of the section , and the length of the section in ‘dig’ and in ‘fill’. Toprint the report click on the ‘printer’ button from the bottom.








You can extract a diagram of an accumulated haul diagram or bysections (this option is available only Microsoft Excel is installed in

your computer). Click on button excel mass haul diagram and awindow will be opened, displaying the following two options:

1) Accumulated mass haul diagram - A diagram displayingthe cut/fill quantities accumulated along the centerline.2) Sections volumes diagram - A diagram displaying thecut/fill quantities to each section.

Choose from one of these options and click 'OK'. The software willdisplay the diagram on the Excel window. In order to save an Excelworksheet, save the diagram in the Excel window.

6. To finish the Earthworks computations, click ‘ Close’ (bottom right).

Earthworks Quantity Computation Function Window

Here are more options from the Earthworks window:

Quantity computation for some of the sections – in order to computethe quantities for some of the sections, do the following:

From the sections window, mark only the sections for which you want tosee the Earthworks.Check the word ‘ Block ’ at the bottom of the list (‘v’ mark). Click ' Apply' . The table built will include only the selected sections.

Stripping depth – in this field the stripping depth of the Earthworks isentered, if such an area exists. The stripping depth is entered in meters.The program divides the stripping by giving a different depth to the ‘dig’area an d a different depth to the ‘fill’ area. Next to field ‘Cut ar.’ enter thedepth for area ‘Dig’, and next to field ‘Fill ar.’ the depth area ‘fill’ (notentering a value to a certain field indicates that there is no stripping in thatarea). Click ‘ Apply ’ to receive the new report that will be affected by thestripping depth entered.

‘Options ’ button – this button opens the ‘ Options ’ window thatenables a selection of definitions for the reports. (One of the definitions thatappear in this window, has already been discussed in section 2 – ‘volumecomputation for the road structure layer’.) The main principle of thiswindow is controlling the display volumes, and stripping areas summaryreports. In this window appears a list of all the fields that appear in thereport tables. On the left, are the table fields of the centralized volumes,and on the right, the table fields of the stripping areas. If you wish to deletea certain column from one of the reports, uncheck the ‘v’ mark near its








column. To confirm cl ick ‘OK’. Next time you print this report, it will appearwithout the column you deleted. Additional options in this window:

Accuracy in section's data – an accuracy level of showed in thereport values (the number of digits after decimal point).

Stripping length - expose length calculation method. Horizontal - calculating the expose will be set according to the horizontalalignment.Inclined - the actual expose parallel the planned one. Layers of calculation - the earthworks quantity computation between theDesign and the Existing tables or between the Design and the Structuretables.Display after stripping areas in volumes table - Displaying calculation ofvolumes after the calculation of the expose.

The vertical alignment showing the top of theditch banks

CivilCAD 2014 supports the introduction of ditch bank tops on the verticalalignment. After completing the cross sections, go to vertical alignmentdesign:

Activate: ‘ Roads- > Vertical alignment’ to open the vertical alignment ditch

window. Click on the ‘ Get edges ’ button from the hand right window.The program will add to the vertical alignment of the existing and designedstatus, the vertical alignment of the ditch banks from the left and from theright. The banks height data will be added in the new rows that will openfrom the bottom table.








Coordinates along the centerline

CivilCAD 2014 enables geographic computations along the center linefrom different shapes, including coordinates computations at station andoffset along center line, geographical data reports of the center line andmore. Most of the functions from this window can be activated immediately,proceeding the center line definition of the horizontal alignment, and withno definition of cross sections. However, it seems that there is a possibilityto compute the coordinates of the dibbling points at the sections. To doso the program must define cross sections in the computed project.

For geometric computations go to – ‘Roads-> Coordinatescomput ations’ . These are the options from the window that opens :

Coordinates computations along or offset to the center line – calculating a single point -Make sure that you choose ' Coord ’ from the options that appear in thewindow - ‘Coord’ or ‘Geom’. In the ‘Station’ field - enter the station (in meters), of the point you wish tocompute. To compute a point in the second section, for example, enter 20.Click ‘Enter’ to continue.In the ‘Offset’ field - enter the computed point offset from the center line (oroffset). To compute the point in the center line itself, enter 0 or leave the

field empty. To compute a point left of the center line, enter a negativedistance, and to the right a positive one. Click ‘Enter’ to continue.In the ‘ New point’ field - enter the name of the new point to be computed.It can be a number or an alphanumeric name that includes letters.Click ‘Enter’ , or 'Apply' button. The program will compute the desiredcoordinate and add it to the list of coordinates at the bottom window.

As default, the computed coordinate will be added to the ‘ Designedcoordinates ’ list (browsing between lists is done, as aforesaid, bychoosing ‘ Topography -> Coordinates ’ or ‘Design-> Coordinates ’ from

the main menu). It is possible to instruct the program for which list toperform its computation. To do so, follow these steps:

From the main menu activate: ‘ Geometry- > Geometry parameters’ . Awindow will open from the right.From the window that opens choose ‘ Topo points only ’ to compute thedata for t he existing table, or ‘ Designed points only ’ to computate theminto the designed table.Click ‘OK ’ to confirm. (In order to determine this definition for all the projects in the program,follow this order of commands in the ‘Prototype’ project.).








Coordinates computations along or offset to the center line – computing a points sequence.Make sure that you choose 'Coord’ from the options that appear in thewindow - ‘Coord’ or ‘Geom’. In field ‘From’, enter the station of the first point you want to compute andclick ‘Enter’. To start the center line enter ‘0’. In field ‘ To ’ enter the station of the last point you want to compute and click‘Enter’.The program had computed the length of the center line and presented itnext to the ‘ Roads length’ field. In order to compute points along the entirecenter line, enter the length near the ‘To’ field, and click ‘Enter’ to continue.In the ‘ Offset ’ field, enter the offset points computed from the center line(and offset to it). To compute the center line points themselves, enter 0 orleave the field empty. To compute a point left of the center line, enter anegative number, and to the right a positive one . Click ‘Enter’ to continue.

It is possible to compute numerous points at different offsets in oneaction. To enter several offsets, separate the offsets using spaces. Forexample, if you want to compute the road section points, when for eachsection we are interested in the center line point itself and in the points tothe left and right of it at the offset of 5 meters, then enter “ -5 0 5 ” intothe ‘Offset’ field.

In the ‘New point’ field, enter the first point number created. The programwill number the points from here on.

When working on a sequence of points (unlike computing a single point),the name of the point entered in the ‘New point’ field, must be a number, inorder for the program to number the points in an ascending. You mightwant to give the points a characteristic prefix name. To do so use the‘prefix’ field. If you wish, for ex ample, to compute the actual center linepoints, enter ‘CL’ in the ‘Prefix’ field.

Click ‘Enter’, or ‘ Apply ’. The program will compute the desired points andadd them to the coordinates list at the bottom window. If ‘Prefix’ was

entered, then the names of the points will be added with their matchingprefix. After you finish the computation, click to get the points on thedrawing.

After you finish the computations, and confirm that in the bottom listappears the desired coordinates database, you can save the list in file' Ascii’, or print it (for more detail on saving or printing coordinates in a Textfile, see chapter 2 section 3 “Coordinates Database – command buttonsconnected to the list”).

Coordinates computations of the dibbling points along the center line – this options enables coordinates computations of the dibbling points








sections along the center line, to its left and right. Using this functionrequires, naturally, cross section definitions aside from the center linehorizontal alignment definition. To perform follow these steps:

Click on the dibbling points computation button from the right handwindow. The window will open.From the window that opens, you have the following options:

If you choose to compute the dibbling points – a default, the programwill compute the dibbling for the ‘Designed G.L’ points . If you wish tocompute the dibbling for the ‘Structure’ layer, move the small arrow fromthe ‘Designed G.L’ dialog box, to ‘Structure’ (an example of a case in wh ichyou would like to compute the ‘structure ’ dibbling points, can occur when

in the design, you entered ‘structure’ height only, without the Earthworksheight).

Entering a “security distance” to the dibbling points from left toright. If you want the program to compute the dibbling points at an offset from their real location, enter this distance at the proper fields : for field‘Left’ enter the distance to the left dibbling, and for field ‘Right’ the distanceto the right dibbling. The distance computed, will always be from thecenter line and outwards, (distances will always be entered as an absolutevalue without the “-“ mark).

Enter the prefix to the points created. If you want to add any kind of textto the names of the points created (say the name of the road to which theybelong), enter this text in the ‘Prefix’ field.

After determining the desired window setting, click ‘ Apply ’ to perform thecomputation. The program will compute the points according to definitionsand they will be added to the ‘Designed coordinates’ list at the bottom. Thenames of the points will be chosen according to the name of the section towhich they belong, with the addition of ‘L’ or ‘R’ to mark the point left orright of the section. In addition, if the prefix was entered, it will appear atthe beginning of the point's names.

The center line geometric data computations – In order to get thegeometric data list, choose ‘ Geom ’ (choose between ‘Coord’ and ‘Geom’

options), and click on the report button . In the report that opens youwill see the center line geometric data with the IP coordinates data andarch data. To print this data, click on the printer button from the bottom ofthis window.

The geometric data report can be placed on the drawing. To do so, firstcompute the report as detailed above, and perform the following steps:








Click on the report placement button drawing .Move to the drawing area and position the table in the desired area:

For users of Stand Alone version –using your mouse, position the tableborders rectangle at the desired location. The table will be built andpresented as part of the drawing.For AutoCAD users only – In the AutoCAD command ruler appears thelabeling – “Locate table. Pick Location/Set/(Esc)nd: ”. Mark the c ursor inthe location you want it to appear in the table. Mouse click to get the table’sborders frame. The borders will appear at a temporary layer that will beerased once you finish positioning the table. You may choose from anumber of locations for your table, i.e. receive the frame an unlimitednumber of times, until it’s final location is set. After choosing the finallocation, click ‘ S ’ from the ‘AutoCAD’ line and ‘Enter’. The temporary

borders will be erased and the table will be positioned at the location ofyour last choice.The table font size can also be changed. In order to make a change, click

on the ‘ Options ’ button from the right window . From the window thatopens, choose the desired font size using the small arrow next to ‘ Scale ’field . After choosing, click ‘OK’. To change the table on the drawing, youwill have to go back and position it as explained at the top.Receiving computation reports – sections 1-3 from the top – there aredifferent ways to compute coordinates along the center line. For each oneof these computations, you can get the computation table in the format of

an orderly report. To get the report choose ‘ Coord ’ (choose between‘Coord’ and ‘Geom’ options), and click on the report button . Thecomputation report will appear before you.

Deleting all window fields – click on the delete button to delete allfields.








Chapter 18: ReservoirDesign








Reservoir Design

This chapter includes the following sections:

Alignment design of the peripheral embankment.Defining the embankment cross section up to the bottom of thereservoir.Creating the reservoir model (including the creation of thebottom).Balancing earthworksReservoir capacity.Changing the alignment of the peripheral embankment.Slope of the reservoir bottom Drawing ‘Scraper plan' and sections along the reservoir. Dams.

CivilCAD 2014 is a strong and efficient tool for the design of reservoirs andpools. You can use it to define the reservoir alignment and to get theoptimal height until the leveling of the Earthworks. The program will alsoshow the capacity of the reservoir. At the end of the design, we will showhow to receive ‘Scraper’ work plans for Earthworks, and sections along thereservoir.

The last part of the chapter will discuss a reservoir composed from a‘Dam’, and not a ‘Pond’.

Alignment of peripheral embankment

The preceding step in reservoir design, is preparing the background of theexisting G.L (for details on preparation of existing background, see thebeginning of chapter 15 'Roads Design - Preparing the background(existing background)').The first step in planning a reservoir, is defining its peripheral embankmentalignment. Defining the peripheral embankment will be done the same asin roads or ditches design –using IPs and radiuses.

From the main menu go to: ‘ Roads -> Horizontal Alignment ’. A windowwill open from the right. Please notice that the list at the bottom window(Topography coordinates ) has been changed, and in place of theexisting points list, now appears a new empty list - the ‘ Designedcoordinates’.








A good background for exercising the subject discussed during this chapteris project ‘Sample 7 ’ that can be found installed in the ‘Samples’ directoryinstalled in the program’s installation directory. You can open a new projectand load the project’s coordinates file - ‘Samples 7 .Tco’.

Inserting the IP data of the center line.The horizontal alignment definition of the peripheral embankment will beperformed by defining the embankment center line. As aforesaid, thisalignment will be defined by IP points, and radiuses (if necessary):

Method A:In AutoCAD, draw a Polyline (2D Polyline) that will serve as theembankment's center line. The Polyline must be closed.Choose ‘ Select ’ from the table on the right (with the list of ‘Select ', ‘Locate’,‘Pick’, ‘Unused’). Move to the drawing area, press 'Enter' at the AutoCAD's command line,choose the drawn Polyline and click ‘Enter’. The table from the window onthe right will fill with the center line IP list. Every vertex in the Polyline willbe set as the IP of the center line, and in the bottom window theircoordinates list will appear.Notes:It is important to draw the Polyline in the clockwise direction.For the example you can draw a simple Polyline with 4 vertex (rectangle).

Method B:In the bottom window, type the IP center line list. For example:

Type in the IP names as they were typed in the bottom list, in the tablefrom the right. Type the IP under the labeling 'IP' in the table. In thisexample we will enter the list in the following manner:








After defining the center line (both methods) , click ‘ Apply ’ from the rightwindow, and ‘OK’ in the new window that opens. The program will draw thecenter line that had been defined with the IP points.

Defining the beginning and end point of the embankment

The beginning and end point of the peripheral embankment cannot be anIP, since you might want to define radiuses for those points as well. Forthis we will add an IP (arbitrary) on the line that connects between the firstIP and the last. This IP will be used as the beginning and end point of thecenter line. Adding this point, can be done in two ways:

Method A:Enter the desired point in the bottom coordinates list, in continuation of theremaining IPs,. In the sample of method B that had just been introduced,you can add such a point, label it 1000 and it will be: 1000 1000 1050,meaning at the following coordinate: Y=1050, X=1000.

Click on the button, right of the drawing window.In the right hand table, type the new IP names at the beginning and end ofthe list. To do so, stand on the first point, click ‘Enter’, and in the line thatopens enter the new – IP name (1000 in this example). In the sample thathad been given, the list from the right will look like this:

Click on ‘ Apply ’ from the right window, and again in the window thatopens. The peripheral embankment center line will be updated accordingto the change entered.

Method B:Click on ‘ Pick’ from the options list ('Unu sed', 'Pick' …) at the bottomwindow (please make sure it’s the bottom ‘Designed coordinates’ windowand not the right window). In the AutoCAD command line the followingoption will appear: ‘Pick point <1000>:'. Choose AutoCAD ‘Object snap’ to ‘ Midpoint'.Move to the drawing and choose a point on the line connecting betweenthe first IP and the last IP in the embankment center line. In the points list








from the bottom window a new point will appear labeled 1000. Move to thelist, choose the point and erase its height.

Click on the button right of the drawing.In the table from the right, type the new IP name at the beginning and endof the list (as shown in the upper table). To do so, stand on the first pointand click ‘Enter’. Type in the new IP name ( 1000 in this example) in theline that opens. Afterwards, stand on the last line, click ‘Enter’ and movewith your arrow upwards to the new line. Enter the same IP here as well(also 1000).Click on ‘ Apply ’ from the right window, and 'Ok' in the window that opens.The peripheral embankment center line will be updated according to thechange that had been entered.

Inserting the radius of the center line

The next step in the Horizontal Alignment is defining the radiuses atthe IP points. If we do not define them, the program will refer the radiusesas – 0.Enter the desired radius for each of the IP’s in the right table. Do not definea radius for the first and last radius.Click on the ‘ Apply ’ button from the right. The ‘Layout & contours’ windowwill open.Click ‘OK’ again in the window that opens (we will not detail here the usesof this window. Later on we will return to this window and explain itsusage).

The program will create the Horizontal Alignment of the center line that willappear in several separate layers. Next to each IP will appear it’s coordinate, and next to each arc – the arc data.

When you finish defining the Horizontal alignment, click ‘Close’ in the rightwindow.

For more information about additional functions in the Horizontalalignment window, please refer to Chapter 15 – 'Roads design', section 2 – 'Horizontal alignment – additional functions'.








Defining the cross section of the peripheral

embankmentIn the previous chapter we defined the peripheral embankment alignmentof the reservoir. Now we will define the cross section of the embankment:

Activate: ‘ Roads- > Cross sections’ from the main menu, to open the‘Cross sections’ window. This window is divided into three parts: The drawing area – the main area where the drawing of the section willappear. The name of the current section that is being worked on willappear in the heading above the drawing.The list of cross sections – right window.

The existing and designed topography tables for every section – the tablesat the lower section of your screen:Existing G.L. – The existing status topography data from the left table.Designed G.L – the designed topography data from the right hand table.

Click on the from the right window ( Define sections ) – to open theCross Sections setting window. From this window determine the followingdata:

Start at station –station to the first section. The default will be ‘0’. Do notchange it.End at station – station to the last section. The default will be according tothe length of the center line as it will be computed by the program (thislength appears immediately when the cross section window opens, at theright window – Roads length), and since we are interested in the spreadingthe sections along the entire embankment, do not change this value either.Distance between sections – the distance between the cross sections.Name of first section – the name of the first section. The program willnumber the remaining sections in an ascending order according to theformat spe cified in the window. We will explain both these ‘Format’

statuses:Format 1 – the first option presents the sections names as they appear inthe sections list.Format 2 –by changing the parameters that appear in the bottom window,the program will use thi s option to present the section’s name in thefollowing way: KM + METER. For example, if you leave the value in fieldKM: 0, the program will present the sections like: 0+000, 0+020,0+040……, 0+380.

After defining the desired parameters, click ‘OK’ to bu ild the sections. Thelist of sections that were built will appear in the right table according to the

selected definitions. Each section will have a name and station. If thecross-sections are already defined and the sections' names table was full,








the software will display a notice that warns of an existing section"Overwrite previous section named" + name of the first section. Also thefollowing options will be displayed:Rename section - the software will alter only the name of the section

according to the new definitions.Overwrite section - the software will delete the section's data and will

change its name according to the new definition. Leave existing section - the software won't execute any change in this

section.

By clicking 'OK', the window will display the same options to the nextsection. In order to execute this option to all section, click on button 'OK toall'.

Activate the Options button from the right window . The ‘Definesections width’ window will open:Define the width of section for the project. We are referring to the width ofthe ground that the program will sample for the existing G.L out of thetopography. We will define a distance from the left center line and adistance from the right center line that will together define the width of theground strip. The left end of the section will be defined in the ‘Left’ field(default of ' – 20' meters), and its right en d in the ‘Right’ field (default '20'meters), when the distance left of the center line is a negative number andthe distance from the right is a positive one. In reservoir design of a largeperipheral embankment, you will need a large strip of ground (mainly forthe internal embankment of the reservoir – the right side), and so you mustchange the data that appears in the fields (increase it to '40' for example).

When designing reservoirs define the sections' elevations as absolute – make sure the work status is on ‘ Elevation ’ and not on ‘ dH ’.

Move from Earthworks to Design . This option defines the graphicpresentation form of the section. The program has two options for definingthe section: a section for presenting Earthworks , and a section forpresenting Designed sections . The difference in presentation will beshown by the form of the sections in the drawing window, by printingthrough the program to the printer, and by creating a section's file on an

AutoCAD sheet. The main difference between the two displays is the datatable. In the section for design purposes, the existing ground data tableappears at the bottom, and the design data are located on the section. Inthe ‘Earthworks’ sections, all the data will appear at the bottom table, aswell as two additional lines in the table that present the computationmethod of ‘ cut ’ and ‘fill’ section area.

Click on the GetT all button . Click ‘OK’ in the window that opens. Theprogram will warn ' About to erase all Existing data' . Click ‘OK’ to continue.The program will move across the center line and sample the current








existing topography data along it, according to the sections that have beendefined.The sampling of the existing topography data is dependent upon thenumber of measuring points in the project: the number of breaklines andnumber of cross sections that have been defined. In large projects, thisaction might take a long time. CivilCAD 2014 does not limit the project size,or the length of the center line, although in slow computers or computerswith little memory, this might take a while, or even cause the computer to“crash”.

When the reading of the existing topography data is done, the first sectionwill appear in the drawing window and the existing topography data willappear in the table 'Existing G.L.'. It is possible to move between thesections by pointing on the desired section from the right table. Eachselected section will automatically appear on the drawing, and its data willappear in the tables below. In order to continue, make sure you are in thefirst section.

We will shortly explain the structure of the design table. Each line of thetable representing a segment. The segments are numbered from -40 to+40 (a sum of 81 possible segments for each section). In the table thereare five columns (the one on the far left is without a heading). To explainthis, number these columns in an ascending order from left to right, so thecolumn on the far left is number 1:

Column number 1 : in this column appears the segment’s serial number.This number does not represent a distance of any kind. Segments left tothe center line will be represented by a negative number, and numbersright of the center line will be represented by a positive number.

Column number 2 (Offset): this column represents the distance of thesegment from the center line. The distance left of the center line will beentered as negative and the number from the right as positive. There aretwo options for the distance from the center line: absolute distance or

relative distance. When working with 'dH', the data will be entered as arelative distance, meaning that the distance entered is actually the lengthof the segment and not the absolute distance from the center line. Whenworking with ‘Elevation’, this data will be entered as absolute heights.

Column number 3 (Elevation): the absolute height of the segment.

Column number 4 (Slope%): in this column you can enter the segmentslope.

Before we continue, we will shortly explain a number of editing commands

from the table:Clicking on ‘Del’ from a certain field will delete the field.








Clicking on ‘Backspace’ (back arrow), to w ork as usual.To delete an entire line, or reduce lines, stand on the far left column(column number 1) in the desired segment and click ‘Del’. The program willdelete the segment and reduce the lines.It is possible to copy a segment from the existing cross section to othercross sections. To copy, stand on the desired segment and right click withyour mouse button and choose 'Send to'. From the table that opens, markthe sections to which the segment data will be copied and (to choose allsections, click on button ‘All’ from the bottom), and click ‘OK’. The programwill copy the segment data for all the selected sections.Begin by entering the design data in the table. To clarify this issue, we willdemonstrate the data for a typical section that will be followed by a detailedexplanation. Observe the embankment center line existing status that wascomputed for the current section (see ‘Existing G.L’ table, ‘Elevation’ heightcolumn of segment 0). Say for the sake of the example, the elevation is26.55. We will define the peripheral embankment with height 4 meter in theexisting section (this height will be determined as the turning point for thedesign start and will change in the course of the design). We will furtherdefine the width across the load of the embankment as 5 meters, theexternal reservoir slope to be 1:3, the internal slope to be 1:4, and thedepth of the reservoir as 6 meters.

Enter the following data in the in the ‘Designed G.L ‘ table:

In field 'Fill 1:', near the caption ‘Slp.left’ (see head of table), enter thevalue ‘3’ (leave all the remaining slope fields including the ‘Slp.right’, empty (at ‘0’ value )).

Review the definitions you have entered: segments -1 and 1 mark theembankment load distance width as 2.5 meter for each side, 5 meters inall. Since you have defined the embankment alignment clockwise, the leftside will be in the exterior to the reservoir. From this comes the definition‘3’, to mark the ratio of 1:3 outward (field: Slp.Left). Segment 2 marks theembankment slope inward to the reservoir (6 meters height in the ratio of1:4 are 24 meters. With the addition of 2.5 meters of the previous segmentyou get 26.5 meters).

When you finish entering the data, click ‘ Apply ’ to receive the section.








Now we will project the typical section on the entire center line wehave built

Click on the ‘ Copy ’ button left of the Designed G.L table. After youclick, the ‘Designed G.L’ table will be copied to the computer’s memory.

Using the table from the left window (the sections list table, left of thedrawing), move to the last section on the list. Click on the ‘ Paste ’ button

, in order to copy the data from memory into the table, in this section.

The main principle of working with CivilCAD 2014, is entering of data in thesections in which the road changes (only in those sections!), and filling theremaining road parts with intermediate interpolation. Now we have two sections filled with data. The rest of the sections are stillempty (you can see this by browsing between them by clicking on a certainsection from the right hand- sections list table).

Intermediate interpolation. Click on the ‘ Interpolation empty sections’

button from the right. Click ‘OK’. The program will perform interpolationto all the empty sections in the project, and since we have only twosections only, (first and last), that are similar in capacity, the program willfill all the sections with the same design data.

At the end of the interpolation, you can browse through the sections. At thisstage, if you are interested you can move to a certain section and changeits capacity.

Getting the reservoir position. Click on the ‘ Create Layout’ button ,from the right. From the window that opens, mark ‘v’ next to the threepossible options (L ayout, Contours, Distances). Click ‘OK’ to continue. Theprogram will create the layout of the reservoir on the drawing, which willinclude the contour lines of the reservoir including dibbling lines.

Note . After clicking ‘OK’ in the Layout window, the cross section windowwill be minimized (so you can view the changes in layout). To maximize thescreen, click on it from the Windows “Task -Bar” from the bottom of yourscreen. Now you can continue to edit the section data as you wish, andchange the layout accordingly.

Click on the ‘Close’ button to finish defining the sections and return to themain screen.








Additional functions from the Cross Sections window .

We will now explain in detail additional functions from the cross sectionswindow, that were not discusses during the sample stages:


- deleting a single section – stand on the section you wish to deletefrom the list, and click on this button from the sections list window (rightwindow). The program will erase this section from the list.

- deleting all the project sections – click on this button from the rightwindow. The program will send a warning before deleting all the sections.Click ‘OK’ to confirm this action.

- deleting section group data . To delete in unity the data ofnumerous sections, click on the ‘Clear all’ button from the sections list(right window). From the window that opens, choose to delete the followingdata - Existing G.L. data or the Designed G.L . Click ‘OK’ to continue. Fromthe table that opens, mark the sections whose data you want to delete. Tochoose all sections, click on the ‘A ll’ button from the bottom. Click ‘OK’.The program will delete the chosen sections data.

- adding height to the sections data . This option is useful mainly for

working with absolute heights, as demonstrated in chapter 'Roads design'.For more details look 'Roads design – Cross sections'.

Functions from the 'Options' window (activate using the button from thesections list right window), from the drawing window (the main window onwhich appears the section drawing) and the table's window(bottomwindow) are explained in the chapter 15 - 'Roads design – Cross sections

– Additional functions from 'Options' window'.

Creating the reservoir model

In the previous chapter we have shown how to define the cross section ofthe peripheral embankment up to the bottom of the reservoir. At the end ofthe chapter we have also shown how to view the designed reservoir layout.For CivilCAD 2014 to compute the Earthworks volumes of the reservoir,the capacity, and create a construction plan, we will have to instruct thebuilding of the reservoir 3D model.

Go to ‘General -> Reservoir’ from the main menu. From the right, the

'Reservoirs' window will open.








Click ‘ Apply ’ from the window that opens. The program will compute thereservoir’s 3D model, create the bottom of the reservoir on the crosssection definitions of the embankment, and draw the designed contourlines.

As explained in numerous chapters in this user guide, the program storestwo 2D models, one of the existing status, and the other of the designed. Inorder to know the height of a certain point in the models, both in the

existing and designed, click the ‘Pick height’ button from the mainCivilCAD 2014 toolbar, then go to the drawing clicking their mouse on anypoint. The existing and designed heights of the model at the point that wasclicked, will appear under the heading 'Height_T:' and 'Height_D:' at thebottom of the Design coordinates table. CivilCAD 2014 allows the full

reception of the model. To do so, use the 3D model presentation asexplained in chapter 10 – 'Quick Sections and the 3D model'.

Additional options from this window.‘Road’ field – when working on a number of reservoirs, this field will allow

browsing between the different reservoirs.Choice fields – Pond/Dam:Pond - a closed reservoir, the example discussed reservoirs that weredesigned as a closed reservoir with a defined peripheral embankment.Dam – an open reservoir – the last section of the chapter will discuss themain differences when of designing a reservoir defined by a damembankment only.Capacity + a capacity computation button – we will discuss these fieldoptions, and button later (see “Reservoir capacity”).








Balancing earthworks

One of the most important steps in designing a reservoir is receiving arelative balance of Earthworks, cut/fill. You can do the Earthworks balanceby changing the design data on two levels:

Changing the reservoir alignment.Changing the designed height of the reservoir.

Changing the reservoir alignment is a bit of a complex option, and on thiswe will go into detail in the section “Changing the alignment of theperipheral embankment” of this chapt er. We will be discussing the secondoption of changing the designed height in this section of the chapter.

CivilCAD 2014 is a strong, quick, easy tool for balancing Earthworks in aproject by a quickly changing the height of the project. We will not go andphysically change the reservoir design, but use the possibility supplied bythe program of changing the height of the designed model.

Go to ‘ Earthworks- > General’ from the main menu. From the right, willopen the general Earthworks computation window.Click ‘ Apply ’ from the right window. The program will calculate the volumeof Earthworks in the project, for ‘fill’ and ‘ cut ’ and present them in a reportsummarizing the table’s data. At the bottom of the table you can see the

calculated ratio betwee n ‘fill’ and ‘cut ’. We will balance the Earthworks by“playing” with the height of the reservoir – both embankments and bottom. At the right window appears the ‘ add to design’ window. Enter a positiveor negative change of height in this field (an addition or reduction ofheight), and click ‘ Apply ’ to present the Earthworks quantities as if youwere to begin designing the reservoir at a higher or lower height accordingto the value entered. For example:

Say the ratio between ‘ cut ’ and ‘fill’ is 2.5. This i ndicates that the cutvolume is 2.5 times larger than the ‘fill’ volume. Enter ‘ add to design ’ infield 2 so the program introduces the volumes by the designed height that

is higher by 2 meters than the existing height.Say the ratio between ‘ cut ’ and ‘fill’ is 0.8. As of now, the fill volume is a bitbigger than the cut volume. By entering 1.5 in the ‘ add to design’ field, wewill get the volumes as if we had designed by a designed height higher by1.5 meters than the current height (the change, 2 meters, 1.5 meters etc. isalways in relevance to the original designed height and not the last heightentered.)Say you just received the ‘ cut ’ to ‘fill’ ratio 1.1. Since this ratio isacceptable (you would want a bit more ‘fill’ over ‘ cut ’), the implication i s thatif we had designed the reservoir 1.5 meters higher than the existing designheight, the Earthworks in the project would be balanced.








Note : to reduce designed height, enter a negative height in the ‘add todesign’ field (for example ‘– 0.5 ’).

To physically change the original design of the reservoir, perform thesteps below:

Return to ‘ Roads - > Cross sections’ In the window that opens, click on the ‘dH’ button from the right.Enter the desired difference, 1.5 meters in this case in the window thatopens and click ‘OK’ to continue.From the window that opens, move to ‘ Designed G.L ’ using the optionarrow, and click ‘OK’.Now a window will open with the sections list. Click on button ‘A’ from thebottom window. All sections in the list will be chosen. Click ‘OK’ tocontinue.The program will warn about the change of designed height for thesesections. Click ‘OK’ to confirm. The heights of all the sections will changeaccording to the chosen height change.

Click on the ‘Layout’ button , and f rom then ‘OK’ to receive the renewedreservoir layout.Close the cross section wind ow by clicking on the ‘Close’ button.Go to ‘ General -> Reservoi r’ and in the window that opens, click ‘ Apply ’ toreceive the new model and renewed reservoir bottom.Retur n to window ‘ Earthworks -> General ’ and click ‘ Apply ’ to get the newfill/cut ratio according to the physical change in heights.

Reservoir capacity

In previous sections of this chapter, we have shown how to design areservoir by different stages. One of the things you need to know on thereservoir is its volume capacity. CivilCAD 2014 can produce a report thatdescribes the reservoir capacity and surface relative to the different levelsof the water.

Go to ‘ General -> Reservoir ’. The reservoir windo w will open from theright.The program will automatically compute the height of the bottom of thereservoir, and height of the reservoir’s embankment top and fill in thefollowing fields:

Max liquid level – the maximum water level in the reservoir. Thevalue of height that the program will enter as default will be thevalue of height of the embankment top rounded downwards (forexample, if the height of a embankment top is – 31.79, then themaximum water level will be 31).Min liquid level – the minimal water level in the reservoir. The

height the software enters as default will be the height of thereservoir bottom rounded upwardly.








Compute in steps – the steps in which the report is computed. As default, this field will be of ‘1’ value (1 meter).

Note : the fields filled by the program as default can be changed bythe user.

Click on the ‘ Compute capacity’ button from the right handwindow. The program will compute the reservoir capacity report andpresent it according to the parameters in the fields.

In order to locate the capacity report on drawing:

Click the 'Locate Report on Drawing' button.Click on the screen at the desired location for the report to bedisplayed.In AutoCAD Command Line, type 's' (for Set) and hit the 'ENTER'button. The report will be displayed on drawing.

Computation of capacity for the area that is not defined by aperipheral embankment

The explanation detailed represents the method of computing the volumecapacity of the reservoir that had been defined by the peripheralembankment, according to the different stages that have been detailed inthis chapter. CivilCAD 2014 allows volume capacity calculation for acertain area that is bounded say by mountains, hills or by a dam asdescribed in the last section of chapter - “Dams”.

In order to compute the capacity of a certain area, perform thesefollowing steps

Go to the Reservoir window (‘General -> Reservoir ’ from CivilCAD

2014 main menu).In AutoCAD, transfer a Polyline (2D Polyline) that will bound the borderarea of the reservoir you wish to compute capacity of it.Transfer from ‘Pond ’ to ‘Dam ’ from the right hand window.Mark ‘V’ near the ‘Select area’ field. Go to the drawing area andchoose the ‘Polyline’ that was drawn. Click ‘Enter’ after choosing thePolyline. From the right, the writing will change from ‘None ’ to‘Selected ’.Click on the ‘ Apply ’ button. The program will calculate the maximumwater level and minimal water level within the Polyline area and presentthem in the fields on the right. At this stage it is possible to change the

parameters as requested (for example, to compute the water level atdifferent steps from the default of 1 meter).








Click on the ‘ Compute capacity’ button from the right window. Theprogram will compute a reservoir capacity report and present it

according to the parameters that exist in the fields.








Changing the peripheral embankment alignment

As part of the reservoir design, you might have to study various designoptions in which the peripheral embankment alignment of the reservoir ischanged. In this chapter we will explain how to change the alignment of theperipheral embankment, and what are stages you must go through in orderto fully complete the alignment change.

1. Moving the IP of the embankment central line – there are two methodsof changing the IP of the embankment central line:

A physical change of the coordinate from the ‘Designed coordinates’list. Use the ‘Designed coordinates’ editor to change the coordinate ofone or more of the IP’s to a new value. Make sure you are keeping t hepoint name (say IP1), the same as it was.Using the ‘Move’ option – choose ‘Move’ from the choice list at thebottom window (see list from bottom window: Freeze, Locate, Pick…).Go to the drawing area and choose the IP point of the location you wishto relocate. Choose the first relative point for movement then thesecond. The coordinates of the point in the bottom list of points willchange according to the new location.

After you have moved the IP to its new location, click on the button.The point will change its location on the drawing. Go to ‘Roads ->Horizontal alignment ’. Click ‘ Apply ’ from the window that opens on theright, and again in the new window that opens. The program willchange the embankment center line drawing according to the newalignment. Nevertheless, since the length of the center line with theposition of the sections has changed, you will have to correct thesections accordingly, and receive the layout with them (includingdibbling lines).

2. Go to ‘ Roads - > Cross sections’ . As you enter the ‘ Cross sections ’window, the program will compute the length of the new center line andpresent it at ‘Roads length’. In case there were (before the change ofhorizontal alignment), cross sections across the entire center line, afterchanging the length of the center line, they will not exist. We willdifferentiate between two cases: a length of the center line is smallerrelative to its previous length or bigger. We will explain the changeneeded in the cross sections using two examples:

Example A: a reduced center line length. Say before the change, thecenter line length was 215.32 meters, and say we divided the centerline to cross sections every 20 meters. The last two sections of thecenter line were, as aforesaid were at offset 200 meters and 215.32

meters. Now let us say that after the change, the length of the centerline had changed to 187.32 meters. This distance will appear at ‘Roads








length’, while in the list of sections the previous sections will appear,namely these two sections. We will match between the length and thelist of sections in the following manner: erase the sections at 200 meterdistance and 215.32 meter distance from the list of sections. Now thelast section will be at offset 180 meters. Move to the end of the sectionslist, and add a section at offset 187.32.Example B : the center line length had grown. Say before the changethe length of the center line was 215.32, and say it is divided to crosssections every 20 meters. Now, let us presume that it grew to 240.56meters. We will erase the section 215.32 from the list of sections andadd the following sections to the list: 220, 240, and 240.56.

After matching the sections along the new center line, readthe existing ground data again. Do so for all the sections,both new and previous (since they changed location). Clickon the ‘GetT all’ button, and click ‘OK’ in the window thatopens. The program will read the new existing status datainto the sections. Complete the design for the new sectionsyou created (y ou can do so by using ‘ Copy ’ and ‘Paste’ ).

3. Click on the ‘ Layout ’ button from the right. In the window thatopens, click ‘OK’. The program will fix the layout according to its newcondition.

4. Leave the cross sections window by clicking on the ‘ Close ’ button, andgo to ‘ General -> Reservoir ’. Click ‘ Apply ’ in the window that opens.The program will build the bottom of the reservoir according to the newembankment alignment.

Slope of the reservoir bottom

In the course this chapter we have shown how to design a reservoir with astraight bottom. We will now show how to create a slope of the designedreservoir.

The creation of the slope will be done using one of the two methods:Changing the slope by changing the cross section.Creating designed contour lines at the bottom.

Changing the slope by changing the cross sectionsThis principle is based on changing the bottom segment defined in thecross sections, in the sections in which the change in slope exists, anddoing interpolation between these sections.

From the drawing layout, choose the sections to which you wish tochange the bottom height from the edges of the reservoir.








Go to ‘ Roads -> Cross sections ’ from the main menu.Enter to the desired cross section in the window that opens and changesegment number 2 in the ‘ Designed G.L’ table.

Click on the ‘Clear all’ button from the right. From the window thatopens choose the ‘Designed G.L’ table (move using the small arrow),and click ‘OK’.The list of cross sections will appear. Mark the sections you want todelete (these will be the intermediate sections you want to fill withinterpolation between the sections that were changed). To choose anumber of sections use the ‘Shift’ and ‘Control’ keys. Click ‘OK’ tocontinue.The program will warn that it is about to delete the designed data.Confirm this message.

Click on the layout button from the right. Click ‘OK’ in the windowthat opens. The new reservoir layout will be drawn.Click ‘Close’ to close the window.Go to ‘General-> Reservoir ’ from the window that opens from the right,and click ‘ Apply ’. The program will recreate the bottom of the reservoir,new contour lines, and build the 3D model again.

Adding of designed points into the bottom

Make sure that the list of design coordinates appears in the bottom

window. If the list of topography coordinates appears, change it byDesign -> Coordinates.Press Pick from the bottom actions' window (Pick, Locate, Freeze…). Move to the drawing area and choose the new elevation's points in thebottom. The points will appear in the coordinates' list in the bottomwindow.Note: In order to create accurate connection between reservoir internalslope to designed bottom, it is necessary to add designed points notonly into the bottom of reservoir but in the internal slope area also.Use the bottom window's editor to change the new points’ elevation (see chapter 2 "Coordinates Database - Coordinates list – Editing the

coordinates list").Press to get the new points in the bottom.In order to build new internal slope according to new designed points,go to ‘Design-> Lines ’ and Erase all lines from lines list.From the main menu, go to ‘Design ->Contours’ and click ‘Apply’ torun contours according to new designed points.From the main menu, go to ‘Ro ds- >Cross Sections’ and delete thelast segment in ‘Design’ table .To apply the above changes to other cross sections, stand on thedesired segment and right click with your mouse button. From the table

that opens, mark the desired sections to which the segment data will be








copied to or click on ‘All’ button to select all cross sections. C lick ‘OK’.The program will copy the segment data to all the selected sections.Define new slope for reservoir internal slope .To apply the slope definition to other cross sections, stand on the slopecell and right click with your mouse button. From the table that opens,mark the desired sections to which the segment data will be copied toor click on ‘All’ button to select all cross sections. C lick ‘OK’. Theprogram will copy the slope data to all the selected sections.

Click ‘Insert Layers’ button . ‘Layers Manager’ dialog box will open.

Click ‘Define a new layer’ button and define sub-layer under‘Existing’ e.g. “Bottom”. Click OK to save definition.

Click ‘Get design data for all sections’ button . ‘Select table’ dialogbox will open. Change upper selection to ‘Exsisting G.L.’ and bottomselection to sub- layer (“Bottom”).

In ‘Existing’ table, delete negative segments ( -1,-2,- 3…) data. To apply the definition to other cross sections, stand on the relevantsegment cell and right click with your mouse button. From the table thatopens, mark the desired sections to which the segment data will becopied to or click on ‘All’ button to select all cross sections. C lick ‘OK’.The program will copy the segment data to all the selected sections.

Click ‘Interpolate empty sections’ button and then click ‘Create

layout button .From the main menu, go to ‘Roads ->Horizontal Alignment’ . Erase alldesigned points within reservoi r’s internal slope area (see chapter 2:Coordinates database->Drawing commands affecting the list->Erase).

Click to update drawing.From the main menu, go to ‘Roads ->Reservoir ’. In the window thatopens from the right , mark ‘V’ in ‘Use last segments’ op tion and click'Apply'. The program will create the reservoir bottom newly, the newcontours and the new 3D model.








Drawing ‘Scraper plan' and sections along thereservoir

When you finish designing the reservoir, you will want to execute the plansout. CivilCAD 2014 allows:

1. The drawing of a ‘ Scraper plan’ on the drawing layout.2. Taking out sections along the reservoir.

Drawing the 'Scraper Plan'

Go to ‘Earthworks -> Grid’ from the main menu. A window will open

from the right.Choose the spaces i n the grid to the direction of ‘X’ and to the directionof ‘Y’ by filling in the proper fields in ‘Grid's steps’ (head of right fields).Click on ‘Pick’ from the right window, move to thedrawing area and mark:

The left bottom point of the base line that will define the grid - ‘Base-first’ .The right bottom point of the base line that will define the grid - ‘Base -second’ .

A point perpendicular to the base line that will define the height of the

grid ‘End corner’ .

The coordinates of the selected points will be entered in the right windowfields. We will choose the points that define the grid so it is perpendicularto the reservoir.

Click ‘ Apply ’ from the right window. The program will create a grid onthe drawing, according to the defined size. In every corner of the grid,the existing status height will appear, the designed status height andthe difference between them. In every square of the grid, the ‘ cut ’ and‘fill’ volume of this square will appear. When the grid is completed, asummarizing report with all the quantities of Earthworks according tothe grid square sums will appear.

Note: for more details about additional options from this window seechapter 9 – “Earthworks – additional issues - Earthworks levelinggrid.”

Extracting sections along the reservoir

Go to ‘ Roads -> Roads list ’ from the main menu. A window will openfrom the right.








From the table at the right window, add a new center line to the list(stand at the end of the list and enter the new road name, for example:Road2), cli ck ‘OK’ to continue.Draw the Polyline perpendicular to the vertical alignment which we areinterested in creating. From the main menu activate ‘Roads ->Horizontal alignment ’. After the right window opens, move using thesmall arrow button at the head of the window, from the embankmentcenter line to a new center line we are about to define. From the rightwindow choose 'Select', enter 'P' in the AutoCAD command line and'Enter', then move to the drawing area and select the Polyline byclicking the mouse button and 'Enter' again. In the right window the IP'slist will appear. Click 'Apply'.

After defining the center line move to the Vertical Alignment window:‘Roads -> Vertical Alignment’.From the 'Roads list ' choose the new defined center line.Click 'GetD' button from the bottom window, from the opens windowchoose the 'Designed G.L.' table and click 'OK'. The Designed tablewill fill by new data.Click 'Apply' to get the designed ground level on the drawing.Click on the 'Layers' button from the AutoCAD Toolbar and freeze the'data2' and 'flag' layer.

After receiving the desired vertical alignment, it will be possible to print

them or extract them on to a DXF file using the button right of thedrawing

Dams

In the last section of this chapter, we will discuss the difference betweendesigning a reservoir of a full peripheral embankment - a Pond , anddesigning a reservoir built from a Dam . The principle mode of operation willbe similar for the two systems, although designing a dam is simpler. This isthe order of commands for designing a reservoir built from a dam, withemphasis on the difference between the two design types:

Go to ‘ Roads -> Horizontal Alignment ’ and define the dam center line.It is defined the same exact way as the definition of the reservoirperipheral embankment alignment, except here the center line will beopen (naturally).Go to ‘ Roads -> Cross sections ’:

1. Define the cross sections .

2. Define the width of the existing ground .3. Extract the ground sections of existing status from the

topography.

4. Define the designed cross section at the desired height (insection number 1). Unlike the definition of a cross section in a








closed reservoir, do not define here the bottom of thereservoir. An example for defining a cross section this casemay be:

5. In field: ‘Fill 1:’ near the ‘Slp. Left :’ caption (see head of

table), and in field: ‘Fill 1 :’, near the ‘Slp. Right: ’ (see bottomtable), enter the value ‘3’ (leave the remain der of the fieldslopes for ‘Cut’ status empty (at value ‘0’ )).

We have just defined the embankment section of the road at a 5-meterwidth, and embankment slope of 1:3 for each side.Copy the first section to the last, and perform interpolation between thesections.

Draw the layout of the embankment .Finish b y clicking ‘Cancel’, and go to ‘ Roads -> Reservoir ’. From thewindow that opens transfer from ‘Pond ’ to ‘Dam ’. Click ‘ Apply ’ to create

an embankment model.

Continue as explained in the regular reservoir design , in order to getEarthworks balances and capa city (see section “Reservoir Capacity”earlier in this chapter).








Chapter 19: Designing gaspipelines








Designing of gas pipelines

This chapter will discuss the gas pipelines' planning process. Thisplanning founded on road planning. In the chapter the following stepswill be explained:Project initializing.Layout of the pipeline.Defining of the vertical alignment.Creating DXF files and sheet dividing from the longitudinalsection.Designing the ditch for laying the pipeline.

Project initializing

In order to start the gas line planning project, first follow these steps:

From the main toolbar activate Roads->Roads list . A windowwill be opened from the right, on this window, the names of thepipelines.Type on the table on the right the list of pipelines in the currentproject. Every pipeline in the project has to be titled. The namecan be Alphanumeric or a number. In contrast to road design,the centerlines' names are crucial and should be typed with theletters: GAS in the beginning of each name. This way, thesoftware acknowledges that a gas line was defined.When finished typing the list, click 'Ok' .Now, execute the background preparation stages (existing G.L)as explained in Road design chapter.

Designing pipelines' layout

Next, we'll plan the horizontal alignment of the pipelines.

1) From main toolbar, activate 'Roads-> Horizontal alignment' . A windowwill be opened to the right. Note that the list in the window at the bottom ofthe screen (Topography points) had been replaced and instead of theexisting points' list, a new , empty, list appeared on the designed points 2) Typing the IP data of the centerline. There are several methods to enter the centerline's IP data. Two methodswill be demonstrated here:Method 1- (For AutoCAD users only) -

in AutoCAD, transfer Polyline (2D Polyline) that will constitute thehorizontal alignment of the centerline.

Choose " Select " in the table on the right (the table with the list:Unused, Pick, Locate, Select).








in the command line of the AutoCAD a notice will appear: Enter anoption. (<Polyline>/Segment**) type p and click 'Enter '. TheSegment option enables horizontal planning with the use of advancedtools. This option is discussed in detail in chapter 'Road Design -Horizontal alignment planning'.Switch to drawing area, choose the drawn Polyline and click Enter. Thetable in the window on the right, will be filled with the data of thecenterline's IP. Every fraction (Vertex) in the Polyline, will bedetermined as the centerline's IP and the list of their points will appearon the window in the bottom of the screen.

Note : The names of the IP points for the centerline will be determined by:xIPx, when "x" indicates the number of the centerline and "y" indicates thenumber of the IP. In the first designated centerline (First Select option), theIP's will be numbered as follows: 1IP1, 1IP2, 1IP3, 1IP4 etc. In every newSelect action, the "x" value will grow.

Another method is available to create the alignment with the AutoCAD byusing advanced tools. See details in the next clause (Advanced tools forhorizontal alignment planning).

Defining the vertical alignment

After defining the horizontal alignment of the line, the longitudinal section

will be defined. CivilCAD 2014 software enables longitudinal sectionplanning with two methods: Planning In the drawing environment of thesoftware and planning in the AutoCAD environment (only in the AutoCAD2000 version and up). In order to define the working methods, the severalstages should be executed:

From main menu activate File->ConfigurationBy caption "Vertical alignment mode " choose one of the following options:

o Stand alone - working in the design environment of the software (old version).

o Drawing environment interface - working in

AutoCAD environment.

1) From the main menu activate Roads->Vertical Alignment . The longitudinal window will be opened. The opened window is dividedto:

Drawing area - The main area of the window (black platform).Existing G.L. data table- the table in the bottom left side of thescreen ("Topography").Data planning table- The table in the bottom right part of thescreen.

Actions window - right side window.








The main drawing - Horizontal alignment and existing G.L., located in aseparate window below the longitudinal section window (minimizing thewindow will reveal the previous one).

2) Click the 'Apply' button in the window on the right. The software willscan across the horizontal section and calculate the longitudinal section'selevations. These elevations will appear on the existing G.L. table (on thebottom left side of the screen), as a function of Station and Elevation. Inthe drawing window, the longitudinal section- existing G.L. will bedisplayed. The following points should be clarified:

The section is scaled by the values in "Elevation" and"Length" fields (below caption "View").

The elevations in the bottom screen table, are displayed atthe location of the cross-sections. For example, if cross-sections are defined every 20 meters, elevations will bedisplayed in the longitudinal section every 20 meters. In orderto change the data of the designated elevations, the cross-sections' location must be change as well. For example, we'llchange the location to every 25 meters.

o Click on button (Options). The maindefinitions window will be opened with caption:"Vertical alignment". Enter the desired distanceby caption "Data intervals".

o Click ‘Apply ’ in the window on the right torefresh the drawing.

- Even if no horizontal alignment exists or thetopography is unavailable, the section can be formedby entering the data manually to the existing G.L.table. To do so, the table should be filled with stationdata (ST) and elevation (Elev). In order to display thesection after the data is entered, click 'Apply' in thewindow on the right.

- If, following inaccurate topographical data, a partlyfalse longitudinal window is displayed, the hand-typedexisting G.L's data could be rewritten. To delete a linefrom the table, point the mouse pointer over the serialnumber column of the row (far left column) and click"Del". The row will be deleted. To accept the changeon the drawing, click 'Apply' on the window on theright.








Designing the vertical IP

The following table is an example to a gas pipeline data table:

St- Station.

T.O.P - Top pipe elevation. Slope(%)- The pipe's slope. R - Radius of the vertical arch.

Diameter() - The pipe's diameter. Bedding width - Elevation of bedding.

The longitudinal section's planning can be executed by entering data in thetable or by graphic drawing:

o Method 1 - entering data in the table. The data planning table (the table on the bottom right side of the

screen) is divided to columns by - Number of degrees (far left anduntitled column), station (ST), Elevation, slope between thesections- measured in percentage (Slope %) . Radius of vertical arc,pipe diameter (in inches) and bedding width. Enter the data in the table and for every section, define its stationand elevation. The software will calculate the slope between everypair of sections and will display it in the relevant section. Instead ofelevation the slope for the previous section can be entered, than thesoftware will fill the elevation column. To delete a false line, pointyour mouse pointer on the serial numbers column (the column onthe left) against the relevant and click "Del". In order to display theplanned section's drawing, click 'Apply' on the right window.

o Method 2 - graphical drawing of the data (by using AutoCADwindow). By this method, it's possible to draw the longitudinalsection on the drawing area:

1) Verify that the current layer in the AutoCAD is VerEdit. 2) Begin to draw the longitudinal section with Polyline (it's possible

to join several lines).3) If you wish to draw the polyline in a specified slope, execute the

following steps:








Click on button Define design slope. In the AutoCAD window the notice "Enter slope" will be

displayed. Type the slope's value and click Enter. Verify that ORTHO option in the AutoCAD is marked Now you will be able to draw the Polyline in the desired

slope. To change the slope, click aforementioned button and type a

new value. To finish, click this button, again and then click Esc.

4) In order to update the vertical arcs, their values can be filledmanually under the caption "R" in the planning table or by

marking the point through which the arc has to pass.

Click on button arc through point Click the desired point in the drawing area. If the arch's transition will be impossible to attain at this point,

the software will warn about it. * After the point is marked, the value in the radiuses column

will be updated.

5) Click 'Apply' to finish.

o Method 3 - Graphical drawing of the data (without using the AutoCAD) Two systems to draw the designated section on the existing G.L.section will be demonstrated:

1) Choose 'Pick' in the bottom list (Unused, Pick, Locate, overwrite).Switch to the drawing area. Point your pointer to the left side ofthe section (exceeding from the existing G.L. is possible) andclick on the button on the mouse. The designated point will be

defined as a vertical turning point and its data will be displayed onthe planning table (on the bottom of the screen). Continue todraw the longitudinal section. In the course of your movement inthe drawing area, you will be able to see your exact location,elevation and distance, below caption "Elevation" and "St" on theright of the drawing. When finishing the drawing, click 'Apply' inthe window on the right.

Note : if you choose a point outside the range of the existing G.L,left or right of it, the software will determine the turning point inthe station located on the edge (0 to the left or the end of theexisting G.L. section, on the right) of the elevation you werepositioned at.








2) The second method to draw the longitudinal section is by’Locate ‘. The use of "Locate" is very similar in its modusoperandi to the "Pick" action accept, when you choose theturning point in any given distance, that point will be determinedexactly on the elevation of the existing G.L on the same distance.

Note : if you choose a point outside the range of the existing G.L,left or right of it, the software will determine the turning point inthe station located on the edge (0 to the left or the end of thenatural ground level, on the right) of the elevation you werepositioned at.

3) Using of 'Move' . If the current vertical IP is to be moved to a newlocation, the action will be executed by "Move". Point on thebottom table the IP's location you wish to move. Choose "Move"from the list, move to the drawing and determine the new locationof the IP. Click 'Apply' in the window on the right to refresh thedrawing.It goes without saying that the systems could be integrated(manual filling and graphic planning). After the section waschosen by graph, the data displayed on the bottom window canbe changed and click 'Apply' to approve the changes. (Forexample, you can change the slope in ratio to a specific section, click 'Enter' to change the elevation according to the slope andclick 'Apply' to update the drawing). The graphic planning is from the old turning point to the new oneahead. To add another turning point in the middle of the section,point with your mouse pointer the line of the old turning point (atthe following point, the new point we wish to add is displayed).Switch to the drawing and mark the new turning point. The newpoint will be added in the desired place in the table. Click 'Apply' on the right to adjust the drawing.

Details of the data of the section's drawing

Accumulated Distance - accumulated distance Existing G.L.- existing ground level T.O.P Elevation - top elevation of pipe Min cover required - this line will be manually updated by the userHorizontal distance - horizontal distanceAccumulated construction distType of pipe bend - type of arc (vertical, horizontal or 3D) Reference drawings - this line will be updated manually by the userPipe DATA - diameter of pipe and construction material

Section Nr.- section number Excavation depth








Designed slope/bend description - the software will determine the bends by the following parameters:

1) Bend E - radius equal or above 1000D (diameter of pipe). 2) Bend C - radius between 10D and 40D. 3) Bend H - Radius up to 10D.

* The software will display a user error message if the range of theradius is between 40D-1000D.

Additional actions in the section's window:

Bend numbering - every group of bends will be numbered in an ascendingorder, separately. The user will be able to determine the first serial numberfor every kind of bend. To define this number, follow the next steps:

In the Vertical alignment window click the options button. In the opened window, under caption "Gas, radius indexes", update thenumbering according to the following bend types:

E - ElasticC - ColdH - Hot

Click 'OK' to approve and closing of the window and click 'Apply' toupdate the drawing.

Accurate/By sections - Displaying an accurate data of ground level longitudinal section or in sections only. When CivilCAD 2014 reads thedata of longitudinal section of the topography, it executes it accurately,correlated from the points' density of the measured points (the softwarebuilds the longitudinal section of the topography, by the conjunction of thetriangles' sides it creates of the measurement file). Occasionally, thissample, although accurate, isn’t helpful to the user (for example: there is amistake in the measurement file, the mistake appears on the longitudinalsection but it isn't relevant since it's not in one of the cross-sections).Switching from accurate to By sections, will solve this problem as following:

Accurate - an accurate sample of the section. The line of the section's drawing will be the sample taken from the topography. The elevationsof the table on the bottom will appear according to the cross-sections(the default is every 20 meters). In addition, the elevations will appearon critical points.By sections - an accurate sample of the section. The line of the section's drawing will be constructed by the elevations of the cross-section's alone. The table on the bottom will remain unchanged.

The advantage of the "By sections" system is in "smoothing" thelongitudinal section. Its flaw is inaccuracy.








Unlock datum (Working with AutoCAD window, only) - If the section'sdrawing exceeds in the data table, mark this option and click 'Apply'. Thesoftware will elevate the section's grid so the lines in the drawing will notexceed into the data. When this option is unmarked, the grid's elevationwill be on 'Lock' mode.

Additional action buttons:

Pick Point (AutoCAD users) - and pointing at a specified point. Afterclicking this button, the software will display over the design table thefollowing related data:

Station.

Elevation.Slp (T) - the existing G.L.'s slope at the specified point.Slp(D) - the designated G.L. slope at that point

Define design slope (AutoCAD users) - This action enables thedefining of the slope to the line's drawing. In order to do so, execute thefollowing steps: click on this button and on the AutoCAD window, type thedesired slope's value. By switching the AutoCAD window to "ORTHO"mode (on the bottom of the AutoCAD window) the line can be illustrated bythe specified slope.

Importing longitudinal section's data from an ASCII file . This actionreads existing G.L. into the table (left table on the bottom of the screen) outof a text file that contains stations and elevation list. The file should becomprised of lines containing station and elevation separated with a comaor space.

Saving of longitudinal section's data in the ASCII file . This action savesthe existing G.L. read from the topography (or typed manually), in the textfile. The text file will be comprised of stations and elevation.

Imprinting the Geometric report on top of the layout's drawing . In orderto imprint the report on ` of the drawing, click this button and the layoutwindow will be displayed. Click for the report's location and then type "set"and "Enter" on the AutoCAD window.

Get edges button. Adding the longitudinal section. CivilCAD 2014 canbe used to ditch/river stream adjusting. This planning will be done in asimilar manner to the manner of road planning only the longitudinal sectionwill be used as the Invert Level (IL) of the ditch. The software can add tothe longitudinal section of the ditch, the longitudinal sections of the ditch'sbanks left and right. The following is the course of actions to get theselongitudinal sections:Define the longitudinal section of the ditch's bottom.








Switch to cross-sections and regulate the cross-sections of theditch/stream (for details, see chapter Cross sections' defining). Return to the longitudinal sections window and click the aforementionedbutton. The software will read the planning data from the cross-sections ofthe ditch's edges and will add them in the longitudinal section. The data willbe displayed both as a drawing and as the additional lines on the table atthe bottom of the screen.

Getting the topography elevations in the specified Offset . In order topresent the elevations of the topography in a specified distance fromthe centerline, execute the following stages:

Mark the option G.L. at Offset (L) and type at the field on the right tothis option, the distance from the left side of the centerline.Mark the option G.L. at Offset(R) and type at the field on the right to this

option, the distance from the right side of the centerline. After filling this data, click 'Apply'. The software will add the layers to thesection.

Creating DXF and sheet dividing from thelongitudinal section

After finishing the planning, we would want to display a DXF file of the longitudinal section(we could display it only for Existing G.L. ).

Click button located on the toolbar above the drawing window.In the opened window, define a scale both for length and height Length(example: 1000)In order to create a DXF file without the dividing, choose option "Nodivision" below caption "Divide by paper size". If you wish to execute adivision by paper size, choose the desired page size of the list.To continue, click 'Ok'.In the opened dialogue box, enter the drawing's file name. Click "save"to save the file.

The CivilCAD 2014 software enables the division of thelongitudinal section to several sheets, automatically. This action isavailable only with AutoCAD 2000 and up. In order to divide thesection to sheets, execute the following steps:

Click on button from the toolbar located over the drawing window.In the opened window, define the following data:

Type the scale below caption 'Scale'Choose the paper size near caption 'Divide by paper size'Mark option "Show layout"- in order to include the horizontalalignment of the same section in the sheet








Mark the option "Show sections" - in order to include the sectionitself in the sheet.Enter overlapping distance between the sheets near caption "Paperoverlapping".Enter grid distances near caption "Frames grid steps".If you wish to import a BLOCK file containing the north arrow, clickon the aforementioned button near the caption 'Arrow-block' andchoose the file's location.If you wish to imprint a Block containing the Logo/Company details,click the button near caption Table-block and choose the file'slocation. When choosing, click the block's location on the right or leftof the sheet in "Table position" option.Click the section's perimeter to appear on the sheets below caption'Range'.Click 'OK' to continue.

The software will create the sheet division in 'Paper space'.

Designing the ditch for laying the pipeline

After defining the longitudinal section of the line in the previouschapter, we'll define the cross-sections:

1) From the main toolbar activate Roads -> Cross-sections.The cross-section's window will be opened. The cross-section window is divided to three parts:

Drawing area - the main area where the section will bedisplayed. The name of the current section that is edited,will appear on the title above the drawing.The cross-sections list's table - the right side of the window. Existing G.L. and Design G.L. data tables for each section.The tables on the bottom of the screen are Existing G.L. - lefttable and Designed G.L. - right table.

2) Click on button at the window on the right (Definesections)- the cross-sections' definition window will beopened. In the window, define the following data:

Start at station - station of the first section. The default will be0. Usually preferred that the given station for the first sectionat the designated centerline section will be 0. Nevertheless,in certain cases we plan a section that is a continuance of acenterline. In this case, the distance of the section's runnerwill differ.End at station - station of the final section. The default will bethe length of the centerline as calculated by the software (the

length appear right along with the cross-section's openedwindow on the Road's length window on the right).








Distance between sections - the distance between crosssections. The default is 20 meters. We'll see later on thatthere is no necessity in creating serial cross sections.Furthermore, the entire centerline can be defined in a non-serial manner.Name of the first section - the name of the first section(number). The software will number the additional sections inascending order according to the designated format in thewindow. The two format situations will be explained: The first option is "Format1", displaying the sections' names as theyappear on the sections' list. In choosing "Format2" by altering the parameters displayed on thebottom of the window, the software will display the name of the sectionas follows: station +KM, for example: the value at field KM remains 0,the software will display the sections as follows: 000+0, 020+0,040+0…380+0

Another option for defining cross-sections is by marking the sections'location in the horizontal layout planning stage so the sections will beplaced in fixed locations on top of the measuring background. In order todo so execute the following steps:

When defining the centerline topography draw Polyline thatwill determine the centerline so its fragment point (Vertex) willbe on the exact locations where the sections should beplaced.On the cross-sections' definition window (current window),transfer to By Ips. The software will create sections at thestations that will be determined by the vertex along thecenterline.

After defining the sections (by either method chosen) clickOK to build the sections. The built sections' list will bedisplayed in the table on the right, according to thedefinitions. Every section will have a Name and a station.Intermediate sections can be added to the project of anystage. To do so execute the following:

Place the pointer (with your mouse) on the line into which youwish to insert a section.Click 'Enter' on the keyboard all existing lines line will movedownward and a new line will be displayed.In the new line, enter the name (Number) of the new section.The section name can include numbers, "." and "/" (but notletters). For example, if the new section is located betweensection 1 and section 2, it can be named 1.1. Move themouse to the station column and enter the station of theinserted section.

Note: instead of defining sections automatically with the white button, it's

possible to outright move to the window on the right and build the tablemanually- name and station for every section.








3) Click on the options button on the right window. Thecross sections' defining window will be displayed:

Define the section's working width. Meaning, the width of the groundlevel that the software will sample as existing G.L. from the topography.We will define the distance of the section’s edges to the left side of thecenterline and to the right side of the centerline, when combined, willdefine the width of the sections. The left edge of the section will bedefined in 'Left' field (default is 20 meters) and its right edge- on the'Right' field) same default).Distance left of the centerline has a negativevalue number and the distance of the right have a positive value.In the event that a centerline that is all on the right (or on the left) of thecenterline is desired, an all right (or all left) section can be defined bythe relevant stations.

Switch from Elevation to dH. CivilCAD 2014 software enables to definecross section with absolute elevation offset, or sections with relative inthe centerline. Working with absolute elevation offset will abolish thisdistance’s influence of the longitudinal section over the cross -sectionsand will bide us to define separate planning for every section (or fillingintermediate section by interpolations). Later in the chapter workingwith typical sections will be discussed and when the sections aredefined relatively.Switch from 'Earthwork' to 'Design'. This option defines the graphicdisplay manner of the section. The software has two options ofsection's definition: section for Earthwork display and a section forDesign display. The difference in the display will be evident both in thesection's form on the drawing window, by the printing through thesoftware to the printer and by the sections file creation by the AutoCAD.

4) Click button GetT all . In the opened window, click 'OK'.The software will warn that it's about to change the existingG.L. to new data and that the previous data will be deleted.Click 'OK' to continue. The software will browse through thecenterline and sample existing G.L. data from it by theaccording to the defined sections.

When finishing reading the existing G.L data, the first section will appear inthe drawing window and the existing G.L. data will appear on the bottom-left table.

At the top of the page (the title above the drawing), the name of thedisplayed section will appear for example - Section name:1. In addition, thedesignated elevation of the centerline will be displayed (the elevationdefined in the longitudinal section) for example- /Elevation:233.85. Thesections can be browsed by clicking on the desired section on the table onthe right. Any chosen section will appear automatically in the drawing andits data will appear in the bottom tables. To continue instructions, verify youare in the first section.








We'll briefly explain the Design G.L. to be on this table lines are displayedand every line stands for a fragment. In the cross-section, the segmentsare numbered from -40 to 40 (total of 81 segments). There are fivecolumns in the table (the left one is untitled). In this explanation, thesecolumns are on ascending order from, left to right so the column on the leftis numbered at 1.

Column 1 : on this column the segments' serial number is displayed.This number doesn't stand for any measurement. The segments on theleft of the centerline will be numbered in a negative value numbers andnumbers in the right of it- on positive value numbers.Column 2 (Offset). This column stands for the distance of the segmentfrom the centerline. A distance on the left of the centerline will beentered in negative numbers and a number on the right of it- aspositive. The distance of the centerline has two options: Absolutedistance or relative one. While working with dH as demonstrated here(see clause 24), the data will be typed as relative distances, meaningthat the entered distance is, in fact, the length of the segment and notthe absolute distance of the centerline. when working with Elevation,this data will be entered in absolute elevation values.

Column 3 (dH) . This column has two options: dH (as demonstratedhere) or Elevation. The options are determined in the Status window(see clause 24) . When working with dH, the elevations will be enteredas relative to the earlier segment so the entered elevation is, in fact, theelevation of the segment.Column 4 (slope%). In this column, the segment's slope can beentered. One of two data typed can be entered: typing dH on column 3will calculate the segment's slope automatically and enter it in the fourthcolumn. On the other hand, when entering the slope the software willcalculate the dH and enter it on column 3.

Before we continue, we'll explain certain edit actions that can beperformed in the table:

- Clicking on Del in a specified field will cause to erase its content.- Clicking on backspace will work ordinarily.

- In order to erase the entire line, stand on the column on the left(column 1) in the desired line and click Del. The software will deletethe segment and narrow the lines number.- It's possible to copy a segment from the current cross section tothe other cross section. To copy, point your mouse over the desiredcolumn and right click it. In the opened table, mark the sections thatthe segments data will be copied to (to choose all sections, click onthe "All" button below) and click "OK". The software will copy thesegment's data to the designated section.








The typical section:

1) Start to enter the table with Designed G.L. data. For furtherclarification we demonstrate a set of data for a typical section.Enter the following data to the table:Point your pointer to segment "0" (zero), on column 2 enter "1.5" andclick Enter, move with the pointer to column 3 on the right and enter"1.5", then click Enter. The data defines the bottom of the ditch with thewidth of approximately 3 meters (1.5 meters on each side of thecenterline).

After the data was entered, the table should be displayed as follows:

on the upper and lower end of the table the following captions aredisplayed:

Slp. left : Cut 1: Fill 1:Slp right: Cut 1: Fill 1: These fields represent the ditches' banks' slopes on the left and on theright:Enter “2” on field: Cut 1: in the bo ttom of the screen (near caption Slpright) Enter the same data to the field located in the top of the table (field:Cut 1) The ditch's slopes to the left and right had just been defined to 1:2(respectively).

2) Click on 'Apply' on the window to the right. The Design willappear on top of the drawing.

3) Click on the ‘Copy ’ button on the left of the DesignedG.L. table. The button is located on the left of the table. Andthe Designed G.L. table will be copied to the computer'smemory.

4) Using the section's list table on the left of the drawing, move

to the last section on the list. Click on the ’Paste ’ button(the button beneath the copy in station in order to copy the

data from the memory to the table in this section.








The principle in CivilCAD 2014 is by entering data in varying sectionswhere the cross-section variable and filling the other parts of the centerlinein by interpolations. In our example, we have two sections filled with data.The other sections are still empty (these sections can be viewed bybrowsing between them by clicking on a specified section on the table onthe right- the section table):

5) Executing an intermediate interpolation: click on button(Interpolate empty sections) on the right. In the openedwindow choose "All Design" and click the OK button. Thesoftware will interpolate all the empty sections in the project.Since we have only two sections (the first and the last) thatare identical in content, the software will fill all the sectionswith the same Design G.L. data.

Extracting sections to the drawing sheet:

1) Click on the button over the drawing window.o A window containing the list of sections will be

opened, mark the desired sections or click the

button to choose all the sections and click"OK".

o The software will display a message: " Do youwant to manually arrange cross sections, orCivilCAD 2014 to do it for you?". If you wish toarrange the file's structure click "Yes",otherwise, click "No" and the software willarrange the cross-sections automatically.

o If you choose to arrange the file's structure("Yes"), the software will display a window toarrange the cross sections. In this window enterthe number of sections appearing in eachcolumn near caption 'Sections in every column'and the vertical distance between them nearcaption dY sections (cm). Click 'Arrange' toview the structure's chart. To finish, click 'OK'.

o Choose the name of the file that the softwarewill create and click 'Save'.

Note: DXF file is a drawing file that can be imported by most drawingsoftware programs. For example this file can be imported by command:DXFIN or by File->Open and converting the file Filter to DXF. After the fileis imported, click "Zoom" and "Extents" to see all of the sections.

2) Receiving the ditch's layout: in our example click on buttonCreate layout on the right. In the opened window mark in








"V" all available three options (Layout, contours, distances).Click on the OK button to continue. The software will createthe layout on top of the drawing. The layout contains thecontour lines of the ditch, including the edges.

The layout window contains three options:- Layout - marking "V" on this option will create the layout

lines of the ditch and the caption of the elevations in thesections.

- Contours- this option is inactive in ditch design.- Distances - marking "V" on this option will create a layer

of distances between sections. The software will note thedistances between every section as well as the distancesbetween the section and its nearby tangent.

- Update current read only - marking "V" on this option willinstruct the program to update only the current road'slayout. By removing the "V" mark when several roads aredefined in the project, the software will update the layoutof all of them.

Note: after clicking "OK" on the layout window, the cross section windowwill be minimized (so the layout changes can be viewed). To restore thewindow's former size, click on it on the "mission toolbar" in Windowslocated at the bottom of the screen. Continue to edit the sections asneeded including extracting the proper layout. When edit of the layouts isfinished click 'Close'.

Elaboration of the cross section's window

The following is detailed description of the additional actions that exist inthe cross-sections' window and weren't discussed in the demonstration:

Actions in the cross sections' window (window on the right):

Deleting a single section - point your pointer on the desired sectionto be deleted of the list and click the button with the illustration of theeraser on the sections' list window (window on the right). The software

will delete this section from the list.Deleting all sections in the project - click on the button with the X

illustration in the window on the right. The software will warn before allfiles are deleted. To delete, click 'OK'.

Deleting the data of a group of sections - to delete the data ofseveral sections simultaneously, click the 'Clear all' button on thesection's list window (the window on the right). In the opened windowchoose one of the following data to be deleted: Existing G.L., DesignedG.L, Structure (elevation of the surface of the road) or side- ditches'data. Click 'OK' to continue. In the opened table, mark the sections that

you wish to delete its data. To delete all sections, click 'All' button andclick 'OK' the software will delete the data of the designated sections.








Adding elevation to the sections' data - this option is useful mainlyin working with absolute elevations (in relative elevations, it's preferred

to change the longitudinal sections' data in order to change the cross-sections' data). To activate, click on the button. In the opened windowenter the desired elevation addition (to decrease the elevation, enter anegative value). To continue, click 'OK'. In the additional window,choose the sections you wish to change (Existing G.L., Designed G.Lor Structure). Click 'OK' to continue. In the additional window, choosethe sections you want to change (clicking on 'All' on the bottom of thescreen will choose all sections). Click 'OK'. The software will add thedesired elevations to the designated sections as well as the chosentable.

Actions on the Options window (activation by button in the list ofsections window- the window on the right):Some of the actions in this window were discussed in detail on some of thestages in this clause. The following are details of the actions that weren'tdetailed:

Max/Min interval - occasionally, a scenario where exceededdata entered into the sections of the topography. There areseveral reasons for this phenomenon such as falsemeasuring data, measuring limit narrower than the desiredsection's limit, extrapolations in the contour etc. To avoid this

phenomenon, the maximum interval between the elevation ofthe ground and the elevation of the centerline, can bedefined. The basic assumption is that the elevation on thecenterline is always correct (or at least doesn't exceed thetopography limits). The software is instructed what is themaximum elevation interval allowed existing ground level inthe section. Every fragment that exceeds this interval (oneither direction) will be deleted of the ground level's data. Forexample, if the elevation in the centerline is 230.55 and weentered a Max/min interval of about 3 meters, every groundlevel lower than 227.55 or higher than 233.55 will be deleted

from the ground level’s data of the section. The effect of thedata will occur after we sample the ground level by clickingthe button 'GetT all'. If ground level's data already existentthat we wish to change, we'll enter the desired interval, click'OK' to exit and repeat the 'GetT all' action.

Include edges - the principle of action that lies in thesampling of ground level's data in CivilCAD 2014 is asfollows: the software will always sample existing G.L. on thecenterline and every ground level's fragment identified in thecross section will be added to the table. In addition to thesedata, the software will sample the existing G.L. elevation onthe section's edge, left and right, by the specified width. Inorder to abolish the sampling on the edges, unmark the 'V'








and repeat the 'GetT all' action. The software will re-samplethe data without sampling the edges.

Actions of the drawing window:The drawing window (the main window on which the section'sdrawing is displayed) has three buttons on its right. The DXF functionwas explained in the instructions. We'll elaborate over the additionaltwo buttons:

Printing the sections at the printerClick on the printer button.In the opened window define the scale to print: Height - scale for

elevation, Long- scale for length. We'll enter 100, 100 (scale of1:100, 1:100). Click 'OK' to continue.In the opened window, define the paper size and other printerrelated parameters. Click 'OK' to continue.Now, choose the sections you wish to print. To choose all

sections click the button on the bottom of the screen. Click'OK' to print.

The software will print the sections continuously, by the operating languagedefined in the system. To change the language, execute the followingactions:

Exit the cross sections by clicking 'Close'. Activate File->Configuration.In the opened window, choose by caption Language the desiredlanguage.Click 'OK' and return to cross sections (File->Cross sections).Repeat the process and print the sections as explained.

Zoom extents - there are several actions to control the section'sdisplay:

The scroll bars on the left and right of the drawing. Clicking on the left button in the drawing's area-double magnifiesthe drawing. Clicking the right button double reduces it.

The zoom extents button restores the viewing to all of thedrawing area.

Actions in the table window (the window on the bottom):

On the left of every table (left or right), several buttons are displayed thatenable actions on these tables:

1) Deleting all the data on the table in the current section.2) GetT - Import existing G.L. of the current section from topography.








As opposed to the Get all button , this button imports the existing G.L.of the current section only. Before the action is executed a warning will be

displayed of deleting the current existing G.L. data. Approve the warning tocontinue.

3) GetD - importing the data of the planned topography. As opposed to

the GetD all , this button imports the design G.L. of the current sectiononly. Before executing this action, a warning will be displayed of deletingthe current data approve the warning to continue. If the designated G.L.data will be sampled, it’s recommended to execute the following actionsbefore performing the aforementioned one:

1) Click on the options button.2) In the opened window, click the option Design: allocate -40 to 40segments. This option enables the software to designate topography dataof the project by using all 81 segments in the table (Normally, some of thesegments are reserved for other options such as ditches etc.)

The " copy " and " paste " options were explained at the course of thischapter








Chapter 20: Drainage andSewage Pipeline Design








Drainage and Sewage Pipeline Design

Before you begin, open a new project in CivilCAD 2014 according to thedirections in the manual.

The work stages in designing sewage and drainage lines are as follows:

Initializing the project.Preparing the topography and/or designed settings.Designing the pipelines’ layout .Marking crossings with other utilities.Designing sections.Producing reports.

Initializing the project

From the main menu, activate Pipelines Pipelines list .On the right, a window titled 'Pipelines list' will open. This is the project’sgeneral settings window.

1. Select the pipeline type for the project (sewage or drainage).2. Select the work units for the pipeline diameter (mm, cm, inches).3. Under Pipelines names , fill in every line the names of the

designed pipelines for the project.4. In case of drainage pipeline, under ‘Profile’ cell, double click

inside the cell with the left mouse button and select ‘Square’ or‘Round’ profile .

5. Click ‘OK’ button to save definitions.

We will now go on to designing the pipelines.

You have two design options:1. Design including layout. The layout design will allow you to

obtain the ground section along the pipeline.2. Design without layout.

For design including layout, go to the 'Preparing the topography and/ordesigned settings' section.If you would like to design without layout, go to the 'Designing sections'section.

Note: you can mark line crossings whether you are designing pipelineswith or without layout. To do this, go to the 'Marking the lines crossings'section of this chapter.








Options from the ‘Pipeline’s list’ window

- New pipeline – adding a new pipeline to the list of pipelines.Possible also by clicking ‘ENTER’ .

- Clear all pipelines – clearing all pipelines list (the pipelines will beerased from the list and if they have been defined by data it will be deletedfrom the project as well).

- Erase pipeline – erasing a certain pipeline. Mark the pipeline’s namein the list and click this button in order to delete it from the list (if any datawas defined for this pipeline it will be erased from the project).

- Find Pipeline – find a pipeline by name in the pipelines list. If you tryto add a pipeline, using a name which already exists in the Pipelines List, awarning window will appear. Click the 'OK' button and type a differentname for the pipeline.

Preparing the topography and/or designedsettings

In order to design the pipes’ layout, you will first have to prepare thetopography settings for the design. You can work with up to twotopography layers: existing topography settings and designed settings. Ifyou are working on a single topography layer, refer to it as existingtopography setting (even if it is a designed topography such as roadssurface).

You have several options for inserting the topography settings into theproject:

If you have a . DWG file , insert it into the project, as explained inChapter 25 – Handling.Dwg Files (follow the steps: Importing a .Dwg file and extracting

points from .Dwg).

If you have an ASCII file of the ground, do the following:1. From the coordinate list command buttons (the group of

buttons located on the top of the 'Topography coordinates'

list), click on .2. In the dialog box that opened, select the topography

coordinates file. The coordinate's data will be entered into thecoordinate list on the bottom of the screen.








You may enter the topography data manually .In the coordinates editing line (the empty line under the title – 'Topography coordinates' ), enter the coordinates’ data in the followingmanner:Coordinate name x y Height

Press ‘Enter’ after entering each coordinate. If you have the data of another, designed, layer, replace the TopographyCoordinates list with Designed coordinates, by choosing DesignCoordinates from the main menu.Enter the designed settings data in the same way that you entered thetopography coordinates.

After entering the coordinates data press and create contours.

From the main menu, select Topography Contours .Click 'Apply' in the Topography contours window that opens on theright.The program will create contours. Wait until the process is completed.

If you have entered designed status data as well, create designedcontours:

From the main menu, select Design Contours .Click 'Apply' in the Design contours window that opens on the right.The program will create designed contours. Wait until the process iscompleted.

Designing the pipelines’ layout

1. From the main menu, activate Pipelines Layout . On the right-handside, the Layout window will open.

2. Select the name for the pipeline that you would like to mark in the box

at the top of the Layout window.3. Mark the pipelines’ alignment. There are three ways in which you can do it:

Method A:

In AutoCAD, draw a Polyline (2D Polyline) that will constitute thepipeline’s horizontal alignment.

Choose 'Select' from the menu:

Go over to the drawing area, select the drawn Polyline and click 'Enter'.The table in the right- hand window will be filled with the pipeline’s








manholes data. In the bottom window – the Design coordinates window – the manholes’ coordinates will appear.

Method B:

In the right-hand window, select Pick from the menu:Go over to the drawing area and draw the pipeline’s alignment , press'Esc' to finish the drawing..

Note that while you are drawing, the manholes table is filled withcoordinates and Stations. In addition, the designed coordinates listis filled with the coordinates that you are marking.

Method C:

Enter coordinates into the designed coordinates list on the bottom ofthe screen. Do this by typing in the coordinates in the editing line on thetop of the list. For example:

256123.76175143.56MN1256325.56175200.40MN2256327.12175256.00MN3

In the Layout table on the right-hand side, type in the coordi nates’names (MN1, MN2, MN3), according to the following example:

Diam.St.ManCoor.MN1MN2MN3

You can draw a pipeline that connects with another pipeline in a jointmanhole, in the following ways:

If you are using Method A, after you have followed all the steps for thelayout design for the primary pipeline and proceeded to plan the secondarypipeline that connects with the primary one, do the following:

When you are drawing 2D Polyline of the secondary pipeline, connectits Polyline to the main pipeline at an intersection point (IP) that isshared by both pipelines.Proceed with the other commands normally. The IP will be interpretedas a joint manhole for both pipelines. The program will mark the jointmanhole with a “+” in the secondary pipeline.








Note that for each manhole in the Layout table, the coordinates nameappears on the left (Column: Coor.). The coordinates data appears in theDesign coordinates table on the bottom of the screen on the left.It is advisable to leave the coordinates’ name in the Layout tableunchanged, so as not to lose the connection between a manhole and itscoordinate.In fact, you may change a manhole’s location by changing its coordinates’data in the Design coordinates table.In the 'Additional options in the layout window' section you will find detailson moving manholes.

4. Type in the pipes’ diameters. Across from every manhole in the Layouttable on the right hand side, type in the desired radius.

5. Click 'Apply' to draw the lines.The pr ogram will create a drawing of the line’s horizontal alignment.

In order to proceed to designing the next line, select the line’s name in thebox at the top of the Layout window, and perform the design as explainedabove.

Note : you do not need to click 'Apply' after the design of each and everyline. You can finish designing all the lines, and click 'Apply' to have theprogram build the lines’ drawing.

Additional options in the Layout window

1. Changing the font size . Click on the Options button:Scale - in the window that opens, type in the desired scale.Pipes number in select mode (manholes prefix) – changing ofnames' numeration of manholes' points. For example: enter the value 2,and the next pipeline will include the following names: 2MN1, 2MN2,2MN3 etc. Click 'OK' after the changing.Pipeline width – the pipeline width on the drawing. 0 indicates thedefault width, 1 – without width.

Click 'OK' again to update the drawing.Display angle value – mark ‘V’ to receive angle data on pipeline’slayout.

2. Clear all manholes, using the button .

3. Delete one manhole – mark the desired manhole and click .

4. Show pipeline in the drawing. Click The current pipeline will bemarked yellow.








5. Pipe type – entering of free data by user.

6. Moving a manhole .

Note that each manhole is tied to a coordinate. If you alter coordinatedata in the coordinate's window on the bottom of the screen, the locationof the manhole that is defined by that coordinates will changeaccordingly.In order to move a manhole, you have to move the coordinate that is tiedto it.You can do this in two possible ways:

Manual change of the coordinates’ data .Select the coordinate you would like to change from the coordinatelist on the bottom of the screen. Re-edit the coordinate in the pointsediting line (the empty line under the capti on: ‘Design coordinates’). To actualize the change in the drawing, click 'Apply' in the Layoutwindow on the right-hand side.

Moving the manhole from within the drawing .Select the 'Move' option from the rectangle on the right-hand side of thedeigned coordinates list on the bottom of the screen:

Go over to the drawing area. Select the point that you would like tomove and click on it twice. Now click on the new location to whichyou would like to move the point. To actualize the change in thedrawing, click 'Apply' in the Layout window on the right-hand side.

7. Changing the shape of a manhole in the drawing .You can determine whether the shape of the manhole will be round orsquare. The default is round manholes for sewage projects and squareones for drainage projects. In order to change the shape of the manhole

– mark the manhole you wish to change in the Layout table using yourmouse stand on the right column (Diam.), and click on the right button. Abox will open, with 2 options: Round and Square . Choose the desiredshape by clicking twice. The next time you click 'Apply' the drawing willbe updated accordingly.

8. Drawing a pipeline that ends without a manhole.If you want to end a pipeline without a manhole (for example, in an

estuary area), add the (-) sign to the right of the name of the manhole.For example: 1.3-.








The program will recognize that this is a point without a manhole and willnot draw a manhole for it.

9. Changing the name of a manhole.You can change the name of the manhole in the Man. column in theLayout table.

Marking crossings of the pipeline with otherutilities

You can mark crossing points between project pipelines and pipelines thatdon’t belo ng to the project, if these points are known to you.To do so, select Pipelines Crossings from the main menu.

The Crossings window will open on the right.

St. - station. The place where the crossing pipeline passes upon thedesigned pipeline (in meters).I.L. – the crossing pipeline’s elevation (not obligatory to enter). Dpt. – the depth of pipeline (not obligatory to enter).Diam . – the crossing pipeline’s diameter (not obligatory to enter). Type – the layer of the crossing pipeline.

1. In the box at the top of the window, select the pipeline for which you

want to mark crossings.2. Fill in the Station data

There are several options for entering the Station data:

Method A: manually .In the Crossings table, enter the Station of the crossing pipelines in meters.

Method B: using Pick .Mark ‘Pick’ in the bottom box of the window. Move to the drawing area and mark the point near the desiredpipeline. The Station data will be automatically entered into theCrossings table. If you want to mark coordinates that alreadyexist in the drawing, you can snap them by using the ‘ObjectSnap Settings’ option to a coordinate in AutoCAD.

Method C: using Locate . For this you must first add the crossingcoordinates to the designed coordinates list in CivilCAD 2014, show themin the drawing, and then select them by using ‘Locate’:

From the main menu, select ‘ Design Coordinates ’. Enter the crossing point’s coordinates in the Design Coordinatestable, on the bottom left-hand side of the window. Typing in the










Additional options from the Crossings window

- Delete one crossing.

- Clear all crossings.

- Options button. This button brings us to the window of 'Table ofcrossings'. This button is used for description of crossing pipelines in thesections window drawing.Type – the name of the intersection point of crossing and designedpipelines.Description – you can enter the description of the crossing pipeline and itwill appear on the drawing of the sections window.Min. (m) - this option defines a minimum distance between the crossingpipeline and the designed pipeline. Assuming the crossing pipeline isnearer than the defined distance, the software will automatically changethe design, moving the designed pipeline's location to fit the Min. distance.If no distance has been entered the default minimum distance between thecrossing pipeline and the designed pipeline is 0.3M.

- Delete one description.

- Clear all descriptions.

- locate crossing pipelines in the layout drawing, directly from the'Pipelines Crossings' menu.

Designing sections

1. From the main menu, activate: Pipelines Sections .The Sections window will open before you.The window that opens is divided into three parts:

The drawing area (the black surface)The Ground level table – the table on the bottom left-hand side(Topo).The Manhole's details table – the table on the bottom right-handside.

2. Select the line that you would like to design in the box at top right-handside of the

window:

3. Click on the Options button:








The Options window will open on the left. In this window you candetermine the

status by which the program will apply the design:

Slope calculation – you can choose to calculate the slopeeither from the center of the manhole or from its edges.Min. Manhole's Cover - coverage of a manhole in case it isexposed above ground level.Min. Pipe's Cover – if this data exists, the program will warn youat the points where the pipeline is exposed, by marking theground of the exposed areas in orange.External Drop – you can determine that the program will drawan external drop, for drops over a certain elevation.Keep slopes inside manholes – if this option is marked, theprogram will maintain the entering slope of the pipeline into themanhole, inside the manhole itself.Fit pipes top levels - Check crossings – the program will check the designedpipeline's height in the intersection with crossing pipeline and willchange it if required according to the value in Min. (m) column(Options button of the Crossing window). Keep fixed IL – with this option the software will save the fixedInvert level of manholes, even if we'll change the slope of one ofmanholes.Keep fixed slopes - with this option the software will save thefixed slopes of manholes, even if we'll change the IL of one ofmanhole.Slopes precision – the type of precision of slopes' captions'showing in the table of section's drawing.Manhole's size table – the change of manholes' size divisionaccording to the depths (for more details look the chapter'Additional options in the sections window').

4. Get the topography data .

If you preformed the steps in the sections: ‘Preparingthe existing Ground level’ and ‘Designing the pipeline’sLayout’, the program can create the existing

topography from the layout: click on the buttonthat appears left to the topography table. Thetopography table will then be filled with the existingground level according to the Station and ground levelelevation data.

- If you haven’t preformed the ‘Designing the Layout’ step – enter the topography data in the topography table, accordingto Station, Distance and Elevation.








5. Entering the designed ground level (not obligatory). If you preformed the steps in sections: ‘Preparing theexisting ground level’ and ‘Designing the Pipeline’sLayout’, the program can create the desig ned groundlevel from the layout: click on the button thatappears left to the topography table. The design tablewill then be filled with the topography data. If youwould like to enter designed ground level manually: inthe Ground Level table, select ‘Design’.

Enter the designed ground level data the same way as youentered the ground level.

6. Click ‘ Apply ’ to bring the drawing (appears on the right). The topography

drawing will appear on the screen marking the manhole locations, ifexisting.

7. Enter the manhole data:

Man . – the manhole numeration.St . - Station (in meters). If you preformed Location Design, this datawill already appear in the table. If the data does not appear, enter itfor the designed manholes. To add a manhole, press ‘Enter’. Distance – the distance between two manholes. You can enter thedistance between manholes instead of Station, as long as you enter0 in the St. of the first manhole.IL Lt. – Invert Level in. You can enter the Invert Levelin several ways:

Entering the IL Lt. data for all the manholes.Entering the manhole depth (see – Depth).Entering IL Lt. for the first manhole and theslopes for the remaining manholes (seeSl.%).Interactive pipeline design (physical drawingthe manholes – see the ‘Additional Options’section).

Drop - the drop inside a manhole. Meaning, the difference betweenInvert level in (IL Lt.) and Invert Level out (IL Rt.) (in meters (. Depth - the manhole’s depth (in meters). You can enter this data fora manhole, instead of entering IL Lt . If designed ground level exists,the depth will refer to it.Sl.(%) – the slope of the pipeline entering the manhole. You canenter the Slope level instead of the Invert level.Diam . – the pipeline’s diameter. Wall thick – the pipeline’s wall thick.Receptors – Define receptors.








Size – the size of the manhole. If the manhole is round, enter ‘*’ tothe left of the size, for example: *100. If the manhole is square,enter as following: 100/80. Size units of your choice.Pop – the bulge of the manhole above ground level (in centimeters).Ground – the manhole ground level elevation. Not to be entered bythe user. The program will fill in this data. If designed ground levelexists, it will appear in this column. If there is only existing groundlevel, it will appear in this column.Gr.Sl.(%) – the ground slope. Not to be entered by the user. As inits precedent, the slope refers to the designed topography, if itexists. If it does not, the slope will refer to the existing ground level.

6. Click ‘ Apply ’ to draw the design.

Additional options from the sections' window

Save project - (from the top toolbar) – saving of the entire projectdata, without exit from sections' window.

Creating a DXF file for a longitudinal section:

Click on the button to open this window.

Fill in the scale in fields ‘ Length , Height’ In order to type the section by a specific sheet size,choose the desired sheet size from the list thatopens under ‘ Divide by paper size’ .In order to extract the current section only, click ‘ OK ’. To create afile with all sections, click ‘ DXF all’ .

A box will open for saving files. Choose the directory for saving thefiles, enter the file name and click to save.

Button Section printing – clicking this button will open a new

window. Enter the scale and cl ick ‘OK’ to print this section.

Button Full display – click this button for a full display of the entiresection on the drawing window.

Deleting a manhole . This button deletes the entire manhole,including the Station.

Deleting the data of all manholes . (This function does not totallydelete the manhole – the Station data and distance between manholesare saved).








Adding a manhole . Mark the first column (from the left) in the manholetable, in the row following the row of the manhole you would like to add,and press ‘Enter’ on the keyboard. In the new row that appears, entereither the station for the new manhole, or the distance between it andthe preceding manhole and the rest of its details.

Copying the ground level Stations to the manholes table . Thisfunction will copy the Stations from the Topography table to theManhole's table, for convenient designing.

Getting the designed ground level . (On condition that designedground data, including designed contours, exists in the project, as wellas a designed pipeline layout).

Entering the manhole size automatically .The program will fill in the respective manhole size according to its

standard height.

Modifying the division of manhole sizes according to depths – You can determine the way the program will enter the manhole sizes.

Click on the Options button :

In the window that opens, click on the ‘ Manhole's SizeTable ’ button. A ‘Manhole's sizes’ window will open. In the column labeled ‘ Size ’, enter the manhole size(for a square manhole, enter according to the format:80/100).In the column labeled ‘ Up to depth’ , enter themaximum depth for which the respective size will begiven.Click ' OK’ to confirm.

You can determine a permanent desired division for each new projectin CivilCAD 2014 by following the aforementioned steps in a projectnamed ‘ Prototype.prj ’, and saving the changes.

Automatic designing . The ‘Auto Design’ window will open beforeyou. You can use automatic designing in two methods:

Method 1 : in this method, the user entersone manhole’s IL Lt. in the manholes table,minimum pipeline coverage, and minimalpipeline slope. The program will build a line

with minimum slope and will change theline’s slope in the case of pipeline exposure.








Method 2 : in this method, the user entersone manhole’s IL Lt. in the manholes table,minimum pipeline coverage, and a slope forthe pipeline. The program will maintain aconstant slope for the pipeline, and if thepipeline is exposed, it will create a drop inthe manhole before the exposure.

Fill in the data respectively and click ‘OK’. Notice that the manholes data has been filled accordingly.

Method 3 : gravitational pipeline design.

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Pipelines List’ and define

the pipeline's type as Sewage/Drainage.From Civ ilCAD main menu, go to ‘Pipelines Layout’ and

design the pipeline's layout.

From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Pipelines Sections’.

In 'Manholes details' table, under 'Il Lt.' column, define the IL

for the first station and click the 'ENTER' button.

Click the 'Auto Design' button. 'Auto Design' window will

open.

Click the 'Auto Design' button. 'Auto Design' window will

open.

Checkmark 'Mode 3: Gravitational design' and click the 'Define

slopes according to stations' button. 'Pipes stations'

window will open.

Type the desired conditions for the gravitational pipeline's

design.

Note: CivilCAD will check the data entered in 'Slope' and 'Depth'

columns. For example: for slope of 1% and I.L. depth of 60 cm, if

the I.L. in the next manhole is less than 60 cm, CivilCAD will

deepen the I.L. up to 60 cm and the slope's percentage will

increase.

Click the 'OK' button to start the design.








Getting the topography settings for all pipelines. (On conditionthat designed ground level, including contours, exists in the project, as

well as a designed pipeline layout).Getting the designed ground level for all pipelines. (On

condition that designed ground data, including designedcontours, exists in the project).

The sections' file importation . By clicking this button it's possibleto choose the ASCII file that includes the section's data from the list offiles.

Adding of manholes' height . After clicking this button mark themanholes you want to add\lower their height in opened window, orpress 'A' to choose all of manholes, and press 'OK'. In the next windowthat opens enter the value to change the height (the negative value willlower the manholes' height).

Options from the right window

Topography data - smoothing the ground level. By moving to’Smooth ’ option the ground level will be drawn smoother but less exact(the program will have created certain a distortion in the drawing so theline can be smoother).

View – the section’s display range . Leaving the data under thisheading empty defines the sectio n’s full display for the software (thesection’s full length appears next to ‘ Total range’ ). It is possible todisplay the section of a particular segment by entering the starting andfinal station into the fields ‘ From, to ’. The change of section elevatio nwill be done according to the change of ‘ Height factor ’ parameter.Click ‘ Apply ’ after changing this data to update preview.

Changing colors in the section layer – it is possible to control thecolors in each section layer by clicking on the squares located at thetop section on your screen next to these headings:

Ground level - existing status elevations layers.Design level – designed status elevations layers.Manholes - coordinates layer.

Clicking the layer color opens a window containing colors from whichyou can select the desired color.

Interactive pipeline design . You can interactively draw a

pipeline on the screen, instead of entering Invert Level data.








Select the option ‘Pick’ in this box: .

Move to the drawing area and draw the pipeline.Notice that you can both snap to existing manholesand create new ones. The table will be updated whileyou are drawing.

Using Locate – enables you to locate a manhole in the drawing.In the table, select the manhole you wish to locate ormodify.

Sel ect ‘Locate’ in the box:Move to the drawing area. The curser will link to thechosen manhole.Click new point for moving the manhole, then 'Esc' and'Apply'.

Producing reports

Activate form main menu 'Pipeline -> reports' .In the opened window on the right, choose the report's type that you wishto get:

Manholes report.By clicking on the report extracting button the software will display adetailed report of the manholes' data. This report can be displayed on topof the drawing by executing the following actions:

From the opened list choose 'Manholes'.To produce the report click 'Apply'.

After the software will display the report, close the report's window and

click on button . Switch to the drawing's area and click on the desired point for the report

to be located at the bottom left corner of the report’s table. A yellow frame will appear on the drawings, type 'S' in the AutoCADcommand line and click 'Enter'.








Quantities Report.For sewage and drainage pipes only.This quantities report is comprised from two reports:

1) Manholes report in drawing their diameters and depths. 2) Manholes report by sizes and depths.

Mark "V" the number of pipelines that you wish to include in the report

or click button to mark all pipelines. Division by depth existing coincides with the conventional division. A

different depths division exists for sewage pipelines and sewagemanholes. In order to change the depth division system for the reportproduction:

Click on button depth segments. Under the headline 'Depthsegments' enter the depths for division and at the end, click 'OK'.

Click 'Apply'.

Setting a permanent depths division

You are capable of changing the division method to depths for aquantities report on a regular basis, for every future project openedin CivilCAD 2014.

To do so you must enter the division of your choice in the ‘Prototype’project. Open project Prototype ( File - >Open Project’ ).



From the main command ruler open: Pipelines-> Pipelines list .Choose the type of desired project (Sewage/Drainage).

Open menu Pipelines -> Reports .From the Reports window choose the Quantities.

Click on button (Depth Segments).From the window that opens enter the depths for division.Click ‘OK’ to confirm and close the window.Close the project and save the changes.








Now every new report opened will receive the division you have entered inPrototype Project.

Pipes report .Pipes' length report by diameters. This report displays the sum of pipelines’length for every diameter defined in the project.

Detailed report . A detailed report displaying the manholes' data, existing G.L. and designedsettings along the pipelines. It's possible to choose all pipelines by clicking

on button or to mark "V" for the pipelines we wish to include in thereport.

Discharge .Flow chart report. A report displaying the chart flow for every pipeline. Choose from the list in report window Discharge.

Click on button 'Discharge Input' . In the opened window enter thedischarge (Q.(lt./sec)) at each station.In flow report the following computations will appear:

Q [lt./sec] – discharge.H [m.] – height of fluid in pipe.V [m./sec] – velocity of flow.Q max [lt./sec] – maximum discharge in pipe.

Additional options from the reports window

Print the report by clicking this button from the report window.

Save the report as a text file - click this button appearing in the reportswindow will open a window for saving files. Select the desired location forsaving, type in the file name in the right line, and click ‘Save’. Now you canopen the file and edit it as you like.

Exporting the report to an ‘Excel’ file – click this button from thereport window to open an Excel sheet the program has filled with data fromthe last report.

Clear report.








Chapter 21: Water pipelinedesign








Water pipeline design

Before you begin, open a new project in CivilCAD 2014 according to thedirections in the manual.

The work stages in designing water pipelines are as follows:

Initializing the project.Preparing the topography and/or designed settings.Designing the pipelines’ layout .Marking crossings of the pipeline with other utilities.Designing sections.Producing reports.


From the main menu, activate Pipelines Pipelines list .On the right, a window titled 'Pipelines list' will open. This is the project’sgeneral settings window.

1. Select the pipeline type for the project (water supply).2. Select the work units for the pipeline diameter (mm, cm, inches).3. Under Pipelines names , fill in every line the names of the

designedpipelines for the project.

We will now go on to designing the pipeline.

You have two design options:1. Design including layout. The layout design will allow you toobtain the ground section along the pipeline

2. Design without layout.

For design including layout, go to the preparing the topography and/ordesigned settings section.If you would like to design without layout, go to “Designing Section s”section in this chapter.

* You can mark line crossings whether you are designing pipelines with orwithout layout. To do this, go to the “Marking Pipeline Crossings” section in this chapter.








Options from the ‘Pipeline’s list’ window

- New pipeline – adding a new pipeline to the list of pipelines.Possible also by clicking ‘ENTER’ .

- Clear all pipelines – clearing all pipelines lists (the pipelines will beerased from the list and if they have been defined by data it will be deletedfrom the project as well).

- Erase pipeline – erasing a certain pipeline. M ark the pipeline’s namein the list and click this button in order to delete it from the list (if any datawas defined for this pipeline it will be erased from the project).

- Find Pipeline – find a pipeline by name in the pipelines list. If you tryto add a pipeline, using a name which already exists in the Pipelines List, awarning window will appear. Click the 'OK' button and type a differentname for the pipeline.


In order to design the pipes’ layo ut, you will first have to prepare thetopography settings for the design. You can work with up to twotopography layers: existing topography settings and designed settings. Ifyou are working on a single topography layer, treat it as existingtopography setting (even if it is a designed topography such as roadssurface).


If you have a DWG file , insert it into the project, as explained inChapter 19 – Handling

DWG Files (follow the steps: Importing a DWG file and extractingpoints from DWG).

If you have an ASCII file of the ground, do the following:

1. From the coordinate list command buttons (the group of buttonslocated to the right of the Topography coordinates on the bottom of the

screen, click on .








2. In the dialog box that opened, select the topography coordinates file.The coordinates data will be entered into the coordinate list on thebottom of the screen.

You may enter the topography data manually .In the coordinates editing line (the empty line under the title – Topography coordinates), enter the coordinates’ data in the followingmanner:Coordinate name x y Height

Press ‘Enter’ after entering each coordinate. If you have the data of another, designed, layer, replace the TopographyCoordinates list with Designed coordinates, by choosing DesignCoordinates from the main menu.Enter the designed settings data in the same way that you entered thetopography coordinates.

After entering the coordinates data press and create contours.

From the main menu, select Topography Contours .Click 'Apply' in the Topography contours window that opens on theright.The program will create contours. Wait until the process is completed.

If you have entered designed status data as well, create designedcontours:

From the main menu, select Design Contours .Click 'Apply' in the Design contours window that opens on the right.The program will create designed contours. Wait until the process iscompleted.

Designing the pipelines ’ layout

1. From the main menu, activate Pipelines Layout . On the right-handside, the Layout window will open.2. Select the name for the pipeline that you would like to mark in the box

at the top of the Layout window.3. Mark the pipelines’ alignment.

There are three ways in which you can mark the alignment:

Method A: for AutoCAD users only.In AutoCAD, draw a Polyline (2D Polyline) that will constitute thepipeline’s horizontal alignment.

Choose Select from the menu:








Go over to the drawing area, select the drawn Polyline and click 'Enter'.The table in the right- hand window will be filled with the pipeline’smanholes data. In the bottom window – the Topography coordinateswindow – the manholes’ coordinates will appear.

Method B: available for AutoCAD users and for non-AutoCAD users.

In the right-hand window, select Pick from the menu:Go over to the drawing area and draw the pipeline’s alignment.

Note that while you are drawing, the manholes table is filled withcoordinates and Stations. In addition, the designed coordinates listis filled with the coordinates that you are marking.

Method C: available for AutoCAD users and for non-AutoCAD users .


256123.76175143.56MN1256325.56175200.40MN2

256327.12175256.00MN3

In the Layout table on the right- hand side, type in the coordinates’names (MN1, MN2, MN3), according to the following example:

Diam.St.ManCoor.MN1MN2MN3

4. Type in the pipes’ diameters. Across from every manhole in the Layouttable on the right hand side, type in the desired radius.

5. Click 'Apply' to draw the lines.The pr ogram will create a drawing of the line’s horizontal alignment.








Additional options in the Layout window

1. Changing the font size . Click on the Options button:Scale - in the window that opens, type in the desired scale.Pipes number in select mode (manholes prefix) – change thenumeration of manholes' points. For example: enter the value 2, and thenext pipeline will include the following names: 2MN1,2MN2,2MN3 etc.Click OK after the changing.Pipes first number – start of points' numeration.Pipeline width – the pipeline width on the drawing. 0 indicates thedefault width, 1 – without width.Data intervals – the interval between the lines' data.

Click OK again to update the drawing.

2. Clear all manholes, using the button:

3. Delete one manhole – mark the desired manhole and click

4. Show pipeline in the drawing . Click The current pipeline will bemarked yellow.

5. Compute water supply coordinates - the coordinates'computation . After clicking this button the software will compute thecoordinates of the line in steps of 20 meters and will add them to thedesign coordinates' list.

6. Pipe type – entering of free data by user.

7. Moving an IP - Note that each IP is tied to a coordinate. If you altercoordinate data in the coordinates window on the bottom of the screen, thelocation of the IP that is defined by that coordinates will change

accordingly.In order to move an IP, you have to move the coordinate that is tied to it.You can do this in two possible ways:

Manual change of the coordinates’ data .Select the coordinate you would like to change from the coordinate list onthe bottom of the screen. Re-edit the coordinate in the points editing line(the empty line under the capti on: ‘Topography Coordinates’). To actualize the change in the drawing, click 'Apply' in the Layout windowon the right-hand side.








Moving the IP from within the drawing .Select the 'Move' option from the rectangle on the right-hand side of thedeigned coordinates list on the bottom of the screen:

Go over to the drawing area. Select the point that you would like to moveand click on it twice. Now click on the new location to which you would liketo move the point. To actualize the change in the drawing, click 'Apply' inthe Layout window on the right-hand side.

Marking crossings of the pipeline with otherutilities

You can mark crossing points between project pipelines and pipelines thatdon’t belong to the project, if these points are known to you. To do so, select Pipelines Crossings from the main menu.The Crossings window will open on the right.

St. - station. The place where the crossing pipeline passes upon the

pipeline existing in the project (in meters).I.L. – the crossing pipeline’s elevation (not obligatory to enter). Dpt. – the depth of pipeline (not obligatory to enter).Diam . – the crossing pipeline’s diameter (not obligatory to enter). Type – right or left crossing (enter R for right crossing or L for left crossing)(not obligatory to enter).

1. In the box at the top of the window, select the pipeline for which youwant to mark crossings.2. Fill in the Station data:


Method A: manually.In the Crossings table, enter the Station of the crossing pipelines in meters.

Method B: using Pick.Mark ‘Pick’ in the bottom box of the window. Move to the drawing area and mark the point near the desiredpipeline. The Station data will be automatically entered into theCrossings table. AutoCAD version users: If you want to markcoordinates that already exist in the drawing, you can snap them








by using the ‘Object Snap Settings’ option to a coordinate in AutoCAD.

Method C: using Locate.For this you must first add the crossing coordinates to the designedcoordinates list in CivilCAD 2014, show them in the drawing, and thenselect them by using ‘Locate’:

From the main menu, select ‘ Design Coordinates ’. Enter the crossing point’s coordinates in the Design Coordinatestable, on the bottom left-hand side of the window. Typing in thecoordinates is preformed in the coordinates editing line at the topof the Design Coordinates window, in the following format:

coordinate name x y

(Do not enter coordinate elevation). Press ‘Enter’ after enteringeach coordinate.

Click to refresh the drawing. When refreshed, thecoordinates will appear in the drawing.Select ‘Locate’ in the Crossings window on the right. Move to the drawing area and mark the coordinates you havepreviously entered in the Design Coordinates table by snappingthem. The Station data will be automatically entered into theCrossings table.

Using Select – (for AutoCAD users only). You can choose thecrossing of the current line by marking a drawn line on the layout

– even if it is not defined as a project centerline. Click on ‘Select’,move to the drawing area and mark the desired line. Click‘ENTER’ to update the table with stations and compute theelevation intersection according to the elevation defined in theline that is drawn. If the line you chose has no elevation – theprogram will define the intersection elevation as 1.5 metersunder existing status elevation at the same point.

Using Filtering - (for AutoCAD users only). You have the optionof choosing between a number of pipelines crossing the currentline by filtering these lines from the drawing, from a number oflayers and a number of pipelines simultaneously by repeatingthe following:

Filter crossings lines from a .dwg file – click this

button to open the ‘Filter crossings’ window. ‘Layers ’ – it is possible to mark from the list of layers,the layers containing the lines and the Entities list, the








type of lines, or use ‘Select’ and click on the line orlines symbolizing the line type and layer from whichthe filtering will be done.Click ‘ Apply ’ to filter. For lines that do not haveelevation, the program will select the intersectionelevation as 1.5 meters under existing status elevationat the same point.

3. In the Crossings table, enter the IL data and the pipeline diameter, ifexisting (both are not obligatory).

The pipeline crossings will appear in the Sections drawing.

Designing sections

1. From the main menu, activate: Pipelines Sections .The Sections window will open before you.The window that opens is divided into three parts:

The drawing area (the black surface)The ground data table – the table on the bottom left-hand side(Topo).The design data table – the table on the bottom right-hand side.

2. Select the line that you would like to design in the box at top right-handside of the

window:

3. Click on the Options button:The Status window will open on the left. In this window you can

determine thestatus by which the program will apply the design:

Min. Pipe's Cover – if this data exists, the program will warn youat the points where the pipeline is exposed, by marking theground of the exposed areas in orange.Check crossings – the program will check the pipeline's heightin the intersection points with another pipeline and will change itif required.Keep fixed IL – with this option the software will save the fixedInvert level of the point, even if we'll change the slope of one ofmanholes.Keep fixed slopes - with this option the software will save thefixed slopes between points, even if we'll change the IL of one ofmanhole.








Slopes precision – the precision of the pipeline slopes in thetable of section's drawing.Show turns along pipelines – showing the turns along thesection. If choose this option, the flags that marks the turns'location will appear in the vertical section. Near each flag theturn's angle will appear.Pipes division – for comfortable design it's possible to ask theprogram to divide the pipeline in steps of 20m' or at each IP, orboth of them. To do so mark the wanted division.

4. Get the topography data .If you preformed the steps in the sections: ‘Preparing the existingGround level’ and ‘Designing the pipeline’s Layout’, the programcan create the existing topography from the layout: click on the

button that appears left to the topography table. Thetopography table will then be filled with the existing ground levelaccording to the Station and ground level elevation data.If you haven’t preformed the ‘Designing the Layout’ step – enterthe topography data in the topography table, according toStation, Distance and Elevation.

5. Entering the designed ground level (not obligatory). If you preformed the steps in sections: ‘Preparing the existingground level’ and ‘Designing the Pipeline’s Layout’, th e programcan create the designed ground level from the layout: click on the

button that appears left to the topography table. The designtable will then be filled with the topography data. If you would liketo enter designed ground level manually: in the Ground Level table,select ‘Design’.

Enter the designed ground level data the same way as youentered the ground level.

6. Click ‘ Apply ’ to bring the drawing (appears on the right). The topography

drawing will appear on the screen marking the manhole locations, ifexisting.

7. Enter the water line’s sectional data :

St. (m) - Station.Distance – Instead of entering the Station, you can enter thedistances between turning points, as long as you enter ‘0’ in the St.of the first turning point.Elev. (m) – the elevation or elevation increment from the designedground level, if existing. If not, the increment refers to the existingground level.








Depth (m) - the IP's depth (in meters). You can enter this data foran IP, instead of entering IL Lt . If designed ground level exists, thedepth will refer to it.Slope(%) – the slope percent. You can enter Slope% instead ofdesigned elevation.Diam. (mm) – entering pipeline diameters. (You can choose to usethis option before designing the longitudinal section, or after it).

In CivilCAD’s main menu, selectPipelines Layout.If you have entered a pipeline layout into theproject, enter a respective diameter in frontof each IP.If there is no layout, in the layout table enterStation (in the column labeled St.) anddiameter (in the column labeled Diam.). Forexample:

Material – define the material of the pipeline.Wall thick (mm) – define the pipeline’s wall thick. Devices – define devices along pipeline (pump, tank, check valve,etc.).Flow rate (Cu. m/h) – flow rate in pipeline’s segment. Ground – – the ground level elevation. This data is exhibited by theprogram and is not to be entered by the user. If designed groundlevel exist in the project, it will appear here. If not, the existingground level will appear.Gr. Sl. – the ground slope. Not to be entered by the user. As in itsprecedent, the slope refers to the designed topography, if it exists. If

it does not, the slope will refer to the existing ground level.









Additional options from the section window

- Save project - (at the top of the toolbar) – saving the project data,without exit from the sections' window.

Creating a DXF file for a longitudinal section:

Click on the button to open this window:Fill in the scale in fields ‘ Length, Height’ In order to type the section by a specific sheet size,choose the desired sheet size from the list thatopens under ‘ Divide by paper size’ .

In order to extract the current section only, click‘OK ’. To create a file with all sections, click ‘ DXFall’ . A box will open for saving files. Choose the directoryfor saving the files, enter the file name and click tosave.

Button Section printing – clicking this button will open a newwindow. Enter the scale and click ‘OK’ to print this section.

Button Full display – click this button for a full display of the entire

section on the drawing window.

Deleting a manhole using . This button deletes the entiremanhole, including the Station.

Deleting the data of all manholes (This function does not totallydelete the manhole – the Station data and distance between manholesare saved).

Adding an IP . Mark the first column (from the left) in the design table,in the row following the row of the IP you would like to add, and press‘Enter’ on the keyboard. In the new row that appears, enter either thestation for the new IP, or the distance between it and the preceding IPand the rest of its details.

Elevating/lowering a pipeline . A window containing the designdata will open. Mark the coordinates you would like to elevate/lower (tomark all coordinates press A). At the bottom of the table enter thedesired elevation (for lowering, enter a negative number) and click ‘OK’.The design table will change accordingly








Getting the designed ground level . (On condition that designedground data, including designed contours, exists in the project, as well

as a designed pipeline layout).

Getting the designed ground level all pipelines. (Oncondition that designed ground data, including designedcontours, exists in the project).

View – the section’s display range . Leaving the data under thisheading empty defines the section’s full display for the software (thesection’s full length appears next to ‘ Total range’ ). It is possible todisplay the section of a particular segment by entering the starting andfinal station into the fields ‘ From, to ’. The change of section elevationwill be done according to the change of ‘ Height factor ’ parameter.Click ‘ Apply ’ after changing this data to update preview.

Topography data - smoothing the ground level. By moving to’Smooth ’ option the ground level will be drawn smoother but less exact(the program will have created certain a distortion in the drawing so theline can be smoother).

Changing colors in the section layer – it is possible to control thecolors in each section layer by clicking on the squares located at the

top section on your screen next to these headings:

Ground level - existing status elevations layers.Design level – designed status elevations layers.Manholes - coordinates layer.

Clicking the layer color opens a window containing colors from whichyou can select the desired color.

Copying the ground level Stations to the design table . Thisfunction will copy the Stations from the Topography table to the Design

table, for convenient designing.

Interactive pipeline design . You can interactively draw apipeline on the screen, instead of entering Invert Level data.

Select the option ‘Pick’ in this box: .Move to the drawing area and draw the pipeline.Notice that you can both snap to existing manholesand create new ones. The table will be updated whileyou are drawing.

Using Locate – enables you to locate a manhole in the drawing.








In the table, select the manhole you wish to locate ormodify.

Select ‘Locate’ in the box:Move to the drawing area. The curser will link to thechosen manhole.

Producing Reports

Activate Pipelines Reports from main menu.

IP's Report – a report of the line’s turning points in a p roject(meaning layer points)- possible only if a line’s layout exists inthe project.

Pipe’s Report – pipeline’s lengths report by diameters

Quantities Report - for sewage and drainage pipes only.1) Manholes report in drawing their diameters and depths

Mark "V" the number of pipelines that you wish to include in

the report or click button to mark all pipelines. Division by depth existing coincides with the conventional

division. A different depths division exists for sewagepipelines and sewage manholes. In order to change thedepth division system for the report production:

Click on button depth segments. Under the headline"Depth segments" enter the depths for division and at theend, click 'OK'. Click 'Apply'.

Detailed report - a detailed report presenting the pipeline’s data,existing status, and designed status - along the Pipeline.

Additional Options from the Reports Window

Print the report by clicking this button from the report window.

Save the report as a text file - click this button appearing in the reportswindow will open a window for saving files. Select the desired location forsaving, type in the file name in the right line, and click ‘Save’. Now you canopen the file and edit it as you like.








Exporting the report to an ‘Excel’ file – click this button from thereport window to open an Excel sheet the program has filled with data from

the last report.Setting a Permanent Depths Division Setting a Permanent DepthsDivisionYou are capable of changing the division method to depths for a quantitiesreport on a regular basis, for every future project opened in CivilCAD 2014.

To do so you must enter the division of your choice in the ‘Prototype’project. This project is the software’s “master”. All the definitions that appear in it will appear for every new project you open with CivilCAD 2014.Open project Prototype ( File - >Open Project’ ).



From the main command ruler open: Pipelines-> Pipelines list . Choosethe type of desired project (Sewage/Drainage).

Open menu Pipelines -> Reports .From the Reports window choose the Quantities.Click on button (Depth Segments).From the window that opens enter the depths for division.Click ‘OK’ to confirm and close the window.Close the project and save the changes.

Now every new report opened will receive the division you have entered inPrototype Project.










Cables lines design

As a preliminary stage, open a work project in CivilCAD 2014 accordingto the instructions from other chapters. The work steps for CableDesign are as follows:

Initializing the project.Preparing the topography and/or designed settings.Horizontal Alignment.Defining the maintenance boxes along the line.Defining the maintenance boxes size.Marking crossings of the cable with other utilities.

Designing sections.Producing reports.


From the main menu, activate Pipelines Pipelines list On the right, a window titled “Pipelines list” will open. This is the project’sgeneral settings window.

1. Sele ct ‘Cables’ from under ‘ Pipeline’s type ’. 2. Select the work units for the pipeline diameter (mm, cm,

inches).3. Under Pipelines names, fill in every line the names of the

designedpipelines for the project.

We will now go on to designing the pipelines.You have two design options:

1. Design including layout. The layout design will allow you toobtain the ground section along the pipeline.

2. Design without layout.

For design including layout, go to the 'Preparing the topography and/ordesigned settings' section.If you would like to design without layout, go to ‘Design section’.

* You can mark crossings whether you are designing pipelines with orwithout layout. To do this, go to the Crossings section.

Options from the ‘Pipeline’s list’ Win dow

New cable – adding a new cable to the list of cables. Possible also byclicking ‘ENTER’ .








Clear all cables – clearing all cables lists (the cables will be erased

from the list and if they have been defined by data it will be deleted fromthe project as well).

Erase a cable – erasing a certain cable. Mark the cabl e’s name in thelist and click this button in order to delete it from the list (if any data wasdefined for this pipeline it will be erased from the project).

- Find Pipeline – find a pipeline by name in the pipelines list. If you tryto add a pipeline, using a name which already exists in the Pipelines List, awarning window will appear. Click the 'OK' button and type a different

name for the pipeline.


In order to design the pipes’ layout, you will first have to prepare thetopography settings for the design. You can work with up to twotopography layers: existing topography settings and designed settings. If

you are working on a single topography layer, treat it as existingtopography setting (even if it is a designed topography such as roadssurface).


Importing a DWG file – if you have a DWG file insert it into the project,as explained in Chapter 23 – ‘Handling DWG Files’ (follow the steps:Importing a DWG file and extracting points from DWG file).

Importing an ASCII file - if you have an ASCII file containing thetopography data:

1. From the coordinates list command buttons (the group ofbuttons located to the right of the Topography coordinates list

at the bottom of the screen), click on .3. In the dialog box that opened, select the existing status

topography coordinates file. The coordinates data will beentered into the coordinate list at the bottom of the screen.

You may enter the topography data manually:

In the coordinates editing line (the empty line under the title – ‘Topography coordinates’), enter the coordinates’ data in the following








manner:Coordinates name x y Height

Press ‘Enter’ after entering each coordinate.

Once you have entered the coordinates data, click on the button tocreate contour lines:

From the main menu, select Topography Contours .Click ‘ Apply ’ in this window that opens from the right.The program will build the contour lines according to the coordinatesentered.

Adding a Designed Status Layer

If you have the data of an additional designed, layer - replace the‘Topography Coordinates list’ with ‘Designed coordinates’, by choosing‘Design Coordinates’ from the main menu.Enter the designed status data the same way you entered the existingstatus coordinates.

Once you have entered the designed status data, create the designedcontour lines:

From the main menu, select ‘ Design Contours’ .Click ‘ Apply ’ in this window that opens from the right.The program will build the designed contour lines according to thecoordinates entered.


1. From the main menu, activate Pipelines

Layout . On the right-handside, the Layout window will open.2. Select the name for the pipeline that you would like to mark in the box

at the top of the Layout window.3. Mark the pipelines’ alignment.

There are three ways in which you can mark the alignment:

Method A: for AutoCAD users only.In AutoCAD, draw a Polyline (2D Polyline) that will constitute thepipeline’s horizontal alignment.

Choose Select from the menu:








Go over to the drawing area, select the drawn Polyline and click Enter.The table in the right- hand window will be filled with the alignment IP’S.The IP coordinates list will appear in the bottom window (Designcoordinates).

Method B: available for AutoCAD users and for non-AutoCAD usersalike.

In the right-hand window, select Pick from the menu:Go over to the drawing area and draw the pipeline’s alignment.

Note that while you are drawing, the Layout table is filled withcoordinates and Stations. In addition, the designed coordinates list

is filled with the coordinates that you are marking.Method C: available for AutoCAD users and for non-AutoCAD usersalike.


256123.76175143.56MN1256325.56175200.40MN2

256327.12175256.00MN3

In the Layout table on the right- hand side, type in the coordinates’names (MN1, MN2, MN3), according to the following example:

Diam.St.ManCoor.MN1MN2 MN3

It is possible to mark radiuses. Enter the desired radius under ‘Radius’.

Click 'Apply' to draw the lines.The program will create a drawing of the line’s horizontal

alignment.

Additional options from the Layout window

- Clicking this button from the window that opens, will make it possibleto change the following definitions:








Scale – changing the pipe line’s data lettering size Pipes number in select mode (manholes prefix) – changing thenumbering beginning of the manholes coordinates’ names. For example – entering the value ‘2’ will cause the subsequent pipeline defined to containthe names: 2MN1 , 2MN2, 2MN3 and for the line that follows – names thatstart with ‘3’ and so on.

- Clear all IP's - deleting all current line data.

- Deleting one IP – deleting a single IP. Mark the desired IP and clickthis button.

- Show pipeline – locating a pipeline on the drawing. Clicking on thiscurrent pipeline will mark it in yellow.

Moving an IP. Note that each IP is tied to a coordinate. If you alter coordinate data in thecoordinate's window on the bottom of the screen, the location of the IP thatis defined by that coordinates will change accordingly.In order to move an IP, you have to move the coordinate that is tied to it.

You can do this in two possible ways:

Manual change of the coordinates’ data: Select the coordinate you would like to change from the coordinate list onthe bottom of the screen. Re-edit the coordinate in the coordinates editingline (the empty line under the caption: ‘Topography Coordinates’). To actualize the change in the drawing, click OK in the Layout window onthe right-hand side.

Moving the IP from within the drawing.Select the “Move” option from the rectangle on the right-hand side of the

designed coordinates list on the bottom of the screen: -Go over to the drawing area. Select the point that you would like to moveand click on it twice. Now click on the new location to which you would liketo move the point. (AutoCAD users: you can snap a marked coordinate byusing ‘Object Snap Settings’ to a coordinate.)

To actualize the change in the drawing, click OK in the Layout window onthe right-hand side.








Defining the maintenance boxes along the line

To go to this option, choose ‘Cables’ from Pipeline Layout Window.You can define the manholes on the current cable line using two methods:

Option 1From the right window, choose ‘Pick’ Move to the drawing area and click along the line in location in need of atest cellPlease notice that when you click on a line, the ‘Layout’ table is filling withcoordinates and stations. In addition, the designed coordinates list is fillingwith the coordinates you are marking.

Option 2Enter the coordinates from the coordinates table at the screen bottom. Doso by typing the coordinates in the editing line at the head of the list. Forexample:

In the layout table from the right – enter the coordinate's names (MN1,MN2, MN3) according to the example below:

Click ‘OK’ after clicking on the field ‘Man’ (manhole on drawing), and ‘St’ (stations) will automatically be filled in the table.Pipe’s definition. For every manhole in the table, define the number of pipes under ‘No’ , and the diameter of every pipe under ‘D-r’.

Additional options

- Clicking this button from the window that opens, will make it possibleto change the following definitions:

Scale – changing the pipeline’s data lettering size. Pipes number in select mode (manholes prefix) – changing thenumbering beginning of the manholes coordinates’ names. For example – entering the value ‘2’ will cause the subsequent pipeline defined to containthe names: 2MN1 , 2MN2, 2MN3 and for the line that follows – names thatstart with ‘3’ and so on.

- Clear all manholes - deleting all current line data.








- Deleting one manhole – deleting a single IP. Mark the desired IP

and click this button.


Defining the maintenance boxes size

In order to transfer to this definition, choose Manholes from the list at (next

to Cables title) the Pipeline layout window.Enter the size for every cell in the table, (via units defined from the Pipelinelist window), by typing the values under ‘Width’ ; and ‘Length’ . Seefollowing example:

It is possible to set the test cell sizes regularly by following these

steps:

From menu activate: ‘Pipeline ->Sections’ and click on the ‘Options’

button . A table will open. Enter a name for the size type of your choiceunder ‘Type’, and the test cell size for every type under ‘Length’, ‘Width’(according to units defined in the ‘Pipeline list’). See example:

Now from the ‘Pipeline layout’ window you can enter the name of the typeyou have defined – under ‘Type’ , instead of entering the same sizes overand over. See example:








Additional Options from the Layout Window

- Clear all manholes - deleting all current line data.

- Deleting one manhole – deleting a single IP. Mark the desired IPand click this button.


Marking crossings of the cable line with otherutilities

You can mark crossing points between project pipelines and pipelines thatdon’t belong to the project, if these points are known to you. To do so, select ‘ Pipelines Crossings ’ from the main menu. The Crossings window will open on the right.

St . - Station. Meaning, the place where the crossing pipeline passes uponthe pipeline existing in the project (in meters).IL. – the crossing pipeline’s elevation (not obligatory to enter).

Diam . – the crossing pipeline’s diameter (not obligatory to enter). R/L – right or left crossing (enter R for right crossing or L for left crossing)(not obligatory to enter).

1. In the box at the top of the window, select the pipeline for which youwant to mark

crossings.2. Fill in the Station data:


Method A: manually.In the Crossings table, enter the Station of the crossing pipelines in meters.

Method B: using Pick.Mark ‘Pick’ in the bottom box of the window. Move to the drawing area and mark the point near the desired pipeline.The Station data will be automatically entered into the Crossings table.

AutoCAD version users: If you want to mark coordinates that already existin the drawing, you can snap them by using the ‘Object Snap Settings’option to a coordinate in AutoCAD.

Method C: using Locate . For this you must first add the crossingcoordinates to the designed coordinates list in CivilCAD 2014, show themin the drawing, and then select them by using ‘Locate’:








From the main menu, select ‘ Design Coordinates’ .Enter the cross ing point’s coordinates in the Design Coordinates table, onthe bottom left-hand side of the window. Typing in the coordinates ispreformed in the coordinates editing line at the top of the DesignCoordinates window, in the following format:

coordinate name x y(Do not enter coordinate height)Press ‘Enter’ after entering each coordinate.

Click to refresh the drawing. When refreshed, the coordinates willappear in the drawing.Select ‘Locate’ in the Crossings window on the r ight.Move to the drawing area and mark the coordinates you have previously

entered in the Design Coordinates table by snapping them. The Stationdata will be automatically entered into the Crossings table.

Using Select – (for AutoCAD users only). You can choose the crossing ofthe current line by marking a drawn line on the layout – even if it is notdefined as a project centerline. Click on ‘ Select ’, move to the drawing areaand mark the desired line. Click ‘ ENTER ’ to update the table with stationsand compute the elevation intersection according to the elevation definedin the line that is drawn. If the line you chose has no elevation – theprogram will define the intersection elevation as 1.5 meters under existingstatus elevation at the same point.

Using Filtering - (for AutoCAD users only). You have the option ofchoosing between a number of pipelines crossing the current line byfiltering these lines from the drawing, from a number of layers and anumber of pipelines simultaneously by repeating the following:

Filter crossings lines from a .dwg file – click the button to open the‘Filter crossings’ window.‘Layers ’ – it is possible to mark from the list of layers, the layers containingthe lines and the entities list, the type of lines, or use ‘ Select ’ and click on

the line or lines symbolizing the line type and layer from which the filteringwill be done.Click ‘Apply ’ to filter. For lines that do not have elevation, the program willselect the intersection elevation as 1.5 meters under existing statuselevation at the same point.

3. In the Crossings table, enter the IL data and the pipeline diameter, ifexisting (both are not obligatory) .

The pipeline crossings will appear in the Sections drawing.








Designing sections

1. From the main menu, activate: Pipelines Sections . The Sectionswindow will open before you.The window that opens is divided into three parts:

The drawing area (the black surface)The ground data table – the table on the bottom left-hand side(Topo).The design data table – the table on the bottom right-hand side.

2. Select the pipeline that you would like to design in the box at top right-

hand side of the window:

3. Automatic determination of the control cells sizes. Click on the Options

button: to open the table. Enter a name for the size type of your choiceunder the heading ‘Type’, and the cell type for each type under theheadings ‘Length’, ‘Width’ (according to units defined in the ‘Pipeline list’.See this example below:

4. Get the topography data:

If you preformed the steps in sections: ‘Preparing theTopography Data’ and ‘Designing the pipeline’s Layout’, theprogram can cut the ground level data from the layout: click on

the button that appears left to the topography table. Thetopography table will then be filled with the existing ground levelaccording to Station and ground level elevation data.If you haven’t preformed the ‘Designing the Layout’ step – enterthe topography data in the topography table, according toStation, Distance and Elevation.

5. Entering the designed ground level data (not obligatory):If you preformed the steps in sections: ‘Preparing the existingground level’ and ‘Designing the Pipeline’s Layout’, the programcan create the designed ground level from the layout: click on

the button that appears left to the topography table. Thedesign table will then be filled with topography data.If you would like to enter designed ground level manually: in theGround Level table, select ‘Design’.








Enter the designed ground level data the same way as youentered the ground level. The ground level section will appear onyour screen with a marking for the test cells.

6. Click ‘OK’ to bring the drawing (appears on the right). The topographydrawing

will appear on the screen marking the manhole locations, if existing.

6. Enter the line’s vertical alignment data in the designed table at thebottom of your screen (with the heading ‘Designed’). It is possible to enterthe absolute depth for each manhole by filling under ‘ Elevation ’, or fillingthe line depth under the heading ‘ Depth ’. The program will automaticallyupdate the second set of data according to the typing of the first set.

7. In the design table, enter the water line’s sectional data, as following:

Man - manhole numberSt . – StationDistance – Instead of entering the Station, you can enter thedistances between turning points, as long as you enter ‘0’ in theSt. of the first turning point.Elevation/dH – the elevation or height interval from thedesigned ground level status, if existing. If not, the interval willrefer to the existing ground level.Ground – the ground level elevation. This data is exhibited bythe program and is not to be entered by the user. If designedground level exist in the project, it will appear here. If not, theexisting ground level will appear.Number – the number of pipelines for the existing manholeDiameter - the diameter of the entire pipe in the current manholeType – manhole type (if manholes types are defined in ‘Status’) Length - manhole length (no need to fill unless you are usingtype)Width – manhole width (no need to fill unless you are usingtype)


Additional Options in the Sections Window

- Save project - (at the top of the toolbar) – saving the project data,without exit from the sections' window.








Creating a DXF file for a longitudinal section :

Click on the button to open this window:

Fill in the scale in fields ‘ Length, Height ’ In order to type the section by a specific sheet size,choose the desired sheet size from the list that opensunder ‘ Divide by paper size’ .In order to extract the current section only, click ‘ OK ’. Tocreate a file with all sections, click ‘ DXFall ’.

A box will open for saving files. Choose the directory forsaving the files, enter the file name and click to save.

Button Section printing – clicking this button will open a new window.Enter the scale and click ‘OK’ to print this section.

Button Full display – click this button for a full display of the entiresection on the drawing window.

Erasing a manhole - this button totally deletes the current manholeincluding station.

(near the Design table) – deleting all design data .

(near the ground level table) - deleting all Topography data ofcurrent table (Design/Existing) .

Adding a test cell: mark the column farthest on the left from thedesigned table, in the line before the point you wish to ad, and click‘Enter’. Add the new data in the line that enters.

- Elevating/lowering a pipeline . A window containing the design datawill open. Mark the coordinates you would like to elevate/lower (to mark allcoordinates press A). At the bottom of the table enter the desired elevation

(for lowering, enter a negative number) and click ‘OK’. The design table willchange accordingly

Getting the topography settings for all pipelines (on condition theproject contains Topography including contours, and line’s layout).

Getting the designed ground level . (On condition that designedground data, including designed contours, exists in the project, as well as adesigned pipeline layout).

Getting the designed ground level all pipelines . (On condition thatdesigned ground data, including designed contours, exists in the project).








‘View ’ – the section’s display range. Leav ing the data under this headingempty defines the section’s full display for the software (the section’s fulllength appears next to ‘Total range’). It is possible to display the section ofa particular segment by entering the starting and final station into the fields‘From, to’. The change of section elevation will be done according to thechange of ‘Height factor’ parameter. Click ‘OK’ after changing this data toupdate preview.

Topography data - smoothing the ground level. By moving to ’smooth’option the ground level will be drawn smoother but less exact (the programwill have created certain a distortion in the drawing so the line can besmoother).Changing colors in the section layer – it is possible to control the colorsin each section layer by clicking on the squares located at the top sectionon your screen next to these headings:

Ground level - existing status elevations layersDesign level – designed status elevations layersManhole - coordinates layer

Clicking the layer color opens a window containing colors from which youcan select the desired color.

Copying the ground data stations into the designed table – this

command will copy ‘Stations’ from the ‘Topography’ table to the designtable for design conveniences.

1. Interactive pipeline design. You can interactively draw apipeline on

Select the option ‘Pick’ in this box: .Move to the drawing area and draw the pipeline. The

design table will be updated while you are drawing.2. Using Locate – enables you to locate and to join a vertical

turning point in the drawing.In the table, select the point you wish to locate.

Select ‘Locate’ in the box: .Move to the drawing area. The curser will link to thechosen coordinate.








Producing Reports

From the main menu, activate: Pipelines Reports .

Pipes Report – a pipe’s lengths report by diameters. IP’s Report – a report of pipeline turning points in the project (meaninglayout points) – possible only if a pipeline layout exists in the project.

Options for Managing Reports

Printing the report , using .

Saving the report as a text file . Click on . A box for savingfiles will open. Select the desired saving location, type in the filename, and click ‘Save’. Now you can open the file and edit it asyou like.

Imprint the IP’s or Manho les report on the drawing . Afterclicking this button, move to the drawing area and click in the desiredspot for the report location. Afterwards, click ‘Set’ in the AutoCAD lineand click ‘Enter’. The size of the report can be determined on thedrawing by changing the value next to ‘Scale’ (imprint the report againafter changing the size).

Exporting the report to an ‘Excel’ file – click this button from thereport window to open an Excel sheet the program has filled with datafrom the last report.








Chapter 23: General Issues








General Issues

This chapter discusses CivilCAD 2014 general issues. The optionsdescribed will allow the setting of definitions for working with projects.

These chapter topics are:

Options from Configuration window.Creating a coordinates frame.Division into sheets.Determining project parameters.Computations of poles offsets.

Options from Configuration window

The options from this window determine the project work mode. CivilCAD2014 can determine these definitions, regularly, for each new project thatopens, unless you want them changed. Setting the definitions for all thenew projects will be done by changing the definitions in project‘Prototype’ .



To activate this window, choose from Main Menu File->Configuration or

click from the main toolbar. This window comprised of four screens by

use of the buttons located in the upper hand side of this window. We will explain the definitions by their order of appearance in window ‘File-> Configuration’ . This window is built of 4 screens, which can be leafedthrough using the ‘Next’ and ‘Back’ buttons.

General settings .

Language - CivilCAD 2014 software operates in both English, Hebrewand Portuguese. It's imperative to remember that when we produce areport that the software issues a report in the chosen language. Afterthe altering of the language of choice this action has to be executedagain.








System of units - choosing the measuring system the software willuse.

Metric - the metric systems (Meters).English feet - the English system.

Angle's unit - the angle system the software has to use.

Printout font's size – fixing the fonts' size in the reports, that theprogram creates.

Auto Save - save your project automatically. In order to definethe auto save, follow these steps: Go to ‘File -> Open project’ Choose ‘Prototype.prj’ project and click ‘OK’. Go to ‘File Configuration ’ In 'General' tab, check mark the Auto Save cell and define the

cyclicality (in minutes). Click ‘OK’ Leave the program by : ‘File Exit’ Confirm the changes you have made.

Save Backup - allows saving a project in several backupversions. To use this feature: From CivilCAD main menu, go to ‘Files Configurations’ . In ‘General Settings’ Tab, mark ‘V’ in ‘Save Backup’ option.

Click the button and define the desired path for the backupversions and click the 'Open' button.

Define the desired number of backup versions (default number is 3backup versions).

In case you defined 3 backup versions, the 4 th save will overwritethe first backup.

In order to load a backup project, from CivilCAD main menu go to:'File Restore Project'.

Select the desired file and click the 'Open' button.

Note: the backups are saved to *.Lha format.

In order to define X number of backup versions for all futureprojects, you will need to define it in the Prototype project.

Auto launch – the setting of drawing environment. It's possible tochoose the program to use it as the drawing environment for CivilCAD2014. If choosing option No the program will work as independent unitwithout external program such as AutoCAD or IntelliCAD. The programwill activate the new drawing environment only after the exit from theprogram and reactivation .








Auto Vertical alignment mode - work frame in the vertical sectionwindow (in roads).

AutoCAD's drawing environment interface - only on AutoCAD 2000 and later versions' framework.AutoCAD stand alone - frame work without a supplementarysoftware.

AutoCAD styles - the status of the AutoCAD window. These definitionsshould be determined on project Prototype.

Menu - main menu's display.Toolbars .Command line .Status bar - the status bar (always located at the lower sideof the software's window).

Drawing environment

2D/3D Work State – it's possible to create the lines – to do so, markthe option 3D work state. In this case the .dwg file that the programcreates will be larger. In 2D work state the program will create the lineswithout height. These definitions influence on the displaying of the lines,but not on the program's computations. Blocks mode – this option enables the project to work with blocks.Check this value on prototype projects only and save it. Afterwards,every new opened project will be defined according to the prototypeproject. For more details see the chapter 'Working with blocks'. Standard mode - working with text mode. Marking this option enablesto create a project for work with standard mode texts. Check this valueon prototype projects only and then, save. Afterwards, every newopened project, will be defined according to the prototype project.Purge all when refreshing – deleting of unnecessary layers. If thisoption is marked, each time that we'll press the button Refresh orRefresh the entire program will erase the all unnecessary layers,

including the layers not relevant to the program. *.DXF files format – Changing this parameter will determine the Dxffiles format that the software creates when we ‘save’ from anywhere inthe program. Using this parameter it is possible to create a DXF file likevertical alignment, cross sections, drawings from the 3-D window etc.Do not reverse section's labels (Hebrew mode only) – when we areworking in Hebrew, the program reverses the captions in the section'sdrawings and shows them in Hebrew. Sometimes we don't want theprogram will execute this , for example if the program that reverses thecaptions is installed in AutoCAD, each time we'll load the section with.DXF format, we'll get the inverse captions in case this option is not

chosen.








Coordinates format

*.Dis files format – setting the .dis file format. When importing orexporting a DIS file, the program will read it as defined in this option.For example if the values ‘1’ and ‘11’ appear next to the labels ‘X start’and ‘X end’ - when importing a .DIS file, the program will read fromthese file columns the X - parameter. The same goes for otherparameters defined for this option.

Code columns – location of codes in the list. This value will determinethe range of columns in the coordinates list in which the codes will bepresented, if you are working with codes in a project.

New points counter – Setting points names. When inserting newpoints to the list by choosing them from the drawing itself, the softwaregives the names automatically. In order to begin the numbering usingthe names you want, type the first name next to ‘Start CountingFrom’ . If ‘Auto Names’ is selected, the software will create pointsaccording to the number of points in the list. This implies that each pointwill get its name according to its location in the list, and in addition, theletter ‘T’ or ‘D’ will be attached to it according to its list origin (Design orTopography).

Coordinates' length Max 10 digits – 6 digits from the left of decimal point.Max 11 digits - 7 digits from the left of decimal point.

Files settings

File's paths - defining the program’s default file .Project’s files – default file for opening or saving project's coordinates'files – default file for opening or saving coordinates file

Coordinate`s files files – default file for opening or saving coordinates'file. Distomat`s file - default file for opening or saving an observation’s filein the distomat window.

Save/Load from text file format – when saving to the coordinates'list text format, it is possible to select ahead-of-time in which formatthe program will save, by choosing the tool to which we want totransfer the file or from which we are interested in reading.








Creating a coordinates frame

CivilCAD 2014 makes it possible to add a coordinates frame onto thedrawing.From the Menu open ‘General -> Coordinates frame’ . Following anychanges you make to the data in this window, click ‘ Apply ’ so the programcan mark the entire frame according to the new definitions set. Possibleoptions from this window:

End corner – the value of the coordinate representing the frame topcorner

Base corner - the value of the coordinate representing the firstcorner of the frame base.Base second - the value of the coordinate representing the secondcorner of the frame base.

This button sets the frame borders as the ‘Extends’ – the borderof the entire drawing. The program will change the values of thecoordinates that represent the frame automatically.

This button erases the coordinates' values representing the

frame corners.

Steps – the distances between the coordinates' markings on theframeScale – the frame size value

Select – click on this button and mark the line representing thedesired frame, to set the frame according to choice.

Pick – choose the frame corners by clicking this button. Go to thedrawing – click on the first corner, second corner and top corner.








Division into sheets

By defining each sheet separately, CivilCAD 2014 makes it possible todivide the drawing to several different sheets. From main menu go to‘General -> Frames maker’ (this option is available only for AutoCAD2000 and above). We will proceed in explaining the options from thiswindow and how to produce division into sheets:

Options from ‘Frames maker’ window .

New border – this button adds a new frame to the frames list in thetop section of the window. The name in this window represents the currentframe.

Erase border -this button erases a frame from the list of frames

Set the border coordinates – this button sets the coordinates listed inthe window for the current frame

Mark project's border as the frame window – this button determinesthe borders of the entire project drawing as the border of the current frame

Show border contour -this button presents the borders of the currentframe.

Options - this button allows defining the following options:Steps – the distances between the coordinates markings on theframe. Scale – the frame size value.Arrow block – the location of the block file representing thenorth arrow. Table block – the location of the block file representing thecompany logo.

Pick - choose the frame by clicking on this label and choosing threecorners on the drawing . Select - choose frame by clicking on this label and marking ‘Polyline’ i nthe drawing defining the frame.Find -locate current frame on the drawing (the frame is marked inthe frames list).

Using this sample we will explain the steps for creating sheets:








Open ‘ General - > Frames maker’ from menuSet the frame borders using one of the following:

1. Select – Using AutoCAD, draw a frame according to size,location and desired angle by using a closed Polyline todefine the frame borders. Click ‘Select’, mark the frame youhave created in the drawing and click ‘Enter’.

2. Pick - click on this button, then move to the drawing andmark the first base corner, the second corner and the topupper corner in three clicks.

3. Clicking on will determine the entire drawing border asthe frame border.

4. Another option is to manually insert the corners coordinatesvalues in the fields:

‘End corner ’, 'Base first’ , 'Base second’ .

Click on the button to determine the borders for the currentframe.If you wish to define additional systems subsequent to the definition of

the first system click .In order to add another frame to the list repeat the steps from thebeginning up to this stage as many times as the desired frames.It is possible to create the sheet of the current frame only, byclicking on ‘ OK’, or by clicking ‘Apply’ after defining all theframes.

Determining project parameters

When CivilCAD 2014 performs ground level computations in a project,the user is unable to see this calculation. This calculation is doneaccording to certain precision. In some cases during Earthworkscomputations you will want to get even more accurate results. Settingthe system to enhance precision in its computations method can dothis. In order to define the precision you must repeat the steps below:

Activate ‘ General -> Project Parameters ’.Under the headi ng ‘STEPS’ choose the precision level for ‘X’ axis and‘Y’ axis, with maximum precision being 0.25.

Note: in large topography projects, choosing maximum precision mightcause certain computers to work very slowly with the software(according to processor speed).








Computations of poles offsets

CivilCAD 2014 allows for poles offsets computations. The computation isbased on the designed poles offsets calculations on the drawing and fieldmeasurements.The program performs this calculation by comparing between existing anddesigned status, displaying a detailed report of each point measured in thefield, its original design, horizontal vertical and general offset.Following the report display of this computation, the program will createnew layers on the original drawing. In these layers will appear arrows anddistances that mark the horizontal vertical and general offset betweenexisting and designed status. According to these steps a few preparations

must be made on the original drawing in order for the program to performcalculations the right way.

Drawing preparations steps:

1. A precision change in measurements by transferring them to ameters work mode with precision of three digits after the decimalpoint. The precision system can be changed from AutoCAD menuby clicking ‘ Format ->Units ’. Choose ‘precision’ from the ‘ Drawingunits ’ window that opens and select the three digits after thedecimal point.

2. Changing the measurements to meters is done by writing ‘ Scale ->All’ in the AutoCAD command rule r, and selecting base and factor(if you have transferred from centimeters to meters, write 0.01 whenthe command ‘scale -factor’ appears). Note – there may be layers that will not be changed by thiscommand (DIM). These layers should be turned off.

3. Change the drawing angle by choosing ‘ rotate -> all ’ from the AutoCAD command ruler, and entering the new angle desired forthe alignment of the drawing.

Inserting the drawing to the project and extraction of data:

Having completed the drawing preparation stage, continue to the next stepof extracting details:

1. Open a new project in CivilCAD 2014.

2. From the AutoCAD main menu activate: ‘ File -> Open ’ and choosethe drawing file which you have prepared.








3. After the drawing appears, choose ‘ General -> Filtering ’ from themain menu. From the window that opens the right, two lists willappear. The top list will contain all the names of the layersappearing in the drawing and the bottom will hold all the names ofentities that have coordinated which can be extracted. It is possibleto manually mark the entities and layers from these lists, or click on‘select ’ to go to the drawing immediately (the curser will turn into asmall square), and click on the desired form. After the form (orentities) has been marked, click ‘enter ’ to automatically mark theboxes in the desired layers and shapes. To expand on ‘Filtering’ seeChapter 23 ‘Handling the DWG Files’.

4. From the ‘topography, design’ options choose ‘Topography’, tomove the scanned coordinates to the ‘topography -coor dinates’ list.

The software scans the designated layers and automatically numbers thepoints' names. In order to choose the points' names by a specific layer inthe blueprint (a layer that contains text figures that symbolize the point's

name), open the option window by clicking the button or select the textlayer from the window, mark option "Set names by layer" and then, pressOK

5. Click ‘ Apply ’ to scan the chosen layers, automatically number thepoints names, or coordinate the scanned names in the text layer (ifthis option is selected), in addition to adding the coordinates to the‘Topography coordinates ’ list (in large and complex drawings thiscommand can take a few minutes.

Entering the measurements into the project

Having extracted the designed data from the drawing to the project, youcan load the surveyed file.

Click (load from text file) right of the coordinates list, and choose thetext file form the box that opens.The file will load and appear in the coordinates list (Designed-coordinates).

Offsets calculations

Following the creation of existing and designed status, all that remains is tocompute the offsets.

1. From the main menu choose ‘ General -> poles computations ’ andchoose the maximum offset size ‘ maximum distance ’. Click ‘ Apply ’








and the program will automatically compute the offsets betweenexisting and designed status, and produce a detailed report in thewindow that opens. From this window it will be possible to eitherprint the report or save it as a text file.

2. It is also possible to insert the report onto the drawing itself by

clicking - . Click this button to move to the drawing area andmark the place where you wish to add the report. Click ‘SET’ fromthe AutoCAD command ruler, and the report will appear on thedrawing (it is possible to change its size by choosing the desiredsize from the ‘Scale entities’ list).

3. Changing t he value in the ‘Scale -> entitie s’ list according tothe computation will affect the arrows size that will appearnext to every point.

Additiona l options from the ‘Poles computations’ window

After clicking on the ‘ Apply ’ button, the program will present thecomputerized report and offsets on the drawing. It is possible to control theoffset preview by selecting or removing any one of the options (marking ‘V’next to each option will instruct the program to present it on the drawingafter the calculation).

Drawn offsets values - horizontal and vertical offset value Drawn offsets arrows – arrows that show the horizontal and verticaloffset directionDraw total values – the general offset value (estimate of directdistance from existing to designed status). Draw total arrows – arrows that point the direction of general offset








Chapter 24: Handling*.DWG files








Handling .DWG files

This chapter discusses the different activities that can be performed withCivilCAD 2014 on AutoCAD files – *.DWG files. The options shown are forexporting data from the drawing, as single units of data, or by “filteringdata” from layers. The sections in this chapter ar e:

Importing a *.DWG file.Exporting points from a .DWG file.Using a filter to export points and lines from a .DWG file.Setting the names of the filtered pointsSetting the elevation of the filtered points

Importing a *.DWG file

Importing a DWG file to CivilCAD 2014 is usually the first phase in buildinga project. You will need to import the file so it will serve as workbackground or in order to extract from it various coordinates data asexplained later in this chapter.

First, open a new p roject and name it (use ‘ File - > New project’ , asexplained in previous chapters).Go to ‘ File -> Open ’ from the main menu of AutoCAD.Choose the desired DWG file in the window that opens. After saving theproject by 'File -> Save' CivilCAD 2014 will copy the selected file into thedirectory in which the project was opened and change its name to theproject name with the addition of _. From here on, every time this project isopened, the program will automatically open the copied .DWG file as well.

Note: If certain actions were already performed in the program, such aselevating measurement point, creating contour lines, etc., this action willerase the layers that were already created.In this case you will need to perform the reconstruction of project's layers

by clicking 'Refresh All' button .








Extracting points from a .DWG file

CivilCAD 2014 supplies an easy tool for the input of coordinates from a.DWG file for the purpose of marking them in the field. In order to inputpoints from a .DWG file perform the following:

Open a new project and import a .DWG file to it as explained in theprevious chapter, 'Importing a .DWG file'.In the bottom window (‘Topography coordinates’), choose ‘Pick’ from thelist (Pick, Locate, Freeze..). In the AutoCAD command ruler (Command:)you will see the caption: ‘Pick point/<1000>’. If you wish to new point’sname to be something other than 1000, enter its new number and click

‘Enter’. The command ruler will change accordingly.Move to the drawing area and select the point you wish to input using yourmouse. You can use all of AutoCAD ‘Object Snap’ options (such asEndpoint for example), in order to choose an exact point. After the pointhad been selected, it will appear, name and coordinate, in the bottompoints list. Continue selecting the remaining points.

Once you finish inputting the points, click in the right-hand window.The points you have selected will be added to the drawing. Continueselecting more points until you obtain the desired list.

During the point input process, it is possible to use editor options such as

erasing an incorrect point with the erase button , changing the namesof a number of points by marking them as ‘block’, adding a specificcharacter etc. (for a detailed description of the editor functions, see theChapter 2: “Coordinates Database”).

Suggested work process:

One of the most convenient work processes is inputting a project, editingall the project points first, then graphically selecting the points by locations.We will explain how to use the program using this method:

Open a new project and import a DWG file into it.Use the actions learned in this chapter to edit the measurement points foreach project. Move with ‘Pick’ and choose points, edit the points’ name and

numbering, click to have them appear on the screen.

Save the project . After saving, you can close the program and return toit at any time in order to “extricate” data from the project.








“Extricating” data from a finished project:

Open the project with the points you have prepared.From the bottom ‘Topography coordinates’ window choose ‘Locate’ fromthe list (Pick, Locate, Freeze…). In the AutoCAD command ruler(Command:) you will see the caption:‘polygonIn/polygonOut/<Single>/(Esc)nd ’. Enter “I” (pol ygonIn) and click‘Enter’. The caption in the command line will change to: ‘Frompoint/Close/(Esc)nd’. Go over to the drawing area and border the area fromwhich you wish to export points. To complete the action, click “C” (‘Close’)and ‘Enter’. CivilCAD 2014 will locate the points within the area youmarked, and mark them in the bottom coordinates list.

You have several options:

Creating a file of the points you marked: mark the word ‘Block’ in the

bottom window with a ‘v’. Click on ‘save points in a text file' . You willget the message “ Block mode is on, saving only block selection ”.Confirm this message. From the file window that appears, choose the filename you wish to create and save it. In this file, the program will save onlythe points that were marked in the block, i.e. the points that were borderedby the polygon.

Dispatching the marked points to the instrument: mark the word ‘Block’ in

the bottom window with a ‘v’. Click on the ‘Distomat’ butto n . Confirmthe message you receive. The communication window will open. Choosethe desired parameters (instrument marker, communication pace, etc.).Prepare the instrument for data receipt and click ‘Send’. The program willsave the data in the instrument.

Creating a list of angles and distances for the marked points: From themain menu go to ‘ Geometry -> Distance & Angle ’. A window will open on

the right. In the ‘Station’ field enter the name of the station from which theobservations will be calculated. From the ‘ Zero point ’ window, enter thename of the relevance point that will serve as a “0” (if there is no suchpoint, enter one of the points instead). Now use ‘Locate’ to choose thepoints on which the observations will be calculated. Mark the points in ablock (“V” next to the word ‘Block’ in the bottom window), and click on the

button . The program will transfer the list of points marked as a blockedto the list of points in the right-hand window. Click ‘Apply’ in the rightwindow. The program will calculate and present a report of distance,angles, and azimuths for the points marked.








Using a filter to extract points and lines from a.DWG file

As raw material for the creation of a 3D model, CivilCAD 2014 needs thetopography settings coordinates file. Often this file is not on hand, and weonly have access to the background file, as a drawing in DWG format.CivilCAD 2014 provides a convenient and effective tool for “extracting”height points from a .DWG file:

Open a new project and import the .DWG file into it as explained at thebeginning of the chapter (see “importing a .DWG file”). Go to ‘ General - > Filtering’ from the main menu. On the right-hand side,the filter window will open with two lists: the drawing layers list, and the list

of entities for selection.Mark the list you want to filter and where you want to save the data bychoosing Topography/Design .Locate the measuring points layer within the drawing, and the type of entitycharacterizing it (Point, Block, etc.).

Note: the measuring points may have several characteristics such as‘Point’ and ‘Text’. You should locate the most precise entity (an entity suchas ‘Text’, for example, is not in the precise location of the point but a smalldistance away from it).

In the list on the right, mark the layer and selected type of entity or clickSelect , mark one of shapes represents the layer and the type of entity andpress 'ENTER'. By using 'Select' the program will indicate the layer and theentity's type automatically.Click ‘Apply ’. The program will scan the drawing and fi lter the measuringpoints by the layer and entity that were chosen. When the process iscompleted, a list of measuring points will appear in the window‘Topography coordinates’ at the bottom of the toolbar.

If you want to filter from a certain area click on button Select insidewindow at the right, move to the drawing and click on two paints that will

represent the corners of window from which the software will scan thepoints.

Click . The program will add to the drawing the layers of points that ithad created.

From here you can continue to work as usual, including creating contourlines, etc.Notes:

It is possible that there are points with “0” height in the layer that you havechosen, which will interrupt the work process. To remove these points, dothe following:







In the bottom window click on the ‘Find’ button .

In the ‘Find’ window that opens, select ‘Height’, ‘All’ and 'Accurate'.Enter “0” in the field line and click ‘OK’. The program will signal and markthe points with “0” height.

Mar k “V” next to the word ‘Block’, and click on the ‘erase’ button fromthe button cluster. The program will erase all points with “0” height.

Click to refresh the drawing and proceed as usual.

Setting the names of the filtered points

If you have activated the filtering process in order to export points from thedrawing to the list, and you wish to determine the points names accordingto the text layer containing the names next to each point, or by layercontaining blocks in which the point names are defined – perform the stepsdetailed below and click ‘ Apply ’ from ‘General -> Filtering’ .

Click on the Options button .Mark ‘V’ next to the writing ‘Set points names by layer’

From the list that opens under ‘Scan from layer’ choose the layercontaining the names. Next to ‘Scan names radius’ , enter the maximum value of the radius

scan. The program will scan for each point in the given radius andsearch for text in the chosen layer. If it is found, it will use the text valuefor the point’s name.If fil i bl k d h i f d i h ‘Bl k’ ’